SGWIN

SPACE GASS Reference Manual
Version 9.0
23rd Edition, February 2003
Integrated Technical Software

admin@spacegass.com
www.spacegass.com
Table of Contents
Introduction
How to use this manual
Legal notice
10
11
15
Hardware requirements
19
Product support
20
Hardware locks and insurance
21
Installation and configuration

Installing SPACE GASS
Configuring SPACE GASS
22
23
24
Folders and files
25
Text formatting
27
General configuration
Graphics dimensions
29
32
Graphics colors
34
General colors
35
Problem size limits

Steel connection configuration
36
37
Getting started
Starting SPACE GASS
The main SPACE GASS window
42
43
44
Using the mouse
46
Dialogue boxes
47
Data entry
49
Managing job files
52
Starting a new job
53
Opening a job
Saving a job
54
55
Deleting a job
56
Cleaning up a job
57
Job status
58
The status line
59
The menu system
62
The file menu
63

The structure menu
65
The loads menu
67
The analysis menu
68
The design menu

The output menu
69
70
The view menu
71
The query menu
72
The settings menu

The config menu
73
75
The window menu
76
The help menu
77
The toolbars
The left side toolbar
78
79
The top toolbar
80
Modelling the structure

Coordinate systems
81
82
Sign conventions
84
Symmetrical structures
Ill-conditioning and instabilities
87
88
Analysis data
Units
Headings
89
90
92
Node data
93
Member data
95
Node restraint data

Section property data
100
103
Standard section libraries
106
Shape builder
107
Flipping a section
109
Column and beam Tee sections
110
Angle sections
111
Material property data

Master-slave constraint data
113
115
Member offset data
123
Node load data
125
Prescribed node displacement data
126
Member concentrated load data
128

Member distributed force data
130
Member distributed torsion data
132
Thermal/prestress load data
134
Self weight data

Combination load case data
136
137
Load case title data
140
Lumped mass data
141
Spectral load data

Spectral curve editor
144
146
Importing a spectral curve

Area loading data
148
149
Text file input

Text file format
150
151
Initiator
Headings text
152
153
Nodes text
154
Members text
155
Node restraints text

Section properties text
157
158
Material properties text
160
Master-slave constraints text
161
Member offset text

Node loads text
162
163
Prescribed node displacements text
164
Member concentrated loads text
165
Member distributed forces text

Member distributed torsions text
166
167
Thermal/Prestress loads text
168
Self weight text
169
Combination load cases text
170
Load case titles text
171
Lumped masses text
172
Spectral loads text
173
Steel member design text

Steel connection design text
174
176
Terminator
179
Text file errors

Text file example
180
185

Structure wizard
189
Datasheet input
Using datasheets
192
193
Graphics
Graphics overview
Floating menus
198
199
202
Graphical input
204
Graphical editing
207
Using the keyboard to position points

Multiple viewports
209
210
Node properties
212
Member properties
215
Node restraints
Section properties
219
220
Material properties
221
Master-slave constraints
222
Member offsets
Draw
223
224
Move
225
Rotate
227
Copy
Mirror
228
230
Delete
231
Stretch
232
Scale nodes
Generate arc
233
234
Sub-divide
235
Intersect
Generate taper
237
239
Renumber
241
Select all
243
Node loads
244
Prescribed node displacements
246
Member concentrated loads
248
Member distributed forces
250
Member distributed torsions

Thermal/prestress loads
252
254

Self weight
256
Combination load cases
257
Load case titles
258
Lumped masses
Spectral loads
259
261
Area loading
262
Managing load cases
264
Steel members
Steel connections
265
267
View nodes / members
270
View node and member properties
271
View global origin

View local axes
272
273
View full 3D member geometry
274
Labelling and annotation
278
View diagrams
View envelope
279
280
View dynamic mode shapes
281
View buckling mode shapes

View steel member design groups
283
284
View steel member top flanges
285
View steel member flange restraints
286
View steel member design results

View steel connection drawings
287
289
Redraw
291
Zoom
292
Pan
293
Scales
294
Find
295
Filters
297
Views
Viewpoint
300
302
Query frame
304
Query analysis results
305
Query steel member design results
307
Grid
308
Snap
309
Ortho
310
Attach
311

Plane
313
Coordinates
314
Aperture size
315
Crosshair size
Curved line resolution
316
317
Bending moment diagrams sign
318
Diagram shading
319
Analysis
Static analysis
320
321
Displacements, forces, moments and reactions

P-D effect (big)
323
324
P-d effect (little)
325
Axial shortening
326
Tension-only and compression-only effects

Cable members
327
328
Non-linear analysis procedure
331
Static analysis buckling
333
The wavefront optimizer

The wavefront analysis method
334
339
A quick frontwidth calculation method
340
The wavefront method in more detail
341
Running a static analysis

Dynamic frequency analysis
342
347
Modelling considerations
348
Natural frequencies, periods and mode shapes
349
Running a dynamic frequency analysis

Dynamic response analysis
350
354
Dynamic response
355
Spectral data
356
Spectral curves and load cases
357
Running a dynamic response analysis
359
Buckling analysis
364
Buckling effective lengths
366
Special buckling considerations

Running a buckling analysis
367
369
Analysis warnings and errors
371
Steel member design
375

Steel member design data
377
Steel member design sign conventions
387
Member groups
388
Flange restraints
Column and beam Tees
393
400
Running a steel member design
401
Updating member sizes
406
Constraining members to the same final design size

Serviceability check
407
408
The steel member design/check process
409
Design groups and intermediate stations
410
Design segments
Section check
411
412
Member check
413
Critical flange
414
Effective flange restraints

Twist factor
415
417
Load height factor
418
Lateral rotation factor

End moment ratios and other factors
419
421
Eccentric effects for compression members
422
Eccentric effects for tension members
423
The code check

Steel member design/check assumptions
424
425
Steel member design/check errors
431
Steel connection design

Steel connection design data
434
436
Running a steel connection design
444
The steel connection design process
447
Connection geometry
Haunches
448
449
Design actions
450
Minimum design actions
451
Design phase
452
Check phase
453
Bolts
454
Welds
455
Plates and cleats
456

Tension and compression stiffeners
457
Shear stiffeners
459
Clashing and copes
460
Baseplate connections
Critical load case
461
462
Steel connection design errors
463
Concrete column design

Running a concrete column design
472
473
Concrete column configuration
481
Concrete column assumptions and notes

Output
Frame analysis report
483
485
486
The status report

The bill of materials report
490
491
Centre of gravity
492
Dynamic frequency output
493
Dynamic response output

Buckling analysis output
494
496
Steel design report
497
Steel member design section, member and shear check results
501
Steel member design zero variables

Steel connection design critical load case
502
503
Graphics hardcopy
504
Concrete design report
506
CAD interface module

Exporting data from SPACE GASS to CAD
507
509
Elevations, plans, cross sections, 2D views, 3D models and schedules
510
Steel connection details
513
Importing data from CAD to SPACE GASS
514
Standard libraries
The library editor
515
517
Section libraries
520
Material libraries
523
Bolt libraries
Plate libraries
524
525

Weld libraries
526
Reinforcing bar libraries
527
Spectral curve libraries
528
Portal frame analysis

Geometry and loads
529
530
Method of input
535
Analysis procedure
Analysis results
537
538
Graphical output
539
Analysis input report

Static analysis report (itemised)
543
553
Static analysis report (enveloped)
563
Bill of materials report
568
Dynamic frequency analysis report

Dynamic response analysis report
569
570
Buckling analysis report
571
Portal frame member design

Member design results
573
577
Steel member design report
578
Portal frame connection design

Connection design results
586
589
Steel connection drawings
590
Steel connection design report
591
Cable analysis
Method of input
Analysis procedure
Analysis results
597
599
600
601
Converting old jobs
606
Bibliography
607
Introduction
SPACE GASS is a general purpose structural analysis and design program for 2D and 3D frames,
trusses, grillages and beams. It includes a full complement of features that make it suitable for
any job from small beams, trusses and portal frames to large high rise buildings, towers and
bridges.
Its emphasis on graphics means that you easily see the status of your model at all times. In fact,
the extensive range of graphical editing features allow you to input your model or make changes
entirely within the graphical editor. Of course, if you prefer to work with datasheets or other
methods of input then they are available too.
A structure wizard automatically generates the initial data for many typical structures which you
can then manipulate to create the exact model you want.
State of the art solvers for linear and non-linear static analysis, dynamic analysis and buckling
analysis are available. Steel and concrete design modules for various international codes of
practice are also available.
Graphical and text reports can be generated for any parts of the structural model. Comprehensive
filters that can be defined graphically allow you to customize your graphical views and output
reports to include just want you want to see.
Although SPACE GASS is a comprehensive program with many advanced features, its logical
menu structure, toolbars and graphical emphasis makes it easy to learn and use, even for first time
users. If you have questions or need help then you will probably find the answers in this manual.
10
How to use this manual

Illustrated as follows is an example of each of the three outline styles used in this manual. These
styles are designed to draw your attention to information in one of three ways: as a hint, an
important note or general note.
Hints are non-essential, but useful, pieces of information which will improve your understanding
of the program. Hints sometimes identify a special way of doing something and are typically
quite specific.
Important notes should be carefully read and understood. They outline information that is vital to
the effective use of the software.
Notes identify articles of information which are meant as an aside to aid your understanding of
SPACE GASS. Some notes are quite general in nature and do not give reference to a specific
procedure. Notes may also serve to draw your attention to specific interpretation.
HINTS
This is an example of the SPACE GASS HINTS style and icon.

IMPORTANT NOTE
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
This is an example of the SPACE GASS important note style and icon.
NOTES
This is an example of the SPACE GASS NOTES style and icon.

Following is a brief overview of each section in the manual.
Chapter 1 "Installation and Configuration"
Deals with the installation and configuration of SPACE GASS. Once the software is installed and
running correctly, you should not have to refer to this chapter again.
11

Chapter 2 "Getting Started"
If you are new to frame analysis programs or Windows programs in general, then you should read
this chapter before attempting to run a job. It provides very good basic information that you will
need to know about the operation of SPACE GASS.
Chapter 3 "Modelling the Structure"
Discusses the basics of how you can model a structure with SPACE GASS and includes
information on nodes, members, restraints, coordinate systems, sign conventions, etc.
Chapter 4 "Analysis Data"
Gives a detailed description of each type of data that can be used in the frame analysis part of the
model. Data for steel and concrete design is not included (see later chapters). This chapter deals
only with the data itself, and leaves the discussion of the numerous methods that you can use to
input the data to later chapters.
Chapter 5 "Text File Input"
Describes the format of standard SPACE GASS text files. This is one of the five methods of data
entry. You can type your data into a standard text file and then import it into SPACE GASS.
Standard text files can also be used as an alternative for permanent storage of data.
Chapter 6 "Structure Wizard"
Another method of input involves selecting from a number of standard structures, answering a
few simple questions about the structure selected, and then having the structure wizard generate
all of the frame data for you. Any of the other data entry methods can be used to modify the data
after it has been generated using this method.
Chapter 7 "Datasheet Input"
Is a modified form of spreadsheet input which allows you to input or edit any parts of the frame
data or steel design data. Along with graphical input, this is probably one of the most useful and
versatile methods of data entry.
Chapter 8 "Graphics"
Covers all of the graphics facilities available. This includes graphical structure input, graphical
load input, graphical steel design input, connection drawing detail, graphical output of loading,
displacement, bending moment, shear force, stress, axial force and animated mode shape
diagrams. Full descriptions are also given for the many commands associated with drawing,
moving, copying, rotating, mirroring, erasing, zooming, panning, scaling, coordinate systems,
changing the viewpoint, labelling, querying diagrams, viewing the full 3D geometry of members,
hidden line removal, renumbering, etc.
Chapter 9 "Analysis"
The static, dynamic and buckling analysis modules, together with their options and control
parameters are fully described here.
12
Chapter 10 "Steel Member Design"

Details the use of the steel member design module. Please pay particular attention to the
procedures and assumptions listed near the end.
Chapter 11 "Steel Connection Design"
Details the use of the reinforced concrete column design module. Please pay particular attention
to the procedures and assumptions listed near the end.
Chapter 12 "Concrete Column Design"
Details the use of the reinforced concrete column design module.
Chapter 13 "Output"
Describes the types of output reports and graphics hardcopies that can be obtained and the options
that are available for sorting, formatting, enveloping, positioning on the page, etc.
Chapter 14 "Cad Interface Module"
Describes the CAD interface and how drawing files in DXF format can be imported or exported.
Chapter 15 "Standard Libraries"
SPACE GASS is supplied with a number of standard section, material, bolt, plate and weld
libraries. This chapter provides a complete guide on how you can customise any of these libraries,
or create your own section libraries.
Appendix A "Portal Frame Analysis"
Presents a detailed report on the analysis of a typical steel portal frame. Full discussions regarding
the input data and the decisions involved in producing it are included, together with complete
printouts of the analysis input and output reports.
Appendix B "Portal Frame Member Design"
Presents a detailed report on the member design for the steel portal frame analysed in appendix B.
It includes a discussion on how the steel members are being modelled, together with complete
printouts of the member design input and output reports.
Appendix C "Portal Frame Connection Design"
Presents a detailed report on the connection design for the steel portal frame analysed in appendix
B. It includes a discussion on how the steel connections are being modelled, together with
complete printouts of the connection design input and output reports.
13

Appendix D "Cable Analysis"
Presents a worked example demonstrating the input and analysis of a 30m tall, guyed mast. The
catenary cable equations are used to calculate the axial force in a nominal guy member, this is
then compared to the result obtained from SPACE GASS.
Appendix E "Converting Old Jobs"
Explains how you can convert data files that were produced with SPACE GASS v1, v2 or v3 for
loading into the latest version. Note that data files produced with SPACE GASS 4 or later are
automatically converted into the latest format when they are opened.
Appendix F "Bibliography"
A list of references.
14
Legal notice
End User License Agreement
Notice to Licensee:
This End User License Agreement (the "Agreement") is a legal agreement between you and I.T.S.
Integrated Technical Software Pty Ltd (ACN 086 605 567) ("ITS"), a registered company under
the Corporations Law of the State of Victoria, Australia. BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU
AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. If
you do not agree to all the terms and conditions of this Agreement or if you do not have the
authority to agree to all the terms and conditions of this Agreement on behalf of the licensee then
you MUST NOT USE THE PRODUCT. Provided the Product has not been used and is not a
loan, student or evaluation version, you may return it to your place of purchase for a full refund.
1. Definitions. For the purposes of this Agreement, the following terms shall have the following
meanings:
1.1 "Product" shall mean and include the SPACE GASS software, updates, CDs,
computer disks, Security Devices, help files, reference manual or other instructions,
technical support or any other software, items or information of any kind provided by ITS
or obtained from the www.spacegass.com web site.
1.2 "Software" shall mean all software included in the Product.
1.3 "Security Devices" shall mean and include hardware or software that limits the
number of users that may operate the Software simultaneously, or imposes an Expiry
Date beyond which the Software cannot be used, or prevents certain parts of the Software
from being used.
1.4 "Expiry Date" shall mean the date imposed by any Security Devices beyond which
the Software cannot be used.
1.5 "ITS" includes its employees, agents and suppliers.
2. License. The Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as
well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Product is licensed, not sold.
2.1 Grant of License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, ITS grants
to you a non-exclusive license to use the Product during the term of this Agreement.
2.2 User Limit. The Software may be installed on an unlimited number of computers,
however the maximum number of users operating it simultaneously may not exceed the
user limit imposed by the Security Devices.
15

2.3 Reference Manual. You may make such copies of the reference manual as are
reasonably necessary for your use of the Product by the permitted number of
simultaneous users, but you may not make copies of the reference manual for any other
purpose without the prior written consent of ITS.
3. Ownership; Proprietary Rights. ITS shall at all times be the owner of and have all rights to
the Product, and all intellectual property associated therewith, including but not limited to patents,
copyrights, trade names and marks, domain names, and trade secrets related thereto. The Product
is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Nothing herein shall cause or
imply a sale, license or transfer of any intellectual property rights of ITS to you or to any third
party, except as expressly set forth herein. You may not reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, or otherwise attempt to discover the source code of the Software. You may not
attempt to reverse engineer, duplicate or bypass any Security Devices.
4. Disclaimers. ITS makes no warranties or representations as to the Product to you or to any
other party. To the extent permitted by applicable law, all implied warranties, including, but not
limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are
hereby disclaimed.
5. Limitation of Liability. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, in no event shall
ITS be liable for any punitive, exemplary, consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages
arising from or related to the use of the Product by any party, including without limitation
damages arising from loss of data, loss of revenue or profits or failure to realize savings or other
benefits, even if ITS has been advised of or should be aware of the possibility of such damages.
In the event of any defect in the Product ITS may, at its option;
(i)
(ii)
replace the Product or supply its equivalent;

repair the Product;
(iii)
pay for the cost of replacing the Product or of acquiring its equivalent; or
(iv)
pay for the cost of having the error in the Product rectified.
To the extent that the Product involves providing a service, in the event of any error or defect in
the provision of that service ITS may, at its option;
(i)
supply the service again; or
(ii)
pay for the cost of having the service supplied again.
Because some states and jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability, the
above limitation may not apply to you.
6. Indemnification. You, at your sole expense, will defend, indemnify and hold ITS harmless
from and with respect to any loss or damage (including reasonable attorneys fees and costs)
incurred in connection with, any suit or proceeding brought by a third party against ITS insofar as
such suit or proceeding shall be based upon (i) any claim arising out of or relating to your use of
16

the Product except where such claim alleges that the Software infringes or constitutes wrongful
use of any copyright, trade secret, patent or trade mark of any third party; or (ii) any claim arising
out of or relating to any act or omission by you. You will pay any damages and costs assessed
against ITS (or paid or payable by ITS pursuant to a settlement agreement) in connection with
such a suit or proceeding.
7. Changes to the Product. ITS may change the Product from time to time without notice to you
and shall not be under any obligation to provide you with any notification of such change.
8. Non-Transferability. You may not rent, lease, sub-license, lend or transfer the Product to
another person or legal entity without the prior written consent of ITS.
9. Term and Termination. The term of this Agreement shall commence on the date that you
install or use the Product and shall continue (unless earlier terminated as provided herein) until
the Expiry Date, or in perpetuity if no Expiry Date is imposed. Without prejudice to any other
rights, ITS may terminate this Agreement at any time if you fail to comply with its terms and
conditions.
Upon termination of this Agreement for any reason whatsoever, you shall cease all use of the
Product and remove all copies of the Software from your computers.
10. General.
10.1 Assignment. You may not assign or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights,
duties or obligations hereunder and this Agreement may not be involuntarily assigned or
assigned by operation of law, without the prior written consent of ITS, which consent
may be granted or withheld by ITS in its sole discretion.
10.2 Severability. Each provision of this Agreement is intended to be severable. If any
covenant, condition or other provision contained in this Agreement is held to be invalid
or illegal by any court of competent jurisdiction, such provision shall be deemed
severable from the remainder of the Agreement and shall in no way affect, impair or
invalidate any other covenant, condition or other provision contained in this Agreement.
If such covenant, condition or other provision shall be deemed invalid due to its scope or
breadth, such covenant, condition or other provision shall be deemed valid to the extent
of the scope or breadth permitted by law.
10.3 Governing Law. You agree that the use of the Product by you shall be governed by
the laws of the State of Victoria and the Commonwealth of Australia, and you consent to
the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of that State and the Commonwealth.
10.4 Attorneys Fees. If any legal action is brought arising out of or relating to this
Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to receive its reasonable attorneys fees
and court costs in addition to any other relief it may be entitled.
17

10.5 Entire Agreement. This Agreement is the complete and exclusive statement of the
agreement of the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter hereof, and supercedes
all prior and concurrent agreements, promises, proposals, representations and warranties,
oral or written, with respect to the subject matter hereof.
18
Hardware requirements
IBM 386/486/Pentium or compatible.
Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000/XP.
Minimum 8Mb RAM.
Hard disk with at least 30 Mb free space.
800x600 graphics resolution or better running 256 colors.
Any printer or plotter including postscript devices supported by Windows.
Microsoft mouse or other Windows pointing device.
Math co-processor.
19
Product support
Product support includes:
Notification of any program modifications or enhancements as they become available.
Update facility for those users wishing to upgrade to the latest version.
Replacement of any software which is found to be defective through no fault of the user or
which does not conform to the general published function of the software.
Telephone, facsimile and email support by I.T.S. or an authorised dealer.
Comprehensive Internet web site providing latest information, drivers, updates, libraries,
etc. for all registered SPACE GASS users.
I.T.S. reserves the right to charge for telephone, facsimile or email support.
20
Hardware locks and insurance

SPACE GASS is usually supplied with a hardware lock that must be inserted into the parallel or
USB port before the software will run. If the hardware lock is faulty or becomes damaged or
destroyed, it can be replaced for a nominal fee provided that a remnant of the lock showing a
valid serial number can be produced proving that it is a genuine SPACE GASS hardware lock.
The hardware lock cannot be replaced for a nominal fee if it is lost or stolen and, for this reason,
it is recommended that the user insure the software package and hardware lock for the full current
market value of the software.
21
Installation and configuration

Installation and configuration of SPACE GASS is a simple two-stage process that is explained in
the following sections.
22
Installing SPACE GASS

Insert the SPACE GASS CD and then follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
Alternatively, if you have downloaded the program from the SPACE GASS website then just run
the file that you downloaded. If you have any problems, refer to the README.TXT file on the
CD or in the folder that you are installing SPACE GASS into.
23
Configuring SPACE GASS

You can now run SPACE GASS by double-clicking on the SPACE GASS icon which has been
created.
When you first start SPACE GASS, or if you make any changes to your system, you will be
prompted for some configuration information.
After the initial configuration, you can change any of the configuration settings by selecting them
from the Config menu. The eight configuration forms are detailed in this chapter.
All configurable data is stored in a file called SG.INI which is stored in the "Start in" folder (view
the SPACE GASS icons properties to determine the "Start in" folder).
24
Folders and files

Select "Folders and files" from the Config menu.
This dialogue allows you to set the folder locations for the SPACE GASS program itself and for
the various types of data files.
Main program folder

Contains the SPACE GASS program itself.
Main data folder
Contains the main job data files.
Library folder
Contains the standard section, material, bolt, plate, weld, spectral curve and reinforcing bar
libraries. This normally matches the main program folder, however it can be different if you wish
to have the library files in a separate folder.
Text data folder
Contains import/export text data files and print text files.
25

Backup data folder
Contains import/export backup job data files.
Archive data folder
Contains import/export archive data files.
CAD data folder
Contains import/export CAD data files.
Temporary data folder
Contains temporary files that are created and deleted by SPACE GASS as it operates.
Documents folder
Contains MS-Access, MS-Excel and MS-Word document files.
Text editor program
The name of the SPACE GASS text editor. This can be the standard Windows NOTEPAD or any
other text editor that runs in Windows.
Calculator program
The name of the SPACE GASS calculator. This can be the standard Windows calculator or any
other calculator that runs in Windows.
Default sections library
The name of the default section library.
Note that any folders that do not exist are automatically created as you go.
26
Text formatting
Select "Text formatting" from the Config menu.
This dialogue allows you to set the report and graphics text formats, margins and fonts.
Report text format

The report text format which is initially selected when you create a new job. Note that this setting
does not change the current job. The report text format for the current job can only be changed
from the Frame Analysis Report dialogue (selected from the Output menu).
Graphics text format
The graphics text format which is initially selected when you create a new job. Note that this
setting does not change the current job. The graphics text format for the current job can only be
changed from the Labelling and Annotation dialogue (selected from the View menu).
Report margins
The top, bottom and left margins for text reports.
27

Report font
The font for text reports. This must not be a proportional font otherwise the columns of numbers
in reports will not line up properly. The two-column output toggle switches between one-column
and two-column output in the report.
Screen graphics font
The font for screen graphics text. This can be any proportional or fixed font.
After setting the screen graphics font size, if the text on the
SPACE GASS graphics screen looks too big or too small, it may be because the screen graphics
correction factors have not been set correctly. Refer to "Correction factors" in "Graphics
dimensions" later in this chapter.
Printer graphics font
The font for printer graphics text. This can be any proportional or fixed font.
Plotter graphics font
The font for plotter graphics text. This can be any proportional or fixed font.
28
General configuration
Select "General configuration" from the Config menu.
This dialogue allows you to set the general purpose configuration items in SPACE GASS.
Sound on alert
This allows you to suppress or enable the sound that the program makes when it wants to alert
you to something.
Sound on error
This allows you to suppress or enable the sound that the program makes when an error occurs.
Diagram shading
Loading, bending moment, shear force, stress and axial force diagrams are shaded if this item is
checked. This is the setting which is initially selected when you create a new job. It does not
change the current job. The diagram shading for the current job can only be changed from the
Settings menu.
Shading is normally turned off as it makes multiple superimposed diagrams hard to read.
29

Check disk space
If this item is checked, SPACE GASS performs a disk space check to ensure that there is enough
free space for a static or dynamic analysis to proceed to completion. If the disk space check has
been disabled and there is not enough space for the analysis data, the program may abort with an
error message. Although this is not a desirable occurrence, it will not result in loss of data.
Vertical axis
The graphics vertical axis which is initially selected when you create a new job. Note that this
setting does not change the current job. The graphics vertical axis for the current job can only be
changed from the Viewpoint dialogue (selected from the View menu).
Changing this setting only affects the graphics display. It doesnt affect the local axis definitions,
the steel design top flange definitions, or the analysis and design modules in any way.
Aperture size
The size of the aperture circle which appears when nodes and/or members can be selected
graphically. This is the setting which is initially selected when you create a new job. It does not
change the current job. The aperture circle size for the current job can only be changed from the
Settings menu.
Crosshair size
The size of the crosshair which appears when snap or ortho modes are on. This is the setting
which is initially selected when you create a new job. It does not change the current job. The
crosshair size for the current job can only be changed from the Settings menu.
Curve resolution
The curve resolution which is initially selected when you create a new job. Note that this setting
does not change the current job. The curve resolution for the current job can only be changed
from the Settings menu.
All curved lines drawn with SPACE GASS are actually a series of short straight lines. In most
cases it is very difficult to differentiate between a true curve and a series of ten straight line
segments placed around the curve. SPACE GASS allows you to specify how many straight line
segments per member are used to approximate curved lines in displacement, bending moment,
shear force or axial force diagrams.
The bending moments sign which is initially selected when you create a new job. Note that this
setting does not change the current job. The bending moments sign for the current job can only be
changed from the Settings menu.
The convention for drawing bending moment diagrams varies from country to country. SPACE
GASS can be configured to draw bending moments on either the tension or compression side of a
member.
30
Dashed lines
Dashed (broken) lines are used to differentiate between load cases and between diagram types.
All lines are drawn continuous if dashed lines are not allowed.
DXF layer names
Layer names are only applicable if you have the CAD interface module. These are the layers into
which the drawing will be placed when you transfer it into your CAD program. AutoCAD accepts
most names, while AutoSKETCH accepts only integer values from 1 to 10.
It is recommended that you make each layer name different so that it is easy to distinguish
between centrelines, text, members, hidden lines, attributes, bolts, plates and cut-off lines. It is
also recommended that you set the hidden line layer in your CAD software to dashed or dotted
lines.
31
Graphics dimensions
Select "Graphics dimensions" from the Config menu.
This dialogue allows you to set graphics correction factors, and printer/plotter orientation,
dimensions and origin locations.
Correction factors
Some graphics screens, printers and plotters exaggerate the horizontal and/or vertical scales so
that the SPACE GASS graphical output appears stretched or compressed in either or both
directions. SPACE GASS allows you to apply correction factors which allow for these
exaggerations and adjust the graphical output so that it is correctly sized and proportioned.
If you click on the Measure button, you can simply measure the width and height in millimetres
of two lines on the screen with a ruler, and SPACE GASS calculates the correction factors for
you.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Ensure that you measure between the arrow heads rather than measuring the overall dialogue or
screen size, otherwise items on the SPACE GASS graphics screen will appear too small or too
large.
32
Printer/plotter orientation
It is possible to configure SPACE GASS so that graphical output on your printer and/or plotter is
rotated through 90 (landscape). Note that if you specify landscape, only the structure and
labelling inside the graphics border is rotated. The border around the graphics output is not
affected. Thus, a landscape hardcopy uses exactly the same page space as a portrait hardcopy.
Printer line width
This lets you control the thickness of lines in the printer graphics output.
Printer/plotter size
The printer and plotter graphics width and height settings allow you to control the size of the
graphical output that you get. Do not use widths and heights larger than the actual paper size that
the device can handle otherwise part of the image will be lost.
Printer/plotter origin offset
The printer and plotter graphics origin offsets allow you to move the graphical output to any
desired position on the sheet. Origin offsets of zero cause the graphical output to be positioned in
the corner of the page for most printers and plotters.
33
Graphics colors
Select "Graphics colors" from the Config menu.
This dialogue allows you to select colors for screen, printer and plotter graphics output.
Colors are selected by first clicking on the item to be changed and then selecting a color from the
palette at the bottom of the dialogue.
The list of color indexes next to "Section properties" represents section properties 1-25. If you
have more than 25 section properties, the pattern is repeated for properties 26-50, 51-75, etc.
The list of color indexes next to "Load cases" represents the first 25 load cases. If you have more
than 25 load cases, the pattern is repeated for each additional group of 25 load cases.
34
General colors
Select "General colors" from the Config menu.
This dialogue allows you to set the Windows color scheme. It controls items such as dialogue
colors, button colors, scroll bar colors, etc.
When you select this option SPACE GASS loads the standard Windows color selection dialogue
which can also be selected from the Windows Control Panel. The appearance of this screen is
dependant upon the version of Windows you are running.
35
Problem size limits

Select "Problem size limits" from the Config menu.
This dialogue allows you to set maximum job size limits.
SPACE GASS has been dimensioned dynamically. This allows it to expand into the available
memory of your computer giving you virtually unlimited problem size capacity dependant only
on the memory capacity of your computer.
The size limits you set allow you to reserve space for a job, with space being allocated according
to the size of each component of a job. You should set the limits high enough so that there is
enough capacity for the largest of jobs that you are likely to encounter but small enough that you
don't exceed the memory capacity of your computer.
Keep in mind that the limits can be changed at any time, even when you are halfway through
inputting a job and find that you have run out of capacity. Just select "Problem size limits" from
the Config menu and change the limits to suit your job size. After changing the limits you can
simply return to where you left off, with all previously entered data retained.
36
Steel connection configuration

Select "Steel connection configuration" from the Config menu.
This dialogue allows you to change the default steel connection design settings.
Some of the items are purely global settings which apply to all connections during a design. They
can only be changed here and do not form part of the individual data for a connection. The other
items above are also global settings which can be changed here, but which can also be redefined
independently for each connection to be designed. They are, in effect, the default values for the
individual connection design parameters.
The idea is to set the configuration defaults to the most common settings to suit your situation.
This reduces the amount of data required for each connection because, for most connections, the
default data will suffice. Naturally, there are some items such as connection type, bolting
procedure and haunch details, etc. for which defaults are of no use. These must be defined
individually for each connection.
37

Strength grades
The strength grades for bolts, welds, plates, cleats, seats and members can be set to normal or
high. The actual yield strengths are taken from the standard section, bolt, plate and weld libraries
supplied with SPACE GASS. All of these libraries can be viewed, modified, or appended as
required (see also Standard libraries).
Bolt, weld, and plate size ranges
The four size ranges for snug bolts, tensioned bolts, fillet welds and plates are limits within which
the connection program will work during the design phase. Note that the weld and plate size
ranges do not apply to stiffener welds or plates. It is possible to partially simulate a connection
check (as opposed to a design where all sizes are unknown) by setting some or all of the range
setting's minimums and maximums to the actual known sizes.
Bolt slip factor
A measure of the friction sliding resistance between two surfaces bolted together. For clean,
rolled sections or plates a slip factor of 0.35 is common. For finished or machined surfaces the
slip factor must be determined by testing.
Bolt prying factor
A coefficient to allow for the additional tensile force in a bolt due to prying. The prying factor is
normally in the range 0.2 to 0.33.
Edge distance factor
The minimum distance from a bolt centreline to the edge of a section or plate. AS4100/NZS3404
recommends edge distance factors of 1.75 for sheared or hand flame cut edges, 1.5 for rolled
plate, machine flame cut, sawn or planed edges, or 1.25 for rolled edges of rolled sections.
Bolt gauge and pitch
The bolt gauge is the centreline distance between adjacent gauge lines (columns of bolts), while
the bolt pitch is the centreline distance between adjacent bolts along a gauge line.
Note that in most connections, the gauge lines run perpendicular to the axis of the supported
member. For the bolts in the seat component of an angle seat connection, however the gauge line
and pitch directions are interchanged.
38
Connection dimensions
Flange to bolt clearance

The minimum distance from the centreline of an end plate bolt to the edge of the flange to which
the end plate is welded (C4 in the diagram above). It applies to bolted end plate, apex and
moment baseplate connections. For example, for a bolted end plate connection and, considering
the bolts above the top flange of the supported beam, the flange to bolt clearance is the distance
from the top of the beams top flange to the centreline of the bolts above it.
Beam end clearance
The distance from the end of the supported member to the face of the supporting member (C3 in
the diagram above). This setting is ignored when an end plate is involved because the thickness of
the end plate determines the distance between the two members.
Coped flange clearance
The minimum distance from the edge of the flange of the uncoped member to the end of the cope
(C1 in the diagram above).
Minimum cope depth
The minimum depth of the cope, aligned with the axis of the coped member (C2 in the diagram
above).
Stiff seat bearing length
The flange bearing length parallel to the supported member longitudinal axis used for stiff seat
connections. If the connection has a steel supporting member (as opposed to a brick or concrete
support of unknown dimensions), the stiff seat bearing length can be left at zero and it will be
calculated automatically during the design phase based on the dimensions of the supporting
member.
39

Preferred bolt rows
This is used to control the final number of bolt rows in web side plate, flexible end plate, angle
cleat or pinned baseplate connections. The specified number of bolt rows will be used provided
that they physically fit and provided that the resulting number of bolts are adequate for design
purposes. If you set this variable to zero then the number of bolt rows will be determined
automatically during the design phase.
Bolting procedures
The bolting procedures can be snug, bearing or friction for simple (non-moment resisting)
connections, or bearing or friction for moment resisting connections. Snug and bearing bolting
procedures resist the shear load by direct bearing of the bolt on the connected components, while
friction bolting procedures resist the shear load through friction between the connected surfaces.
Bearing and friction bolting procedures require high strength bolts to be fully tensioned.
Wrench type
This simply controls the amount of clearance required around a bolt to allow the tightening
wrench to fit. The wrench type for bolt tightening can be air or hand. It applies to bolted end
plate, apex and moment baseplate connections only.
Bolt hole type
The bolt hole type can be standard, oversize (or short slotted), or long slotted. It applies to bolted
end plate, apex and moment baseplate connections which use friction bolting procedures only.
Standard holes are allowed to have a diameter not exceeding df+2mm when df24mm, or
df+3mm when df>24mm, or df+6mm for baseplates (where df is the bolt diameter). Oversize or
short slotted holes are allowed to have a width not exceeding the greater of 1.25df and df+8mm
and a length not exceeding the greater of 1.33df and df+10mm. Long slotted holes are allowed to
have a width not exceeding the greater of 1.25df and df+8mm and a length not exceeding 2.5df.
Weld categories
The weld categories for the main connection components and stiffener plates can be GP (general
purpose) or SP (structural purpose). SP welds are stronger than GP welds. It is common to use SP
welds for the main connection components and GP welds for stiffener plates.
Flange weld type
This is used to specify fillet welds or butt welds for the ends of the supported member flanges in
bolted end plate, welded moment, apex or moment baseplate connections. It is common to use
butt welds in this situation, particularly when the supported member flanges are thick.
Member alignment
Controls the relative alignment of members coming into a connection. It can be set to top, centre
or bottom.
For two supported beams coming into either side of a supporting column, the height of the side B
beam is adjusted in accordance with the specified member alignment to match the side A beam.
40

The member alignment variable has no effect when there is only one beam supported by a
column.
Member alignment variations
Where one or two supported beams connect to the sides of a supporting beam web, the height of
the supported beams is adjusted in accordance with the specified member alignment to match the
supporting beam flanges.
Threads in shear plane
Affects the bolt shear strength. Bolts designed with the thread in the shear plane have a reduced
cross-section and thus, a reduced strength.
Bolts above top flange
This allows you to specify a top flange plate instead of having bolts above the top flange in bolted
end plate connections. Otherwise SPACE GASS always places two bolts in the tension flange(s).
41
Getting started
This chapter explains how to start SPACE GASS and takes you on a guided tour of the main
SPACE GASS window and all of its menus. It also explains how you should interact with
SPACE GASS and respond to its requests for data.
42
Starting SPACE GASS

Before proceeding with this section you should have copied and installed SPACE GASS (see also
Installing SPACE GASS).
In order to start SPACE GASS, you can either:
1. Double-click on the "SPACE GASS" shortcut on your desktop.
2. Double click on a SPACE GASS data file (they end with .SG).
If you are running SPACE GASS for the first time, you will be taken through part of the SPACE
GASS configuration program (see also Configuring SPACE GASS).
43
The main SPACE GASS window

When you start SPACE GASS, the following main window appears with the structural model for
the current job displayed in it.
The title bar

This is the colored band across the top of the window, it contains the SPACE GASS version, the
name of the current job and the scale of the viewport if it is being displayed in full-screen mode.
The menu bar
The second band across the top of the window contains the twelve main menu items. By selecting
one of the main menu items you can gain access to all of the options contained within that menu.
The menu bar allows you to access all of the programs features (see also The menu system).
The toolbars
The buttons across the top and to the left of the display area form the toolbars. The toolbar
buttons replicate the most commonly used menu items and give you instant access to them (see
also The toolbars). The graphics settings buttons across the bottom of the screen display the
current settings for the drawing tool and allow the settings to be toggled.
44
The graphics display area

The area in the centre of the main window displays the structural model for the current job. The
global axes are also shown in the top-right corner. You can display up to four viewports in this
area.
The text display area
The area below the graphics settings buttons forms the text display area. The first line displays
the project heading, job heading and the local axis settings. The second line is a multi-purpose
line which usually contains the status line, but which also periodically displays other prompts and
messages, some of which are purely informative and some of which require you to respond.
45
Using the mouse

This section gives basic information about using the mouse. If your mouse has more than one
button, use the left button unless specifically told otherwise.
The right mouse button is generally used by SPACE GASS to replicate the keyboard ESC key.
The ESC key generally enables you to abort from the current operation or dialogue box. Note,
however that the right mouse button is not always active, such as when a dialogue box is open.
The following definitions explain the basic terms that are associated with using the mouse.
Pointer
The descriptive cursor that appears on the screen and tracks the mouse movement.
Point
Position the pointer on an item.
Click (or Pick)
Point to an item, and then quickly press and release the left mouse button.
Right Click
Point to an item, and then quickly press and release the right mouse button.
Double-click
Point to an item, and then quickly press and release the left mouse button twice.
Drag
Point to an item, press and hold the left mouse button as you move the mouse to a new location,
then release it.
46
Dialogue boxes
When you choose a command, a dialogue box often appears so that you can select options or type
in data. If an option is dimmed, it is not currently available.
Using the keyboard with a dialogue box

Although its usually easiest to use a mouse while you work in a dialogue box, you can also select
options or fill in information with the keyboard. Some of the standard keyboard operations that
you can use in dialogue boxes are as follows.
TAB
Move to the next field in the dialogue box.
SHIFT+TAB
Move to the previous field in the dialogue box.
ENTER
Equivalent to selecting the Ok button.
ESC
Equivalent to selecting the Cancel button.
ALT
If an option, box or button has an underlined letter in its

name, you can choose that item by holding down ALT
while typing the underlined letter.
Moving a dialogue box

You can move a dialogue box dragging its title bar to the new location. The title bar is the colored
band along the top of the dialogue box.
47

Closing a dialogue box
You can close a dialogue by pressing the Ok or Cancel buttons. Alternatively, if the dialogue has
a control-menu box at the left side of the title bar, you can double-click on it to replicate the
cancel button. If you single click on the control-menu box, a control menu appears which also
allows you to close or move the dialogue.
48
Data entry
Dialogue boxes can contain a wide variety of data entry fields, boxes, options and buttons. Some
of the commonly used ones in SPACE GASS are:
Command buttons
You choose a command button to initiate an action, such as carrying out or cancelling a
command. The Ok, Cancel and Help buttons are common command buttons. In SPACE GASS,
they are usually located in the top-right corner of the dialogue box. To choose a command button,
you can either click on it or press TAB until the button you want is selected, and then press
ENTER.
Scroll bars
Some windows and dialogue boxes have scroll bars which you can use to view information that
does not fit inside the window. If you can view all of the contents of a window or dialogue box
without having to scroll, the scroll bars may be absent or dimmed to indicate that they cannot be
used.
Scroll bars have a scroll arrow at each end with a moveable scroll box in between. To scroll
through information displayed in a window or dialogue box, drag the scroll box to the desired
position. To scroll one line at a time, click on the scroll arrows, or to scroll continuously, hold a
scroll arrow down. To scroll one page at a time, click on the scroll bar on either side of the scroll
box.
Text boxes
You can type appropriate information directly into text boxes. Text boxes are generally sideways
scrollable so that they can hold more data than can be displayed in the box.
Sometimes numeric text boxes have arrow buttons attached to them. These are called "spin
buttons" and you can change the number in the text box, without actually having to type anything,
by clicking on the arrows or holding them down.
When entering data into a text box, you will find that quite often a default value is already
displayed there. If a default value is highlighted then as soon as you start typing it will be erased.
To edit a default value without causing it to be erased, you can simply click somewhere in the
49

text box or press one of the keyboard ARROW keys before you begin typing. The point where
you clicked becomes the insertion point for the new text.
If you want to highlight text in a text box, you can simply drag the pointer across the text, or
double-click on a word to select one word at a time. Any text that you type will then replace the
highlighted text. You can also delete highlighted text by pressing "DEL" or "BACKSPACE".
Generally, when you select a text box by clicking on it, its default value does not become
highlighted, however if you use the TAB key to get to the text box, its default value does become
highlighted.
List boxes
Display a list of items in a scrollable window from which you can make a selection. In special
circumstances, you can sometimes select more than one item from a list box.
Combo boxes
Appear initially as a rectangular box containing the current selection. When you select the down
arrow in the square box at the right of the selection, a list of available choices appears. If there are
more items than can fit in the box, scroll bars are provided.
Radio buttons
Represent a group of mutually exclusive options. You can select only one option at a time. If you
already have one option selected, your current selection replaces it. The selected radio button
contains a black dot.
Check boxes
Represent non-exclusive options. You can select as many check box options as needed. When a
check box is selected, it contains an X.
50

Lists
Sometimes SPACE GASS will ask you to provide a list of items such as nodes, members or load
cases. Lists can be typed in as integers separated by commas or dashes. If, for example, your list
was to contain the items 1,2,6,7,8,9,13,14,15 and 20, you could type it in as
1,2,6,7,8,9,13,14,15,20 or as 1,2,6-9,13-15,20. Dashes simply allow you to list a range of
numbers.
A special type of list is used to input flange restraint positions in the steel member design
modules. This list accepts @s (AT symbol) instead of dashes and can be used to quickly input a
number of equally spaced flange restraints. For example, a list containing the following numbers
1.2,2.4,3.6,4.8,6.0,6.6,7.2,7.8,8.4 could be replaced with 5@1.2,4@0.6.
When using a file selection dialogue box in which you have to

scroll to get to the file you want, you can simply type in the first couple of characters of the file
name to automatically scroll it into view.
51
Managing job files

Whenever you run SPACE GASS, it loads and displays the job that you previously had open. The
procedures for starting new jobs, opening previously saved jobs, saving jobs, deleting jobs and
cleaning up jobs are explained in the following sections.
52
Starting a new job
Click on the "New Job" toolbar button or select "New" from the File menu.
Opens a new job. If you have unsaved changes to the current job file then SPACE GASS will ask
you is you wish to save these changes.
53
Opening a job
Click on the "Open Job" toolbar button or select "Open" from the File menu.
Opens a previously saved job. You will be prompted for the name of the file you wish to open.
SPACE GASS, by default, looks in the most recently accessed folder when opening a job.
54
Saving a job
Click on the "Save Job" toolbar button or select "Save" from the File menu.
Saves all changes made to the job. If you have not already created a name for the job (ie. if it is
previously unsaved) then you will be prompted for a file name and a location (performs the same
function as selecting "save as" from the file menu).
"Save As" is similar to "Save", except that the job is saved under a new name that you specify.
For example, if you open Job1, make changes to it and then use Save As to save it as Job2, Job1
will be left unchanged while Job2 will be the changed version of Job1.
55
Deleting a job
Click on "Delete Job" from the File menu.
Deletes the entire job. Use it with care because the job cannot be recovered after it has been
deleted.
56
Cleaning up a job
Click on the "Clean-up Job" toolbar button or select "Clean-up Job" from the File menu or the
floating menu.
Cleans up your model by deleting obsolete items or items that are no longer connected to
anything. For example, it will remove loads that are applied to non-existent nodes or members, or
section properties that are not being used by any members. It is very useful for quickly removing
the causes of many analysis errors.
The clean-up feature can also merge nodes that are within a specified distance of one another,
transferring members, restraints, loads, etc. from the deleted nodes to the retained nodes. If this
action results in a change to the way the structure responds to the applied loads then an error
message will be displayed and the clean-up will not proceed. Any pairs of nodes close together
that are linked with master-slave constraints will not be merged.
Dummy nodes can be removed provided they are not used as direction nodes for members.
57
Job status
Select "Job Status" from the File menu.
Displays the current status of the job as shown below.
58
The status line
The status line appears in the second line of the text display area of the main SPACE GASS
window. It indicates which data is present for the various parts of the current job.
The presence (or absence) of data is indicated by sequences of characters shown as follows. In all
cases, unless otherwise indicated, "Y" represents "data exists", while "N" represents "no data
exists".
If, for example, you have performed a static analysis, a dynamic frequency analysis and an elastic
buckling analysis (but no dynamic response analysis), the "Analysis" part of the status line would
appear as "Analysis:YYNY".
You can use the status line as a check to ensure you have entered sufficient data before
performing another operation. For instance, you cannot perform a static analysis until you have
applied some type of load to the structure (in addition to which, sufficient data must be present on
the structure itself). Check for the appropriate code in the status line window before proceeding
with the operation.
Headings
1. Project name, Job name, Designers initials and Notes
(Y/N)
Structure
1. Nodes
2. Members
3. Restraints
4. Sections
5. Materials
6. Master-slave constraints
7. Member offsets
(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)
Loads
1. Node loads
2. Prescribed node displacements
59

3. Member concentrated loads
4. Member distributed forces
5. Member distributed torsions
6. Thermal/prestress loads
7. Self weight
8. Combination load cases
9. Load case titles
10. Lumped masses
11. Spectral load data
(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)
Analysis
1. Static analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed,
"U"=desired convergence not obtained,
"I"=ill-conditioned
2. Dynamic frequency analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed
3. Dynamic response spectrum analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed
4. Buckling analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed
(Y/N/U/I)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)
Steel
1. Steel member design data
2. Steel Member design/check results, where
"N"=not designed or checked,
"D"=designed,
"C"=checked
3. Connection design data
4. Connection design results, where
"N"=not designed,
"D"=designed
(Y/N)(D/C/N)(Y/N)(D/N)
Concrete
1. Concrete column design data
60

2. Concrete beam design data
(Y/N)(Y/N)
61
The menu system

The menu bar appears immediately below the title bar in the main SPACE GASS window.
To open a menu, click on it with the mouse, or press ALT and then use the ARROW keys to
move across to the desired menu, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, you could hold down the
ALT key while typing the underlined letter in the menu name.
To choose an item from a menu, click on the item with the mouse or drag the selection cursor
down the menu until the desired item is highlighted, and then release the mouse button.
Alternatively, you could use the ARROW keys to move down the menu to the desired item, and
then press ENTER.
Many of the menu items can also be accessed using a keyboard shortcut. They are shown in the
menus with CTRL+K or SHIFT+CTRL+K after them, where K represents the shortcut key. For
example, to operate the Edit Libraries shortcut of CTRL+L, you must hold down the CTRL key
and then hit the L key. Alternatively, to operate the Renumber shortcut of SHIFT+CTRL+R, you
must hold down the SHIFT and CTRL keys together and then hit the R key.
Each of the menus in the menu bar is explained briefly as follows.
62
The file menu

This menu controls most of the programs job and file operations, including exiting from SPACE
GASS.
The file menu lets you create a new job, open an existing job, save the current job under its own
name or under a different name, display a job status window, delete a job, etc.
It also allows you to start the text editor or calculator linked into SPACE GASS. The default text
editor and calculator are the standard Windows ones, however you can link in any other Windows
compatible text editor or calculator by choosing "Folders and Files" from the Config menu.
SPACE GASS is able to import and export data files in standard ASCII text format, DXF
drawing format, SDNF steel detailing format, Microstran ARC format, ZIP archive format,
Microsoft Access format, Microsoft Excel format and Microsoft Word format. The File menu
gives you access to all of these facilities as well as the ability to import or export backup copies
of jobs in their native SPACE GASS format.
63
The File menu also gives access to the library editor which allows you to edit any of the standard
section, material, bolt, plate, weld, reinforcing bar and spectral curve libraries supplied with
SPACE GASS. You can also use the library editor to create your own custom libraries.
The Copy to Clipboard item allows you to copy the current graphics display area into the
Windows clipboard, ready for pasting into other Windows programs.
You can exit from SPACE GASS by choosing "Exit" from the File menu, and you can open one
of the four most recently used jobs by choosing one of the numbered items (with job path) from
the bottom of the File menu.
64
The structure menu

This menu lets you input and edit the models structural geometry.
The Structure menu allows you to change the units system for the current job and input the
project and job headings.
The structure wizard offers a very fast method of inputting a structure provided that it conforms
loosely to one of the standard structures included in SPACE GASS.
Each of the "Nodes", "Members", "Node restraints", "Section properties", "Material properties",
"Master-slave constraints" and "Member offsets" items in the Structure menu have two
alternative methods of input.
65

If you choose a datasheet item, a display window appears with the data layed out in rows and
columns, much like a spreadsheet.
If you choose a graphical item, SPACE GASS allows you to operate directly on the graphics
display area. You can draw new members, change their attributes, or highlight nodes or members
and then change their restraints, properties or constraints.
The remainder of the items in the Structure menu are purely graphical. They offer various
graphical means of inputting and manipulating the structural geometry to suit your exact
requirements.
66
The loads menu

This menu lets you input and edit loads on the structure.
Like the Structure menu, the Loads menu offers datasheet and graphical alternatives for most of
its items.
The datasheet items operate in similar fashion to the Structure datasheet items, while the
graphical items allow you to highlight nodes or members graphically and then input or edit loads
for them.
67
The analysis menu

This menu gives you access to the five types of structural analysis available in SPACE GASS.
The order of the Analysis menu suggests the order in which you will most probably perform the
various types of analysis. For instance, you must perform a static analysis and save the stiffness
matrix to disk before you can perform a dynamic frequency analysis. Furthermore, before
determining the dynamic response of a structure you must have performed a dynamic frequency
analysis.
68
The design menu

This menu allows you to perform steel or concrete designs and checks.
For a steel member design/check, the items in the Design menu allow you to input/edit the design
data with a datasheet or graphically, and then perform a design or check to one of the listed steel
structures codes. After a steel member design you can then use the "Update frame member sizes"
item to transfer the new designed member sizes into the analysis model.
For a steel connection design, the Design menu has items for datasheet or graphical input of the
design data. You can then perform a connection design.
The "Concrete Column Design" and "Concrete Beam Design" items allow you to design or check
reinforced concrete columns and beams. You can graphically select the desired member(s) and
then open the concrete design dialogue to perform the design or check phase.
69
The output menu

This menu gives you access to the programs output report and graphics hardcopy facilities.
The frame analysis and steel design text reports can be previewed on the screen or directed
straight to the printer or to a file.
The "Graphics hardcopy" item sends a copy of the graphics display area to the printer or to a file.
To output concrete column design data and reports you must first enter the concrete
design module and then click on its "Print" toolbar button.
70
The view menu

This menu controls the graphics display area and allows you to select the content and format of
what is displayed there.
Most of the items in this menu are viewport specific. That is, you can have different settings and
items activated for each viewport. You can tell if a toggle item has been selected as there will be a
tick beside it. Greyed-out items indicate that the command is inappropriate to the specific
circumstance, or there is not enough data (eg. if you have not done a static analysis you cannot
display a bending moment diagram).
71
The query menu

This menu allows you to query the frame and its superimposed diagrams.
Selecting "Frame" allows you to click on any node or member to obtain a dialogue full of
information about its geometry and attributes, including the material and section properties.
Selecting "Analysis Results" is similar to "Frame" except that you can obtain a tabulated display
of analysis results for any node or member that you click on.
The remaining menu items allow you to move a crosshair along any member and obtain a readout
of the diagram values at the crosshair point (ie. the "Station") on the member.
72
The settings menu

This menu controls various settings that affect how the graphics functions operate.
The first seven items in this menu are specific to each viewport, allowing you to specify
different settings for each.
The "Grid" and "Snap" items control a rectangular grid of dots which provide a visual aid and a
positioning aid when you are locating points in the graphics display area. The "Ortho" and
"Attach" items are also positioning aids which let you draw truly horizontal, vertical lines and
inclined lines, and attach lines and points to nodes and members.
The "Operating plane" item can be used to set any of the three global planes as the working plane,
while the "Coordinates display" tells you the location of the mouse pointer and lets you switch
between Cartesian/polar and absolute/relative coordinate systems.
The first six items of the settings menu can also be changed using the graphics settings buttons
located at the bottom of the screen. You can also toggle these settings using the keyboard, during
graphics operations, making it very easy to change settings while you are editing a job. The
keyboard keys that correspond with each command are as follows:
G
Grid
Snap
Ortho Mode
A
P
Attach
Operating Plane
Coordinates Display
73
The aperture circle and crosshair are special graphics cursors which appear when attachment to
nodes or members is possible, or when the graphics cursor is not at the same point as the mouse
pointer (such as when snap or ortho modes are on). Their sizes can be modified from the Settings
menu.
All curved lines in SPACE GASS actually consist of a series of short straight lines. The
number of straight line segments used to approximate a curve can be controlled by the "Curved
line resolution" item.
The "Bending moment diagram sign" item lets you specify whether bending moments should be
drawn on the tension side or the compression side of members.
The last item in the Settings menu allows you to shade loading, moment, shear force and axial
force diagrams.
74
The config menu

This menu allows you to configure SPACE GASS to suit your exact requirements.
For a full explanation of the Config menu items, see also Configuring SPACE GASS.
75
The window menu

This menu controls the display and configuration of multiple viewports.
This menu has items that are typical to most Windows programs with multiple viewports.
Only one viewport is opened by default, however you can use this menu to open up to four
viewports. Once you have opened a viewport it can be arranged using one or more of the items in
this menu.
The "Viewports" item allows you to select from a variety of pre-defined arrangements for your
open viewports (in addition to opening additional viewports). This item also has an option that
allows you to enable or disable active viewports under the cursor. If activated then any viewport
that is under the cursor when you have selected a graphics command (among others) will become
active.
76
The help menu

This menu gives you access to the on-line SPACE GASS reference manual.
The "Contents" item allows access to the manual via a table of contents, while the "Search for
help on..." item allows access via an index.
The other items provide useful information about using the help facilities, about SPACE GASS
and also information about your system.
77
The toolbars
The toolbars consist of buttons that provide quick and easy access to commonly used features.
When you point to a toolbar button, SPACE GASS displays its name in a yellow tooltip. Each of
the toolbars is explained in the following sections.
78
The left side toolbar

This toolbar controls most of the graphics display options that can be toggled on or off.
79
The top toolbar

This toolbar controls a mixture of file, editing, viewing and settings options.
80
Modelling the structure

Before a frame can be modelled and analysed with a program such as SPACE GASS, it must first
be idealised and modelled mathematically. The most popular mathematical model uses the
concept of nodes connected by elements of a finite size (finite elements).
SPACE GASS requires that frames are represented by nodes connected by members. Such nodes
are generally free to move and rotate in space. Practical structures, however are connected to a
footing in some way, and so node restraints must be applied which limit the movement of
selected nodes.
The relative movement between two nodes connected by a member is a function of the section
and material properties of that member. Loads can be mathematically represented in the model
and can be applied to nodes and members. Such loads include all of the normal force and moment
type loads, in addition to load inducers such as prescribed displacements and temperature
differentials. A single analysis can consider numerous load cases, each of which may contain
many different load types.
During the analysis phase all unrestrained node displacements (degrees of freedom) are calculated
for each load case. Member forces and moments are then determined from the relative movement
of each end of the member and, finally, reactions are calculated by equating member end
reactions at each restrained node.
If the analysis selected is non-linear, SPACE GASS does an initial linear analysis and then
modifies the stiffness matrix for each member based on the previous analysis node displacements
and member axial forces. It then re-analyses the structure for the modified member stiffness and
continues iterating the analysis phase in this way until convergence is achieved.
81
Coordinate systems
The shape and position of a structure in space is defined by a set of global axes (X,Y,Z). All node
coordinates, for example, are input relative to the global axes system. The global XZ plane is
assumed to be horizontal, while the global Y-axis points vertically upwards.
Each member also has its own set of local axes (x,y,z). This is necessary because section
properties, member loads, forces and moments are most conveniently referenced by axes along
and at right angles to the member. All axes are right hand orthogonal. This means that if you are
looking at the XY plane with the Y-axis pointing upwards and the X-axis pointing to the right, the
Z-axis points towards you shown as follows.
Z
Local and global coordinates
82
y`
z`
= Direction angle
z
End B
Local coordinates and the direction angle
In order to determine the orientation of the local axes for a member, you should first assume a
zero direction (skew) angle with no direction node or direction axis and apply rules 1-3. If the
direction angle is not zero or if a direction node or direction axis is defined for the member, you
should then rotate the local axes about the longitudinal axis of the member according to rule 4.
1. The local x-axis lies along the axis of the member and points from node A to node B.
2. The local y-axis lies at right angles to the local x-axis and points in the same general
direction as the global Y-axis. It is orientated such that the local xy-plane is parallel to the
global Y-axis.
3. For members that have their longitudinal axis parallel to the global Y-axis, rule 2 above is
undefined. Consequently, for these members, the local z-axis points in the same direction as
the global Z-axis.
4. If the direction angle is not zero, rules 2 and 3 above are modified so that the member
(together with its local axes) is rolled about its own axis an amount equal to the direction
angle. If you are looking along the member from node B to node A, a positive direction
angle causes an anti-clockwise roll.
Alternatively, if a direction node or direction axis has been defined for the member, the
member (together with its local axes) is rolled about its own axis until the members local
xy-plane lines up with the direction node or direction axis.
If you are unsure of the orientation of the local axes for a particular member, you can display
them graphically (see also View node and member properties).
83
Sign conventions
Items which act along or about an axis are considered to be positive when they act along or about
the positive axis direction. Positive rotations conform to the right hand screw rule shown as
follows.
Right hand screw rule
Applied loads have their sign determined by the axes system in which they are referred. Most
types of member loads can be specified in either the global or local system, however node loads
and self weight must be referenced by the global system.
Node displacements are positive if they displace along or around the positive global axis
directions. External reactions are positive if they act along or around the positive global axis
directions.
Member forces and moments follow the sign conventions as follows.
84
Member forces and moments
Positive axial forces cause compression in the member.

Positive moments cause compression on the positive axis side of the member.
Channel and angle sections have their flange toes pointing in the direction of the local zaxis. Positive y-axis moments therefore cause the flange toes to go into compression.
Positive shears cause the node A end of the member to translate in the direction of the positive
axis with respect to the node B end.
85

Positive torsions cause the node A end of the member to rotate anti-clockwise with respect to the
node B end when observed from the node B end.
86
Symmetrical structures
In many situations, where frames are symmetrical about one or more arbitrary lines or points, it is
possible to save a considerable amount of analysis time and effort by reducing the size of the
frame. For example a rectangular grid with four identical quadrants could be analysed by using
just one quadrant. The quadrant boundaries which were normally connected to adjacent quadrants
would have boundary conditions applied in the form of node restraints. These restraints would
simulate the effect of adjacent quadrants.
The principle can be easily demonstrated by considering the three span continuous beam shown
as follows which lies in the XY plane. It is simply supported at four points and is loaded with a
uniformly distributed load. Because the beam is symmetrical about its centre, it could be cut in
half and analysed as a two span beam.
Equivalent beams
Intuitively, the rotation at the centre of the beam is zero. Thus it can be seen that even though
there may be vertical deflection at the beam centre, the only effect that the right hand half of the
beam has on the left half is to prevent rotation at the centre. This effect could be simulated by
replacing the right hand half of the beam with a rotation restraint as shown in the diagram above.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Symmetrical frames cannot be easily simplified unless they also have symmetrical section and
material properties and symmetrical loading conditions. For example, if the beam in the above
example was only loaded over the first three spans, then the rotation at the central support would
not be zero and therefore could not be restrained to zero
87
Ill-conditioning and instabilities

The most common analysis errors are caused by structures which are not correctly conditioned or
stabilised.
Ill-conditioning commonly occurs when frames contain members of widely varying stiffnesss.
When a very stiff member is connected to a very flexible member and their stiffness matrices are
assembled into the structure stiffness matrix, some of the stiffness terms of the flexible member
can be completely lost due to their insignificance in comparison with the stiffness terms of the
stiff member. Hence, the flexible member is not completely represented and ill-conditioning
occurs.
SPACE GASS contains an algorithm which checks for possible ill-conditioning and displays
warning messages if appropriate. Generally, these messages appear well before ill-conditioning
actually occurs. They do, however serve to highlight structures which are close to being illconditioned. If after the analysis, the sum of the reactions equals the sum of the applied loads then
it can be assumed that the frame is well conditioned.
Instabilities occur when one or more nodes are free to translate or rotate without resistance from
the frame. Sometimes unstable structures are very easy to detect, such as when restraints have not
been applied or when an obvious collapse mechanism is possible.
Instabilities are often very subtle and difficult to isolate. For example, if an unrestrained node has
a pinned connection to each of its connecting members then it would be free to rotate and an
instability would result. This type of instability can be hard to detect because it only affects one
node in the structure. True trusses must therefore have every rotational degree of freedom
restrained.
Sometimes highly ill-conditioned frames can also be interpreted

as being unstable by the program.
Another common type of instability occurs when a group of members connected end-to-end in a
straight line are free to rotate about their longitudinal axis. The instability occurs because during
the analysis the program is unable to determine the amount of rotation of the intermediate nodes.
There are no hard and fast rules to follow in the detection of conditioning and stability problems,
however if the structure is clearly drawn and examined, the problem usually becomes evident to
any moderately experienced user.
88
Analysis data
This chapter describes in detail each type of data that can be included in the analysis model.
This chapter does not include design data (see also Steel member designSteel connection
design and Concrete column design).
There are five ways in which data can be input.
1. Text file input.
2. Structure wizard.
3. Datasheet input.
4. Graphical input.
5. CAD DXF input.
Each data entry method operates on the same common database, therefore you can use any
combination of methods to input your data. For example, you can use the structure wizard to
generate the basic frame geometry, then graphically edit the geometry and apply some loads,
followed by opening up some datasheets to view the data and make further modifications to the
structure or loads.
When some data has been input, regardless of the amount or type, you can produce an output
report on the screen or printer. In addition, regardless of which input method you use, the
graphics display area displays the current state of the structural model graphically. A graphics
hardcopy can also be produced at any time.
See also Frame analysis report.
See also Graphics hardcopy.
89
Units
SPACE GASS can handle a variety of different unit sets. The units do not need to be consistent or
even belong to the same system (ie. you can mix units from Metric and Imperial). You can
quickly select standard Imperial or Metric by clicking on the "Imperial" or "Metric" buttons and
then make further individual changes as required.
If the "Convert the current job for any unit changes" box is checked then all of the data in the
current job will be converted in accordance with the units changes you made. If the box is not
checked then the units will change but none of the job data will be converted.
If the "Save the above units as the default for new jobs" box is checked then SPACE GASS will
use the selected units as the default every time you start a new job in the future.
If you are entering data and are not sure what the correct units are for that particular type
of data, you should either (a) select the datasheet (from the datasheets button on the top toolbar)
for the particular type of data you are entering and observe the units displayed at the bottom-right
of the datasheet or, (b) produce an output report and observe the units displayed next to each
section heading.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
90

Before accepting any output from SPACE GASS, please check that all of the input and output
data conforms to the units you have selected. You can do this most conveniently by producing a
full output report and observing the units that are shown next to the heading in each section of the
report.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
If you change units for any or all data types after having input some data and you want the data to
be converted, then you must ensure that the option to "Convert the current job for any unit
changes" is checked. Otherwise the data will not be converted automatically.
See also The structure menu.
See also Initiator.
91
Headings
Headings are a desirable feature which allow you to clearly label the output for each job with a
project heading, job heading, designers initials and descriptive notes.
Project heading
Allows you to describe the project.
Job heading
Allows you to describe the job.
Designer
Identifies you as the designer.
Notes
Allows you to describe the job in more detail.
See also The structure menu.
See also Headings text.
92
Node data
Nodes are used to define the geometry of the structure in 3D space, and to mark the start and end
points of members in the model.
There are six possible displacements (degrees of freedom) per node in a 3D frame. They are
translation along, and rotation about, X,Y, Z.
Node
The node numbering order is of no consequence and successive node numbers do not have to be
sequential. For example, a straight beam with five nodes could just as easily be numbered
24,8,2,13,99 as 1,2,3,4,5. It is possible to leave gaps in the numbering sequence to allow for
nodes which might be inserted later.
While the node numbering sequence doesnt effect the results it is easier to interpret the
results of an analysis if a logical numbering sequence has been used.
You can renumber nodes at any stage by using the graphics renumbering facility (see also
Renumber).
X,Y and Z coordinates
Global coordinates of the node that may be positive or negative.
Dummy nodes
These are nodes that are not connected to any members. They are useful as direction nodes or
reference points.
See also Node restraints.
See also Master-slave constraints.
93

See also Members.
See also Nodes text.
See also Datasheet Input.
See also Node properties.
See also Draw.
94
Member data
Members represent the actual beams, columns, ties, struts, cables, braces, etc. in the real structure.
They must be prismatic and must be connected to a node at each end.
Member
The member numbering order affects the analysis frontwidth, however this is of no consequence
if the wavefront optimiser is used. The graphical renumbering feature also means that the initial
member numbering order is unimportant because it can be easily changed at any time. Successive
member numbers do not have to be sequential.
Type
Choices are:
Normal,
Tension-only,
Compression-only,
Cable.
While in tension, tension-only members act identically to normal members with axial, flexural,
torsional and shear capacity. However, if they go into compression then they are automatically
disabled and act as if they have been removed from the model. Members such as tension bracing
and slender ties fall into this category.
Slender members that rely on axial tension to resist lateral loads applied to them should
be modelled as cables rather than as tension-only members!
While in compression, compression-only members act identically to normal members with axial,
flexural, torsional and shear capacity. However, if they go into tension then they are
automatically disabled and act as if they have been removed from the model. This type of
member is useful in situations such as where a support member resists download loads by bearing
on a footing but is unable to resist any uplift.
95

In both tension-only and compression-only cases, the program does an initial analysis and then
scans for tension-only members that have gone into compression, and compression-only members
that have gone into tension. If any of these are found they are disabled and the structure is reanalysed. This process continues until all tension-only members are in tension and all
compression-only members are in compression. Note that disabled members are sometimes reenabled if their axial force reverses sign during the iteration process.
See also Tension-only and compression-only effects.
Cable members use axial tension only to resist lateral loads. They have no flexural, torsional or
shear capacity, and so to avoid instabilities you must restrain all rotational degrees of freedom for
nodes connected to cable members which are not rotationally fixed to other members. Cable end
fixities of FFFFFF, FFFFFR, FFFFRR, FFFRRR all give the same results.
Cables that arent laterally loaded are treated as tension-only members which become disabled if
they go into compression. Laterally loaded cables sag instead of taking compression.
See also Cable members.
Cable length
If the member type is "Cable" then an unstrained cable length can be specified to allow for cable
sag when the cable length is different to the chord length (as follows). A zero cable length
indicates that the unstrained cable length is equal to the chord length.
Chord Length
The chord length is the straight line distance between the member ends Note that a members
chord length may not be equal to the distance between its end nodes if member offsets exist for
that member.
Direction angle
The direction angle (degrees), also called the skew angle, allows you to roll the member (with its
local axes) about the member longitudinal axis. The direction angle is equal to the angle of roll. It
is normally set to zero so that the member local y-axis lies in a vertical plane.
y`
z`
= Direction angle
z
End B
96

Member direction angle
Direction node
Selecting a direction node aligns the local xy-plane with the nominated node.
A direction node can be a normal node or a dummy node (one which is not connected to any
members).
Direction node
y`
y
z`
End B
z
Direction node & local axis
Direction axis
Choices are: X axis,
Y axis,
Z axis,
-X axis,
-Y axis,
-Z axis,
N/A
Selecting a direction axis aligns the local xy-plane with the nominated axis (eg. -Z axis selected
in the diagram as follows).
97
Direction axis is -Z axis
End B
y
Z
Direction axis & local axis
Using direction angle, node and axis

Note that the three member orientation members are mutually exclusive. Hence, setting one of
them to a desired value causes the other two to be disabled.
Node A and B
The two end nodes connected to each member are referred to as node A and node B. Node A is
considered to be at the start of the member and any external loads applied to the member are
located by their distance from node A.
Node A cannot be equal to node B, however there are no restrictions relating to node A being
numerically bigger than node B or vice-versa.
End fixity
A member may be released or fixed to its end nodes with varying degrees of fixity. Member end
fixity is referenced by the local axes system and there are six possible components at each end
which may be fixed or released. These components are specified by a six character code
corresponding to translational fixity along x, y and z and rotational fixity about x, y and z
respectively.
The letter "F" represents fixed and "R" represents released. Thus, as an example, a pin ended truss
member with no rotational end fixity in a 3D frame could be modelled using a fixity of
"FFFRRR" at each end, while a pin ended truss member in a 2D frame could have fixities of
"FFFFFR". Members with fully fixed ends would have fixities of "FFFFFF".
You can also specify a spring stiffness, allowing you to model a semi-rigid joint. The letter "S"
represents a spring stiffness, applicable to rotation about the local y or z axes of the member. If
98

you specify a spring stiffness in the fixity code you will also need to enter a corresponding
stiffness in the y/z stiffness fields.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Member end fixities should not be confused with node restraints. Member end fixities specify
only how a member is internally fixed to its end nodes, while node restraints specify how the
structure is connected to its footing. Completely rigid frame members should have member end
fixities of "FFFFFF" regardless of whether the frame is pin based or not.
Section
Section property reference numbers simply specify a particular member cross section from the
section property data. Thus, members with identical properties would have the same property
reference numbers.
The current section property for the members selected is displayed in this field. If no section
property has been chosen, or if more than one section property applies to the selection, this field
will be blank. The source is displayed along with an indication of whether the section has been
flipped and what type of angle section was chosen (if appropriate).
You can change the section property by entering another section property number. If this number
corresponds with a section which has already been defined, the corresponding properties will be
displayed. All of the members selected will have this property applied to them.
See also Section properties.
See also Material properties.
See also Member offsets.
See also Members text.
See also Member properties.
See also Draw.
99
Node restraint data
Unrestrained nodes are generally free to move along or about any axis direction, however
practical structures must be restrained to a footing in some way, otherwise instabilities would
occur. Nodes can be restrained about one or all of their six degrees of freedom and such a
restraint may take the form of a fixed restraint or a flexible restraint. If a degree of freedom is
given a flexible restraint then a spring stiffness must also be input. Fixing a degree of freedom has
the effect of immobilizing that node movement, while specifying a flexible restraint causes the
node movement to be a function of the spring stiffness.
Node restraints are specified by a six character code corresponding to restraints along X,Y and Z
and about X,Y and Z respectively. "F" represents fixed, "R" represents released, "D" represents
deleted and "S" represents spring (or flexible). "D" has the same effect as an "F" except that
reactions are not calculated for deleted degrees of freedom.
Deleting degrees of freedom can be useful in cases such as plane frames lying in the XY plane
where all out-of-plane components should be restrained. In such cases every node other than the
support nodes would be given a restraint of "RRDDDR". The support nodes would have restraints
in accordance with the frame support conditions. For example, the node at the bottom of a 2D
frame pin based column would have a restraint of "FFDDDR".
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Member end fixities should not be confused with node restraints. Member end fixities specify
only how a member is internally fixed to its end nodes, while node restraints specify how the
structure is connected to its footing. Completely rigid frame members should have member end
fixities of "FFFFFF" regardless of whether the frame is pin based or not.
In order to further clarify the difference between node restraints and member fixities, consider the
pin based column connection for a typical 2D frame as follows.
100
Pin base variations
Node restraint:
Node restraint:
FFDDDF
Member fixity:
FFFFFR
In the left hand example in the diagram above, because the node has been fully
restrained, the output deflections will show a node rotation of zero. Although
it gives correct results, this is not the recommended way to model a pin based
column.
FFDDDR
Member fixity:
FFFFFF
In the centre example of the previous diagram, because the node can rotate with
the bottom of the column, the output deflections will show the actual
magnitude of the rotation. This is a more logical way to model a pin based
column.
Node restraint:
FFDDDR
Member fixity:
FFFFFR
In the right hand example, the node has been pinned to both the column and
footing. This results in an instability because there is no resistance to rotation
of the node by either the member or the footing.
General restraint
For cases where a number of nodes are given the same restraint code, there is a general restraint
facility whereby the code only has to be entered once. This saves data entry time and reduces the
quantity of printed output. Considering again the "RRDDDR" restraint code mentioned in the
previous paragraph, instead of applying this code to each unsupported node separately, a general
restraint code of "RRDDDR" could be applied to just one of the unrestrained nodes.
The general restraint code does not apply to nodes which have their own restraint code. Note that
output reports only show the general restraint code on one node, even though the analysis has
assumed that it applies to all unrestrained nodes.
101
It is a good idea to put a general restraint on all frames which are not space frames so that any 3D
movements which arent applicable to the frame can be stopped. General restraints which should
be specified for various common types of frames are.
DRDDDR
plane.
Continuous beam along X-axis, loaded in XY
DDRDRD
plane.
Continuous beam along X-axis, loaded in XZ
RRDDDD
Plane truss in XY plane with all members pinned.
DRRDDD
Plane truss in YZ plane with all members pinned.
RDRDDD
Plane truss in XZ plane with all members pinned.
RRDDDR
Plane frame in XY plane.
DRRRDD
RDRDRD
Plane frame in YZ plane.

Plane frame in XZ plane.
DDRRRD
Plane grid in XY plane.
RDDDRR
Plane grid in YZ plane.
DRDRDR
RRRDDD
Plane grid in XZ plane.

Space truss with all members pinned.
For example, a single bay pin based portal frame lying in the XY plane would have restraints of
"FFDDDR" on its two column base nodes, and a general restraint of "RRDDDR" on any one of
the other nodes. The general restraint would effectively tell the program not to consider any outof-plane (3D) degrees of freedom.
X,Y and Z axial stiffnesses
Axial spring stiffness for degrees of freedom restrained with "S". Axial spring stiffnesses must
always be greater than zero.
X,Y and Z rotational stiffnesses
Rotational spring stiffness spring stiffnesses for degrees of freedom restrained with "S".
Rotational spring stiffnesses must always be greater than zero.
See also Node restraints text.
See also View node and member properties.
102
Section property data

Click on
in the Member Properties dialogue box.
Section properties must be input for each type of member cross section in the model. Each section
property describes the geometric properties of a single cross section relative to the local member
axes.
Section
There are two fields, one for the section property number and the other for the section name.
Section property numbers do not have to be sequential or in any particular order. The section
property name is used as a description for the section, and as a reference for sections which have
been read from a library.
Source
This indicates the source of the section. There are four different sources:
Manual:
Library:
User defined properties.

A shape taken from a library.
The source will be the library name (eg. AUST300).
Shp Bldr:
Section defined in the Shape Builder.
Std Shps:
Section defined in Standard Shapes.
See also Standard sections libraries.

See also Shape builder.
If you create a section in the shape builder by importing it from the library, and you dont
make any changes to it, the source will be the name of the library the section was taken from.
103

However, you can still edit the shape via the shape builder. You can also edit other library
sections in the shape builder, even if the section wasnt input via the shape builder.
Flipped
"YES" if the section has been flipped (see also Flipping a section).
Angle Type
Indicates the angle configuration.
Choices are:
Single
Short-Short
Long-Long
Starred
See also Angle sections.

Area of section
Cross sectional area of the section.
Torsion constant
Torsional stiffness of the cross section. Calculating the torsion constant for arbitrary cross
sections can be quite complex, particularly if the cross section changes shape (warps) under
torsion. For example, a circular tube has a relatively high torsion constant because it doesnt warp
under torsion. However, if a saw cut is made through the tube wall the torsion constant is
drastically reduced because the cross section can change shape under very small torsion loads.
Thus two shapes with very similar geometric properties can have substantially different torsion
constants.
The torsion constant for shapes which cannot warp is equal to the polar moment of
inertia.
The torsion constants for various common shapes can be calculated using the following formulae.
Solid circle:
Circular tube:
Solid square:
D 4
J=
32
J=
Do4 Di4
32
J = 01406
.
D4
104
Solid rectangle:
5
AB 3
B
B
J=
1 0.63 + 0.0525
3
A
A
where A & B are length and breadth (or vice-versa)

and A>B
I, H, T, L and angle
sections:
J is equal to the sum of the torsion constants of the

composite sections which constitute the total
cross-section.
Y and Z moments of inertia

Principal moments of inertia of the cross section.
Y and Z shear areas
Principal shear areas of the cross section, where a value of zero represents an "Infinite" shear
area.
The shear area is the effective cross sectional area which is used in the calculation of shear
deformations. In general, the shear area depends upon the shearing stress distribution, which in
turn depends upon the shape of the cross section.
For rolled steel sections, the major axis shear area is approximately equal to the area of the
web(s). For rectangular cross sections, the shear area is equal to A/1.2, where A is the gross area.
Values for other shapes are given in standard textbooks on strength of materials.
For most cross sections and materials, the shear deformations are negligible compared to
the flexural deformations. Therefore, the shear area can often be specified as infinite.
Principal angle
Angle (degrees) from principal axes to geometric axes in anti-clockwise direction. For example,
the principal angle is positive for single angle sections that have their horizontal leg pointing to
the left.
Section mark
Member mark used in connection detail drawings, marking plans, etc.
See also Section properties text.
See also View full 3D member geometry.
105
Standard section libraries

Standard sections libraries are available for most countries and they include all I sections, H
sections, T sections, channels, angles, square tubes, rectangular tubes and circular tubes.
See also Standard library.
106
Shape builder
The shape builder allows you to modify library shapes, combine library, standard and custom
shapes into built-up sections, and create standard and custom shapes. Standard shapes are easily
created by clicking on one of the standard shapes buttons and entering the desired dimensions.
For a custom shape, you are required to enter three or more coordinates and the shape builder will
display the shape and calculate the section properties.
You can add any shapes you create, including modified library sections, standard and custom
shapes, to a sections library at the click of a button. The shape builder displays the appearance of
the shape you have specified as well as calculating the section properties.
To operate the shape builder:
1. In the member properties dialogue box click the "Shape builder" button after entering a
section number and name.
2. To input a new shape, select the library button and choose a section or select the custom
shape button or a standard shape button.
107

3. To edit a shape, modify any of the dimensions for library or standard shapes, or modify the
perimeter coordinates for a custom shape.
4. Move or rotate the shape by entering an X, Y or value.
5. Mirror the shape by clicking either of the mirror buttons.
6. If you wish to create a built-up section then select another library, custom or standard shape.
You can add any section you have created or edited to one of the sections libraries, delete it, or
save it for use in the current job. To add to the library click the "Add to library button", to delete
click the "Delete" button or to save it for use in the current job click the Ok button.
Section properties input via the shape builder will be stored in your job as library or standard
shapes if possible. If this is not possible, such as when multiple shapes are combined or shapes
are rotated or mirrored, then they will be stored in your job as shape builder shapes. Library and
standard shapes can be shown in 3D when you turn on the full 3D geometry, however shape
builder shapes can not.
Furthermore, the geometric data for non-standard or built-up shapes is not saved in SPACE
GASS text files or section library files. Therefore, if you save these types of sections into a
library via the shape builder, or if you export your job containing these types of sections to a text
file, you will be able to retrieve their section properties (ie. A, Ix, Iy, etc.) but not their cross
section shape.
The section properties displayed apply to the whole section (ie. the sum of the composite
shapes in the display window).
See also View full 3D member geometry.
108
Flipping a section
If the properties of a section have been read from a library, SPACE GASS then asks if the section
has been flipped. This simply causes the section to have its major and minor section properties
transposed and allows the section to be used in the frame with its major axis parallel to the local
y-axis instead of the z-axis. In most cases, the major axis of a member is parallel to its local zaxis (see also Coordinate systems).
When a section is flipped, the orientation of the local y and z axes are not affected. This
information is not required for sections with equal major and minor axis section properties.
Flipped section orientation
You can see from the diagram above that when the section is flipped, the y and z axes remain
unchanged. This method of flipping a section is different to applying a 90 direction angle to a
member. A direction angle rotates the local axes together with the section, while the above
method simply transposes the section properties. Note that the transposed properties apply to
every member which references the flipped section property number, while a direction angle
rotation affects only the member(s) to which it is applied.
109
Column and beam Tee sections

Column Tees have the major axis parallel to the web and are therefore assumed to be lying on
their side with their flange vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and no flipping). They are
orientated at right angles to normal beam Tees which have the major axis parallel to the flange.
Tee section orientation
110
Angle sections
For angle sections, you can specify single or double angle sections.
Choices are:
Single angle,
Double angle with short legs connected,
Double angle with long legs connected,
Double angle starred (equal angles only).
Angle section orientation
The diagrams above show the orientation of a single angle section and the available double angle
sections. Note that the z-axis is the major axis in all cases.
For equal angles, specifying a double angle section with either short or long legs
connected has the same effect and always results in a section as shown at the top-right above.
111
112
Material property data

Click on
Material properties must be input for each type of member material in the model. Each material
property describes the properties of a single isotropic material.
Material
There are two fields, one for the material property number and the other for the material name.
Material property numbers do not have to be sequential or in any particular order. The material
name is used as a description for the material, and as a reference for materials which have been
read from a library.
E
Value of Youngs Modulus for the material.
Poissons
Value of Poissons Ratio for the material.
Mass Dens
Mass density, required only for self weight calculations.
Temp Coeff
The coefficient of thermal expansion, required only for thermal loads. You must ensure that this
is appropriate for the temperature units you have selected (see also Units).
Fc
Characteristic concrete strength, required only for concrete materials. Is used only in the SPACE
GASS concrete design modules.
113
See also Material properties text.

114
Master-slave constraint data

Click on
in the Node Properties dialogue box.
Master-slave constraints allow you to connect nodes together with imaginary links so that they
translate and/or rotate together. The degree of constraint can be varied so that any or all of the six
degrees of freedom of a node can be linked to another node. For example, it is possible to connect
two nodes together with a 3D rigid link, a 2D rigid link, a 2D translational link, a 2D rotational
link, a 1D translational link, a 1D rotational link or any other combination of the six degrees of
freedom.
A node which is linked to another node is termed a "slave node" and the node to which it
is linked is termed its "master node". A master node can have many slave nodes, however a slave
node can have only one master node. A typical frame can have many slave nodes and many
master nodes. A master node cannot be the slave of another master node. A slave node
constrained DOF cannot be a support (restraint).
A constraint link between a slave node and its master node not only affects the movements of the
slave but also the master.
Node
Slave node to be constrained.
Master node
The node to which the slave node is to be constrained. You can select a master node by clicking
on the "Select" button and then choosing a node.
Constraint code
Master-slave constraints are controlled by a six character constraint code which specifies the
exact constraint relationship between a slave node and its master. The six characters of the
115

constraint code correspond to translational constraint along X,Y and Z and rotational constraint
about X,Y and Z respectively. "F" represents fixed (constrained) and "R" represents released
(unconstrained).
In order to illustrate how the constraint code works, we will consider some typical examples of
constraints in the global XY plane. Please note that the following examples apply equally to the
XZ and YZ planes also.
When considering the XY plane, the only significant characters in the constraint code are the
first, second and sixth. These correspond to translation along X and Y, and rotation about Z.
When considering the XZ plane, only the first, third and fifth characters apply, and when
considering the YZ plane, only the second, third and fourth characters apply.
If a slave node has a constraint code of "RFxxxR" (where xxx could be any combination of Fs
and Rs) then its Y-axis translation will be the same as its master node. Note that the X-axis
translation and the Z-axis rotation of the slave node will be completely independent and in no
way affected by its master node. This can be represented by the simple constraint equation Dys =
Dym, where Dys is the slave Y-axis translation and Dym is the master Y-axis translation.
Similarly, if a slave node has a constraint code of "RRxxxF" then its Z-axis rotation will be the
same as its master node and the X-axis and Y-axis translations will be independent. The
constraint equation in this case is Rzs = Rzm, where Rzs is the slave Z-axis rotation and Rzm is
the master Z-axis rotation.
A slightly different situation occurs if both a translational degree of freedom and a rotational
degree of freedom are constrained. An example of this is a constraint code of "FFxxxF". In this
case, the constraint code effectively places a 2D imaginary rigid member between the slave node
and its master so that the translations of the slave node are a function of both the translations and
the rotation of the master node. The constraint equations in this case are
Dxs = Dxm-Ly*Rzm
Dys = Dym+Lx*Rzm
Rzs = Rzm
where Lx and Ly are the horizontal and vertical components of the distance between the slave and
master nodes.
116
Constraint movements
The following list shows some common constraint codes.

FRRRRR
X translation constrained
(Dxs=Dxm)
RFRRRR
RRFRRR
Y translation constrained
Z translation constrained
(Dys=Dym)
(Dzs=Dzm)
RRRFRR
X rotation constrained
(Rxs=Rxm)
RRRRFR
Y rotation constrained
(Rys=Rym)
RRRRRF
FFFRRR
Z rotation constrained
X, Y and Z translations constrained
(Rzs=Rzm)
(Dxs=Dxm)
(Dys=Dym)
(Dzs=Dzm)
RRRFFF
X, Y and Z rotations constrained
(Rxs=Rxm)
(Rys=Rym)
(Rzs=Rzm)
FFRRRF
Rigid link in XY plane
(Dxs=Dxm-Ly*Rzm)
(Dys=Dym+Lx*Rzm)
(Rzs=Rzm)
FRFRFR
Rigid link in XZ plane
(Dzs=Dzm-Lx*Rym)
117

(Dxs=Dxm+Lz*Rym)
(Rys=Rym)
RFFFRR
Rigid link in YZ plane
(Dys=Dym-Lz*Rxm)
(Dzs=Dzm+Ly*Rxm)
FFFFFF
(Rxs=Rxm)
Rigid link in all planes(Dxs=Dxm-Ly*Rzm+Lz*Rym)
(Dys=Dym+Lx*Rzm-Lz*Rxm)
(Dzs=Dzm-Lx*Rym+Ly*Rxm)
(Rxs=Rxm)
(Rys=Rym)
(Rzs=Rzm)
Any further combinations of the six character constraint code can also be specified.
The following diagrams show the effect that each of the XY plane constraints have. The effects
shown apply equally to the XZ and YZ planes also. Note that constraint codes for any of the three
planes can be combined together as can be seen in the examples above.
118
Typical constraint links

Master-slave constraints can be used to great advantage in many structures. They are particularly
useful for modelling floor slabs in three dimensional frames. A typical floor slab may displace
and rotate in plan as a unit but its plan dimensions do not change due to its large in-plane rigidity.
This could be modelled in SPACE GASS by using one of the perimeter nodes in a typical floor
slab as the master node for that floor and specifying all of the other perimeter nodes in that floor
to be slaves of the master node in the in-plane (XZ plane) directions using a constraint code of
"FRFRFR". Thus all nodes in the floor would move as a unit in the in-plane (horizontal plane in
this case) directions. They would still, however be free to move independently in the out-of-plane
(vertical) direction.
119
Rigid diaphragm modelled with constraints
Another example is the case of wind bracing or a scissor lift where two continuous members
cross each other and are connected to each other with a bolt or pin. The pin transfers shear from
one member to the other but not moment so that the members are free to rotate about the pin
independently.
120
Scissor lift modelled with constraints
This situation is very difficult to model in a frame analysis program unless a constraint facility is
available. Using a master-slave constraint, it is a simple matter to locate two nodes on the same
point where the two members cross. One of the members would be connected to the first node
and the other member would be connected to the second node. Assuming that the frame was in
the XY plane, a constraint code of "FFRRRR" could then be used to force the two nodes to
translate together but rotate independently.
A third example of a common master-slave constraints application is in the modelling of a shear
wall. A column of nodes consisting of one master and the rest slaves could be used to form the
wall itself. Any other nodes connected directly to the wall could also be slaves of the master.
Assuming that the wall was in the XY plane, a constraint code of "FFRRRF" could be used.
Another situation which is difficult to model without using a master-slave constraint occurs when
two members of different depths are connected together end-to-end such that their centrelines do
not line up. In such cases a node could be placed at the end of each member and then a masterslave constraint could be used to join the two nodes together with a rigid link.
In some situations, short stiff members could be used as an alternative to constraint links,
however they would be susceptible to ill-conditioning problems, particularly if they were very
stiff in comparison to other members in the structure.
Master-slave constraints do not suffer from ill-conditioning problems, regardless of how

short the links are.
121

See also Master-slave constraints text.
122
Member offset data

Click on
Choices are:
Local
Global
It is possible to specify a rigid member segment that doesnt deform under bending at each end of
a member. These rigid segments have infinite stiffness for bending, shear and axial deformations.
Member offsets are very useful for modelling the very stiff area at the interconnection of
members (especially stiff members such as large steel members or concrete members).
Member offsets
For example, the rectangular reinforced concrete frame shown above on the left could be
modelled quite accurately with SPACE GASS using a model similar to the one shown on the
right. Each member in the model has short member offsets at each end where intersecting
members overlap.
123
Y
Rigid end offsets
yb
zb
xb
ya
za
xa
X
Z
Specifying 3D member offsets
Member offsets are also very useful in situations where the centrelines of connected members do
not intersect at a node. For example, the diagonal brace members of a plane truss may intersect
below the top chord centreline. Member offsets could be used to allow for this.
Member offsets could also be used to model the centreline mismatch when members of different
depths are connected end-to-end with "top-of-steel" alignment.
The ends of a member with "local" offsets are offset relative to an axis connecting the
end nodes of the member rather than being relative to the axis of the member in its final position.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Be careful when sub-dividing members that have local offsets because the direction of the axis
that the offsets are relative to will change when any intermediate nodes are added.
See also Member offset text.
124
Node load data
Concentrated forces and moments may be applied to any node along or about the global X,Y and
Z axis directions. If a load is applied to a restrained degree of freedom then that load is simply
added to the final reaction.
Node loads may be applied in any number of load cases and may be combined with other load
types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain node loads.
Node
Node to be loaded.
X,Y and Z forces
Node forces (global axes).
X,Y and Z moments
Node moments (global axes).
See also Node loads text.
See also Node loads.
See also View diagrams.
125
Prescribed node displacement data
Prescribed node displacements allow you to specify known displacements and/or rotations to
nodes. They can be very useful for situations where a frame deflects by a fixed and known
amount such as settlement of a support for example.
Prescribed displacements may only be applied to restrained (fixed or deleted) degrees of

freedom, otherwise they are ignored.
Prescribed node displacements may be applied in any number of load cases and may be combined
with other load types within the same load case. It is important to note that like all other load
types, prescribed node displacements do not have any effect on load cases other than the ones in
which they are input.
Case
Load case to contain prescribed displacements.
Node
Node to be displaced.
X,Y and Z translations
Node translations (global axes).
X,Y and Z rotations
Node rotations (global axes).
See also Prescribed node displacements text.
126
127
Member concentrated load data
Concentrated forces and moments may be applied to members in either the global or the local
axes systems. Such loads can act along or about any of the three axis directions and can be
located at any point along the member.
Member concentrated loads may be applied in any number of load cases and may be combined
with other load types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain concentrated member loads.
Member
Member to be loaded.
Sub load
This allows you to reference multiple concentrated loads on a member in the same load case.
Each load is given a sub load number (different to a load case number). For example five
concentrated loads applied to a member within the same load case would have sub load numbers
of 1,2,3,4 and 5 respectively. Unless there are multiple loads applied to a single member within
the same load case, the sub load number should be 1.
Axes
Axes system in which loads are referenced.
Choices are:
Local,
Global.
128

Units
Units system in which load positions are referenced.
Choices are:
Actual,
Percentage.
Position
The load position is defined as the distance from node A to the load. Depending on the "Units
system" selected, this distance may be expressed as an absolute length or as a percentage of the
member length. Thus, a member 600mm long with a load at midspan could have the load position
specified as 300mm or as 50%.
X,Y and Z forces
Member concentrated forces.
X,Y and Z moments
Member concentrated moments.
See also Member concentrated loads text.
See also Member concentrated loads.
129
Member distributed force data
Member distributed forces can be input in the local or global axes systems and can act along any
of the three axis directions.
Distributed forces may start and finish at any point along the member length and may vary in
intensity from start to finish. Thus, it is possible to apply uniform, trapezoidal, or triangular
distributed loads.
Member distributed forces may be applied in any load case and may be combined with other load
types within the same load case.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
For "Local" or "Global Inclined" loads, the total load is equal to the load per unit length
multiplied by the actual distance between the load start and finish positions. For "Global
Projected" loads, the total load is equal to the load per unit length multiplied by the projected
distance between the load start and finish positions.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
For cable members, distributed forces must be uniform and extend over the entire length of the
cable. For "Global Projected" UDLs applied to cable members, the total load is equal to the load
per unit length multiplied by the unstrained cable length.
Case
Load case to contain distributed member forces.
Member
130

Sub load
This allows you to reference multiple distributed loads on a member in the same load case. Each
load is given a sub load number (different to a load case number). For example two distributed
loads applied to a member within the same load case would have sub load numbers of 1 and 2
respectively. Unless there are multiple loads applied to a single member within the same load
case, the sub load number should be 1.
Axes
Axes system in which loads are referenced. There are two global axes systems which may be
used. When the axes are designated as "Global projected" the load acts over the projected length
of the member, while a "Global inclined" load acts over the actual length of the member.
Choices are:
Local,
Global projected,
Global inclined.
Units
Choices are:
Actual,
Percentage.
Start and finish positions

The load start and finish positions are taken relative to node A. Depending on the "Units system"
selected, this distance may be expressed as an absolute length or percentage of the member
length. Thus, a member 600mm long with a load that extends from the 150mm mark to the end
could have the load start position specified as 150mm or as 25%, and the load finish position
specified as 600mm or as 100%. The finish position must always be greater than start.
X,Y and Z start and finish forces
Start and finish member distributed forces.
See also Member distributed forces text.
See also Member distributed forces.
131
Member distributed torsion data
Member distributed torsion loads are similar to member distributed forces except they may only
be applied about the local x-axis. The load intensity may be varied between the start and finish
positions. Member distributed torsions may be applied in any load case and may be combined
with other load types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain distributed member torsions.
Member
Sub load
This allows you to reference multiple distributed torsions on a member in the same load case.
Each load is given a sub load number (different to a load case number). For example two
distributed torsions applied to a member within the same load case would have sub load numbers
of 1 and 2 respectively. Unless there are multiple loads applied to a single member within the
same load case, the sub load number should be 1.
Units
Choices are:
Actual,
Percentage.
Start and finish positions

The load start and finish positions are taken relative to node A. Depending on the "Units system"
selected, this distance may be expressed as an absolute length or percentage of the member
132

length. Thus, a member 600mm long with a load that extends from the 150mm mark to the end
could have the load start position specified as 150mm or as 25%, and the load finish position
specified as 600mm or as 100%. The finish position must always be greater than start.
Start and finish torsion load
Start and finish member distributed torsion load.
See also Member distributed torsions text.
133
Thermal/prestress load data
A thermal load can be applied to a member by specifying a temperature change, while a prestress
can be applied to a member by specifying a tensile or compressive force. Thermal and prestress
loads act over the entire length of the members on which they are applied.
It is possible to model prestress loads with equivalent thermal loads and vice-versa, however this
is generally unnecessary because they can both be applied directly in SPACE GASS.
Thermal and prestress loads may be applied in any load case and may be combined with other
load types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain thermal/prestress loads.
Member
Temperature change
The units for a thermal load are such that L/L = T*C, where L/L is the member strain, T is the
temperature change, and C is the coefficient of thermal expansion.
Prestress force
The prestress force is positive for compression or negative for tension.
134
Unlike other member load types, you can apply thermal loads to
non-existent members without causing an analysis error. Such loads are simply ignored during the
analysis phase. For example, in order to apply a uniform 10 temperature change to an entire
structure with a highest member number of less than 100, you could simply generate 10 thermal
loads on members 1-100 without concerning yourself about possible gaps in the member
numbering sequence.
For cable members, you may wish to apply a prestress load

instead of specifying a non-zero unstrained cable length. The prestress load P that is equivalent to
an unstrained cable length L is given by the equation:
P = ( L D)
where
AE
D
D = chord length,
A = cross sectional area,
E = Youngs modulus of elasticity.
See also Thermal/Prestress loads text.

135
Self weight data
Self weight can be automatically generated by the program if an acceleration (such as gravity) is
specified. Acceleration may be specified along any of the three global axis directions. In order to
calculate self weight, mass densities must also be specified in the material property data.
Self weight may be applied in any load case and may be combined with other load types within
the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain self weight.
X,Y and Z acceleration
Acceleration applied to the entire structure. See Units for the appropriate acceleration units that
apply.
See also Self weight text.
See also Self weight.
136
Combination load case data
All loads applied to a structure are always input via primary load cases. Further load cases can be
created by combining the various primary load cases into combination load cases.
Combination load cases can be combined into further combination load cases.
Combination case
Load case to be formed. Cannot be equal to a primary load case.
Case
Load case to be factored and combined into the combination. This can be a primary load case or a
combination load case.
Multiplying factor
The multiplying factor applied to the primary load case when it is combined.
Consider for example a structure that is to be analysed for the following combination load cases
10, 11 and 12.
Load case 1:
Self weight (SW)
137

Load case 2:
Load case 3:
Floor load (LL1)

Roof traffic (LL2)
Load case 4:
Cladding (CL)
Load case 5:
Wind load (WL)
Load case 20: 1.25*DL + 1.50*LL

Load case 21: 0.80*DL + 1.50*LL
Load case 22: 0.80*DL + 1.00*WL,
where DL = SW + CL
LL = LL1 + LL2
The desired combination load cases could then be made up as follows.
Load case 10 (DL):
Load case 11 (LL):
1.00*Load case 1 + 1.00*Load case 4

1.00*Load case 2 + 1.00*Load case 3
Load case 20: 1.25*Load case 10 + 1.50*Load case 11

Note that for a linear analysis, it is not necessary to analyse the combination load cases. They can
be calculated by simple linear superposition of the primary load case results during the output
phase. For a non-linear (2nd order) analysis, however the simple linear superposition rules dont
apply and combination load cases have to be fully analysed and treated in the same way as
primary load cases.
For this reason, SPACE GASS allows you to decide whether or not to analyse the combination
load cases and treat them the same as primary load cases or to not analyse them and have them
calculated by simple linear superposition during the output phase. You can specify the load cases
that you want analysed by listing them at the start of the analysis phase. For example, if you have
primary load cases 1,2,3 and 4, and combination load cases 10,11 and 12, you could analyse just
the primaries by entering 1-4 for the load cases list.
SPACE GASS will not allow a combination load case to be a simple linear combination
of analysed primary load cases if any of the primaries have been analysed non-linearly or if the
frame contains tension-only or compression-only members. In this case the combination load case
must be analysed.
You can modify the combination load case data and obtain new
results without re-analysing the structure, however this only applies to linear superposition
combinations. Results for analysed combinations are deleted if the combination load case data is
changed.
138
See also Combination load cases text.

See also Combination load cases.
139
Load case title data
Load case titles serve the purpose of creating clearer, more understandable output. Primary or
combination load cases may be given titles.
Case
Load case to have title defined.
Title
A description of the load case.
Notes
Notes that allow you to describe the load case in more detail.
See also Load case titles text.
140
Lumped mass data
Lumped masses are required to be input before a dynamic frequency analysis can
proceed.
Translational or rotational masses can be applied to any node along or about the global X,Y and Z
axis directions. If a mass is applied to a restrained degree of freedom then that mass is simply
ignored during the dynamic frequency analysis.
Masses may be applied in any load case and may be combined with static loads within the same
load case, although it is often a good idea to put masses in load cases of their own (ie. not in with
static loads) so that they can be isolated in graphics displays or output reports.
Case
Load case to contain lumped masses.
Node
Node to have masses applied.
X,Y and Z translational masses
Translational masses (global axes).
X,Y and Z rotational masses
Rotational masses (global axes).
The application of lumped masses
A mass that affects the natural frequencies of a structure must be applied in each of the
unrestrained directions of the node to which it is attached. For example, a 0.5 tonne machine
141

which is attached to a point on a building rafter has an inertia in each of the X, Y and Z directions
and effects the natural frequencies of the building in all three directions. It must therefore be
applied as 0.5 tonne X, Y and Z translational masses.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Lumped masses are not the same as loads and therefore cannot be calculated by simply
converting loads to mass units. Masses represent the structure and/or attachments to the structure
which move and rotate with it and which effect its natural frequencies. Some types of loads
would have to be input as lumped masses while others would not. For example, dead loads and
30-100% of live loads would normally affect the natural frequencies of a structure, however wind
loads would not.
The inertia of the structure could be modelled in one of the following two ways:
Translational masses
Consider a rigid floor slab. You could model the distribution of mass by placing a small
translational mass at each node in the slab (the sum of all node masses equalling the total mass of
the slab).
Translational and rotational masses
You could also model the rigid floor slab by lumping all of the translational mass and a rotational
mass at the centroid of the slab.
In the first approach, the rotational inertia would be provided by the action of each of the small
translational masses being a distance away from the centroid of the slab. In the second approach,
the rotational inertia would be provided directly by the rotational mass at the centroid of the slab.
It is usually more convenient and just as accurate to use the second approach.
The rotational mass for a point at the centroid of a rectangle is
[a
m
+ b2 ]
12
,
where m is the mass of the rectangle, and a and b are the dimensions of the rectangle.
The concept of rotational mass, together with formulae for calculating rotational masses at
various locations on rectangles and other shapes, is given in Clough and Penzien (10).
It is not necessary to manually input lumped masses for the self mass of the structure because self
mass can optionally be calculated and considered automatically during the dynamic frequency
analysis. Automatic self mass should, however be used with care, especially for large structures
due to the large number of masses it generates (2 or 3 masses per node). It is sometimes more
prudent to apply a small number of manually input lumped masses to simulate self mass rather
than allowing SPACE GASS to automatically attach small masses to every node. You can
drastically reduce the problem size and the analysis time by simulating the masses of a group of
142

members by a single mass (in each unrestrained direction) at the centroid of the group. The
reduction in accuracy of the results is minimal in most cases.
Automatic self mass generation does not calculate rotational masses because of the large number
of extra masses that would be generated for a fairly insignificant improvement in results
accuracy. If required, rotational self mass must be manually applied as rotational lumped masses.
For example, the self mass of a 2D multi-storey frame can be quite sufficiently approximated by
inputting only one horizontal translational mass per storey. Each storey mass would contain all of
the masses on that particular storey (slabs and beams) plus half of the mass of the columns and
walls on that storey and the storey below. Similarly, for a 3D multi-storey frame, each storey
would have two horizontal translational masses and one rotational mass (about a vertical axis).
This approach assumes that vertical vibrations are insignificant.
If a load case is to include automatic self mass only then you must input at least one lumped mass
so that the load case is recognised. The effect of the dummy lumped mass can be minimised by
either making it very small or by applying it to a restrained degree of freedom.
In order to adequately define the distribution of mass along members for which local vibrations
are important, it is sometimes necessary to add intermediate nodes (with masses applied) to such
members.
See also Lumped masses text.
See also Lumped masses.
See also Dynamic frequency analysis.
See also Running a dynamic frequency analysis.
143
Spectral load data
In order to perform a response spectrum analysis, you must first create one or more spectral load
cases. A spectral load case contains the number of a mass load case, a direction vector and a list
of mode shapes, each with its associated spectral curve and damping factor. Normally all mode
shapes in a spectral load case use the same spectral curve, however you can nominate different
spectral curves for each mode if desired. Spectral load cases can be combined and multiple
spectral load cases can be analysed simultaneously.
The mode shapes must have been calculated from a dynamic frequency analysis before
the response spectrum analysis can proceed.
Case
The spectral load case being created.
Mode
A mode shape being included in the spectral load case. Multiple mode shapes can be included in a
single spectral load case by simply inputting multiple entries (lines) with the same spectral load
case number. A particular mode shape can appear only once in each spectral load case.
Spectral curve
The name of the spectral curve to be used with the specified mode shape. Within a spectral load
case, each mode shape can have a different spectral curve if required.
Damping
The damping factor associated with the nominated spectral curve. This value is built into each
spectral curve when it was derived and cannot be changed. It is included in the datasheet for
display purposes only.
144
Mass case
The mass load case for which the specified mode shapes have been (or will be) calculated from a
dynamic frequency analysis.
Direction vector
Defines the direction of the ground vibration. For example, an earthquake acting in the X
direction would have a direction vector of Dx=1.0, Dy=0.0 and Dz=0.0.
145
Spectral curve editor
Select "Spectral load data" from the Loads menu and then click on the spectral curve editor
button that appears on the datasheet. The library editor will then be loaded and displayed as
follows:
You can select the desired spectral curve from the tree in the left-hand window and observe its
data values in the right-hand window. You can also click on the spectral curve editor button (next
to the Ok button) to load and display the spectral curve editor as shown below.
146
The spectral curve editor can be used to input or edit curves in the spectral curve library. Note,
however, that the standard curves supplied with SPACE GASS cant be changed. The editor
allows you to create a spectral curve that will result in the most accurate analysis possible.
Operation of the spectral curve editor is self-explanatory and simply involves selecting a curve
name and then inputting or modifying its properties. Each curve contains a set of period versus
acceleration pairs, a description and a damping factor.
You can go to a specific point in a curve by clicking near it in the graphics window or by
scrolling to and selecting it in the list box. The currently selected point in the list box is
highlighted by a small circle in the graphics window. You can add (or delete) points by clicking
on the buttons below the list box.
See also Standard Libraries for general information about the operation of the library editor.
147
Importing a spectral curve

You can import a spectral curve directly into the spectral curve editor by clicking on the "Import
curve" button in the spectral curve editor. When activated a dialogue appears prompting you for
the desired spectral curves text file. Select the appropriate file to continue with the import.
In order to successfully import a spectral curve into the spectral curve editor you must ensure that
you use the correct format in the text file.
The correct format is as follows:
Line 1
Description:Damping factor
Line 2
Line 3
period,acceleration
period,acceleration
{for point 1}
{for point 2}
Line 4
period,acceleration
{for point 3}
etc.
Line n
period,acceleration
{for point n-1}
Line n+1
period,acceleration
{for point n}
etc.
For example:
AS1170.4 S=1.0:5%
0.00,2.5
0.01,2.5
0.02,2.5
2.99,0.602276
3.00,0.600937
See also Spectral loads text.
See also Dynamic response analysis.
See also Running a dynamic response analysis.
148
Area loading data
Area loads are not a unique data type. The area loading function actually creates member
distributed forces. For more information see also Area loading and see also Member distributed
forces.
149
Text file input

Select "Import from text" or "Export to text" from the File menu
Inputting data into SPACE GASS via a text file is sometimes faster than using datasheet input,
however it is not as user friendly and is not recommended for first time users of SPACE GASS.
You can use Windows Notepad to edit or create text files. The text editor linked to SPACE GASS
can be started by choosing "Text editor" from the File menu.
SPACE GASS text file names have the form <name>.TXT, where <name> is any name. The text
file should be located in the text data folder as created during the installation procedure.
If a large proportion of the data for a job has to be modified and

you do not wish to use the normal editing facilities, the data can be put into a text file which can
then be edited using a word processor or text editor, and then imported back into SPACE GASS.
150
Text file format

Each data group in a SPACE GASS text file must be preceded by a title line. The title line
describes the type of data in the lines to follow. For example, the node data would be preceded by
"NODES". When reading text files the program uses only the first six characters of each title line,
therefore when creating text files you can abbreviate title lines to their first six characters.
It is possible to repeat data throughout the data file. Single items or whole groups can be repeated.
In such cases the last entry overrides any previous entries. For example, if node coordinates were
entered at the top of the file and then updated at the end, the last group would override the first.
This practice, however is not recommended.
Groups of data do not have to be input in any particular order. The program recognises the data
types by their title lines rather than their order of appearance.
Items within a line must be separated by commas.
Lines can be continued on the next line if they end with the "&" character.
The maximum length of a single line is 1024 characters.

The maximum length of a set of continued lines is 2048 characters.
Comment lines must begin with the "#" character.
Blank lines are permitted anywhere in the file.
Non-numeric items that contain commas must be enclosed in "quotes".
Real numbers in SPACE GASS text files no longer need to contain a decimal point.
Furthermore, all numbers in SPACE GASS text files can now be up to 15 digits long (they were
previously limited to 10 digits).
151
Initiator
Line 1:
Line 2:
SPACE GASS Text File - Version 900

UNITS LENGTH:Len, SECTION:SecProp, STRENGTH:MatStr,
DENSITY:Dens, TEMP:Temp, FORCE:Force, MOMENT:Mom,
MASS:Mass, ACC:Acc, TRANS:Trans, STRESS:Stress
Len
Length units (ft, in, m, cm or mm)
(Chars)
SecProp
MatStr
Section property units (ft, in, m, cm or mm)

(Chars)
Material strength units (Ksf, Psf, Ksi, Psi, MPa, kPa, Pa, (Chars)
kg/m^2, kg/cm^2, kg/mm^2)
Dens
Mass density units (K/ft^3, K/in^3, lb/ft^3, lb/in^3, T/m^3, (Chars)
Temp
T/cm^3, T/mm^3, kg/m^3, kg/cm^3, kg/mm^3)

Temperature units (Fahrenheit, Celsius)
(Chars)
Force
Force units (K, lb, kN, N, kg)
(Chars)
Mom
Moment units (Kft, Kin, lbft, lbin, kNm, kNcm, kNmm, (Chars)
Mass
Nm, Ncm, Nmm, kgm, kgcm, kgmm)

Mass units (K, lb, T, kg)
(Chars)
Acc
Acceleration units (g's, ft/sec^2, in/sec^2, m/sec^2,
(Chars)
cm/sec^2, mm/sec^2, kN/kg)

Trans
Stress
Translation units (ft, in, m, cm, mm)

Stress units (Ksf, Psf, Ksi, Psi, MPa, kPa, Pa,
(Chars)
(Chars)
kg/m^2, kg/cm^2, kg/mm^2)

See also Units.
152
Headings text
Line 1:
Line 2:
HEADINGS
Project
Line 3:
Job
Line 4:
Designer
Line 5:
Notes
Project
Project description
(50 Char)
Job
Job description
(50 Char)
Designer
Notes
Designers initials
Job notes
(3 Char)
(1024 Char)
If any of the heading lines have no data then they should be entered as just a pair of quotes (eg.
"") rather than just being a blank line.
See also Headings.
153
Nodes text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
NODES
Nd,X,Y,Z,Gen1,Ndi1,Rot,Ai,Xi1,Yi1,Zi1,
Gen2,Ndi2,Xi2,Yi2,Zi2
Nd
X
Node number
X coordinate
(Integer)
(Real)
Y coordinate
(Real)
Z coordinate
(Real)
Gen1
Ndi1
# of 1st order nodes to be generated

1st order node number increment
(Integer)
(Integer)
Rot
Axis of rot. for arc or helix generation (X/Y/Z)
(1 Char)
Ai
Angle increment for arc or helix generation
(Real)
Xi1
Yi1
1st order X increment

1st order Y increment
(Real)
(Real)
Zi1
1st order Z increment
(Real)
Gen2
Ndi2
# of 2nd order nodes to be generated

2nd order node number increment
(Integer)
(Integer)
Xi2
2nd order X increment
(Real)
Yi2
2nd order Y increment
(Real)
Zi2
2nd order Z increment
(Real)
For straight line generation, Ai should be zero. For arc or helix generation, Rot is the axis of
rotation, Ai is the angle increment and Xi1, Yi1, Zi1 are the centre of rotation and the helix
length increment. For example, if a helix is generated about the Y-axis, then Yi1 is the helix
length increment. For arc generation the helix length increment is 0.
Rot choices are "X"=X-axis, "Y"=Y-axis, "Z"=Z-axis.
See also Nodes.
154
Members text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
MEMBERS
Mb,DirAng,DirNode,DirAxis,Type,Na,Nb,Sp,Mp,Fa,Fb,
Ya,SZa,SYb,SZb,Cab,Gen1,Mbi1,Nai1,Nbi1,Gen2,
Mbi2,Nai2,Nbi2
Mb
Member number
(Integer)
DirAng
DirNode
Direction angle
Direction node
(Real)
(Integer)
DirAxis
Direction axis
(2 Char)
Type
Member type (N/T/C/A)
(1 Char)
Na
Nb
Node number A
Node number B
(Integer)
(Integer)
Sp
Section property number
(Integer)
Mp
Material property number
(Integer)
Fa
Fb
Node A fixity (F/R/S)

Node B fixity (F/R/S)
(6 Char)
(6 Char)
SYa
Y rotational stiffness at node a
(Real)
SZa
Z rotational stiffness at node a
(Real)
Syb
SZb
Y rotational stiffness at node b

Y rotational stiffness at node b
(Real)
(Real)
Cab
Cable length
(Real)
Gen1
# of 1st order members to be generated
(Integer)
Mbil
Nail
1st order member number increment

1st order node A increment
(Integer)
(Integer)
Nbil
1st order node B increment
(Integer)
Gen2
# of 2nd order members to be generated
(Integer)
Mbi2
2nd order member number increment
(Integer)
Nai2
2nd order node A increment
(Integer)
Nbi2
2nd order node B increment
(Integer)
Type choices are "N"=Normal, "T"=Tension-only, "C"=Compression-only, "A"=Cable.

Fa, Fb choices are "F"=Fixed, "R"=Released. "S"=Spring can also be used for the y and z
rotational fixities.
155

See also Members.
156
Node restraints text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
RESTRAINTS
Nd,Rs,Gr,Gen,Ndi,Ax,Ay,Az,Rx,Ry,Rz
Nd
Node number
(Integer)
Rs
Gr
Restraint code (F/R/D/S)

General restraint (Y/N)
(6 Char)
(1 Char)
Gen
# of restrained nodes
(Integer)
Ndi
Node number increment
(Integer)
Ax
Ay
X axial spring stiffness

Y axial spring stiffness
(Real)
(Real)
Az
Z axial spring stiffness
(Real)
Rx
X rotational spring stiffness
(Real)
Ry
Rz
Y rotational spring stiffness

Z rotational spring stiffness
(Real)
(Real)
Rs choices are "F"=Fixed, "R"=Released, "D"=Deleted, "S"=Spring.

Gr choices are "Y"=General restraint, " " or "N"=Normal restraint.
157
Section properties text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
SECTIONS
Sp,Secn,Lib,Ast,Mark,Flip,Ar,Ix,Iy,Iz,Ay,Az,
Pa,Scs
The following extra line is required whenever Scs is "R", "C", "T", "L" or "I".
Dpth,Wdth,Fw,Ft,Hf
Sp
Secn
Section property number

Section name
(Integer)
(15 Char)
Lib
Section library name
(8 Char)
Ast
Angle section type (A/S/L/X)
(1 Char)
Mark
Flip
Section mark
Section flipped (Y/N)
(5 Char)
(1 Char)
Ar
Area of section
(Real)
Ix
Iy
Torsion constant
Y moment of inertia
(Real)
(Real)
Iz
Z moment of inertia
(Real)
Ay
Y shear area
(Real)
Az
Pa
Z shear area
Principal angle
(Real)
(Real)
Scs
Standard shape (R/C/T/L/I)
(1 Char)
Dpth
Overall depth or diameter
(Real)
Wdth
Overall width or web width
(Real)
Fw
Flange width if T-beam or L-beam
(Real)
Ft
Flange thickness if T-beam or L-beam
(Real)
Hf
Height to bot. of flange if T-beam or L-beam
(Real)
Ast choices are " "=Not an angle section, "A"=Single angle, "S"=Double angle with short legs
connected, "L"=Double angle with long legs connected, "X"=Double starred angle.
Flip choices are "Y"=Flipped, " " or "N"=Not flipped.
Scs choices are " "=Not a standard shape, "R"=Rectangle, "C"=Circle, "T"=T-beam, "L"=Left Lbeam, "I"=Right L-beam. If Scs is blank, the section is assumed to come from Ar, Ix, Iy, Iz, Ay,
Az and Pa.
158
159
Material properties text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
MATERIALS
Mp,Matl,E,Pr,D,T,Fc
Mp
Material property number
(Integer)
Matl
Lib
Material name
Material library name
(15 Char)
(8 Char)
Youngs modulus
(Real)
Pr
Poissons ratio
(Real)
D
T
Mass density
Coefficient of thermal expansion
(Real)
(Real)
Fc
Characteristic concrete strength
(Real)
160
Master-slave constraints text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
CONSTRAINTS
Sn,Mn,Cc,Gen,Si,Mi
Sn
Slave node number
(Integer)
Mn
Cc
Master node number

Constraint code (F/R)
(Integer)
(6 Char)
Gen
# of slave nodes to be generated
(Integer)
Si
Slave node number increment
(Integer)
Mi
Master node number increment
(Integer)
Cc choices are "F"=Fixed, "R"=Released.

161
Member offset text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
OFFSETS
Mb,Ax,Dxa,Dya,Dza,Dxb,Dyb,Dzb
Mb
Member number
(Integer)
Ax
Dxa
Axes system (L/G)

Member offset from A along x-axis
(1 Char)
(Real)
Dya
Member offset from A along y-axis
(Real)
Dza
Member offset from A along z-axis
(Real)
Dxb
Dyb
Member offset from B along x-axis

Member offset from B along y-axis
(Real)
(Real)
Dzb
Member offset from B along z-axis
(Real)
Ax choices are "L"=Local, "G"=Global.

162
Node loads text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
NODELOADS
Lc,Nd,Fx,Fy,Fz,Mx,My,Mz,Gen,Ndi
Lc
Load case number
(Integer)
Nd
Fx
Node number
X force
(Integer)
(Real)
Fy
Y force
(Real)
Fz
Z force
(Real)
Mx
My
X moment
Y moment
(Real)
(Real)
Mz
Z moment
(Real)
Gen
# of loaded nodes to be generated
(Integer)
Ndi
(Integer)
See also Node loads.
163
Prescribed node displacements text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
NODEDISPS
Lc,Nd,Tx,Ty,Tz,Rx,Ry,Rz,Gen,Ndi
Lc
Load case number
(Integer)
Nd
Tx
Node number
X translation
(Integer)
(Real)
Ty
Y translation
(Real)
Tz
Z translation
(Real)
Rx
Ry
X rotation
Y rotation
(Real)
(Real)
Rz
Z rotation
(Real)
Gen
# of displaced nodes to be generated
(Integer)
Ndi
(Integer)
See also Prescribed node displacements.
164
Member concentrated loads text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
MEMBCONC
Lc,Mb,Sl,Ax,Un,Ps,Fx,Fy,Fz,Mx,My,Mz,
Gen1,Mbi,Gen2,Sli,Psi
Lc
Mb
Load case number

Member number
(Integer)
(Integer)
Sl
Sub load number
(Integer)
Ax
Axes system (L/G)
(1 Char)
Un
Ps
Units system (A/%)

Load position
(1 Char)
(Real)
Fx
X force
(Real)
Fy
Y force
(Real)
Fz
Mx
Z force
X moment
(Real)
(Real)
My
Y moment
(Real)
Mz
Gen1
Z moment
# of loaded members to be generated
(Real)
(Integer)
Mbi
Member number increment
(Integer)
Gen2
# of loads per member to be generated
(Integer)
Sli
Psi
Sub load number increment

Load position increment
(Integer)
(Real)
Ax choices are "L"=Local, "G"=Global.

Un choices are "A"=Actual, "%"=Percentage.
See also Member concentrated loads.
165
Member distributed forces text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
MEMBFORCES
Lc,Mb,Sl,Ax,Un,St,Fi,Xs,Xf,Ys,Yf,Zs,Zf,
Gen,Mbi
Lc
Mb
Load case number

Member number
(Integer)
(Integer)
Sl
Sub load number
(Integer)
Ax
Axes system (L/G/A)
(1 Char)
Un
St
Units system (A/%)

Start position
(1 Char)
(Real)
Fi
Finish position
(Real)
Xs
X start force
(Real)
Xf
Ys
X finish force
Y start force
(Real)
(Real)
Yf
Y finish force
(Real)
Zs
Zf
Z start force
Z finish force
(Real)
(Real)
Gen
# of loaded members to be generated
(Integer)
Mbi
(Integer)
Ax choices are "L"=Local, "G"=Global-projected, "A"=Global-inclined.

See also Member distributed forces.
166
Member distributed torsions text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
MEMBTORSION
Lc,Mb,Sl,Un,St,Fi,Ts,Tf,Gen,Mbi
Lc
Load case number
(Integer)
Mb
Sl
Member number
Sub load number
(Integer)
(Integer)
Un
Units system (A/%)
(1 Char)
St
Start position
(Real)
Fi
Ts
Finish position
Start torsion
(Real)
(Real)
Tf
Finish torsion
(Real)
Gen
# of torsion loads to be generated
(Integer)
Mbi
Member # increment
(Integer)

See also Member distributed torsions.
167
Thermal/Prestress loads text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
THERMAL
Lc,Mb,T,P,Gen,Mbi
Lc
Load case number
(Integer)
Mb
T
Member number
Temperature change
(Integer)
(Real)
Prestress force
(Real)
Gen
# of thermal loads to be generated
(Integer)
Mbi
Member # increment
(Integer)
See also Thermal/prestress loads.
168
Self weight text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
SELFWEIGHT
Lc,Ax,Ay,Az
Lc
Load case number
(Integer)
Ax
Ay
X acceleration
Y acceleration
(Real)
(Real)
Az
Z acceleration
(Real)
See also Self weight.
169
Combination load cases text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
COMBINATIONS
Cc,Pc,Mf
Cc
Combination load case number
(Integer)
Lc
Mf
Load case number (primary or combination)

Multiplying factor
(Integer)
(Real)
170
Load case titles text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
TITLES
Lc,Title
Lc
Load case number
(Integer)
Title
Notes
Load case title

Load case notes
(50 Char)
(255 Char)
See also Load case titles.
171
Lumped masses text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
LUMPEDMASS
Lc,Nd,Tx,Ty,Tz,Rx,Ry,Rz,Gen,Ndi
Lc
Load case number
(Integer)
Nd
Tx
Node number
X translational mass
(Integer)
(Real)
Ty
Y translational mass
(Real)
Tz
Z translational mass
(Real)
Rx
Ry
X rotational mass
Y rotational mass
(Real)
(Real)
Rz
Z rotational mass
(Real)
Gen
# of loaded nodes to be generated
(Integer)
Ndi
(Integer)
172
Spectral loads text
Line 1:
Next n lines:
SPECTRAL
Lc,Ms,Sc,Mc,Dx,Dy,Dz
Lc
Load case number
(Integer)
Ms
Sc
Mode shape
Spectral curve name
(Integer)
(50 Char)
Mc
Mass case
(Integer)
Dx
X direction vector
(Real)
Dy
Dz
Y direction vector
Z direction vector
(Real)
(Real)
See also Spectral loads.
173
Steel member design text
Line 1:
STEELMEMBERS
Next n lines: GNum,Title,MList,SGrade,Units,LoadHt,LSC,CalcLc,Lcx,Lcy,
CalcLb,Lb+,Lb-,TopPos,TopRest,BotPos,BotRest,Swayx,Swayy,
Ast,EndCon,EccEffect,Criteria,Bolts,Dia,Gen,Gi,Mi
GNum
Title
Group number
Group title
(Integer)
(50 Char)
MList
List of analysis members in the group
(50 Integer)
SGrade
Strength grade (N/H)
(1 Char)
Units
LoadHt
Units system (A/R)

Load height position (C/T)
(1 Char)
(1 Char)
LSC
Library scan code
(4 Char)
CalcLc
Calculate Lcx and Lcy (Y/N)
(1 Char)
Lcx
Lcy
Major axis compression effective length

Minor axis compression effective length
(Real)
(Real)
CalcLb
Calculate Lb+ and Lb- (Y/N)
(1 Char)
Lb+
Positive bending effective length
(Real)
LbTopPos
Negative bending effective length

List of restraint positions (intermediate only)
on top flange
List of restraint types (end and intermediate)
on top flange
(Real)
(30 Real)
BotPos
List of restraint positions (intermediate only)

on bottom flange
(30 Real)
BotRest
List of restraint types (end and intermediate)

on bottom flange
(32 Char)
Swayx
X-axis sidesway (Y/N)
(1 Char)
Swayy
Y-axis sidesway (Y/N)
(1 Char)
Ast
Angle section type (A/S/L/X)
(1 Char)
EndCon
End connection type (C/F/W/S/L)
(1 Char)
EccEffect
Consider eccentric effects (Y/N)
(1 Char)
Criteria
Bolts
Design criteria (W/D)

(1 Char)
Maximum number of bolts in cross section (0=Welded) (Integer)
Dia
Bolt diameter
(Integer)
Gen
Number of groups to be generated
(Integer)
Gi
Group number increment
(Integer)
TopRest
(32 Char)
174

Mi
(Integer)
MList can now include dashes. For example, members 3,4,5,6,7,8 could be listed as 3-8.
SGrade choices are "N"=Normal strength, "H"=High strength.
Units choices are "A"=Actual, "R"=Ratio.
LoadHt choices are "C"=Shear centre or below, "T"=Top flange.
CalcLc choices are "Y"=Calculate Lcx and Lcy from a buckling analysis, "N"=Use the input
values of Lcx and Lcy.
CalcLb choices are "Y"=Calculate Lb+ and Lb- from the flange restraints, "N"=Use the input
values of Lb+ and Lb-.
TopPos and BotPos are lists of the intermediate flange restraint positions which can include @
multipliers but not dashes. For example, restraint positions 1.2,3.0,4.8,6.6,8.4,10.2,11.4 could be
listed as 1.2,5@1.8,1@1.2 or 1.2,5@1.8,11.4.
TopRest and BotRest must be a string of characters without commas, dashes or @s. For
example FLLPLR.
Swayx and Swayy choices are "Y"=Sidesway occurs, "N"=Sidesway prevented.
Ast choices are "A"=Single angle, "S"=Double angle with short legs connected, "L"=Double
angle with long legs connected, "X"=Double starred angle. Ast is only considered if the section is
an angle section.
EndCon choices are "C"=Centroid, "F"=Flange, "W"=Web, "S"=Angle short leg, "L"=Angle
long leg.
EccEffect choices are "Y"=Consider end connection eccentric effects, "N"=Ignore eccentric
effects.
Criteria choices are "W"=Use weight design criteria, "D"=Use depth design criteria.
See also Steel member design data.
175
Steel connection design text
Line 1:
STEELCONNECT
Next n lines: CNum,Title,Supporting,SupportedA,SupportedB,
CTypeA,CTypeB,BProcA,BProcB,HLenA,HDepthA,
HLenB,HDepthB,SGBolt,SGWeld,SGPlate,SGCleat,
SGMember,Gauge,Pitch,BLen,Wrench,HType,BRows,
Threads,BATF,WCatC,WCatS,WType,Align
Cnum
Connection number
(Integer)
Title
Connection title
Supporting Supporting member number
(50 Char)
(Integer)
SupportedA Side A supported member number
(Integer)
SupportedB Side B supported member number
(Integer)
CTypeA
CTypeB
Side A connection type

Side B connection type
(Integer)
(Integer)
BProcA
Side A procedure (F/B/S)
(1 Char)
BProcB
HLenA
Side B procedure (F/B/S)

Side A haunch length (0=No haunch)
(1 Char)
(Real)
HDepthA
Side A haunch depth (0=Maximum depth)
(Real)
HLenB
Side B haunch length (0=No haunch)
(Real)
HDepthB
SGBolt
Side B haunch depth (0=Maximum depth)

Bolt strength grade (N/H)
(Real)
(1 Char)
SGWeld
Weld strength grade (N/H)
(1 Char)
SGPlate
Plate strength grade (N/H)
(1 Char)
SGCleat
Cleat/seat strength grade (N/H)
(1 Char)
SGMember Member strength grade (N/H)
(1 Char)
Gauge
Bolt gauge
(Real)
Pitch
Bolt pitch
(Real)
BLen
Wrench
Stiff seat bearing length (0=Calculate)

Wrench type (A/H)
(Real)
(1 Char)
HType
Hole type (S/O/L)
(1 Char)
BRows
Preferred number of bolt rows (0=Calculate)
(Integer)
Threads
Include threads in shear plane (Y/N)
(1 Char)
BATF
Allow bolts above top flange (Y/N)
(1 Char)
WCatC
Weld category for connection (G/S)
(1 Char)
WCatS
Weld category for stiffeners (G/S)
(1 Char)
176

WType
Align
Weld type for flanges (F/B)

Member alignment (T/C/B)
(1 Char)
(1 Char)
CtypeA and CtypeB can be selected from the following list.

1. Bolted end plate
2. Bolted apex
3. Welded moment
4. Flexible end plate
5. Web side plate
6. Bearing pad (Top)
7. Bearing pad (Bottom)
8. Pinned baseplate
9. Angle seat (Bolted)
10. Stiff seat (End)
11. Stiff seat (Internal)
12. Single angle cleat
13. Double angle cleat
14. Angle seat (Welded)
15. Moment baseplate
16. Welded apex
BProcA and BProcB choices are "F"=Friction, "B"=Bearing, "S"=Snug.
SGBolt, SGWeld, SGPlate, SGCleat, SGMember choices are "N"=Normal, "H"=High.
Wrench choices are "A"=Air, "H"=Hand.
HType choices are "S"=Standard, "O"=Oversize or short slotted, "L"=Long slotted.
Threads choices are "Y"=Threads in shear plane, "N"=Threads not in shear plane.
BATF choices are "Y"=Bolts allowed above top flange, "N"=Bolts not allowed above top flange.
WCatC, WCatS choices are "G"=General purpose, "S"=Structural purpose.
WType choices are "F"=Fillet, "B"=Butt.
177

Align choices are "T"=Top, "C"=Centre, "B"=Bottom.
See also Steel connection design data.
178
Terminator
Line 1:
END
179
Text file errors

Error messages which may occur while a text file is being read by SPACE GASS are as follows.
Illegal or missing numeric value
Essential real or integer numeric value has been omitted or is beyond the problem size limits.
Illegal data encountered
Unexpected data type was encountered (eg. integer instead of real).
Title line not recognised
Incorrect data group title has been detected (eg. NEDES instead of NODES).
Generation data out of limits
Items to be generated would exceed the problem size limits. Change the generation data or choose
"Problem size limits" from the Config menu and increase the limits.
Illegal or missing character
Illegal character detected or expected character not found.
Maximum limit exceeded
One of the problem size limits has been exceeded. Choose "Problem size limits" from the Config
menu and increase the limits.
Library not found
The standard sections or materials library cannot be found.
Wrong format library
The standard sections or materials library is in an invalid or old format and cannot be read.
Section or material not found
Specified section or material name cannot be found in specified library.
Demonstration version limit exceeded
The demonstration version of the program allows only 1 section property, 1 material property, 5
steel design groups, and 1 steel design connection.
Not a valid SPACE GASS text file
180

The file does not have a valid SPACE GASS text file format or the first line does not indicate that
it is SPACE GASS data.
Restraint positions are not in ascending order
The intermediate flange restraint positions must be in ascending order.
Restraint positions do not match types
The number of intermediate flange restraint positions must match the number of restraint types
less the two end restraint types. Each use of an @ multiplier in a restraint positions list must have
only one corresponding restraint type.
L or C restraint is ineffective
A Lateral restraint type must have Full or Partial restraint types between it and the end of the
design group on both sides to be effective. A Continuous restraint type must be between Full,
Partial or Lateral restraint types to be effective.
Ignored segments must be at ends
You have specified an ignored segment at an intermediate position along the group. Segments to
be ignored must be at either or both ends of the group only.
Require intermediate restraint positions only
Restraint positions should be specified for the intermediate restraints only. SPACE GASS already
knows the positions of the restraints at the ends of the group.
100 members per design group limit exceeded
A steel member design group cannot contain more than 100 members.
100 cases per combination limit exceeded
A combination load case cannot contain more than 100 primary load cases.
100 flange restraints limit exceeded
A steel member design group cannot contain more than 100 flange restraints per flange.
No members in steel design group
A steel member design group must consist of at least one analysis member.
Restraint position exceeds maximum distance
A flange restraint has been positioned beyond the length of the steel member design group.
Illegal or missing restraint type
181

An illegal character has been detected in the steel member design restraint types field or the
restraint type is missing.
Comma is missing
A list of numbers is missing a comma.
There must be a value between separators
A list of values has two adjacent commas, dashes or @s.
Too many values in list
A list of numbers contains too many values.
Cannot use "-" range in this data field
You are not permitted to use dashes in this list of integers.
Cannot use "@" multiplier in this data field
You are not permitted to use @s in this list of numbers.
Multiplier must be an integer
The number before an @ in a list of numbers must be an integer.
Cannot have a repeated member
The same member has been referenced twice in a single connection.
Must have at least one supported member
All connection types require at least one supported member.
An apex connection must be the same on both sides
If you have specified one side of a connection to be an apex then you must use exactly the same
connection type for the other side.
An internal stiff seat must be the same on both sides
If you have specified one side of a connection to be an internal stiff seat then you must use
exactly the same connection type for the other side.
This connection requires two supported members
Apex and internal stiff seat connections require two supported members.
This connection requires only one supported member
182

Baseplate connections must have only one supported member. It doesnt matter whether the
supported member is specified as side A or side B.
This connection requires a supporting member
A supporting member is always required (except for apex, stiff seat or baseplate).
This connection requires no supporting member
Apex and baseplate connections cannot have a supporting member.
No connection type specified
You have not specified a valid connection type for one of the supported members.
Supported member not specified
You have not specified a supported member for one of the connection types.
Invalid bolting procedure for connection type
A snug bolting procedure cannot be used in bolted end plate, apex or moment baseplate
connections, use bearing or friction bolting procedures.
Haunches are only for B.E.P, welded moment or apex
Haunches are supported only in bolted end plate, apex and welded moment connections.
Invalid bolt strength for bolting procedure specified
Normal strength bolts cannot be tensioned for bearing or friction bolting procedures. Use high
strength bolts.
Stiff seat bearing length required
Because you have not specified a supporting member for the stiff seat connection, the bearing
length cannot be calculated by SPACE GASS. Specify a supporting member or a stiff seat
bearing length (or both).
Cannot have fillet weld for welded apex connection
Welded apex connections require butt welds for the flanges.
Must have the same bolting procedure on each side
You must specify the same bolting procedure on both sides of an apex or internal stiff seat
connection.
Cannot have a haunch on only one side of an apex
183

If you have specified a haunch on one side of an apex connection then you must also specify a
haunch on the other side.
Must have the same haunch depth on each side of an apex
Apex connections require the same haunch depth on both sides.
184
Text file example

The following sample text file contains all of the data for the worked example used in the
appendices at the end of this manual.
SPACE GASS Text File - Version 900
UNITS LENGTH:m, SECTION:m, STRENGTH:kPa, DENSITY:T/m^3, TEMP:Celsius, &

FORCE:kN, MOMENT:kNm, MASS:T, ACC:m/sec^2, TRANS:m, STRESS:kPa
HEADINGS
"SPACE GASS Worked Example"
"25m Single Span Portal Frame"
"PS"
""
NODES
1,0.000,0.000
2,0.000,3.750
3,0.000,7.500
4,1.630,7.585
5,3.260,7.671
6,6.250,7.828
7,12.500,8.155
8,18.750,7.828
9,21.740,7.671
10,23.370,7.585
11,25.000,7.500
12,25.000,3.750
13,25.000,0.000
MEMBERS
1,0.00,0,
,N,1, 2,1,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
2,0.00,0,
3,0.00,0,
4,0.00,0,
5,0.00,0,
6,0.00,0,
7,0.00,0,
8,0.00,0,
9,0.00,0,
,N,9,10,4,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
10,0.00,0,
11,0.00,0,
12,0.00,0,
RESTRAINTS
1,FFDDDR
2,RRDDDR,Y
13,FFDDDR
SECTIONS
1,"530 UB 92","AUST250", ,"C1"
185

2,"360 UB 51","AUST250", ,"R1"
3,"360 UB 51-A","", ,"HNCH ",N,0.10773E-01,0.472E-06,0.14524E-04,0.63586E-03
4,"360 UB 51-B","", ,"S4
",N,0.96446E-02,0.472E-06,0.14519E-04,0.36376E-03
MATERIALS
1,"STEEL","METRIC"
NODELOADS
2,7,0.0,-4.5
MEMBFORCES
1,3,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,4,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,5,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,6,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,7,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,8,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,9,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,10,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
2,3,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,4,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,5,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,6,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,7,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,8,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,9,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,10,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
3,1,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,6.300,6.300,0.0,0.0
3,2,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,6.300,6.300,0.0,0.0
3,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,6,1,L,A,0.0,1.7410,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,6,2,L,A,1.7410,6.2590,0.0,0.0,3.600,3.600
3,7,1,L,A,0.0,3.4820,0.0,0.0,3.600,3.600
3,7,2,L,A,3.4820,6.2590,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,11,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,4.500,4.500,0.0,0.0
3,12,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,4.500,4.500,0.0,0.0
4,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
4,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
4,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
4,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
5,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
186

5,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
6,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
7,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
SELFWEIGHT
1,0.0,-9.807E-03,0.0
COMBINATIONS
10,1,1.25
10,2,1.50
11,1,0.80
11,3,1.00
11,6,1.00
12,1,1.25
12,3,1.00
12,6,-0.96
13,1,0.80
13,4,1.00
13,7,1.00
14,1,1.25
14,5,1.00
14,7,-6.50
187
TITLES
1,Dead load (DL)
2,Live load including 4.5kN at ridge (LL)
3,Cross wind (CW)
4,Longitudinal wind at first internal frame (LW1)
5,Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
6,Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
7,Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
10,1.25DL+1.5LL
11,0.8DL+CW+IPCW
12,1.25DL+CW+ISCW
13,0.8DL+LW1+IPLW
14,1.25DL+LW2+ISLW
STEELMEMBERS
1,"","1,2",N,A,C,A
,N,20.0,1.7,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.2,2.4,3.6,5.3,7",RLLLLFIF,"",RF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
2,"","5,6",N,A,C,A
,N,12.517,1.2,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.3,2.5,3.7,4.9,6.1,7.3,8.1",RLLLLLLLF,"4.9",RLF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
3,"","8,7",N,A,C,A
,N,12.517,1.2,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.3,2.5,3.7,4.9,6.1,7.3,8.1",RLLLLLLLF,"4.9",RLF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
4,"","12,11",N,A,C,A
,N,20.0,1.7,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.2,2.4,3.6,5.3,7",RLLLLFIF,"",RF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
STEELCONNECT
1,"Left baseplate",0,1,0,8,0,S,S,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
2,"Left eave",2,0,3,0,1,S,B,0.0,0.0,3.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
6,"Bolted apex",0,6,7,2,2,B,B,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
11,"Right eave",11,10,0,3,0,S,S,3.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
12,"Right baseplate",0,0,12,0,8,S,S,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
END
188
Structure wizard
Click on the "Structure wizard" toolbar button or select "Structure wizard" from the Structure
menu.
Once initiated, a dialogue with a set of standard structure buttons is displayed as follows.
Structure wizard input provides a very fast means of inputting data into SPACE GASS for
structures that conform generally to one of the standard structures shown above.
The structure wizard input method can still be used for structures
which dont conform exactly to the structures shown above. In such cases it can be used to input
the basic structure and then modified by one of the other data entry methods. For example, a
portal frame with its apex off centre could be initially input as a symmetrical portal frame using
189

the structure wizard and then modified graphically by moving the apex node to its correct
location.
Once a structure has been selected, a structure specific dialogue is opened which allows you to
input basic data relating to the frame geometry, supports, pattern loads, etc. SPACE GASS will
then generate the structure, and apply any pattern loading, automatically.
The input dialogue for a single bay portal frame is shown below.
All of the structure wizard dialogues are similar to each other in their operation and are quite selfexplanatory, however the input of section and material properties may require some further
explanation. You can see from the following dialogue that the current selections for material,
rafter section, column section, etc. are shown on the left-hand side. They can be changed by
clicking on the appropriate radio button and then making the necessary changes in the selection
boxes on the right-hand side.
190
191
Datasheet input
Click on the "Datasheet" toolbar button to open the datasheet selection menu as follows, or select
one of the datasheet items from the Structure, Loads or Design menus.
Datasheet input is the one of the most useful methods of entering data into SPACE GASS. All
types of frame and steel design data can be input or edited via a datasheet.
192
Using datasheets
All datasheets have the same format, appearing in a grid format like a spreadsheet. The members
datasheet is shown below.
Common datasheets operations

Sorting the data on any
column
Click on the column heading to sort on. Further

clicks cause the sorting to alternate between
ascending and descending order.
Frozen key columns
Allows you to scroll the main data sideways

without scrolling the key columns so that you
can always see which row you are working on.
In the members datasheet, the "Member"
column is the key column.
Multi-row editing
Possibly one of the most useful datasheet editing

features! It allows you to edit multiple rows of
data simultaneously. The procedure is as
follows:
1. Select the rows to be edited by clicking on
the buttons at the left end of the rows, using
the CTRL or SHIFT keys to highlight
multiple rows (see "Selecting rows" below).
2. Move in any highlighted row to the column
you want to edit.
3. Click the right mouse button.
193

4. Enter your data and click on the Ok button.
5. All the highlighted rows will be updated.
6. Go back to step 2 above to edit another
column.
Split screen
Move to the small black bar just to the left of the

horizontal scroll arrow, click and drag it to the
right to introduce and position a vertical split
screen division.
Editing existing data
Move to the desired cell using the keyboard or

mouse and then type in or select the desired
data.
Entering new data
Move to the bottom (blank) row and then type in

or select the desired data.
Combo boxes
To edit combo box cells, either click on the

arrow and then make your selection or just use
the keyboard arrow keys to move to the combo
box cell and then type the first character of the
desired selection. For example, to change a
Yes/No combo box to Yes, just move to the cell
and then type Y.
Selecting rows
Click on the button to the left of the row to be

selected.
You can select multiple rows by:
1. Dragging up or down the selection buttons.
2. Selecting one row, holding down the CTRL
key and then selecting additional rows.
3. Selecting one row, holding down the SHIFT
key and then clicking on another selection
button to select all the rows in between.
Alternatively, you can click on the blank button
at the top-left corner of the datasheet to select all
the rows.
Cutting, copying and pasting
Cut or copy selected rows from a datasheet to

any other Windows program or paste from
another Windows program into a datasheet.
194

Deleting rows
Select the rows to be deleted and then press the

Delete key or click on the datasheets delete
button or click the right mouse button and select
Delete from the menu that appears.
Special buttons
Special buttons on some of the datasheets allow

you to quickly change specific data in the
current row. For example, the special fixity
buttons in the members datasheet (shown left)
let you choose commonly used fixity codes
without having to type them in.
Counter
A counter at the bottom-right corner of the

datasheet tells you how many rows of data are in
the datasheet.
Generation
The generate button on some datasheets allows

you to generate a number of extra items
(members, nodes, etc.).
When you click on the generate button you will
be presented with a generation dialogue which
varies for each type of input. Most of the
generation dialogues are self-explanatory,
however some of them employ 2nd order
generation which is explained below.
Generation
195
The above node generation dialogue box allows you to generate items along two axes at once. It
can also be used to generate extra series at different levels (ie. the 2nd order).
Consider the following 20 node grid in the XY plane. It could have been created by inputting the
coordinates for node 1 then generating four 1st order nodes (5,9,13 & 17) along a line with a node
increment of 4 and X increment of 2.4, followed by three 2nd order rows of nodes with a node
increment of 1 and a Y increment of -1.5.
Grid of generated nodes
196

If only 1st order generation is required, you should specify zero for the number of 2nd order items
to be generated.
The node generation dialogue box also has the unique ability to generate nodes along a line, arc
or helix.
The axis of rotation, which only applies to an arc or helix, defines the point about which the
nodes will be generated. The angle increment causes the nodes to be generated at some regular
angle increment.
The helix length increment defines a regular increment along a parametric path at which the
nodes will be generated.
2nd order generation is also employed in the member and member concentrated load datasheets.
Renumbering data
Any data can be renumbered by simply changing its number in a datasheet. However, be careful,
because related data in other datasheets will not be automatically renumbered to match. A better
way to renumber nodes or members is to use the graphics renumber tool. It not only lets you
renumber large groups of nodes and members effortlessly, it also adjusts all of the restraints,
constraints, loads, and design data automatically to allow for the new numbering sequence (see
also Renumber).
A convenient way to quickly move around and edit numeric cells

in a datasheet is to use the keyboard arrow keys to move to the desired cell, type the new data,
then use the keyboard arrow keys to move to the next cell. You do not have to press ENTER to
accept the new data.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
When you use a datasheet to renumber items, none of the other data which may reference the
renumbered items is adjusted. You must do this yourself or use the renumber tool instead (as
explained above).
See also Analysis data.
197
Graphics
This chapter describes all of the graphics editing and display facilities as well as revealing how
they can be used to maximum advantage.
The graphics display area in the main SPACE GASS window is the central focus of the program
and is constantly updated to always show the current state of the structural model.
The graphics display area is used to:
Input or edit the frame, loads, or design data graphically.
Display the frame, loading diagrams, displacement diagrams, bending moment diagrams,
shear force diagrams, axial force diagrams, torsion diagrams, reactions, stress diagrams,
envelopes, dynamic mode shapes, steel connection drawings, restraints, hinges, constraints,
axes, section shapes, etc. graphically.
The graphics editor is the most powerful of the five data entry methods currently available in
SPACE GASS (see also Analysis data). It is just like a 3D CAD system, but with the added
intelligence of knowing that it is dealing with a structure made up of nodes and members rather
than just lines in a drawing.
One of the great advantages of inputting a structure graphically is that you can see exactly what is
happening at all times. If you make a mistake, the mistake becomes immediately obvious and you
can correct it straight away.
Many structures such as trusses, building frames, grillages,

towers, etc. can be generated very quickly by drawing just a small portion of the frame and then
using MIRROR or COPY to graphically generate the rest of it.
198
Graphics overview
The process of inputting a frame graphically into SPACE GASS simply involves drawing lines
on the screen with a mouse or other pointing device. Each line represents a frame member. Nodes
are automatically attached to the ends of each member and at points where members intersect.
Node and member numbering is performed automatically, or at your discretion. The graphics
renumber facility lets you renumber nodes and/or members, and automatically adjusts all the
other data that references nodes and/or members accordingly.
In order to draw a line, you must position the graphics cursor (a small "pointer" on the screen) at
the start of the line, press the left mouse button, position the cursor at the other end of the line,
and press the left mouse button again. The line is dragged around with the cursor as you position
the second point. The end of the first line then becomes the start of the next line and the process
continues for subsequent lines until you press ESC or the right mouse button to end the process.
If the end of a member is drawn so that it touches another member, the two members become
connected. If attach is on then you only have to position a member close to another member in
order to connect them. If you connect a member to an intermediate point along an existing
member, the existing member is sub-divided into two, and a node is automatically inserted at the
intersection point.
Nodes and members can be deleted, moved, copied, rotated, stretched, mirrored or sub-divided. It
is simply a matter of "picking" a node or member, or placing a window around a group of nodes
and members, and then performing the desired operation in accordance with the instructions
following in this chapter. If you want to move a single node, you can just "pick" it up with your
mouse and drag it to its new location. You can see the members connected to the node being
stretched as you move the node.
The term "pick" referred to in the previous paragraph means to position the graphics cursor on or
near the desired item and then press the left mouse button. If attach is on then you only have to
move close to the item in order to "pick" it. If attach is off then you have to make a direct hit.
Items such as nodes or members can be "un-picked" by simply "picking" them a second time.
When using a window to select members, there are two modes available.
1. If the second corner of the window is to the right of the first then only those members
completely enclosed by the window are selected.
2. If the second corner of the window is to the left of the first then any members enclosed by,
crossed by or touched by the window are selected. This is called a "crossing window" and
can be identified by its broken perimeter line.
199
Selection windows
When picking points, or picking nodes or members directly (ie. not using a selection window), an
aperture circle attached to the graphics cursor indicates how close you must get in order to attach
to them or select them (you can change the size of this circle via the Config and Settings menus).
If there is no aperture circle visible then either attach is off or picking of nodes or members is not
appropriate for the current graphics operation (eg. when selecting the second corner of a
window).
Aperture Circle
Normal Cursor
Cursor Icon
Graphics cursor
Whenever picking of nodes or members is appropriate, a small hand grasping a node or member
is attached to the graphics cursor in addition to the aperture circle. If a hand grasping a node
appears it indicates that you can pick only nodes (eg. when inputting restraints graphically).
Alternatively, a hand grasping a member indicates that you can pick only members (eg. when
inputting member properties graphically). Other cursors will be periodically displayed. The
complete list of "context sensitive cursors" is as follows:
Zoom window
200

Zoom in / out
Draw
Query
Pan
Delete
Select node(s)
Select member(s)
Member properties, restraints, section properties, material properties, constraints, member offsets,
most loads, and design data can be input or edited graphically by simply picking the nodes or
members to which they apply and then inputting or editing the data in the dialogue box that
appears.
201
Floating menus
A floating menu is activated by clicking the right mouse button. The resulting menu is context
sensitive. This means that the contents of the menu will depend upon the nature of the items you
have selected. For instance, if you have selected a group of members, SPACE GASS will display
a floating menu with a list of commands that can be applied to members.
For example, if you click the right mouse button while the cursor is on a member then the
member specific floating menu shown below will appear.
Alternatively, if you click the right mouse button while the cursor is on a node then the node
specific floating menu shown below will appear.
202
There are many different floating menus that are used depending on the feature and the type of
data being worked on.
203
Graphical input
In order to input a structure graphically you have to be able to position the graphics cursor
accurately. Unless you have the steady hands of a surgeon and you are an expert with the mouse,
this is virtually impossible. Therefore, SPACE GASS has a number of indispensable tools which
enable you to draw a structure to the nearest micron regardless of your surgical abilities.
All of these tools can be accessed via the settings menu or activated, deactivated and/or
configured using the graphics settings buttons across the bottom of the screen and/or the
keyboard. All of these settings can be toggled without interrupting the use of most graphics tools.
[Keyboard "G"] Clicking the Grid button displays a grid of dots on the screen at
any user defined spacing. If the grid has been activated the grid button will appear depressed and
instead of the dialogue "Grid: Off" the button will display a message "Grid: x", where x is the
spacing you defined. The grid can lie in the XY, XZ or YZ planes.
See also Grid.
[Keyboard "S"] The Snap facility, if turned on, activates a secondary crosshair
graphics cursor which indicates the actual selection point and which moves in discrete steps
rather than moving smoothly. The snap spacing can be set equal to the grid spacing or any other
desired value. As with the Grid button, if you activate the Snap button and enter a spacing at the
prompt the dialogue on the button will change from "Snap: Off" to "Snap: x", where x is the
spacing you defined.
For example, if you set the snap spacing to 100mm the cursor will move in steps of 100mm,
enabling you to draw to an accuracy of exactly 100mm. The button will indicate that snap has
been set to 100mm by displaying the dialogue "Snap: 100" (if units are set as mm). You can
change the snap spacing as you move the cursor. SPACE GASS automatically senses when
SNAP is not required and turns it off temporarily in such cases.
See also Snap.
[Keyboard "O"] The Ortho tool forces lines to be drawn either horizontally or
vertically. Since structures are made up predominantly of horizontal beams and vertical columns,
it is a very useful feature indeed.
See also Ortho.
[Keyboard "A"] The Attach facility displays an aperture circle with the
graphics cursor and allows you to attach to existing members by simply picking points near them.
The aperture circle indicates how close you must get to a member in order to attach to it. It is very
204

useful for attaching new members to existing members or for locating points which are at the
ends of members.
See also Attach.
[Keyboard "X,Y,Z and P"] The Plane facility allows you to change the current
drawing plane. You will be able to select the drawing plane (choice of XY - "Z", YZ - "X" and
XZ - "Y") as well as specifying an offset. An offset is the distance from a virtual plane to the
specified plane, the distance being measured perpendicular to the virtual plane. For example,
selecting the XY plane with an offset of 5m will result in every node being created with
coordinates of x,y,5.
See also Plane.
[Keyboard "C"] The Coordinates facility allows you to toggle between one
of four coordinate systems. The different systems available are:
Cartesian
Cartesian-Relative (Cart-Rel)
Polar
Polar-Relative (Polar-Rel)
The text display at the bottom right corner of the screen will constantly change to reflect the
position of the graphics cursor on the screen. The format of this text is governed by the
coordinates system you have selected. Selecting the "Off" option switches all coordinates systems
off and disables the coordinates display text.
See also Coordinates.
The keyboard can also be used to position points precisely. You simply type in the
coordinates of the point using cartesian or polar coordinates in absolute or relative modes
(depending upon the coordinates system selected).
There is no icon or button for this function, however you need

only type a number after selecting the draw tool and the coordinates input dialogue box will
appear.
See also Using the keyboard to position points.
There are a number of other tools, apart from the graphics settings buttons, which are of great use
when inputting data graphically.
205
The query frame facility (see also Node properties, and see also Member properties) allows you
to point to a node or member and obtain information about node coordinates, member end
fixities, section properties, material properties, etc. You can also query analysis results and steel
member design results.
You can use the zoom, pan and viewpoint facilities to view the structure in different ways. Zoom
allows you to zoom in on a portion of the structure and have it enlarged for a detailed inspection.
Pan allows you to translate the structure in any direction on the screen. Viewpoint allows you to
rotate your viewpoint to any position around the structure.
There are a host of additional features which allow you to scale the structure or diagrams to any
desired value, show the full 3D geometry of members with hidden lines removed, superimpose
loading diagrams, displacement diagrams, bending moment diagrams, shear force diagrams, axial
force diagrams, torsion diagrams, reactions, stress diagrams, envelopes and dynamic mode
shapes, display steel connection drawings, show local member axes, restraints, constraints,
member offsets, top flanges, etc.
You can also set up a number of filters, each of which limits the amount of the model that you
can see and work on. The contents of each filter can be based on a range of axis coordinates, node
properties, member properties, load types and many other selection criteria that you can control.
Filters can also be selected in the output reports so that they can be quickly customized to include
exactly what you want to see.
Searching for specific nodes or members is easy with the find function. You can search for nodes
or members directly, or by reference to their properties.
All aspects of what you see on the graphics screen can be saved as views that can be named and
then recalled at any time. All filters, viewpoint, scales, zoom, pan and other settings applicable at
the time the view is saved are recalled when the saved view is recalled.
The contents of the graphics display area can be reproduced on your printer or plotter at any time.
Operating a mouse efficiently is an acquired skill. Until you have mastered the art of
coordinating your hand motion with the movement of the graphics cursor on the screen, you may
find the graphical input procedure slower than conventional input methods. This is similar to the
learning curve that draftspeople have to go through when changing from a drawing board to a
computer based drafting system. Once you have progressed past the initial learning stage,
however you will start to appreciate the extra power and versatility you have at your fingertips
with the graphics editor.
The following sections describe all of the graphics operations in detail.
206
Graphical editing
The SPACE GASS graphical commands can be initiated in a number ways as described below:
1. Choose the command from the menu system, select the desired nodes or members (if
applicable) and then follow the prompts at the bottom of the screen to complete the
operation.
Note that the menus cant be selected if a graphics command is currently in use. You can tell
if a graphics command is in use by the presence of a red command prompt in place of the
status line at the bottom of the SPACE GASS screen. The easiest way to exit from a
graphics command is just to press the keyboard ESC key a number of times until the status
line re-appears at the bottom of the screen.
2. Choose the command by clicking on the appropriate toolbar button, select the desired nodes
or members (if applicable) and then follow the prompts at the bottom of the screen to
complete the operation.
Note that most toolbar buttons can be used to initiate a graphics command even if another
graphics command is currently in use.
3. Click the right mouse button (away from any nodes or members), choose the command from
the floating menu that appears, select the desired nodes or members (if applicable) and then
follow the prompts at the bottom of the screen to complete the operation.
4. Select the desired nodes or members, click the right mouse button, choose the command
from the floating menu that appears and then follow the prompts at the bottom of the screen
to complete the operation.
5. Select the desired nodes or members, choose the command by clicking on the appropriate
toolbar button and then follow the prompts at the bottom of the screen to complete the
operation.
6. Click the right mouse button on a node or member, choose the command from the floating
menu that appears and then follow the prompts at the bottom of the screen to complete the
operation.
7. Double click on a node or member to display the node or member properties form.
Using any method, when selecting nodes or members, you can select them individually by
picking them one at a time or you can select them en-masse by using a normal or crossing
selection window as explained in the previous section. Dont forget that you can de-select nodes
or members by simply picking or windowing them a second time.
207

To confirm your node or member selections, just click on the
button below the left hand
toolbar or click the right mouse button and choose "Ok" from the floating menu that appears. You
can then complete the rest of the graphics operation.
In all methods of graphical editing, instructions will be displayed in the bottom left hand corner
of the SPACE GASS window. These will usually be in the form of the name of the command
followed by the instruction. Please refer to this if you are unsure of what SPACE GASS is asking
you to do.
208
Using the keyboard to position points
If you cant position the graphics cursor using the mouse, you can simply type in the desired
coordinates. You can enter points in cartesian or polar coordinates, using absolute or relative
modes.
A point can be entered using cartesian coordinates by simply typing the X, Y and Z values
separated by commas. For example, 2.3,1.2,0.5 locates a point at X=2.3, Y=1.2 and Z=0.5.
If you type less than three values for a point, the missing values are assumed to be zero. For
example, 2.3,0,0 could be shortened to just "2.3", or 2.3,1.2,0 could be shortened to "2.3,1.2".
To locate the "0,0,0" origin very quickly, you only have to type
0.
A point can be entered using polar coordinates by simply typing a distance, followed by a vertical
angle (from the global XZ plane), followed by a horizontal angle (from the global XY plane). <s
are used to separate the values rather than commas. For example, a point 10 units from the origin
with a vertical angle of 45 and a horizontal angle of 15, could be typed in as 10<45<15.
To enter points in relative mode (ie. relative to the other end of a line) apply an "@" prefix to the
coordinates. For example, a point which is 8 units in the X direction and 6 units in the Y direction
from a previous point, could be typed in as @8,6, or @10<36.9.
If you use the keyboard to type in coordinates for a point that is

within the aperture circle distance of a member, and ATTACH is on, the point will not attach
unless you make a direct hit. Any point positioned with the keyboard is kept at the exact
coordinates that you type in.
209
Multiple viewports
Click on the "Viewports" toolbar button or select "Viewports" from the Window menu.
SPACE GASS allows you to present more than one view of your structure on the screen at any
one time. Up to four different windows, or "viewports", can be displayed and individually
configured to better display your structure. Once you have opened multiple viewports you can
page through the different views using the "Next Viewport" and "Previous Viewport" toolbar
buttons (the TAB and SHIFT+TAB keys perform the same functions).
The viewport dialogue.

When you click the viewport tool you are presented with a number of different configurations.
Most of these configurations are self explanatory, with the exception of the bottom four views as
follows.
Viewport 1
Viewport 2
Viewport 3
Viewport 4
210
These four buttons allow you to select any one of the four viewports, either on their own, or in
combination. Each corner of the screen corresponds with viewports 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively (as
depicted above). If one of the viewports selected is already displayed it will return to the
configuration defined by the diagram on the button selected.
Each of the viewports which are displayed have their own unique configuration. This applies to
scales, viewpoint, filters, superimposed diagrams, toggle button settings, etc. The configuration
you specify for a viewport will be retained when you close the viewport so that, when you open
that viewport again, the same settings will be active.
You can use the viewports to display a variety of different information including different views
of the structure, graphics settings, bending moment, shear force, axial force, stress and
displacement diagrams, dynamic and buckling mode shapes, filters, load cases, member top
flanges, 3D geometry, local axes, etc. When you select a different viewport (either by clicking on
it with the mouse, selecting it via the "Viewport" toolbar buttons or Window menu, or by using
the TAB and SHIFT+TAB keys) the settings you have selected for that viewport will be indicated
via the toggle buttons.
Graphics commands apply to the active viewport. Some graphics commands allow you to move
between viewports without exiting from the command. For instance, consider a job where you
have 4 viewports displayed with viewport 1 as the active viewport. If you select the draw facility
and start drawing a line in the active viewport, you can then move the cursor to any other
viewport without exiting from the draw command.
You will find that as you move the cursor between the viewports each viewport displays a drawn
line which has the same coordinates as in the viewport where you first started drawing the line.
This is useful in a number of situations, such as when you start drawing a line in one viewport but
cannot locate the end point in that viewport. This feature applies to some graphics functions and
can be switched on and off via the "Viewports" dialogue (ie. by toggling the "Activate Viewport
Under Cursor" check box in the viewports dialogue box).
211
Node properties
Node properties include node coordinates, node restraints and master-slave constraints. Hence,
selecting the graphical option for "Nodes", "Node restraints" or "Master-slave constraints" will all
take you to the same node properties dialogue box.
There are three modes available for editing node properties as follows.
To edit or query node properties one node at a time
Click on the "Query Frame" toolbar button
simply double click on a node.
or select "Frame" from the Query menu or
Note "Edit/Query Node" in the title bar of the dialogue box that appears.
Although this mode only lets you edit the properties of one node at a time, you can simply click
on any other node to display and edit its properties without exiting the command. When doing so,
any changes you made to the properties of the previously displayed node are saved.
You can also press the "Results" button and then click on any nodes to display their analysis
results in a scrollable window (see also Query analysis results).
To edit or query node properties for multiple nodes using a form
Click on the "Node Properties" toolbar button
or select "Nodes-Graphical" from the
Structure menu or select some nodes and then "Properties (Form)" from the floating menu or
click the right mouse button on a member and then select "Properties (Form)" from the floating
menu.
212

You must then select "Form" if a floating menu appears asking you to choose between form or
datasheet.
Note "Edit Node Properties" in the title bar of the dialogue box that appears.
Edit mode works in a similar way to edit/query mode except that you cant select other nodes
while the dialogue is open. You can, however select multiple nodes initially and make changes to
all of them simultaneously.
Blank fields
A blank field indicates that for the nodes selected, more than one value exists. If you leave such a
field blank then the selected nodes will retain their individual values. However, if you type into a
blank field then all of the selected nodes will receive the new value.
Special buttons
Shows or hides the master-slave constraints part of the node properties dialogue.
Allows you to graphically select a master node rather than having to type in its node number.
To edit or query node properties for multiple nodes using a datasheet
Click on the "Node Properties" toolbar button
or select "Nodes-Graphical" from the
Structure menu or select some nodes and then "Properties (Datasheet)" from the floating menu or
click the right mouse button on a member and then select "Properties (Datasheet)" from the
floating menu.
You must then select "Datasheet" if a floating menu appears asking you to choose between form
or datasheet.
213

Note that the datasheet that appears is different to the normal nodes datasheet because it contains
extra columns for restraints and master-slave constraints.
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
You can view node restraints or master-slave constraints graphically by depressing the
"View node restraints" or "View master-slave constraints" toggle buttons in the side toolbar.
If you change any node properties that affect the structures geometry, you may not be
able to select some nodes or members until after a redraw. This is due to their displayed position
becoming out-of-date. The "Regen" check box allows you to order an automatic redraw after you
exit the node properties dialogue.
You can remove restraints and/or constraints by either blanking

the restraint or constraint field or by typing "NONE" in the field or by clicking on the delete
button.
See also Nodes.
See also Floating mouse menus.
214
Member properties
Member properties include member type, connectivity, orientation, fixity, section properties,
material properties and member offsets. Hence, selecting the graphical option for "Members",
"Section properties", "Material properties" or "Member offsets" will all take you to the same
member properties dialogue box.
There are three modes available for editing member properties as follows.
To edit or query member properties one member at a time
Click on the "Query Frame" toolbar button
simply double click on a member.
or select "Frame" from the Query menu or
Note "Edit/Query Member" in the title bar of the dialogue box that appears.
Although this mode only lets you edit the properties of one member at a time, you can simply
click on any other member to display and edit its properties without exiting the command. When
doing so, any changes you made to the properties of the previously displayed member are saved.
You can also press the "Results" button and then click on any members to display their analysis
results in a scrollable window (see also Query analysis results).
215

To edit or query member properties for multiple members using a form
Click on the "Member Properties" toolbar button
or select "Members-Graphical" from the
Structure menu or select some members and then "Properties (Form)" from the floating menu or
click the right mouse button on a member and then select "Properties (Form)" from the floating
menu.
You must then select "Form" if a floating menu appears asking you to choose between form or
datasheet.
Note "Edit Member Properties" in the title bar of the dialogue box that appears.
Edit mode works in a similar way to edit/query mode except that you cant select other members
while the dialogue is open. You can, however select multiple members initially and make changes
to all of them simultaneously.
Blank fields
A blank field indicates that for the members selected, more than one value exists. If you leave
such a field blank then the selected members will retain their individual values. However, if you
type into a blank field then all of the selected members will receive the new value.
Special buttons
Shows or hides the section properties part of the member properties dialogue.
Shows or hides the material properties part of the member properties dialogue.
216
Shows or hides the member offsets part of the member properties dialogue.
Allows you to input a section or material from a standard library.
Initiates the shape builder.
Initiates the standard shapes input.

Section and material properties are different to the other items in the members dialogue because a
single section or material can be shared amongst many members. All other items of data in the
members dialogue have their own independent values for each member. Hence, as soon as you
change the section or material property number, the rest of the section or material data changes to
match.
You can scroll through the sections or materials in the current

job by changing the section or material number in the member properties dialogue. All of the
properties that have been defined for that section or material will be displayed. If no properties
have been defined for that section or material then the name field will be blank, as will the
properties fields.
To edit or query member properties for multiple members using a datasheet
Click on the "Member Properties" toolbar button
or select "Members-Graphical" from the
Structure menu or select some members and then "Properties (Datasheet)" from the floating
menu or click the right mouse button on a member and then select "Properties (Datasheet)" from
the floating menu.
You must then select "Datasheet" if a floating menu appears asking you to choose between form
or datasheet.
Note that the datasheet that appears is different to the normal members datasheet because it
contains extra columns for section properties, material properties and offsets.
217
You can view member hinges, member offsets or section properties graphically by
depressing the "View member hinges", "View member offsets" or "View full 3D geometry"
toggle buttons in the side toolbar.
If you change any member properties that affect the structures geometry, you may not be
able to select some nodes or members until after a redraw. This is due to their displayed position
becoming out-of-date. The "Regen" check box allows you to order an automatic redraw after you
exit the node properties dialogue.
See also Members.
See also Floating mouse menus.
218
Node restraints
Node restraints are incorporated into node properties.
219
Section properties
Section properties are incorporated into member properties.
220
Material properties
Material properties are incorporated into member properties.
221
Master-slave constraints are incorporated into node properties.
222
Member offsets
Member offsets are incorporated into member properties.
223
Draw
Click on the "Draw" toolbar button or select "Draw" from the Structure menu or select "Draw
members" from the floating menu.
This feature allows you to draw new members and attach them to existing nodes or members.
Nodes are automatically generated at the ends of each member. If a member is attached to the
intermediate point of an existing member, the existing member is broken into two and a node is
automatically inserted at the intersection point.
When in drawing mode you can control the numbering of new

nodes and members being drawn by pressing the keyboard N or M keys and then specifying the
number of the next node or member to be drawn. Alternatively, you can simply let SPACE GASS
find the next available node or member. You can easily renumber any nodes or members later
using the RENUMBER facility (see also Renumber).
The procedure is as follows.
1. Pick the start of a new member. This can be a new point not connected to existing members
or it can be an existing member end point or intermediate point.
2. Pick the end of the new member. Again, this can be a new point or a point on an existing
member.
3. If you wish to draw another member which extends from the end of the member just drawn
then pick another end point. You can keep picking end points for additional members.
4. Press ESC or the right mouse button to end the operation.
5. Return to step 1 above to draw another member, or press ESC or the right mouse button to
exit from the operation.
Be careful when subdividing or connecting to intermediate points on members that have

local Y or Z member offsets. Because local offsets are calculated relative to a straight line joining
the members end nodes, they will change direction if you add intermediate nodes. It is therefore
recommended that you should always convert any local Y or Z member offsets to global before
adding intermediate nodes.
224
Move
Click on the "Move" toolbar button or select "Move" from the Structure menu or select some
nodes and then "Move" from the floating menu.
This feature allows you to select one or more nodes and drag them in any direction on the screen
together with their connecting members.
There are three ways to MOVE nodes. They are explained as follows.
1. For one node only:
Select "Move" from the toolbar or the Structure menu and then select the node you wish to
move. Move the node and pick its destination point. You can see the members attached to
the node being moved and stretched as you move the node.
OR
For one or more nodes:
Select "Move" from the toolbar or the Structure menu and then select the node(s) you wish
to move. Pick two points which represent the vector through which the selected nodes are to
be moved. All selected nodes are then moved.
OR
For one or more nodes:
Select the node(s) you wish to move and then select "Move" from the toolbar or the floating
menu. Pick two points which represent the vector through which the selected nodes are to be
moved. All selected nodes are then moved.
2. Select more node(s) to move, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the
operation.
To remove an intermediate node from two members connected

end-to-end and convert them into a single continuous member, select MOVE and simply move
the intermediate node onto either one of the end nodes. Make sure that ATTACH is not "Off".
To remove an unwanted member, select MOVE and simply move one of its end nodes onto the
other end node. This has the effect of joining other members which were connected to the ends of
225

the removed member. If DELETE were used instead, a gap would be left where the deleted
member was.

226
Rotate
Click on the "Rotate" toolbar button or select "Rotate" from the Structure menu or select some
nodes and then "Rotate" from the floating menu.
This feature allows you to select one or more nodes and rotate them about any user defined axis
together with their connecting members.
1. Select the node(s) you wish to rotate and then select the "Rotate" tool from the toolbar or the
floating menu.
OR
Select "Rotate" from the toolbar or the Structure menu. Select the node(s) you wish to rotate
and then click on the Ok button.
2. Pick the centre of rotation point.
3. In the rotate dialogue box that appears (as follows), change the data to suit your
requirements, and then click on the dialogue Ok button. Note that a positive angle of
rotation is anti-clockwise.
4. All selected nodes are then rotated.

5. Select more nodes to rotate, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the
operation.
227
Copy
Click on the "Copy" toolbar button or select "Copy" from the Structure menu or floating menu or
select some members and then "Copy" from the floating menu.
This feature allows you to copy nodes and members in any straight line direction, or around an
arc or helix. This is very useful for structures such as trusses where you can draw just the first
panel and then make copies of it to build up the complete structure.
There are three COPY sequences of operation for copying in a straight line, around an arc, or
around a helix. They are explained as follows.
1. Select the member(s) you wish to copy and then select the "Copy" tool from the toolbar or
the floating menu.
OR
Select "Copy" from the toolbar or the Structure menu. Select the member(s) you wish to
rotate and then click on the Ok button.
2. In the dialogue box that appears, select a radio button for copying in a straight line, around
an arc, or around a helix.
Continue with step 3 for straight line copying, or go to step 7 for arc or helix copying.
3. For copying in a straight line, pick two points which represent the vector through which the
selected members are to be copied.
4. In the copy dialogue box that appears (as follows), change the data to suit your
requirements, and then click on the dialogue Ok button.
228
5. All selected members are then copied in a straight line.

6. Select more members to copy, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the
operation.
OR
7. For copying around an arc or helix, pick the centre of rotation point.
8. In the copy dialogue box that appears (see above), change the data to suit your requirements,
and then click on the dialogue Ok button. Note that a positive angle of rotation is anticlockwise.
9. All selected members are then copied around an arc or helix.
10. Select more members to copy, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the
operation.
229
Mirror
Click on the "Mirror" toolbar button or select "Mirror" from the Structure menu or select some
members and then "Mirror" from the floating menu.
This feature allows you to create a mirror image of any user defined nodes or members about any
user defined surface.
1. Select the member(s) you wish to mirror and then select the "Mirror" tool from the toolbar
or the floating menu.
OR
Select "Mirror" from the toolbar or the Structure menu. Select the member(s) you wish to
mirror and then click on the Ok button.
2. Pick a point somewhere on the mirror plane.
3. In the mirror dialogue box that appears (as follows), change the data to suit your
4. All selected members are then mirrored.

5. Select more members to mirror, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the
operation.
230
Delete
Click on the "Delete" toolbar button or select "Delete" from the Structure menu or select some
members and then "Delete" from the floating menu.
This feature allows you to delete any or all of the structure. The components to be deleted are first
highlighted so that you can verify them before they are actually removed. Nodes connected to
deleted members are also deleted unless they are connected to other members that still exist.
Members remain even if their nodes are deleted.
1. Select the member(s) you wish to delete and then select the "Delete" tool from the toolbar or
the floating menu.
OR
Select "Delete" from the toolbar or the Structure menu. Select the member(s) you wish to
delete and then click on the Ok button.
2. Specify whether or not you want to delete the nodes that are left unattached as a result of the
DELETE operation.
3. Specify whether or not you want to delete the loads that are applied to the nodes and
members being deleted.
4. All selected members are then deleted. Unattached nodes and/or applied loads are also
deleted in accordance with your instructions as mentioned above.
5. Select more members to delete, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the
operation.
231
Stretch
Select "Stretch" from the Structure menu or select some nodes and then "Stretch" from the
floating menu.
The graphical stretch feature lets you stretch all or part of your model.
1. Select the node(s) you wish to stretch and then select the "Stretch" tool from the floating
menu.
OR
Select "Stretch" from the Structure menu. Select the node(s) you wish to stretch and then
click on the Ok button.
2. Select an anchor point (which could be a node or any other point).
3. Define a stretch vector (which comprises a start and end point).
4. Each selected node is then moved parallel to the stretch vector by an amount that is
proportional to its distance from the anchor point. The distance D a node is moved parallel
to the stretch vector is given by:
D = Lv
Dn
Dv
where Lv is the length of the stretch vector, Dn is the distance from the node to the anchor
point, and Dv is the distance from the start of the stretch vector to the anchor point.
5. Select more nodes to stretch, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the
operation.
232
Scale nodes
Select "Scale Nodes" from the Structure menu or select some nodes and then "Scale Nodes" from
the floating menu.
You can use this feature to apply a scale factor to selected nodes. For example, you could use it to
enlarge your frame by 20% or, if you had mistakenly input your node geometry in millimetre
units instead of metres, you could scale the nodes by 0.001.
The scale nodes feature also allows you to specify a base point about which the scaling occurs.
This means that the distance from the new node position to the base point is equal to the old
distance multiplied by the scale factor.
1. Select the node(s) you wish to scale and then select the "Scale Nodes" tool from the floating
menu.
OR
Select "Scale Nodes" from the Structure menu. Select the node(s) you wish to scale and then
click on the Ok button.
2. Select a base point (which could be a node or any other point).
3. Enter a scale factor.
4. Each selected node is then moved relative to the base point by an amount proportional to the
scale factor.
5. Select more nodes to scale, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the
operation.
The scale nodes feature only affects the node coordinates. It doesnt adjust offsets,
section properties, loads or any other parts of your model.
233
Generate arc
Click on the "Generate Arc" toolbar button or select "Generate Arc" from the Structure menu or
select some members and then "Generate Arc" from the floating menu.
The graphical arc generation feature lets you apply an arc to any member by adding intermediate
nodes with any desired radius and arc plane.
1. Select the member(s) you wish to generate an arc from and then select the "Generate Arc"
tool from the toolbar or the floating menu.
OR
Select "Generate Arc" from the toolbar or the Structure menu. Select the member(s) you
wish to generate and arc from and then click on the Ok button.
2. Select a point which describes both the plane of the arc and its direction (the arc is always
generated on the opposite side of the member to the selected point).
3. In the dialogue box that appears (as follows), specify the number of intermediate nodes in
the arc and the arc radius, chord deviation, centre angle or arc length.
4. All selected members are then sub-divided and formed into an arc.
5. Select more members to convert to arcs, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from
the operation.
234
Sub-divide
Click on the "Sub-divide" toolbar button or select "Sub-divide" from the Structure menu or select
some members and then "Sub-divide" from the floating menu.
This feature allows you to select one or more members and sub-divide them by inserting
intermediate nodes at regular or irregular points along them.
1. Select the member(s) you wish to sub-divide and then select the "Sub-divide" tool from the
toolbar or the floating menu.
OR
Select "Sub-divide" from the toolbar or the Structure menu. Select the member(s) you wish
to sub-divide and then click on the Ok button.
2. In the sub-divide dialogue box that appears (as follows), change the data to suit your
If the node insertion points are irregular, you can nominate "Insertion points" to be
expressed as inclined distances, or as projected distances along one of the global axis
directions. Naturally, you cannot nominate projected distances along a global axis which is
at right angles to the axis of the member being sub-divided.
Insertion points are referenced from the node A end of the members. They can be expressed
as actual distances or as percentages. For example, to sub-divide a 10m beam into 2m, 3m,
and 5m beams, you could type 2,5, or 2,50%, or 20%,50% into the "Insertion points" field.
In all three cases, the final result is the same.
235

If you are using percentages for all of the insertion points, then the inclined or projected axis
specification is irrelevant.
3. All selected members are then sub-divided.
4. Select more members to sub-divide, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the
operation.
If the inserted nodes are to be equally spaced then you can leave
the "Insertion points" field blank.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Concentrated loads and distributed forces acting on a member that is sub-divided are now
automatically re-distributed onto the sub-divided members, however distributed torsion, thermal
and prestress loads are not!

236
Intersect
Click on the "Intersect" toolbar button or select "Intersect" from the Structure menu or select
some members and then "Intersect" from the floating menu.
This feature allows you to join two or more members and automatically insert nodes at the
intersection points. It works with members that are not touching each other, and with members
that cross over each other.
1. Select the member(s) you wish to intersect and then select the "Intersect" tool from the
OR
Select "Intersect" from the toolbar or the Structure menu. Select the member(s) you wish to
intersect and then click on the Ok button.
2. Select an "intersect" member to which you want to connect all of the previously selected
members.
3. In the dialogue box that appears, select a radio button to choose between moving the ends of
the members being joined, or extending them.
If you choose "Move ends", the ends of those members being joined which dont already
pass through the intersection point, are moved to the intersection point.
If you choose "Extend ends", new members which meet at the intersection point are added
to the ends of those members being joined which dont already pass through the intersection
point.
Because the "Move ends" or "Extend ends" selection only affects members which dont
already pass through the intersection point, the selection is irrelevant for members that cross
over each other.
4. All selected members are then connected to the "intersect" member.
5. Select more members to intersect, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the
operation.
237

! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Concentrated loads and distributed forces acting on a member that is sub-divided as the result of
an intersect operation are now automatically re-distributed onto the sub-divided members,
however distributed torsion, thermal and prestress loads are not!
Be careful when intersecting with members that have local Y or Z member offsets.
Because local offsets are calculated relative to a straight line joining the members end nodes,
they will change direction if you add intermediate nodes. It is therefore recommended that you
should always convert any local Y or Z member offsets to global before intersecting at an
intermediate point.
238
Generate taper
Click on the "Generate Taper" toolbar button or select "Generate Taper" from the Structure
menu or select some members and then "Generate Taper" from the floating menu.
This feature lets you model tapered members with or without haunches.
A member can be tapered by varying its depth, width or both depth and width. If the depth is
varied, the taper can be applied to the top of the member, the bottom of the member, or evenly to
both the top and bottom. If the width is varied, the taper is applied evenly to both sides of the
member.
If a haunch is selected, its depth is varied and is applied to the bottom of the haunch only.
SPACE GASS uses a series of prismatic member segments to approximate the exact taper. You
can use up to 50 segments per taper, however usually 3 segments is enough to get very close to
the exact solution. The cross section dimensions for each prismatic member can be set equal to
the tapers largest end dimensions, smallest end dimensions or average dimensions for the
segment under consideration.
1. Select the members you wish to be tapered and then select the "Generate Taper" tool from
the toolbar or the floating menu.
OR
Select "Generate Taper" from the toolbar or the Structure menu. Select the members you
wish to be tapered and then click on the Ok button.
In either case, the selected members must be a continuous run of members with no gaps inbetween. Each selected member will become a segment of the total taper. If you have a
single member that is to be tapered then you must sub-divide it before generating the taper.
The start of the taper (usually the thick end) is taken to be at the end of the member you
select first (provided it is at one end of the taper). If you select the members using a
selection window or if you select an intermediate member first, the start of the taper will be
at the end of the lowest numbered member.
2. In the dialogue box that appears below, change the data to suit your requirements, and then
click on the dialogue Ok button.
239
3. The section properties for the taper are then calculated and linked to the selected members.
You can view the final result by double clicking on one of the tapered members to display
the member properties dialogue and then click on the shape builder button. Alternatively,
you can view the taper in full 3D by using the VRML viewer.
Whenever a taper is generated, member offsets are also calculated and applied to the tapered
members. The offsets take into account the changed centroid location in the built-up sections and
ensure that the tapered members are correctly positioned relative to each other.
240
Renumber
Click on the "Renumber" toolbar button or select "Renumber" from the Structure menu or select
some nodes or members and then "Renumber" from the floating menu.
This feature allows you to renumber nodes and/or members at any stage of the program operation.
Items which reference nodes or members such as restraints, constraints, loads and steel design
data are automatically adjusted for the new numbering sequence.
1. Select the node(s) or member(s) you wish to renumber and then select the "Renumber" tool
from the toolbar or the floating menu.
OR
Select "Renumber" from the toolbar or the Structure menu. Select the node(s) or member(s)
you wish to renumber and then click on the Ok button.
2. In the renumber dialogue box that appears (as follows), change the data to suit your
If you wish to increment all of the nodes or members selected by a common amount then
you should check the "Increment by" radio button and enter the common increment amount.
If you want to renumber individual nodes or members, the "Starting number" in the
renumber dialogue will default to the selected node or member, and the "Numbering
increment" will default to zero. You only need to change the "Starting number" to the new
number required.
241

3. All selected nodes or members are then renumbered.
4. Select more nodes or members to renumber, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit
from the operation.
If a node or member is to be renumbered to a node or member that already exists, SPACE

GASS displays an error message and forces you to change the renumbering data before
renumbering can proceed.
The "Increment by" feature allows you to create a gap in a

sequence of nodes or members without having to redefine the entire numbering sequence.
242
Select all
Select "Select All" from the Structure menu or the floating menu.
This lets you quickly select all nodes or members that are visible in the graphics window. It does
not select nodes or members outside the graphics window or those that are suppressed due to
being filtered out.
The selected nodes or members are highlighted graphically the same as if you had selected them
by picking them with the mouse. You can then click on a toolbar button or click the right mouse
button and choose from the floating menu that appears to perform an operation on the selected
nodes or members. You can cancel the highlighting by pressing the keyboard ESC key or by
selecting "Cancel" from the floating menu.
After the Select All command highlights the nodes or members,

you can perform many graphics operations on them by clicking the right mouse button and then
selecting from the floating menu that appears.
243
Node loads
Click on the "Node Loads" toolbar button or select "Node Loads-Graphical" from the Loads
menu or select some nodes and then "Node Loads" from the floating menu.
When applying node loads to a structure the global coordinates system is used. If you wish to
apply a load on a node so that it is aligned with one of the member axes you should use a member
concentrated load (see also Member concentrated loads).
1. Select the node(s) you wish to apply loads to and then select "Node Loads" from the toolbar
or the floating menu.
OR
Select "Node Loads" from the toolbar or "Node Loads-Graphical" from the Loads menu.
Select the node(s) you wish to apply loads to and then click on the Ok button.
2. In the load case dialogue box that appears, type in a list of load cases that you wish to input or
edit and then choose between showing all the selected nodes or just the ones that currently
have loads applied to them in the load cases that you listed.
If you are inputting new loads then you would probably choose to show all the selected
nodes, whereas if you are editing existing loads or just viewing loads then showing just the
loaded nodes may be preferable.
244
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing loads shown. You can add, edit or delete loads
and then click on the Ok button to save any changes. The operation of the datasheet is the
same as the non-graphical datasheets (see also Datasheets).
See also Node load data.
245

Select "Prescribed Node Displacements -Graphical" from the Loads menu or select some nodes
and then "Prescribed Node Displacements" from the floating menu.
When applying prescribed node displacements to a structure the global coordinates system is
used. Prescribed node displacements can only be applied to restrained degrees of freedom.
1. Select the node(s) you wish to apply displacements to and then select "Prescribed Node
Displacements" from the toolbar or the floating menu.
OR
Select "Prescribed Node Displacements" from the toolbar or "Prescribed Node
Displacements-Graphical" from the Loads menu. Select the node(s) you wish to apply
displacements to and then click on the Ok button.
have displacements applied to them in the load cases that you listed.
If you are inputting new displacements then you would probably choose to show all the
selected nodes, whereas if you are editing existing displacements or just viewing
displacements then showing just the displaced nodes may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing displacements shown. You can add, edit or delete
displacements and then click on the Ok button to save any changes. The operation of the
246

datasheet is the same as the non-graphical datasheets (see also Datasheets).
See also Prescribed node displacement data.
247
Click on the "Member Concentrated Loads" toolbar button or select "Member Concentrated
Loads-Graphical" from the Loads menu or select some members and then "Member
Concentrated Loads" from the floating menu.
1. Select the member(s) you wish to apply concentrated loads to and then select "Member
Concentrated Loads" from the toolbar or floating menu.
OR
Select "Member Concentrated Loads" from the toolbar or "Member Concentrated LoadsGraphical" from the Loads menu. Select the member(s) you wish to apply concentrated loads
to and then click on the Ok button.
edit and then choose between showing all the selected members or just the ones that currently
members, whereas if you are editing existing loads or just viewing loads then showing just
the loaded members may be preferable.
248

You can apply more than one concentrated load to the same
member within the same load case by specifying a different sub-load number for each different
member concentrated load.
See also Member concentrated load data.
249
Click on the "Member Distributed Forces" toolbar button or select "Member Distributed ForcesGraphical" from the Loads menu or select some members and then "Member Distributed Forces"
from the floating menu.
Member distributed forces can be prismatic and continuous along a member or continuously
varying along a member.
1. Select the member(s) you wish to apply distributed forces to and then select "Member
Distributed Forces" from the toolbar or floating menu.
OR
Select "Member Distributed Forces" from the toolbar or "Member Distributed ForcesGraphical" from the Loads menu. Select the member(s) you wish to apply distributed forces
250
You can apply more than one distributed force to the same
member distributed force. This allows you to apply "stepped" distributed forces along a member
without having to resort to intermediate nodes.
See also Member distributed force data.
251

Select "Member Distributed Torsions-Graphical" from the Loads menu or select some members
and then "Member Distributed Torsions" from the floating menu.
Member distributed torsions can be prismatic and continuous along a member or continuously
varying along a member.
1. Select the member(s) you wish to apply distributed torsions to and then select "Member
Distributed Torsions" from the toolbar or floating menu.
OR
Select "Member Distributed Torsions" from the toolbar or "Member Distributed TorsionsGraphical" from the Loads menu. Select the member(s) you wish to apply distributed torsions
252

You can apply more than one distributed torsion to the same
member distributed torsion. This allows you to apply "stepped" distributed torsions along a
member without having to resort to intermediate nodes.
See also Member distributed torsion data.
253
Thermal/prestress loads
Select "Thermal/prestress Loads-Graphical" from the Loads menu or select some members and
then "Thermal/prestress Loads" from the floating menu.
1. Select the member(s) you wish to apply thermal/prestress loads to and then select
"Thermal/prestress Loads" from the toolbar or floating menu.
OR
Select "Thermal/prestress Loads" from the toolbar or "Thermal/prestress Loads-Graphical"
from the Loads menu. Select the member(s) you wish to apply thermal/prestress loads to and
then click on the Ok button.
254
See also Thermal/prestress load data.
255
Self weight
Click on the "Self Weight" toolbar button or select "Self Weight" from the Loads menu.
This feature lets you specify accelerations in any load cases that you select. By specifying the
acceleration due to gravity you can model the self weight of the structure.
The procedure involves entering the data into the self weight datasheet as explained in Self
weight data.
256
Click on the "Combination Load Cases" toolbar button or select "Combination Load Cases" from
the Loads menu.
Combination load cases combine existing load cases to allow analysis of a structure with the
interaction of different loads. Combination load cases are given a load case number the same as
any other load case.
The procedure involves entering the data into the combination load cases datasheet as explained
in Combination load case data.
257
Load case titles

Select "Load Case Titles" from the Loads menu.
Load case titles allow you to describe your load cases so that they can be easily identified. For
each load case you can specify a short title and a longer description.
The procedure involves entering the data into the load case titles datasheet as explained in Load
case title data.
258
Lumped masses
Click on the "Lumped Masses" toolbar button or select "Lumped Masses-Graphical" from the
Loads menu or select some nodes and then "Lumped Masses" from the floating menu.
When applying a lumped mass to a structure the global coordinates system is used. You must
assign lumped masses to one or more nodes before a dynamic frequency analysis can be
performed.
1. Select the node(s) you wish to apply masses to and then select "Lumped Masses" from the
OR
Select "Lumped Masses" from the toolbar or "Lumped Masses-Graphical" from the Loads
menu. Select the node(s) you wish to apply masses to and then click on the Ok button.
have masses applied to them in the load cases that you listed.
If you are inputting new masses then you would probably choose to show all the selected
nodes, whereas if you are editing existing masses or just viewing masses then showing just
the loaded nodes may be preferable.
259
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing masses shown. You can add, edit or delete masses
See also Lumped mass data.
260
Spectral loads
Select "Spectral Loads" from the Loads menu.
Spectral loads must be defined for each load case that you wish to include in a dynamic response
analysis.
The procedure involves entering the data into the spectral loads datasheet as explained in Spectral
load data.
261
Area loading
Select "Area Loading" from the Loads menu or select some members and then "Area Loading"
from the floating menu.
Areas defined by three or four perimeter members can have pressure loads automatically input as
member distributed forces using this feature. After selecting the perimeter members, you only
have to enter the pressure load and its direction, after which the member distributed forces are
generated on the selected members.
You can select three or four members that define a single area or you can select a large number of
members that define multiple areas. For example, you could model a uniform pressure acting on a
large grillage by selecting all of the members in the grillage and then use the area loading feature
to generate all of the distributed forces that act on the grillage members.
1. Select the member(s) you wish to load and then select "Area Loading" from the toolbar or
the floating menu.
OR
Select "Area Loading" from the toolbar or the Loads menu. Select the member(s) you wish
to load and then click on the Ok button.
2. In the area loading dialogue box that appears (as follows), change the data to suit your
If an area to be loaded is not exactly planar or if it is not exactly normal to the direction of
loading then it is assumed that the pressure load acts on the projection of the area.
262
3. The pressure loads are then converted into equivalent uniform, trapezoidal and triangular
member distributed forces for the selected members. However, if the "Generate one-way
uniformly distributed forces only" option is ticked then the pressure for each area is evenly
distributed onto the perimeter members as uniformly distributed forces only. This can be
useful for cases such as cable members where triangular and trapezoidal loads are not
appropriate.
4. Select more members to load, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the
operation.
Loads are not generated on areas that have more than four perimeter members.
If you need to sub-divide members that are to have area loads

generated on them, you should generate the area loads first and then sub-divide the members. See
also Sub-divide and see also Intersect .
263
Managing load cases
This feature lets you select and display load cases, or copy, renumber or delete an entire load
case, including all static, mass and spectral loads contained within it.
To select and display the desired load cases
Click on the "Load Cases" toolbar combo box
and select a single
load case, a list of load cases, all load cases, all primary load cases or all combination load
cases.
To copy, renumber or delete a load case
or select "Copy a Load Case", "Renumber
Click on the "Manage Load Cases" toolbar button
a Load Case" or "Delete a Load Case" from the Loads menu.
264
Steel members
Select "Steel Member Design Input Data-Graphical" from the Design menu or select some
members and then "Steel Member Design Input Data" from the floating menu.
This feature allows you to graphically specify steel member design data.
1. Select the member(s) you wish to include in a design group and then select "Steel Member
Design Input Data" from the floating menu.
OR
Select "Steel Member Design Input Data" from the Design menu. Select the member(s) you
wish to include in a design group and then click on the Ok button.
Because the top flange for a steel design group is taken to be the same as the top flange for
the first member in the design group, it is important to be able to control which member
comes first in the design group. Flange restraint positions are also referenced from the free
end of the first member in the design group.
If you are inputting a new design group, the member that you select first will be placed first
in the design group (assuming that it is at either end of the group). If you want to select a
"first" member, you should pick it directly or ensure that it is the only member selected if
you use a window.
If you use a window and select a group of members initially, then the end one with the
lowest member number will be placed first in the design group.
2. In the steel member dialogue box that appears, type in the data for the selected design group,
and then click on the dialogue Ok button.
265
266
Steel connections
Select "Steel Connection Design Input Data-Graphical" from the Design menu or select some
members and then "Steel Connection Design Input Data" from the floating menu.
This feature allows you to graphically specify steel connection design data.
1. For each connection, you can pick up to three members to be joined. They consist of a
supporting member and one or two supported members. Most connections require a
supporting member, but some, such as apex and baseplate, do not.
2. The two supported members are called "Supported A" and "Supported B". The A and B
designations mean nothing other than to differentiate between the two sides. Connection
drawings always show the "Supported A" member at the left hand side of the drawing and it
is therefore good practice to select the member on the LHS as A and the member on the
RHS as B, otherwise they will be shown on opposite sides in the drawing details. Single
member connections such as baseplates can be specified as A or B, the result is the same.
3. The selection box at the bottom-right corner of the screen (shown above) indicates which
type of member you are about to select by the selected radio button. Change the radio button
selection by clicking on the desired radio button, or by picking a point away from any
members, or by using the keyboard ARROW UP/DOWN keys.
4. When the desired "Supporting", "Supported A", or "Supported B" radio button is selected,
pick a member and its number will be displayed in the selection box next to the highlighted
radio button.
If the first selected member already belongs to a previously input connection, all of the
members in the connection will be highlighted, the selection box will display all of the
members involved in the connection, and the computer will beep. If this happens you should
go directly to point 8.
5. When you have selected one or more members to be connected, click on the main Ok button
located below the side toolbar buttons.
267

6. In the steel connection dialogue box that appears, type in the data for the connection, and
then click on the dialogue Ok button.
For a new connection, the program sets a default connection number equal to the
supporting member (or the first supported member if there is no supporting member). You
are free to change the connection number to any desired value. Connections can be
removed by clicking on the dialogue "Delete" button.
7. Repeat steps 3-6 above to input design data for other steel connections, or press ESC or the
right mouse button to exit from the operation.
8. You can edit connection data graphically by exactly the same procedure as inputting it.
When picking the first member in a connection, if you pick a member which is already part
of a connection, all of the members in the connection will be highlighted, the selection box
will display all of the members involved in the connection, and the computer will beep as
mentioned in point 4 above. You then have the option of editing the existing connection, or
using the picked member in a new connection.
9. To edit the existing connection data, press ENTER or click on the "Select" button in the
selection box, and then continue to select or de-select members as desired. You can then
click on the selection box Ok button and proceed as per step 6 above.
10. If you pick a member which is already part of a connection but you want to use it in a new
connection rather than editing the existing connection to which the selected member
belongs, click on the "New" button in the selection box, and then continue to pick additional
members as desired. You can then click on the selection box Ok button and proceed as per
step 6 above. You will finish up with two connections which share a common member (or
members).
268

11. If you pick a member that is already part of two or more connections, you can cycle through
them by clicking on the "Prev" or "Next" buttons in the selection box. The highlighted
members and the members displayed in the selection box change as you cycle through.
When you get to the one you want to edit, just proceed as in point 9 above.
Thus, you can have members shared by any number of connections. In fact, you can input
multiple connections which all have exactly the same members using this method.
269
View nodes / members
Click on the "View Nodes" or "View Members" toolbar button or select "Nodes" or "Members"
from the View menu.
The node and member view toggle buttons allow you to show or hide the nodes and members.
If the nodes or members are hidden then any operations that require nodes or members to be
selected are suppressed. For example, if the nodes are hidden then node loads cannot be input or
edited graphically.
270
View node and member properties
Click on the "View Node Restraints", "View Member Hinges", "View Master-Slave Constraints",
or "View Member Offsets", toolbar buttons, or select "Node Restraints", "Member Hinges",
"Master-Slave Constraints" or "Member Offsets" from the View menu.
Allows you to display graphical representations of node restraints, member hinges, master-slave
constraints and member offsets individually or all together.
271
View global origin
Click on the "View Global Origin" toolbar button or select "Global Origin" from the View menu.
Allows you to show the global origin.
272
View local axes
Click on the "View Local Axes" toolbar button or select "Local Axes" from the View menu.
Allows you to show the local axes for each member.
273
View full 3D member geometry
Click on the "View Full 3D Geometry" toolbar button or select "Full 3D Geometry" from the
View menu. You must then choose between "Internal 3D Viewer" and "Virtual Reality VRML 3D
Viewer".
Allows you to display the full 3D geometry of the structure from any viewpoint with all member
flanges and webs, etc. clearly visible. The 3D geometry is able to be fully rendered and has
hidden lines removed, resulting in quite realistic views of the structure. This feature has some
very useful advantages.
1. You can verify that the orientation of the members in the structure is as you intended.
2. You can check for clashing of members.
3. You can show architects and other non-engineers what the structure will look like in real life.
Virtual Reality VRML 3D Viewer
VRML is an industry standard 3D virtual reality system that shows objects in full 3D with hidden
line removal and real-time animation involving rotation, translation and "walk throughs". It can
display all shapes including complex cross sections generated by the shape builder.
There are many VRML viewers available that can be linked into SPACE GASS and used as
though they are part of SPACE GASS. You can download them for no charge from internet sites
such as:
www.web3d.org/vrml/browpi.htm
www.parallelgraphics.com/products
www.blaxxun.com/services/support/download
www.cai.com/cosmo
or search for "VRML Viewer" using a reputable search engine.
Because the VRML viewers come from different suppliers, they each have different features and
different methods of operation. For this reason, operating instructions are not included here. They
must be obtained from the help system of the viewer being used.
Dont just keep the first viewer you see. They are very different in their capabilities and method
of control, and you should try a few to see which one suits you best.
274
Internal 3D Viewer
This is a built-in viewer that can display most shapes, but is slower than VRML viewers for large
models and must regenerate the view every time you change the viewpoint or zoom level.
275
If you select "Cross sections", a 2D cross section of the member is displayed near each end of the
member. "Partial extrusions" results in the full 3D member geometry being shown, but being
terminated at a distance equal to the member depth from the member ends. "Full extrusions" refer
to the full 3D member geometry being shown all the way to the member ends.
For partial or full extrusions, you can also choose a hidden line removal option. "None" is very
fast, and can be extremely useful for quickly seeing how your members are orientated. "Fast"
refers to hidden line removal with all web and flange plates being given no thickness, while
"Full" refers to hidden line removal with all web and flange plates being given their correct
thickness.
You can generate a hardcopy of the full 3D frame geometry

without having to wait for it to be generated on the screen by simply initiating the 3D geometry
display, pressing ESC or the right mouse button as soon as it starts doing the hidden line removal
calculations, and then initiating the graphics hardcopy operation.
If you find that 3D geometry calculations are being done each time you re-generate the graphics
display area, just stop them by pressing ESC or the right mouse button, and then turn off the 3D
geometry mode by clicking on the "View full 3D geometry" toolbar button.
276
277
Labelling and annotation
Click on the "View Labelling and Annotation" toolbar button or select "Labelling and
Annotation" from the View menu or the floating menu.
Allows you to turn on or off the various text labelling and annotation options in SPACE GASS.
Once initiated, the following dialogue box appears.
You can turn items on or off by selecting or clearing the appropriate check boxes. In addition,
you can specify the text format and decimal places for diagram annotation.
278
View diagrams
Click on one of the buttons shown above in the left side toolbar or select from the matching items
in the View menu.
Allows you to show or hide loading diagrams, displacement diagrams, bending moment
diagrams, shear force diagrams, axial force diagrams, torsion diagrams, reactions and stress
diagrams on the undeformed frame. Diagrams of different types can be superimposed together.
For example, it is possible to include both bending moment and shear force diagrams together. In
addition, diagrams can be toggled on and off by clicking the button repeatedly.
279
View envelope
Click on the "View Envelope" toolbar button or select "Envelope" from the View menu.
Displays an envelope of any currently displayed displacement diagrams, bending moment
diagrams, shear force diagrams, axial force diagrams, torsion diagrams, reactions or stress
diagrams.
The load cases included in the envelope are the ones currently selected and displayed in the load
case selection combo box in the top toolbar. If you change the load case selection then the
envelope will be updated accordingly.
280
View dynamic mode shapes
Click on the "View Dynamic Mode Shapes" toolbar button or select "Dynamic Mode Shapes"
from the View menu.
Once initiated, the following keyboard commands are available.
1-9
Display mode shapes 1 to 9.
Display the next mode shape.
Display the previous mode shape.
C<case>
S
Change to load case <case>.

Change the display from animated to static.
Change the display from static to animated.
ARROW RIGHT
Increase the amplitude (scale).
ARROW LEFT
ARROW UP
Decrease the amplitude (scale).

Increase the frequency (speed).
ARROW DOWN
Decrease the frequency (speed).
You can exit from the dynamic mode shapes commands by pressing ESC or the right mouse
button. This also causes any animation to stop and revert back to a static display.
If you use REDRAW or any other operation which causes the graphics display area to be
regenerated while a dynamic mode shape is displayed, it will revert back to an animated display,
and the dynamic mode shapes commands will again become active.
Some examples of mode shapes for a plane grid from the dynamic frequency analysis module are
shown following.
1st dynamic mode shape for plane grid
281
4th dynamic mode shape for plane grid
282
View buckling mode shapes
Click on the "View Buckling Mode Shapes" toolbar button or select "Buckling Mode Shapes"
from the View menu.
Displays the buckling mode shapes for every buckling mode analysed in a buckling analysis. You
can limit the number of buckling modes shown by defining a filter and specifying a list of the
buckling modes required.
For 2D models, it is a good idea to view the buckling mode shapes from a 3D viewpoint so that
any out-of-plane buckling modes can be observed.
283
View steel member design groups
Click on the "View Steel Member Design Groups" toolbar button or select "Steel Member Design
Groups" from the View menu.
Shows steel member design groups as thick lines superimposed over the analysis model. The
groups are shown slightly shorter than their actual length so that you can easily see where they
start and finish.
To view the properties of a steel member design group you can simply click the right mouse
button on any part of a design group and then select "Steel Member Design Input Data" from the
floating menu. Note that this can be done regardless of whether the groups are displayed or not.
See also Steel member design data
284
View steel member top flanges
Click on the "View Steel Member Top Flanges" toolbar button or select "Steel Member Top
Flanges" from the View menu.
It is important to know which is the top flange for steel members so that the restraints you specify
for the top and bottom flanges do not get mixed up. This feature lets you display them as small
triangles that touch the top flange of each analysis member.
The top flange for a steel design group is taken to be the same as the top flange for the first
analysis member in the design group. Therefore, to find the top flange of a design group you must
look at just the first member in the group.
285
View steel member flange restraints
Click on the "View Steel Member Flange Restraints" toolbar button or select "Steel Member
Flange Restraints" from the View menu.
Displays all of the flange restraints that you have specified for each design group. The flange
restraints are shown adjacent to their location on the top and bottom flanges.
286
View steel member design results
Click on the "View Steel Member Design Results" toolbar button or select "Steel Member Design
Results" from the View menu.
If a steel member design has been performed, this feature shows the design results color coded for
the various levels of load factor or stress ratio achieved. The color divisions are chosen as
follows.
Load Factors:
>= 2.00
Stress Ratios:
<= 0.50 (Pass)
>= 1.10
>= 1.00
<= 0.90 (Pass)

<= 1.00 (Pass)
< 1.00
> 1.00
(Fail)
< 0.90
> 1.10
(Fail)
< 0.50
Design error
> 2.00 (Fail)

Design error
Not designed
Not designed
You can change the colors by selecting "Graphics Colors " from the Config menu.
To view brief design result details of a steel member design group (see below) you can simply
click the right mouse button on any part of a design group and then select "Steel Member Design
Results" from the floating menu. You can then simply click on other members to view their
results. Note that this can be done regardless of whether the design results are displayed or not.
287

You can also use filters to restrict the display of members based on their design results.
288
View steel connection drawings
Click on the "View Connection Drawings" toolbar button or select "Connection Drawings" from
the View menu.
This feature allows you to view or print fully detailed and annotated steel connection drawings
for connections that have been designed with the steel connection design module. If you have the
CAD interface module, you can also export these drawings to DXF files, ready for use by a CAD
system.
Connection drawings can only be accessed here if you requested a view file to be
generated during the connection design phase (see also Running a steel connection design).
Connections which have not been designed or which failed during the design phase cannot be
viewed or printed graphically.
Once initiated, the first steel connection drawing is displayed and the following keyboard
commands are available.
G<num>
Go to connection <num>.
N<scale>
Change the drawing scale to <scale>.
Zoom window.
WP
WF
Zoom previous.
Zoom full.
Pan.
Export the drawing to a DXF file.
H
PAGE UP
Generate a hardcopy of the drawing.

Go to the previous connection.
PAGE DOWN
Go to the next connection.
You can exit from the connection viewing mode by pressing ESC or the right mouse button, or by
clicking on the "View Connection Drawings" toolbar button.
The following drawings are examples of the types of connections that can be designed and drawn
by SPACE GASS.
289
Beam to column connection
Beam to beam connection
290
Redraw
Click on the "Redraw" toolbar button or select "Redraw" from the View menu or the floating
menu.
This feature simply redraws the graphics display area with the same scale, viewpoint and
contents.
The REDRAW facility can be useful for removing stray lines or

text which are sometimes left after a MOVE, COPY, ROTATE, MIRROR or other graphics
operation.
291
Zoom
Click on the "Zoom" toolbar button or select "Zoom" from the View menu or the floating menu.
Alternatively, you can select some nodes or members and then select "Zoom to" from the floating
menu.
This feature allows you to zoom in or out on the entire structure or just a part of it. There are four
zoom modes as follows.
1. ZOOM full - redraws the entire structure at a scale that allows it to fit comfortably on the
screen.
2. ZOOM window - requires you to place a window around a portion of the structure which it
then enlarges and redraws to fill the screen.
3. ZOOM in/out - requires you to position the graphics cursor at the zoom centre and then
press the left mouse button to ZOOM in or the right mouse button to ZOOM out.
4. ZOOM previous - reverts back to the previously displayed view.
If you have selected ZOOM Window, you can revert to ZOOM

Full or ZOOM Previous by pressing the keyboard F or P keys while selecting the window.
292
Pan
Click on the "Pan" toolbar button or select "Pan" from the View menu or the floating menu.
This feature allows you to move the structure in any direction on the screen. It is useful if you
cannot see the entire structure at once and you don't want to change the scale. You simply move
the structure until you can see the desired portion.
The sequence of operation is as follows.
1. Pick two points that represent the relative movement through which the structure is to be
panned across the screen.
2. The structure is redrawn at the new position.
The PAN operation does not change node coordinates, it simply translates your
viewpoint.
293
Scales
Click on the "Scales" toolbar button or select "Scales" from the View menu or the floating menu.
This feature allows you to change the scales of the undeformed frame or any of the superimposed
diagrams.
All scales initially default to values which allow the diagrams to fit neatly into the available
graphics display area. If you change any of the scales, they are retained with the job.
The "Displacements factor" and "Buckling mode factor" settings are distortion factors
rather than scales. Increasing their values causes the relevant diagrams to increase in size.
Increasing any of the other "Scale" settings causes the relevant diagrams to be reduced in size.
294
Find
Click on the "Find" toolbar button or select "Find" from the View menu or the floating menu.
The find tool can be used to quickly locate nodes or members in your structure.
You can find nodes or members by listing their numbers directly or by specifying their properties
or the nodes/members to which they are connected. Only those nodes or members which satisfy
all of the find criteria in the dialogue box are found.
When a node or member is found, it is highlighted graphically the same as if you had selected it
by picking it with the mouse. You can use the highlighting simply as a visual reference to see
where the found nodes or members are in your structure, or you can click on a toolbar button or
click the right mouse button and choose from the floating menu that appears to perform an
operation on the selected nodes or members. You can cancel the highlighting by pressing the
keyboard ESC key or by selecting "Cancel" from the floating menu.
295
After the Find command highlights the nodes or members you

are searching for, you can perform many graphics operations on them by clicking the right mouse
button and then selecting from the floating menu that appears.
296
Filters
This feature allows you to restrict the amount of data that is displayed in the graphics display area
or in output reports. You can use it to restrict the display to specific nodes, node types, members,
member types, section properties, material properties, load types, buckling modes, steel members,
steel connections, axis limits or any combinations of these.
To create a filter from nodes or members selected graphically
Select some nodes or members graphically by picking them or by using the "Find" feature and
then select "Create filter" from the floating menu, after which the following dialogue box
appears.
To save the current selection as a filter, just click on the combo box in the above dialogue, select
a filter number and then type in the filters name. You can overwrite previously saved filters or
you can select and name an unused filter.
An alternative method of creating a filter from nodes or members selected graphically is to use
the "Select" buttons in the main filters dialogue box as explained below.
To create or edit filters
Click on the "Filters" toolbar button
menu.
or select "Filters" from the View menu or the floating
297
For each filter you can select one or more check boxes and then specify the corresponding items
to be included in the filter. For example, if you specify a member list of 1,2-6,9,10 and a section
property list of 2,3, the filter will include only those members in the specified list that use section
properties 2 or 3. The more check boxes you enable and corresponding items you specify, the
more you limit the nodes or members that are included in the filter.
You can define up to 200 different filters and scroll between them in the dialogue box by
changing the "Filter" numeric field.
The Include/Exclude buttons simply reverse the effect of the items in the filter line. For example,
if you specify a node list of 2-5,9,13 and select "Include" then those nodes will be included in the
filter. However, if you select "Exclude" then all the nodes except 2-5,9 and 13 will be included in
the filter.
You can use the "Select" buttons in the "Nodes" and "Members" lines to graphically select or edit
node and member lists rather than having to type them in manually. You can also use the "Select"
buttons to graphically add to or modify filters that were previously defined using other than node
or member lists.
298

Filters can also be based on lists of steel design members or connections, or steel member design
results.
The "X-axis", "Y-axis", and "Z-axis" fields allow you to specify minimum and maximum limits
for one or more axis directions. You can enter ranges into the fields manually or select them
graphically by clicking on their "Select" button. Any parts of the frame which fall outside of these
limits are excluded from the filter.
You can also limit bending moment, shear force and stress diagrams to specific local member
planes. This setting allows you to view the moments, shears and stresses for one local axis plane
at a time.
The "Grey out members not in filter" checkbox allows you to show in a faint line or completely
hide any members that are not included in the active filter.
To select and activate a filter
Click on the "Filters" toolbar combo box
and make your selection.
299
Views
This feature lets you save everything about the current graphics display including its load case
selections, filter selection, viewpoint, and any diagrams or node and member properties that
might be shown.
To save the current display as a view or to manage the currently saved views
or select "Views" from the View menu or the floating
Click on the "Views" toolbar button
menu. You must then select "Save the Current View" from the floating menu that appears.
To save the current view, just click on the combo box in the above dialogue, select a view number
and then type in the views name. You can overwrite previously saved views or you can select
and name an unused view.
You can save up to 100 different views.
To manage (delete, renumber or rename) previously saved views
Click on the "Views" toolbar button
or select "Views" from the View menu or the floating
menu. You must then select "Manage the Saved Views" from the floating menu that appears.
300
To delete, renumber or rename any of the previously saved views, click on the desired view in the
datasheet shown above and then delete or edit it as required.
To select and activate a view
Click on the "Views" toolbar combo box
and make your selection.
301
Viewpoint
Click on the "Viewpoint" toolbar button or select "Viewpoint" from the View menu or the floating
menu.
This feature allows you to rotate your viewpoint around the structure. You can obtain an elevation
from any side, a plan view or a view from any other position.
The current viewpoint setting is displayed near the top-right corner of the graphics display area
together with a small set of axes. You can watch the axes move as you change the viewpoint or,
by activating real-time structure rotation, you can also watch the entire structure rotating as you
change the viewpoint.
There are a number of ways to change the viewpoint as explained as follows.
1. Clicking on the arrow buttons above the side toolbar buttons (as follows) allows you to
change the viewpoint quickly without having to first click on any other buttons. After
reaching the desired viewpoint, pick a point anywhere inside the graphics display area to
cause a redraw at the new viewpoint.
2. Choosing "Viewpoint-View real-time" from the View menu or the floating menu allows you
to rotate the entire structure on the screen using the keyboard arrow keys. After reaching the
desired viewpoint, pick a point anywhere inside the graphics display area to cause a redraw
at the new viewpoint.
3. Choosing one of the "View front/View plan/View (30,10)/etc." items after clicking on the
"Viewpoint" toolbar button or from the "Viewpoint" item of the View menu or the floating
menu causes the structure to be immediately redrawn at the new viewpoint. The "(30,10)"
item corresponds to a horizontal angle of 30 and a vertical angle of 10. It is a useful
viewpoint for 3D structures.
4. Choosing "Select" after clicking on the "Viewpoint" toolbar button or from the "Viewpoint"
item of the View menu or the floating menu causes the following dialogue box to appear.
302
You can change the viewpoint by editing the "Horizontal angle" and "Vertical angle" text
boxes directly, or you can click on one of the arrow buttons at the bottom-left corner of the
dialogue. When using the arrow buttons, the amount by which the viewpoint changes can be
controlled by setting the value in the "Angle increment" field.
Alternatively, you can click on one of the seven plane buttons which take you immediately
to a front, plan, left, (30,10), right, back or bottom viewpoint.
SPACE GASS normally assumes that the global Y-axis is vertical when displaying the
structure graphically, however the viewpoint dialogue box allows you to change the vertical
axis to one of the other global axes.
The viewpoint settings (including the "Vertical axis" setting) only affect the graphics display.
They dont affect the local axis definitions, the steel design top flange definitions, or the analysis
and design modules in any way.
303
Query frame
For full details, refer to Node properties and Member properties.
304
Query analysis results

You can query the analysis results graphically in either of two ways:
To click on a node or member and get its analysis results in a scrollable dialogue box
Click on the "Query Analysis Results" toolbar button or select "Analysis Results" from the Query
menu or click on the "Results" button in the "Node Properties" or "Member Properties" dialogue
boxes.
The scrollable results dialogue box shown below displays a useful summary of the analysis
results for those nodes or members you select.
While the dialogue box is open, you can simply click on any other nodes or members to have
their results displayed.
To move a crosshair along a member and get its analysis results at the crosshair
location
Choose an item other than "Frame" and "Analysis Results" from the Query menu.
This method lets you nominate a load case and the number of intermediate member stations as
shown in the dialogue as follows, followed by picking a member to query.
305

A crosshair cursor is then positioned at the node A end of the member and a line of information
near the bottom of the SPACE GASS window shows the analysis results for the selected member
at the crosshair location. You can then use the keyboard arrow keys to move the crosshair cursor
to any location on any member in the frame, with the coincident analysis results being
continuously updated and reported in the information line.
To get a fully detailed analysis report, refer to Frame analysis report.
306
Query steel member design results
Click on the "Query Steel member Design Results" toolbar button or select "Steel Member Design
Results" from the Query menu.
The scrollable results dialogue box shown below displays a useful summary of the design results
for those members you select.
While the dialogue box is open, you can simply click on any other members to have their design
results displayed.
To get a fully detailed steel member design report, refer to Steel design report.
307
Grid
Click on the "Grid" toolbar button or select "Grid" from the Settings menu or press
"SHIFT+CTRL+G" on the keyboard (or just "G" if a graphics command is active).
This feature allows you to display a rectangular grid in the XY, XZ or YZ global planes. It is a
useful visual reference as you move the cursor around the screen. The GRID can be set to any
desired size provided it is not too fine or too coarse to be properly displayed. The GRID setting
uses the same system of units as the structure being displayed.
It can be toggled on or off by again clicking on the "Grid" toolbar button or re-selecting the
"Grid" menu item.
The current GRID setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated above).
If you change the operating plane while a grid is displayed, the grid will not be updated until you
perform an operation which refreshes the entire screen such as PAN, ZOOM, VIEWPOINT,
SCALE, REDRAW, etc.
The grid can only be displayed in one of the global planes. It cannot be offset a distance
out along one of the axes. If you are operating in a plane which is offset from the 0,0,0 global
origin and your viewpoint is at an angle to the plane you are working in, do not try to use the
displayed grid as a reference. It is only useful if you are operating in the same plane as the grid or
if your viewpoint is perpendicular to the operating plane.
308
Snap
Click on the "Snap" toolbar button or select "Snap" from the Settings menu or press
"SHIFT+CTRL+S" on the keyboard (or just "S" if a graphics command is active).
This feature activates a secondary crosshair graphics cursor which indicates the actual selection
point and which moves in discrete user defined increments. It allows you to accurately position
the graphics cursor. The SNAP facility can be set to any desired increment which may or may not
match the GRID setting (as desired). The SNAP increment uses the same system of units as the
structure being displayed.
It can be toggled on or off by again clicking on the "Snap" toolbar button or re-selecting the
"Snap" menu item.
The current SNAP setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated above).
For convenience, SNAP is automatically turned off temporarily during some graphics
operations such as when you are simply picking members. This avoids the problem of not easily
being able to pick objects due to the SNAP stepping effect.
When SNAP is turned off, you may notice that the graphics cursor moves in very small
increments which are not useful fractions of whole numbers. These increments actually represent
the distance between pixels on the screen. When you position the cursor on a known point, the
coordinates display sometimes indicates that the cursor is not exactly on the point. This is because
there is no pixel exactly on the point and the cursor has therefore moved to the closest pixel.
SPACE GASS, however ignores the small movement to the closest pixel and assumes that the
cursor is located exactly on the desired point. When SNAP is turned on this does not occur.
309
Ortho
Click on the "Ortho Mode" toolbar button or select "Ortho Mode" from the Settings menu or
press "SHIFT+CTRL+O" on the keyboard (or just "O" if a graphics command is active).
This feature allows you to limit lines to only horizontal or vertical. If ORTHO is on, it activates a
secondary crosshair graphics cursor which indicates the actual selection point and which moves
in such a way that only horizontal or vertical lines (relative to the frame global axes) can be
drawn. It is a very useful aid for drawing and positioning members, as most structures contain
predominantly horizontal and vertical members.
It can be toggled on or off by again clicking on the "Ortho Mode" toolbar button or re-selecting
the "Ortho Mode" menu item.
The current ORTHO setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated above).
If you are drawing new members with ORTHO on and

ATTACH set to "NEAR/END", then the attachment point for any new member which attaches to
an intermediate point on another member is positioned so that the new member stays truly
orthogonal. You can also use ATTACH set to "ORTHOGONAL" for the same result.
310
Attach
Click on the "Attach Mode" toolbar button or select "Attach Mode" from the Settings menu or
press "SHIFT+CTRL+A" on the keyboard (or just "A" if a graphics command is active).
This feature allows you to attach nodes, members and reference points to existing nodes or
members without having to position the cursor exactly on them. If ATTACH is on (as indicated
on the toggle button above), the program displays an aperture circle with the graphics cursor and
allows you to attach to existing nodes members when you pick points near them. The aperture
circle indicates how close you must get to a node or member in order to attach to it. The point of
attachment depends on the ATTACH setting.
ACTION
RESULT
ATTACH OFF
ATTACH MIDDLE/END
ATTACH NEAREST/END
ATTACH MIDDLE
ATTACH NEAREST
ATTACH ORTHOGONAL
ATTACH PERPENDICULAR
The settings that may be displayed on the attach button are:

Off:
Middle/End:
closest.
Function is deactivated.
Attaches to the middle or the end, whichever is
Nearest/End:
within the
Attaches to the nearest point or, if an end falls
311
n%/End:
along
aperture circle, attaches to the end.

Attaches to a point at the nearest n% increment
the member, or the end, whichever is closest.
Middle:
Attaches to the middle.
Nearest:
Attaches to the nearest point.
Orthogonal:
Attaches to a point that makes the line being drawn

exactly horizontal or vertical.
Perpendicular:
Attaches to a point that makes the line being drawn

perpendicular to the member being attached to.
For example, if you draw a new member and wish to attach it to the end of an existing member,
you can simply set ATTACH to "MIDDLE/END" and then locate the start of the new member
near the end of the existing member. The two members will be automatically connected with a
common node at the intersection point.
To connect a member to the mid point of another member ensure that ATTACH is set to
"MIDDLE" and then simply position the end of the first member to within the aperture circle
radius of the second member. The second member is automatically broken into two and a node
inserted at the intersection point.
The attach setting is only used if the aperture circle touches a node or member.
312
Plane
Click on the "Operating Plane" toolbar button or select "Operating Plane" from the Settings
menu or press "SHIFT+CTRL+P" on the keyboard (or "X", "Y", "Z" or "P" if a graphics
command is active).
This feature allows you to specify an operating plane in or parallel to the global XY, XZ or YZ
planes in which the graphics cursor will move. It allows you to accurately move the graphics
cursor to any desired position in 3D space.
The current PLANE setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated above).
The "Offset" field is the distance from the operating plane to the structure origin. It can be seen
by observing the coordinates display as you move the graphics cursor.
You can often take advantage of the fact that when picking
points in any graphics operation, the operating plane offset is changed to match the coordinates of
the most recently picked point.
If you change the viewpoint such that the operating plane is no

longer visible, the program will automatically change the operating plane to a visible one.
313
Coordinates
Click on the "Coordinates Display" toolbar button or select "Coordinates Display" from the
Settings menu or press "SHIFT+CTRL+C" on the keyboard (or just "C" if a graphics command
is active).
This feature allows you to cycle between cartesian and polar coordinates using absolute or
relative modes, to control the 3D coordinates display which shows the position of the graphics
cursor as it is moved in the graphics display area.
The current COORDINATES setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated
above).
Choices are: Cartesian,
Cartesian-Relative,
Polar,
Polar-Relative,
Off.
When a graphics operation is active, the actual coordinates of the graphics cursor are displayed at
the bottom-right corner of the screen.
If you select the second corner of a window or line and the COORDINATES setting is in a
relative mode then the coordinates displayed are relative to the first point of the window or line.
Relative coordinates are the same as absolute coordinates when you select a single point or the
start of a line.
The COORDINATES setting does not restrict your choice of Cartesian, polar, absolute
and relative modes when inputting points from the keyboard. For example, you can enter a point
from the keyboard using polar coordinates even if the COORDINATES display is set to Cartesian
coordinates (see also Using the keyboard to position points).
314
Aperture size
Select "Aperture Size" from the Settings menu.
This feature allows you to change the size of the aperture circle. The aperture circle appears when
nodes and/or members can be selected graphically. It provides a visual indication of how close
you must get to a node or member in order to attach to it or select it.
The aperture circle size is in actual screen millimetre units.
You can also specify the aperture size in the "General Configuration" item of the Config
menu. Any aperture size set here will be retained for all jobs, while the aperture size which you
set in the Settings menu is temporary only. It applies to the current job only and will be reset to
the default value when the current job is closed or another job opened or created.
315
Crosshair size
Select "Crosshair Size" from the Settings menu.
This feature allows you to change the size of the crosshair cursor. The crosshair cursor becomes
visible and indicates the actual selection point when SNAP or ORTHO modes are on.
The crosshair cursor size is in actual screen millimetre units.
You can also specify the crosshair size in the "General Configuration" item of the Config
menu. Any crosshair size set here will be retained for all jobs, while the crosshair size which you
set in the Settings menu is temporary only. It applies to the current job only and will be reset to
the default value when the current job is closed and/or another job opened or created.
316
Curved line resolution

Select "Curved Line Resolution" from the Settings menu.
All curved lines drawn with SPACE GASS are actually a series of short straight lines. In most
cases it is very difficult to differentiate between a true curve and a series of ten straight line
segments placed along the curve.
This feature allows you to specify how many straight line segments per member are used to
approximate curved lines in displacement, bending moment, shear force, axial force and stress
diagrams.
You can also specify the curved line resolution in the "General Configuration" item of the
Config menu, however this only affects newly created jobs and not the current job. Unlike the
temporary aperture and crosshair size settings, the curved line resolution setting is retained with
the job.
317

Select "Moments Shown on Tension Side" from the Settings menu.
The convention for drawing bending moment diagrams varies from country to country.
This feature allows you to display bending moments on either the tension or compression side of
a member.
You can also specify the bending moment diagram sign in the "General Configuration"
item of the Config menu, however this only affects newly created jobs and not the current job.
Unlike the temporary aperture and crosshair size settings, the bending moment diagram sign
setting is retained with the job.
318
Diagram shading
Select "Diagram Shading" from the Settings menu.
This feature allows you to specify shading for displacement, bending moment, shear force, axial
force and stress diagrams. Shading is normally turned off as it often makes multiple
superimposed diagrams hard to read.
You can also specify the diagram shading in the "General Configuration" item of the
Config menu, however this only affects newly created jobs and not the current job. Unlike the
temporary aperture and crosshair size settings, the diagram shading setting is retained with the
job.
319
Analysis
SPACE GASS uses the well documented stiffness method combined with a wavefront equation
solver to model the elastic behaviour of structures. It is capable of performing five types of
analysis, as follows.
Linear (1st order) static analysis
Non-linear (2nd order) static analysis

Buckling analysis
The SPACE GASS analysis modules can accurately deal with semi-rigid joints, elastic supports,
master-slave constraints, member offsets, tension/compression-only members, and cable
members (static and buckling analysis only).
Although the wavefront method is not highly sensitive to badly numbered structures, a wavefront
optimizer which automatically minimizes the frontwidth is also available with SPACE GASS.
The wavefront optimizer means that both the node and member numbering sequences are
incidental to the program.
SPACE GASS has been dimensioned dynamically. This means that during the analysis phase
SPACE GASS automatically adjusts its memory requirements according to the size of the job. If
the available memory in your computer is enough to solve the structure entirely in memory then
the analysis phase will be extremely fast. If you run out of memory during an analysis then some
of the analysis data will be automatically written to disk and the analysis phase will not be quite
as fast. You should aim to have as much of the data as possible held in memory during the
analysis by minimizing the frontwidth or by increasing the memory capacity of your computer.
To see the results of an analysis, you can produce an output report on the screen or printer. You
can also query and view the results graphically, or obtain a graphics hardcopy.
See also Query analysis results.
See also Graphics hardcopy.
320
Static analysis
For non-cable members, SPACE GASS uses the common small displacement theory in its linear
and non-linear static analysis solver. This theory assumes that the equilibrium equations for a
member, which are based on the initial undeformed node positions, are still valid after the frame
has deformed. The deformation of most civil engineering structures fit well within the small
displacement category. Small displacement theory may, however be unsuitable for some highly
flexible structures.
For cable members, SPACE GASS uses a large displacement theory that has been designed to
cope with the highly non-linear behaviour and large deflections that occur within cables (see also
Cable members). For structures that contain both cables and non-cable members, it is important to
note that while the large local cable deflections are allowed for in the analysis, the non-cable parts
of the structure are still analysed using small displacement theory.
Although a SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis includes simple buckling checks on
individual members and on the frame as a whole, a full buckling analysis is usually required in
addition to the static analysis. If the buckling capacity of the frame has been exceeded then the
static analysis results are invalid and should not used!
The SPACE GASS static analysis module is capable of performing linear or non-linear analyses.
Furthermore, you can analyse some load cases linearly and others non-linearly in the same model.
If the static analysis results are to be used for a steel design to AISC-LRFD, Eurocode 3,
AS4100 or NZS3404, the load cases used in the strength design must be analysed non-linearly
unless you know that the second order effects are negligible.
The non-linear static analysis facility available with SPACE GASS considers geometric nonlinearities rather than material non-linearities.
Material non-linearities occur as a result of the non-linear stress-strain relationship of most
materials. This effect becomes more significant as the material reaches its yield point and the
stress-strain curve flattens out. SPACE GASS does not consider material non-linearities because
they are relatively insignificant in comparison with geometric non-linearities and because their
effect only becomes noticeable when the material is highly stressed.
There are many types of geometric non-linearities, some of which can be significant and many of
which are relatively insignificant. The most important geometric non-linearities are:
P- effect
P- effect
Axial shortening effect
321
Tension/compression-only effect
Catenary cable effect
SPACE GASS considers all five effects and they are explained in detail as follows.
Some sources refer to the additional effects of shear deformations and rigid end gussets as being
geometric non-linearities also. While SPACE GASS fully considers these additional effects
during the analysis phase, it does not consider them to be non-linearities because they can be
solved completely in one analysis and do not require an iterative procedure.
322
Displacements, forces, moments and reactions

During the static analysis phase, there are three basic groups of data that have to be calculated.
They are node displacements, member end actions (forces and moments) and support reactions.
Node displacements
Node displacements are calculated for each load case being analysed and for every unrestrained
degree of freedom in the structure. Each node may translate along or rotate about any or all of the
three global axis directions. Restrained (fixed or deleted) degrees of freedom are automatically
assigned displacements of zero except for those nodes which have prescribed displacements
specified. In such cases those nodes are assigned the prescribed displacement only for the
particular load case in which they were specified.
Member forces and moments
There are twelve forces and moments which can be calculated for each member. Each end of a
member is subjected to an axial force, a torsion, bending moments about its y and z axes and
shear forces along its y and z axes.
The program is also capable of calculating forces and moments at user defined intermediate
points along members. These intermediate values, however are not calculated during the analysis
phase. Instead they are calculated as required when the output report is produced.
Reactions
External node reactions are the forces and moments exerted by the structure on the supports. They
are calculated only for restrained nodes and are referenced by the global axes system.
323
P-D effect (big)

The P- effect occurs as a result of the ends of an axially loaded member moving laterally with
respect to each other. A moment of P. is induced which alters the members equilibrium and
causes the relative member end movement to change further.
P- effect
Unless the axial load P exceeds the members critical buckling load, a point of equilibrium
eventually occurs such that the P- moment is balanced by moments applied by other members or
restraints.
324
P-d effect (little)

The P- effect occurs as a result of lateral curvature being induced in an axially loaded member.
A parabolic moment distribution is induced along the length of the member which alters the
members effective stiffness and causes the curvature to change further.
P- effect
Unless the axial load P exceeds the members critical buckling load, a point of equilibrium
eventually occurs such that the P- moments are balanced by internal flexural resistance built up
within the member.
325
Axial shortening
Axial shortening estimates the effect of shortening of the straight line distance between a
members end nodes due to induced local curvature in the member.
Axial shortening can also allow the tension in a member to contribute (along with flexure and
shear) towards resisting lateral loads (provided that intermediate nodes are present). It is, however
limited to small displacements and is not suitable for flexible members or cables.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Axial shortening should not be used to model flexible members or cables.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
The axial shortening effect is generally non-conservative because it can drastically reduce
deflections and bending moments and should therefore be used with much caution!
326
Tension-only and compression-only effects

While in tension, tension-only members act identically to normal members with axial, flexural,
torsional and shear capacity. However, if they go into compression then they are automatically
disabled and act as if they have been removed from the model. Similarly, compression-only
members act identically to normal members unless they are disabled as a result of going into
tension.
Although the solution of tension-only or compression-only members requires an iterative analysis
method, SPACE GASS puts it into a slightly different category to the other non-linear effects and
makes it available in either a linear or a non-linear static analysis.
Unlike the P-, P- and axial shortening effects, tension-only and compression-only effects result
in an exact solution provided that convergence can be achieved.
For tension/compression-only effects, convergence is sometimes difficult (if not impossible),
especially if the frame is highly symmetrical. If convergence is not achieved after three iterations,
SPACE GASS relaxes the tension/compression-only criteria slightly in an attempt to improve the
chances of reaching convergence.
During the first three iterations SPACE GASS disables tension-only members which have either
end in compression. During iterations four and five it disables tension-only members which have
the average of their end forces in compression. During the sixth and further iterations it disables
tension-only members which have both ends in compression. A similar procedure is followed for
compression-only members which have tensile forces at their ends.
If tension/compression-only effects have been activated with "No reversal" then convergence is
usually achieved after two or three iterations, even for highly symmetrical structures. This "No
reversal" method is not usually recommended, however because it sometimes results in members
being prematurely disabled and then not being able to be re-enabled in later iterations after the
axial forces have been redistributed around the frame.
Tension/compression-only effects are ignored by the dynamic frequency analysis module.

No tension-only or compression-only members are disabled in a dynamic frequency analysis,
regardless of their axial force.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Tension-only members should not be used to model cables.
See also Members.
327
Cable members
The analysis of cable members requires special treatment because of their pure axial capacity,
large displacements and highly non-linear behaviour.
Cable members never actually go into compression, they simply sag or change their shape so that
they are in equilibrium at all times. They have no flexural, torsional or shear capacity, and resist
lateral loads by tension alone.
There are a number of special considerations that need to be taken into account when modelling
structures that contain cables as follows.
1. Cables must be loaded with at least one uniformaly distributed load (self weight will do) in
every load case they are analysed for. If not, they will be treated as tension-only members.
2. Nodes connected only to cables must be restrained with RRRFFF to prevent instabilities
caused by the cable-only nodes being free to rotate without resistance.
These points are explained in more detail as follows.
Cable loading
Cables always have to have at least self weight or some other lateral uniformly distributed load to
keep them in tension. Without a lateral load they are treated by SPACE GASS as tension-only
members which become disabled if they go into compression. Furthermore, tension-only
members resist lateral loads by flexure rather than tension and hence their response to lateral
loads is very different to that of cables.
It is therefore important that you analyse only those load cases that contain lateral loads on all the
cable members. Consider, for example, a structure containing cables with the following load
cases:
Load case 1:
cables)
Self weight (includes lateral loads on all the
Load case 2:
Dead load (no lateral loads on the cables)
Load case 3:
Live load (no lateral loads on the cables)
Load case 4:
cables)
Wind load (includes lateral loads on some of the
Load case 10:
1+2+3
Load case 11:
1+2+4
Load case 12:
2+3+4
328

For correct results, you should only analyse load cases 1, 10 and 11. Load cases 2, 3, 4 and 12
have cable members that are not laterally loaded and which will therefore be treated as tensiononly members in those load cases.
Cable members can be loaded with UDLs, thermal loads, prestress loads and self weight. For
"Local" or "Global projected" UDLs, the total load is equal to the load per unit length multiplied
by the actual (for "Local") or projected (for "Global projected") distance between the end nodes.
For "Global inclined" UDLs, the total load is equal to the load per unit length multiplied by the
unstrained cable length.
Restraining nodes connected to cables
Because cable members have zero moment capacity, in order to avoid instabilities you must
restrain all rotational degrees of freedom for nodes which are connected to cable members only.
Cable end fixities of FFFFFF, FFFRRR, FFFFFR, FFFFRR all give the same results.
For example, cable members that have been sub-divided or cables that are connected to other
cables result in nodes that are connected only to cables. Because the cables offer no rotational
resistance, the cable nodes are free to rotate without resistance. They must therefore be restrained
with node restraints of RRRFFF. This allows them to translate but not rotate.
Cable convergence
Convergence is often a problem for structures which contain cables because of their large
deflections and highly non-linear behaviour. There are four recognized methods for obtaining
convergence.
1. One load step, many iterations, no damping.
2. One load step, many iterations, deflection related damping.
3. One load step, many iterations, damping with uniform relaxation.
4. Many load steps, one iteration per load step, no damping.
All four methods give the same results for the same final convergence. Methods 1 and 2 are
generally the fastest but they dont achieve convergence in all structures, especially flexible
structures. Methods 3 and 4 are more likely to achieve convergence but sometimes require more
iterations. For methods 3 and 4, the number of iterations required is pre-defined by the number of
relaxation steps or load steps that you specify at the start of the analysis.
For each method, but methods 3 and 4 in particular, it is generally apparent after only a few
iterations whether convergence is going to be achieved or not. If the convergence level is not
steadily creeping upwards or has not reached about 60% or 70% by 5 or 6 iterations then it is
unlikely that convergence will be achieved. If this happens, it is generally best to stop the analysis
and then start it again with a different method, or change the damping, or increase the number of
load steps. For example, using method 4, it is quite feasible that 50 load steps will converge
where 40 load steps will not.
329
In some instances, you may wish to apply a prestress load to a

cable member instead of specifying a non-zero unstrained cable length. The prestress load P that
is equivalent to an unstrained cable length L is given by the equation:
P = ( L D)
AE
D
where D = chord length,

A = cross sectional area,
E = Youngs modulus of elasticity.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
If cable members exist in your structure, it is imperative that you specify them as "Cable"
members in your SPACE GASS model. If you try to model them as "Normal" or "Tension-only"
members, the results will be incorrect.
See also Members.
See also Thermal/prestress loads.
330
Non-linear analysis procedure

The procedure that SPACE GASS adopts to perform a non-linear static analysis depends on
whether axial shortening has been activated or not. If axial shortening has not been activated then
the approach is as follows.
1. An initial linear static analysis is performed.
2. For each member in each load case, a modified stiffness matrix is assembled.
For non-cable members, the modified stiffness is based on the member axial forces
calculated in the previous analysis iteration. The modifications to the stiffness matrix are in
accordance with the theory presented by Ghali and Neville (2). They involve changes to the
flexural stiffness terms, taking into account P- and P- effects (if activated).
For cable members, the modified stiffness is based on the unstrained cable length, the cable
lateral loads and the deflected position of the cable ends calculated in the previous analysis
iteration.
3. Note that the non-cable member fixed end actions due to intermediate member loads are not
adjusted for the change in flexural stiffness of the member. This is an approximation which
is not significant in most cases but which can affect the results for members which have
large axial forces in them. For such members, the approximation can be improved with the
addition of intermediate nodes.
4. The frame is re-analysed with the modified member stiffness matrices. In this and later
analysis iterations, each load case must be solved separately because the structure stiffness
matrix is now different for each load case. This can take considerably longer than the initial
linear analysis, especially if there are numerous load cases.
5. The results of the latest analysis are compared with the previous analysis and the level of
convergence is displayed on the screen. If the level of convergence has reached the
requested convergence accuracy then the results have converged and the analysis terminates.
If not, steps 2 and 3 are repeated for the unconverged load cases until a solution is reached.
If some load cases have still not converged after the specified number of iterations per load
step then the program pauses and asks if further iterations are required. If no further
iterations are requested, the analysis terminates and the results for the converged load cases
only are saved.
If axial shortening has been activated then the approach is slightly different as follows.
1. The same as in step 1 for no axial shortening.
2. The same as in step 2 for no axial shortening, except that the modifications to the non-cable
member stiffness matrices take into account P- (if activated) and local axial shortening
effects only. The modifications for local axial shortening are in accordance with the theory
331

presented by Harrison (1).
P- and global axial shortening effects are taken into account with modifications to the noncable member transformation matrices based on the deflections of the member end nodes in
the previous analysis. Note that this is effectively the same as modifying the node
coordinates in accordance with the deflections from the previous analysis so that the
structural geometry is slightly modified for the next iteration.
3. The same as in step 3 for no axial shortening, except that new member transformation arrays
are now involved also.
4. The same as in step 4 for no axial shortening.
332
Static analysis buckling

Although a SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis does not perform a full buckling analysis, it
does include some buckling checks as described below. For details of the capabilities of a full
buckling analysis, refer to Buckling analysis.
1. The SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis includes a simple buckling check on individual
members that is intended to alert you if a member is being removed from the model due to
its Euler buckling load being exceeded. However, it is not a full buckling check that
considers groups of members or the structure as a whole.
A common misconception appears to be that if the static analysis passes this simple single
member buckling check then buckling is not a problem. Another misconception is that if the
simple buckling check fails, you can just sub-divide the buckled member until the error goes
away and everything will be Ok. Clearly, this doesn't fix the problem, it just transfers the
buckling from a single member mode to a multi-member mode that is no longer detected by
the single member buckling check. The only way to be sure that buckling is not a problem is
to perform a full buckling analysis.
2. The SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis also includes a frame buckling check that
simply alerts you if the structure's buckling capacity has been exceeded. This will allow you
to determine if the static analysis results are reliable or not, and nothing more. It will not
calculate member effective lengths or the buckling load factor, and hence will not be able to
alert you if buckling is close to happening. Consequently, a full buckling analysis will still
be required for most structures.
It is very important to note that the results of a static analysis will be incorrect if the structure's
buckling capacity has been exceeded, and hence one of the key roles of a buckling analysis is to
ratify the static analysis results.
Although most practical structures do not come close to reaching their buckling load, unless you
know that your frame has not reached its buckling load, you should perform a buckling analysis.
See also Buckling analysis.
333
The wavefront optimizer

The SPACE GASS wavefront optimizer temporarily re-organises the structure during the analysis
phase to achieve close to the smallest possible frontwidth with the fastest possible analysis time.
The basic philosophy behind the optimizer is quite simple. It alters the order in which members
are loaded into the stiffness array by starting at one end of the structure and proceeding through it
to the other end in one complete pass. Depending on the operating mode selected, the
optimization can follow an irregular path, a straight line path or a circular path.
The optimizer usually reduces the frontwidth to within 95% of the optimum, however some
structures such as large cubes which do not have a well defined "long dimension" can reduce its
efficiency to almost 60%. Large cubic structures therefore may require careful member
numbering if they produce excessively large frontwidths.
If you have already numbered the members to achieve the smallest possible frontwidth then the
optimizer will of course not have much effect. If, however you have numbered the members
badly, the optimizer will probably have a dramatic effect. The most noticeable effect will be the
smaller analysis time which is partly proportional to the frontwidth squared.
You can control the direction along which the optimization proceeds by selecting the
optimization mode at the start of the analysis. The various optimization mode settings are
described in the following sections.
Not activated
If the optimizer is not activated, the members are loaded into the stiffness array in the order that
they are numbered. If they have been badly numbered and the structure is large then excessive
analysis times may result.
General mode
This is the default optimizer mode. SPACE GASS starts at the lowest numbered member and then
loads all of the members which are connected directly to it. It then takes each of the connected
members in turn and loads all of the members which are connected to them. This process
continues until all members in the structure have been loaded. This mode results in very efficient
frontwidths for most structures.
Linear mode
This mode instructs the optimizer to proceed through the structure in a straight line direction
parallel to one of the global X, Y or Z axes. After you have specified linear mode, you must also
nominate the axis along which optimization will proceed. This should generally be in the
direction of the long dimension of the structure.
Linear mode is ideally suited to long thin structures which have a well defined long dimension.
The "long dimension" of a structure is not necessarily the dimension with the greatest length,
334

rather it is defined such that if you make a cut through the structure at right angles to the long
dimension at its widest point, you will cut through the least number of members.
In the truss in the following diagram, the most efficient direction for the optimizer to proceed is
horizontally. This is because a cut at right angles to the horizontal cuts through only four
members.
Horizontal optimization
Vertical optimization
In the 2D multi-storey frame above, the most efficient direction for linear optimization is vertical
even though the frame height is less than the frame width.
335

Angular mode
This mode instructs the optimizer to proceed through the structure around an arc with the axis of
rotation parallel to one of the global X, Y or Z axes. After you have specified angular mode, you
must also nominate the axis about which optimization will proceed, followed by the coordinates
for the centre of rotation.
Angular mode is ideally suited to curved structures such as the circular frame shown following.
Structures which are not perfectly circular but which have a general shape which is arranged
around a central point can also be optimized very efficiently using angular mode. The centre of
rotation should generally be near the centre of the structure, however this is not absolutely
essential.
Angular optimization
Angular mode can also be used to great advantage with structures that require linear optimization
in two directions.
A three dimensional multi-storey frame for example would probably require its primary
optimization direction to be vertical. As the optimizer reached each floor, however a secondary
horizontal direction would also need to be specified otherwise it would not know in which
direction to go along the floor. Without a secondary direction, the optimizer would simply have to
336

load the floor members in the order of their numbering and this could result in an unnecessarily
large frontwidth if the members were badly numbered.
It is not possible to specify a primary and secondary direction with the optimizer in linear mode,
however it is possible to do this in angular mode by having the centre of rotation a large distance
away from the structure. Using angular mode in this way is very similar to linear mode except
that as the optimizer progresses across (or up) the structure, the angle of attack also changes
slightly as it moves around the arc.
Bi-directional optimization
337

Consider for example the three dimensional multi-storey frame shown above. The primary
optimization direction is vertical and the secondary direction for each floor is to the left. By using
angular mode and positioning the centre of rotation at a large distance away from the frame as
shown in the following diagram, the desired result can be achieved.
Bi-directional optimization using angular mode
As the optimization line progresses up the structure, it reaches the right hand side of each floor
before the left hand side. Thus, the structure as a whole is optimized from bottom to top and each
floor is optimized from right to left.
Note that this method of optimization is usually the best way to deal with large cubic shaped
structures.
If you are not sure which optimizer mode to use for a particular structure, it is recommended that
you experiment with various modes to see how small a frontwidth can be achieved. You can do
this by running the analysis and then terminating it by pressing ESC or the right mouse button
after the frontwidth has been calculated and displayed on the screen. Once you have found the
most efficient mode, you can simply let the analysis continue to the end as normal.
338
The wavefront analysis method

Conventional structural analysis programs utilizing the stiffness method generally use a
bandwidth equation solver which requires that nodes be numbered correctly to ensure the smallest
possible bandwidth.
The wavefront method, however requires that members be numbered correctly to ensure the
smallest possible frontwidth. The optimum wavefront numbering sequence, however is quite
logical and is not sensitive to adding more nodes and members at a later stage which are out of
sequence. This can be quite a problem with the bandwidth method.
For most structures, the member numbering sequence doesnt matter because the frontwidth
capacity of SPACE GASS is quite large. Large structures, however can be made to analyse faster
by optimizing the frontwidth. The displacements calculation time is roughly proportional to the
square of the frontwidth.
A wavefront optimizer is available with SPACE GASS which internally re-orders the stiffness
matrix and which generally reduces the frontwidth to within 95% of the optimum. The optimizer
adds only a few seconds to the analysis time and gives you the freedom of not having to concern
yourself with member numbering sequences even for the largest structures.
For those of you who are interested in the wavefront solution method, the following sections
should give you an insight into the inner workings of the SPACE GASS analysis module.
339
A quick frontwidth calculation method

In order to minimize the frontwidth, members should be numbered from side to side across the
structures shortest dimension while gradually proceeding up the length of the structure. The
numbering should proceed up the entire length of the structure in one pass. A tall multistorey
building for example would have the ground floor columns numbered first, followed by first floor
beams, first floor columns, second floor beams, second floor columns etc., right up to the top.
A quick frontwidth calculation can be done as follows.
1. This procedure assumes that the member numbering sequence proceeds generally from one
end of the structure to the other in a single pass as described in the paragraph above.
2. Make an imaginary cut through the structure at its widest point and at right angles to the
general direction of member numbering. For example, the multistorey frame described
above would have a horizontal cut at any one of its levels.
3. On one side of the cut only, count the number of nodes which are connected to members
which have been cut.
4. Add 1 to the number of nodes in step 3 above and multiply by the degrees of freedom
(DOF) per node. Space frame nodes have 6 DOF, space truss nodes, plane frame nodes and
grid nodes have 3 DOF, while plane truss nodes and beam nodes have 2 DOF.
5. Subtract the number of restrained DOF (ie. restraints in step 3).
The final figure is the structure frontwidth.
It is generally not necessary for you to know any more about the wavefront method than has been
described above, however for those of you wishing to know more, a detailed explanation of the
wavefront analysis method follows.
340
The wavefront method in more detail

Both the bandwidth and wavefront methods are primarily concerned with the assemblage and
solution of a very large structure stiffness array. This array equates node displacements to
externally applied loads as follows.
[P]=[K][D], where
[P]= Load array

[K]
Structure
[D]
Node
stiffness array
displacement array
[P] and [K] are fully defined while [D] is the unknown.
The wavefront method is different to the bandwidth method in that the structure stiffness array is
assembled in order of member numbering rather than node numbering, and a much smaller
portion of the array is required in memory at any one time.
In the wavefront method, the program loads each member into the stiffness array in order of the
member numbering sequence. The nodes associated with each member have stiffness equations
which occupy certain rows and columns in the array.
This loading process continues until one or more nodes have been fully assembled. A node is said
to be fully assembled when all members connected to it have been loaded into the array. At this
point the equations associated with that node can be solved and removed, thus leaving space in
the array for other nodes.
Further members are then loaded and their nodes take the place of nodes which have previously
been solved and removed. More node equations are eliminated and the whole process continues
until the entire structure has been fed in and the stiffness array emptied. The frontwidth is equal to
the largest number of node equations that occupied the stiffness array at one time.
341
Running a static analysis

Select "Linear Static Analysis" or "Non-linear Static Analysis" from the Analysis menu.
Load cases list

If you want to analyse all load cases then this field can be left blank, otherwise you should type in
a list of load cases (separated by commas or dashes) that you want analysed.
Using this feature, it is possible in some cases to achieve significant time savings by analysing
non-linearly only those load cases which cause 2nd order effects, and analysing all of the other
load cases linearly. This would have to be done in two runs, however because a non-linear
analysis can take considerably longer than a linear analysis (especially if there are a large number
of load cases).
Further time savings can be made by not analysing linear combination load cases. "Linear
combination load cases" are combinations which have all of their primary load cases analysed
linearly. Results for non-analysed linear combinations are assembled from the primary load cases
at the time a report or graphics output is generated. If a combination load case has one or more of
its primary load cases analysed non-linearly or if the structure contains tension-only or
compression-only members then the combination will have to be analysed in order to obtain
results for it.
342

Tens/comp-only
Tension/compression-only effects can be "fully operational", "operational with no reversal" or
"fully de-activated". "Fully operational" means that tension-only or compression-only members
which have been disabled during the analysis are able to be re-enabled if their axial force is
reversed. "Operational with no reversal" means that once they have been disabled they cannot be
re-enabled even if their axial force has reversed. "Fully de-activated" means that they are treated
as normal members, able to take tension and compression. No reversal is useful if the fully
operational analysis will not converge, however you should check the results and, if required,
manually disable some tens/comp-only members and then re-analyse.
See also Tension-only and compression-only effects.
Cable damping factor
This allows you to apply damping to the cable connected nodes. It does this by multiplying the
stiffness terms of the unrestrained cable-only node degrees of freedom by the factor:
10
. +
Ratio Damping
100.0
where Ratio depends on the damping relaxation, and Damping is the cable damping factor. 100%
is the default.
Damping relaxation steps
If cable damping is used, it must be relaxed as the solution proceeds so that at convergence there
is no damping at all.
Setting the damping relaxation steps to zero causes the damping to be relaxed in direct proportion
to the change in deflection between the current and previous iterations. As convergence
approaches 100%, the change in deflections approaches zero and hence the damping approaches
zero.
Alternatively, setting the damping relaxation steps to a finite value causes the damping to be
relaxed in uniform steps down to zero. If this method is used, the analysis keeps iterating until the
damping is fully relaxed, regardless of whether convergence has been achieved earlier or not.
Number of load steps
This allows you to apply the load gradually in a number of small load steps. If you specify a
single load step then all of the load is applied in the first iteration (this is how the program
343

worked in all previous versions). If cable damping is also being used, the damping relaxation
process begins anew for each load step.
Iterations per load step
This parameter allows you to specify the maximum number of iterations that will occur in a load
step before the program begins prompting you for extra iterations. A special case occurs if you
specify just one iteration per load step, in which case the program proceeds to the next load step
after one iteration regardless of whether convergence has been achieved or not.
The analysis will finish if the convergence accuracy is satisfied, even if the number of
iterations per load step hasnt been completed.
Convergence accuracy
The convergence accuracy is only applicable for non-linear analyses. After each iteration, SPACE
GASS compares the results of the latest analysis with the results of the previous analysis. If the
comparison shows that the level of convergence has reached or exceeded the specified
convergence accuracy then the analysis is assumed to have converged.
Write stiffness matrix to disk
If you are intending to run a dynamic frequency analysis later then you must save the global
structure stiffness matrix during a static (linear or non-linear) analysis. Once the stiffness matrix
has been saved it does not have to be done again unless the structural geometry has been changed
or another static analysis has been performed without saving the stiffness matrix.
See also Running a dynamic frequency analysis.
Retain results of other load cases
If you have specified that not all load cases are to be analysed and, if results already exist for
some of the non-specified load cases, you can choose to retain them or have them deleted.
Show messages from single member buckling check
During a non-linear analysis, SPACE GASS performs a simple Euler buckling check on each
member individually (regardless of whether you have the buckling analysis module or not). If the
buckling check fails then the member is disabled for the remainder of the analysis. If you select
the "Show messages from single member buckling check" check box then a message is displayed
whenever a member fails the simple buckling check.
See also Static analysis buckling.
See also Buckling analysis.
344
Analysis type
Even though you have already chosen "Linear" or "Non-linear" from the Analysis menu, this pair
of radio buttons allows you to change your mind without having to exit from the dialogue.
P-Delta (P-) effects
For a non-linear analysis, you are able to activate or de-activate the P- effects. The P- effect is
usually the most significant 2nd order effect and is mandatory for non-linear analyses which
comply with most limit states design codes of practice.
See also P-D effect [big].
P-delta (P-) effects
For a non-linear analysis, you are able to activate or de-activate the P- effects. The P- effect is
mandatory for non-linear analyses which comply with most limit states design codes of practice.
See also P-d effect [little].
Axial shortening
For a non-linear analysis, you are able to activate or de-activate the axial shortening effects. This
effect is not required by most design codes of practice and should be used with caution.
See also Axial shortening.
Optimization method
If you have the wavefront optimizer, you can choose to activate it for any linear or non-linear
analysis. The wavefront optimizer can be de-activated or it can be operated in one of three modes
as follows.
No optimization
1. General mode - SPACE GASS determines the path along which optimization proceeds
through the structure.
2. Linear mode - You select either of the X, Y or Z axes along which optimization proceeds in
a straight line through the structure.
3. Angular mode - You select either of the X, Y or Z axes about which optimization proceeds
around an arc through the structure.
See also The wavefront optimizer.
345
Optimization axis
If you have selected "Linear" or "Angular" for the wavefront optimization mode then you must
select the axis along or about which optimization will proceed.
Coordinates of optimization centre
If you have selected "Angular" for the wavefront optimization mode then you must select the
centre of rotation about which optimization will proceed.
When all of the information has been entered, the SPACE GASS static analysis module calculates
the displacements, forces, moments and reactions for each load case and then saves them ready
for graphical or text report output.
If you want to terminate the analysis before it is finished, just press ESC or the right mouse
button. If you terminate the analysis in this way, the results for any load cases which have already
converged are saved. This applies to non-linear analyses and to linear analyses with tension-only
or compression-only members.
346

The SPACE GASS dynamic frequency analysis module is able to analyse multiple mass load
cases consisting of self mass and/or user defined lumped masses in a single run. For each mass
load case it calculates the natural frequency (eigenvalue), period and mode shape (eigenvector)
for any user defined number of vibration modes. The natural frequencies, periods and mode
shapes comprise the dynamic properties of the structure.
You must perform a dynamic frequency analysis before performing a dynamic response
analysis.
347
Modelling considerations
The dynamic properties of a structure are dependent only on its geometric properties, stiffness
and mass. The geometric properties and stiffness of the structure are determined automatically
from the node coordinates, member connectivity and fixity, node restraints, section properties and
material properties. The structure mass is made up of self mass (applied as lumped masses on
every node) and extra applied lumped masses. Self mass can be calculated automatically during
the dynamic frequency analysis if requested, while any extra lumped masses must be pre-defined
by the user.
In most cases, lumped masses placed at nodes are an adequate means of defining the mass
distribution throughout the structure. However, where the distribution of mass is critical, extra
nodes may be required. For example, consider a vertical cantilevered structure (such as a pole or
tower). In order to accurately determine the natural frequencies you must define the distribution
of mass up the cantilever by adding intermediate nodes with masses applied to them. A similar
situation applies with a continuous beam where the mode shapes between supports are important.
As a general rule, extra intermediate nodes (with masses applied) should be added to members for
which the mass is a significant part of the total mass of the structure. Structures with a small
number of members are often affected in this way.
Dynamic mode shape deflections are calculated and output at

nodes only. Therefore, in order to get realistic looking mode shapes it is sometimes necessary to
add intermediate nodes to some members, particularly if the deflected shapes of these members
have significant curvature. If the local deflected shape of a member is of interest then the
distribution of mass along it will also be important and the requirement for intermediate nodes
will apply anyway.
The dynamic frequency analysis module cannot analyse structures that contain cable
members.
348
Natural frequencies, periods and mode shapes

The results of a dynamic frequency analysis should not be used blindly. You should examine each
mode shape carefully (preferably graphically) to determine whether it is a buckling mode of the
whole structure rather than a local vibration affecting a small subset of members in the structure.
Note that in some cases local vibrations affecting a small part of the structure may be important
and it is up to you to determine which modes are appropriate for your situation.
Mode shape displacements are relative only. They define the mode shape, not its
magnitude. You cant compare the displacements of different mode shapes in an attempt to
determine which mode will result in the largest displacements. The scale factor for the
displacements of each mode shape is unique to that mode.
A normalized mode shape will have been adjusted such that each displacement (translation or
rotation) is divided by the absolute value of the largest translational displacement for the mode
shape under consideration. This makes it easier for you to relate the displacement of a particular
node to the maximum displacement within a mode shape. For example, a normalized
displacement of 0.60 indicates that the node moves by an amount which is 60% of the maximum
displacement in that particular mode shape.
349
Running a dynamic frequency analysis

Select "Dynamic natural frequencies" from the Analysis menu.
Before a dynamic frequency analysis can proceed, the global structure stiffness matrix
must have been saved to disk. This can only be done by first running a static analysis (linear or
non-linear) and selecting the "Write stiffness matrix to disk" check box. Once the stiffness matrix
has been saved it does not have to be done again unless the structural geometry has been changed
or another static analysis has been performed without saving the stiffness matrix.
The dynamic frequency analysis module uses the linear stiffness matrix of the structure regardless
of whether or not the stiffness matrix was saved during a linear or non-linear static analysis. Any
tension-only or compression-only members are assumed to be activated during the dynamic
frequency analysis.
Load cases list

If you want to analyse all load cases then this field can be left blank, otherwise you should type in
a list of load cases (separated by commas or dashes) that you want analysed. Note that only the
load cases which contain lumped masses are considered during a dynamic frequency analysis.
Any static loads which exist in the same load cases as lumped masses are ignored.
350

Calculate self mass
The self mass of the structure can be calculated automatically by SPACE GASS and added to any
other manually input lumped masses for selected load cases. Self mass is applied by calculating
the mass of each member and then applying half of it as translational lumped masses to each of
the member end nodes in each of the unrestrained X, Y and Z global axis directions.
Automatic self mass generation does not calculate rotational masses because of the large number
of extra masses that would be calculated for a fairly insignificant improvement in results
accuracy. If required, rotational self mass must be manually applied as rotational lumped masses.
Self mass can only be applied to load cases which also contain manually input lumped masses. If
a load case is to include automatic self mass only then you must input at least one lumped mass
so that the load case is recognized. The effect of the dummy lumped mass can be minimized by
either making it very small or by applying it to a restrained degree of freedom.
Automatic self mass should be used with care, especially for large structures due to the large
number of masses it generates and the substantial increase in analysis time which usually results.
It is sometimes more prudent to manually input lumped masses to simulate self mass rather than
allowing SPACE GASS to generate it automatically.
Self mass load cases list
Self mass (if activated) can be applied to any of the load cases which contain lumped masses. If
you want to include self mass in all load cases then this field can be left blank.
Maximum number of iterations
You can limit the maximum number of iterations that are performed before the analysis aborts if
convergence hasnt been achieved. Naturally the analysis stops earlier if convergence has been
achieved before the maximum number of iterations have been completed.
Convergence tolerance
The convergence criteria is dependent on the convergence tolerance specified. The convergence
tolerance is defined in terms of the number of significant digits required in the calculation of
natural frequencies. For each analysis iteration the tolerance is measured using abs(Fi-Fi-1)/Fi,
where F is the natural frequency and Fi refers to the current iteration, while Fi-1 refers to the
previous iteration. Convergence is assumed to be achieved if abs(Fi-Fi-1)/Fi<10-T, where T is the
convergence tolerance specified.
Number of mode shapes
The dynamic frequency analysis module calculates mode shapes, natural frequencies and natural
periods for the number of mode shapes requested. It also sorts them into order of significance
with the most significant mode shape having the lowest natural frequency.
351

Although there is no limit on the maximum number of mode shapes that can be calculated, the
analysis time increases dramatically as the number of mode shapes increases. The number of
mode shapes requested should therefore be kept to a minimum. Because the first mode shape is
commonly the only significant one for the design of a real structure, it is often enough to request
just one mode shape.
Frequency shift
The dynamic frequency analysis module normally calculates natural frequencies starting from
0Hz and working upwards, however if a non-zero frequency shift is specified then the program
works backwards from the frequency shift value.
For example, consider a structure having its first six natural frequencies equal to 1.2Hz, 1.5Hz,
2.3Hz, 2.4Hz, 3.1Hz and 3.3Hz. If the frequency shift is zero and the number of mode shapes
requested is three then the natural frequencies calculated will be 1.2Hz, 1.5Hz and 2.3Hz. If,
however a frequency shift of 3.5Hz is specified then the natural frequencies calculated will be
2.4Hz, 3.1Hz and 3.3Hz.
The frequency shift facility can be very useful for calculating the natural frequencies between a
lower and upper limit. For example, if you wish to calculate the natural frequencies between
10Hz and 15Hz but there are 20 natural frequencies below 10Hz then you should set the
frequency shift to 15Hz and experiment with the number of mode shapes until you get all
frequencies between 10Hz and 15Hz. If you used a zero frequency shift then you would need to
request a large number of mode shapes (more than 20) and the analysis would spend a lot of time
just getting through the first 20 frequencies, not to mention the speed degradation which would
occur for each successive frequency that was calculated.
Because it is impossible to accurately pre-adjust the dynamic frequency analysis matrices

to take into account a frequency shift, the actual shift obtained is often higher than specified. This
can cause the program to calculate some natural frequencies above the frequency shift value,
however it doesnt affect the accuracy of the results obtained. Natural frequencies above the
frequency shift value are also calculated if the number of mode shapes requested is more than the
number of natural frequencies which occur below the frequency shift value.
Normalize mode shapes
Because mode shape displacements are relative values only, they are often more useful in a
normalized form. Even if you decide not to normalize them, their absolute magnitudes are
irrelevant and cannot be used to compare the magnitude of one mode shape with another.
Displacements for a given mode shape are normalized by simply dividing them by the absolute
value of the largest translational displacement in the mode shape. Thus, the maximum
displacement becomes 1.00 (or -1.00) and all other displacements are adjusted to be in the range
from -1.00 to 1.00.
352

When all of the information has been entered, the SPACE GASS dynamic frequency analysis
module calculates the natural frequencies, periods and mode shapes for each load case and then
saves them ready for graphical or text report output.
button. If you terminate the analysis in this way, no results are saved.
353

The SPACE GASS spectral module performs a dynamic response analysis of structures subjected
to earthquake loads given in the form of acceleration response spectra. Its general approach
means that the spectral module is not just restricted to earthquakes, but can calculate the
maximum response of a structure subjected to any ground vibration provided that all supports are
vibrating in phase (ie. the same response spectrum is applied at all supports simultaneously).
The results of the spectral analysis include deflections, forces, moments and reactions that can be
displayed graphically, printed, or used in a steel design in the same way as the results from a
static analysis. It is also possible to combine spectral load cases with static load cases in
combination load cases.
354
Dynamic response
The spectral module considers the vibration of the structure and identifies the maximum values
that result from the vibration. Generally, the maximums at different points of the structure occur
at different times during the dynamic event. Consequently, the spectral results do not represent an
equilibrium state of the structure, rather an envelope of the maximums. Furthermore, because the
earthquake action has no sign (ie. its accelerations are both positive and negative), the maximum
values have no sign and hence the sign of the results is indeterminate. Usually, the results are
dominated by one of the mode shapes which SPACE GASS can identify and apply its sign to the
results. Alternatively, you can select which mode shape the sign should be taken from.
355
Spectral data
The spectral module is not code specific, however for ease of use with the Australian and New
Zealand loading codes AS1170.4 and NZS4203, many of the analysis input parameters have
alternative code specific input options. These options require you to simply select from tables
taken from the code rather than having to type in numeric values. Future versions will include
these input aids for other international codes also.
The earthquake loads are provided in the form of curves called "acceleration response spectra"
which graph acceleration versus period. Each spectral curve is derived from the time-history
record of a ground vibration for a specific level of damping, and is not dependent in any way on
the properties of the structure being analysed. Usually, for one earthquake, there are several
spectral curves for different damping ratios (eg. 0%, 1%, 2%, 5% and 10% of the critical
damping). In the design codes, the spectral curves are derived from a set of earthquake records
which are smoothed and averaged.
A spectral curve library containing some standard (unauthorised) curves is supplied with SPACE
GASS. The built-in graphical spectral curve editor allows you to modify or create your own
spectral curves as required. The acceleration values in a spectral curve are always specified in
terms of g (acceleration due to gravity) units. Before being used in an analysis, SPACE GASS
automatically multiplies them by the dimensionless spectral curve multiplier and by the
appropriate value of g to yield acceleration units that are consistent with the currently selected
units system.
356
Spectral curves and load cases

The spectral curve multiplier is used to control the scale of the spectral curve acceleration values.
It can be typed in directly or, for AS1170.4, can be calculated based on an acceleration
coefficient, an importance factor and a structural response factor. Alternatively, for NZS4203, it
can be calculated based on a structural performance factor, risk factor and a zone factor. Each of
the code specific factors can be typed in directly or calculated automatically based on descriptions
of the structure location, structure importance and construction method.
In order to perform a response spectrum analysis, you must first create one or more spectral load
cases. A spectral load case contains the number of a mass load case, a direction vector and a list
of mode shapes each with its associated spectral curve and damping factor. Normally all mode
shapes in a spectral load case use the same spectral curve, however you can nominate different
spectral curves for each mode if desired. The mode shapes must have been calculated from a
dynamic frequency analysis before the response spectrum analysis can proceed. Spectral load
cases can be combined and multiple spectral load cases can be analysed simultaneously.
For example, if load case 1 is gravity loading, load case 2 is an earthquake acting in the X
direction and load case 3 is an earthquake acting in the Z direction, then the load combinations
could be defined as follows:
1.0 x Case 1 + 1.0 x Case 2
1.0 x Case 1 - 1.0 x Case 2
1.0 x Case 1 + 1.0 x Case 3
1.0 x Case 1 - 1.0 x Case 3
The above load combinations would consider a non-concurrent action of the earthquake acting in
both horizontal directions (the vertical direction has been neglected), taking into account the
reversal of the earthquake load. The structure should be designed to resist the envelope of all four
combinations.
In the spectral analysis, it is important to consider a sufficient number of mode shapes. SPACE
GASS provides a very efficient means of measuring the contribution of each mode shape in the
overall dynamic response. This is known as the mass participation factor. For example, for an
earthquake acting in the X direction, the total X-axis mass participation factor should be greater
than 90% (AS1170.4 clause 7.4.2.2). If it is less than 90% then a few more mode shapes should
be included in the analysis. A small mass participation factor will indicate inaccurate results.
During the analysis phase you can specify automatic scaling of the base shear to be not less than a
user defined proportion of the total static force in accordance with the loading code or, more
generally, as a user defined percentage of the structures weight.
The spectral module calculates the dynamic response for each mode separately. The final results
for each spectral load case are obtained by combining the results of all mode shapes included in
357

that load case. You can choose between two alternative mode combination methods, namely
SRSS (Square Root of the Sum of Squares) and CQC (Complete Quadratic Combination).
See also Dynamic frequency analysis.
358
Running a dynamic response analysis

Select "Dynamic response spectrum" from the Analysis menu.
Before a dynamic response analysis can proceed, you must have performed a dynamic
frequency analysis.
Spectral load cases list

Leave blank if you want to analyse all spectral load cases, otherwise enter the load cases (separate
by commas/dashes) you want analysed.
Retain results of other load cases
Check this box if you want to keep the analysis results of previously analysed spectral load cases.
Otherwise, if they are not being re-analysed in the current session, they will be discarded.
359
Loading code
This allows you to select the loading code to be used. If you choose AS1170.4 or NZS4203, you
should ensure that you have also selected matching AS1170.4 or NZS4203 response spectra in
your spectral load data.
Limit state
For NZS4203, you must choose between serviceability or ultimate limit states. Seviceability
assumes a ductility factor of 1.0, while ultimate allows you to select the ductility factor.
The selected ductility factor is only used if a non-NZS4203 response spectra is used in
the spectral load data. If you have used a predefined NZS4203 response spectra then the ductility
factor is derived from it.
Auto scaling of base shear
This is a code related parameter that instructs the program to scale the results so that the sum of
the support reactions obtained from the response spectrum analysis can be controlled.
Vertical direction
The axis indicates the vertical direction of the structure. This should usually match the vertical
axis setting in the Viewpoint dialogue box.
AS1170.4/NZS4203 - Base shear factor (%)
Controls the scaling of the results so that the sum of the support reactions resolved along the axis
of the direction vector is not less than the total static force (resolved in the same direction)
multiplied by the scaling factor. For example, if you select a scaling factor of 90% the total
reaction vector will be not less than 90% of the total static force vector.
AS1170.4 - Site factor
An AS1170.4 specific factor which allows you to nominate an appropriate soil profile. You can
elect to have the site factor calculated for you or you can choose a "User Defined" structure type
and then type in the site factor directly.
When you elect to have SPACE GASS calculate a site factor, in-line with AS1170.4, the dialogue
box that follows appears. You need only enter the data which corresponds with your structure and
SPACE GASS calculates the site factor.
360
The site factor you select is only used if a non-AS1170.4 response spectra is used in the
spectral load data. If you have used a predefined AS1170.4 response spectra then the site factor is
derived from it.
NZS4203 - Site subsoil category
A NZS4203 specific factor which allows you to nominate an appropriate site subsoil category.
The site subsoil category you select is only used if a non-NZS4203 response spectra is
used in the spectral load data. If you have used a predefined NZS4203 response spectra then the
site subsoil category is derived from it.
General - Horizontal base shear factor (%)
of the direction vector equals the weight of the structure (including applied lumped masses)
multiplied by the horizontal base shear factor. It is used if the direction vector is predominantly
horizontal. For example, if you select a horizontal base shear of 3% the total reaction vector must
be equal to 3% of the weight of the structure.
General - Vertical base shear factor (%)
of the direction vector equals the weight of the structure (including applied lumped masses)
multiplied by the vertical base shear factor. It is used if the direction vector is predominantly
vertical. For example, if you select a vertical base shear of 2% the total reaction vector must be
equal to 2% of the weight of the structure.
Sign of the results
Because the results of a response spectrum analysis are a combination of a number of mode
shapes, the final sign of the results has to be determined. Choosing "No sign" is of limited use and
means that all deflections, forces, moments and reactions will be positive. Choosing "Auto Sign"
means that the sign of the predominant mode shape will be applied to the results. Choosing
"Select Mode" tells the program to extract the sign from a nominated mode shape.
361

Spectral curve multiplier
A non-dimensional factor by which the spectral curve acceleration values are multiplied during
the analysis. You can type it in directly or, for AS1170.4 and NZS4203, it can be calculated for
you.
For AS1170.4, the multiplier is based on an Acceleration Coefficient (AC), an Importance Factor
(IF) and a Structural Response Factor (SRF) according to the following formula:
SCM =
[ AC IF ]
SRF
For NZS4203, the multiplier is based on a Structural Performance Factor (SPF), a Risk Factor
(RF) and a Zone Factor (ZF) according to the following formula:
SCM = SPF RF ZF
When you click on the "Select" button one of the following dialogue boxes will appear,
depending upon whether you have selected AS1170.4 or NZS4203 loading code. You can elect to
have each factor calculated for you, or you can enter a factor directly by selecting "User
Defined". Data in each section can be changed, which will cause SPACE GASS to calculate a
new value for that item. You need only enter the data which corresponds with your structure and
SPACE GASS calculates the relevant value.
362
If you have selected the general loading code you can specify a spectral curve multiplier
or accept the default value of 1.0.
Mode combination method
The results for spectral load cases that contain more than one mode shape are obtained by
combining the results for each of the mode shapes. You can choose between:
SRSS - Square Root of the Sum of Squares

The simplest and most commonly used mode combination method that works well for most
situations.
CQC - Complete Quadratic Combination

Recommended when some of the mode shapes to be combined have natural frequencies that
are close together.
Either method can be used regardless of the spectral curve damping factors.
When all of the information has been entered, the SPACE GASS dynamic response analysis
module performs its calculations for each load case and then saves them ready for graphical or
text report output.
button. If you terminate the analysis in this way, no results are saved.
363
Buckling analysis
The SPACE GASS buckling analysis module performs a rational elastic buckling analysis of a
frame to determine its buckling load factors, buckling mode shapes and member effective lengths.
The buckling load factor is the factor by which the loads need to be increased to reach the
buckling load. A load factor less than 1.0 means that the working loads exceed the structures
buckling capacity.
The buckling modes considered in this analysis involve flexural instability due to axial
compression in the members (also known Euler buckling) and should not be confused with
flexural-torsional buckling (torsional instability due to bending moments) or axial-torsional
buckling (torsional instability due to axial loads).
An accurate buckling analysis such as the one available in SPACE GASS looks at the interaction
of every member in the structure and detects buckling modes that involve one member, groups of
members, or the structure as a whole.
A buckling analysis is an essential component of every structural design because it:
1. Determines if the loads exceed the structure's buckling capacity and by how much.
2. Calculates the member effective lengths for use in the member design.
3. Determines if the static analysis results are useable or not.
Points 1 and 3 above highlight the fact that a buckling analysis must always be performed unless
you are certain that the structure's buckling capacity exceeds the applied loads by a suitable factor
of safety.
It is very important to note that the results of a static analysis will be incorrect if the structure's
buckling capacity has been exceeded (see point 3 above), and hence one of the key roles of a
buckling analysis is to ratify the static analysis results.
Once the buckling load factors have been determined, a simple formula is used to calculate the
member effective lengths as described in the next section. The effective lengths can then be
automatically transferred into the steel member design modules.
The method that SPACE GASS uses to calculate the buckling factors (eigenvalues) and
corresponding mode shapes (eigenvectors) is based on the theory developed by Wittrick and
Williams (12).
364

Note that the magnitudes of the effective lengths or the effective length factors (k factors) from a
buckling analysis cannot be used to determine if buckling is a problem or not. This can only be
determined by looking at the buckling load factor.
Refer to "Static analysis buckling" for details of some simple buckling checks that are included in
non-linear static analyses.
Refer to "Special buckling considerations" for details of items to be aware of when preparing
your model for a buckling analysis.
365
Buckling effective lengths

The effective length of a compression member is the length of an ideal pin-ended strut whose
buckling load is the same as the axial load Pcr in the member at frame buckling. It can be
determined from:
L =
EI
Pcr
It is evident from the formula that because the member actual length is not involved in the
calculation, subdividing the member into smaller segments does not change its effective length.
Thus, the effective length of a strut is the same as the effective length of one of its segments if it
has been subdivided.
For a steel member design group, which consists of a number of analysis members connected
end-to-end, the overall design group effective length should be taken as the MAXIMUM (not the
sum!) of its individual analysis member effective lengths.
Effective lengths calculated by the buckling analysis can be automatically transferred into the
steel member design modules. This has the obvious advantage that effective lengths don't have to
be transferred manually, but it also offers design efficiencies in that the effective lengths will be
calculated specifically for each design load case rather than having to use one set of effective
lengths for all load cases.
366
Special buckling considerations

Although a buckling analysis requires no more input data than a standard static analysis, there are
a number of items to be aware of when preparing a model for a buckling analysis.
Restraining the structure for buckling
It is important that you restrain the appropriate degrees of freedom for buckling modes that are
not required. For example, if you are interested in the in-plane buckling behaviour of a plane
frame, you must ensure that any out-of-plane degrees of freedom are restrained, otherwise the
buckling load factor may apply to an unexpected out-of-plane buckling mode.
Furthermore, if you are only interested in the in-plane buckling of a plane frame, and you have
added intermediate nodes to some of the members, you should ensure that their out-of-plane
movement is restrained.
A general restraint is usually the most convenient way to solve these problems (eg. apply a
general restraint of RRDDDR to XY-plane frames).
Note that a static analysis is not as sensitive to the lack of out-of-plane restraints as a buckling
because static analysis out-of-plane displacements generally only occur if out-of-plane loads are
applied. This is not true of a buckling analysis which can cause buckling in any direction, even if
there are no loads in that direction.
Buckling analysis with secondary members
Structures are often modelled with the secondary members such as ties or bracing removed. If
these members are required to prevent buckling of the major members in the real structure then
they should be included in the buckling analysis model, otherwise the buckling capacity of the
structure will be underestimated by the analysis.
This is particularly true of tower structures that contain large numbers of slender members that
prevent buckling of the major support members.
Buckling analysis with tension-only or compression-only members
Extra care must be taken with buckling analysis of structures that contain tension-only or
compression-only members.
For example, consider a portal frame building modelled in 3D with tension-only wall bracing
members that prevent the building from swaying longitudinally. Special treatment is required for
the load cases that contain predominantly gravity loads which would cause all the wall braces to
go into compression and therefore become disabled. In such load cases, the buckling analysis
would yield very low buckling load factors because the wall bracing members would have been
disabled and a longitudinal sway buckling mode at very low load would result. Of course, in the
real structure this could not happen because the wall brace members would prevent it as soon as
the sway mode was initiated.
367
One solution is to introduce a very small horizontal load into these load cases which is small
enough to have a negligible effect on the static analysis results but large enough to cause the wall
brace members to go into tension. The result is that they are not removed from the buckling
analysis model and are therefore able to prevent the unrealistic longitudinal sway buckling mode.
Similar situations can occur in any structures that contain tension-only or compression-only
members.
Buckling analysis with cable members
Extra care is needed for structures containing cable members because of their highly non-linear
nature. Because the axial force distribution in cable structures can change dramatically as the load
factor is increased beyond the working load, it is recommended that the buckling analysis be
performed on combination load cases that factor the working loads up close to the buckling load
and result in buckling load factors that are close to 1.0.
For example, if a buckling analysis of a working load case for a cable structure yields a primary
buckling load factor of 5.2, you could create a combination load case which factors up the
working loads for the particular load case by 5.0 say, and then re-do the buckling analysis for the
combination load case instead. If the subsequent buckling load factor is 0.90 say, then the final
load factor (for the working load case) is 5.0 x 0.90 = 4.50.
Buckling instabilities
Occasionally, you may find that a requested buckling mode can't be calculated and "Unstable"
appears in the buckling output report. This occurs when a node floats free due to local buckling of
all of the members to which the node is connected. Sometimes it is possible to avoid this problem
and calculate higher order buckling modes by adding intermediate nodes to the members which
have buckled.
368
Running a buckling analysis

Select "Buckling Analysis" from the Analysis menu.
The input data requirements for a buckling analysis are the same as those for a static analysis. No
extra buckling data is required.
You do not have to run a static analysis before a buckling analysis.
After initiating a buckling analysis, the following dialogue box appears.
Load cases list

The list of load cases to be analysed. For realistic results, only those load cases which can exist in
reality should be used. For example, a live load cannot exist on its own and therefore a load case
containing only live loads should not be used in a buckling analysis.
Tolerance limit
The accuracy to which the buckling load factors will be calculated. For example, a tolerance of
0.01 means that the load factors will be within +/- 0.01 of the exact value.
369

Load factor upper limit
The upper limit above which the buckling analysis will no longer search for buckling load factors.
Once this limit is reached, the analysis will stop, even if not all requested buckling modes have
been calculated.
Load factor lower limit
The lower limit below which the buckling analysis will not search for buckling load factors.
Buckling modes
The number of buckling modes that are required. Normally only the first buckling mode is of
interest, because beyond that the structure has usually collapsed and further modes are of
academic use only.
If the first buckling mode is caused by local buckling of a slender member or group of members
rather than the frame as a whole, the model should be changed so that overall frame buckling
occurs instead. One way of achieving this could be to change the slender members into tensiononly members so that they become disabled rather than buckle (see also Members).
You should view the buckling mode shapes graphically to determine whether or not overall frame
buckling has occurred.
Axial force distribution
The buckling properties of a structure are largely dependent on the axial force in the members.
The buckling analysis module performs its own static analysis first to determine the axial force
distribution and you can nominate either linear or non-linear for this initial static analysis phase.
Generally, the choice between linear or non-linear doesn't significantly affect the buckling load
factor and, because linear is faster, it is recommended for most frames. Naturally, some
structures, such as those containing cable members, which cannot be analysed linearly, require
you to select non-linear.
370
Analysis warnings and errors

SPACE GASS performs numerous checks for illegal and inconsistent data. Many of these checks
are done in the data input modules and any errors detected there must be corrected immediately.
However, some errors and warnings such as instabilities and ill-conditioning cannot be detected
until the analysis phase.
If any errors in the data are detected, SPACE GASS lists them on the screen, aborts the analysis
and then returns to the main menu, ready for correction of the offending items. Warnings are
displayed at the end of the analysis and do not cause it to abort.
Node # not found for member #
A member is connected to a non-existent node.
Direction node # not found for member #
A member has referenced a non-existent direction node.
Section # not found for member #
A member has referenced a non-existent section property.
Section # has impractically large section properties for the frame size
The properties of a section are too large for the frame dimensions. This error is often due to the
section properties being input in the wrong units.
Material # not found for member #
A member has referenced a non-existent material property.
Member # has zero length
A member is connected to two nodes with identical coordinates.
Restraint applied to non-existent node #
A restraint has been applied to a node which doesnt exist.
Slave node # not found
A non-existent node has been specified as a slave node.
Master node # not found for slave node #
A non-existent node has been specified as a master node.
371

A constraint has been applied to a restrained DOF on node #
Any restrained degrees of freedom for a slave node cannot be constrained to a master node.
Node # has been specified as both slave and master
A master node cannot be the slave of another master node.
Member # with PA<>0.0 must have identical Y and Z axis fixities at an end
Because of the difficulty involved in calculating the stiffness matrix for a member with a nonzero principal angle when the member end fixities are about its non-principal axes, the Y and Z
fixities at an end must be the same.
Cable member # must not have any translational fixities released
For stability, cable members must have all of their translational fixities fixed.
Cable member # must not have member offsets
Cable members cannot have member offsets.
Cable member # must not have semi-rigid joints
Cable members are always assumed to be pin-ended, and hence cannot have semi-rigid joints.
Member # must not have shear fixity released with semi-rigid joints
Members with semi-rigid joints cannot have shear fixities released. This restriction only applies
when the semi-rigid joint and the shear fixity act in the same plane.
Node load on non-existent or dummy node #, load case #
A node load has been applied to a non-existent node.
Prescribed displacement on non-existent or dummy node #, load case #
A prescribed displacement has been applied to a non-existent node.
Concentrated load on non-existent member #, load case #
A concentrated member load has been applied to a non-existent member.
Distributed force on non-existent member #, load case #
A distributed member force has been applied to a non-existent member.
Distributed torsion on non-existent member #, load case #
A distributed member torsion has been applied to a non-existent member.
372

Prestress load on non-existent member #, load case #
A prestress load has been applied to a non-existent member.
Prescribed displacement applied to end of cable member #, load case #
Nodes at the ends of cable members must not have prescribed displacements applied to them.
Prescribed displacement applied to released restraint on node #, load case #
Prescribed displacements can only be applied to node degrees of freedom which are restrained.
Prescribed displ. applied to master constraint DOF on node #, load case #
Prescribed displacements must not be applied to master node degrees of freedom which are
constraining a slave node.
Concentrated load is off the end of member #, load case #
A concentrated member load has been located beyond the ends of the member.
Concentrated load applied to cable member #, load case #
Concentrated member loads must not be applied to cable members.
Distributed force is off the end of member #, load case #
A distributed member force has been located beyond the ends of the member.
UDL must act over full length of cable member #, load case #
Uniformly distributed loads applied to cable members must act over the entire cable length.
Trapezoidal load applied to cable member #, load case #
Distributed trapezoidal loads must not be applied to cable members.
Distributed torsion is off the end of member #, load case #
A distributed member torsion has been located beyond the ends of the member.
Distributed torsion applied to cable member #, load case #
Distributed torsion loads must not be applied to cable members.
Load case # has been specified as both primary and combination
Load cases can be primary or combination, but not both.
Combination # contains non-primary load case #
373

Combination load cases can only be made up from primary load cases. Combination load cases
cannot be further combined.
None of the load cases selected exist
There are no valid load cases in the load cases list selected for analysis.
Insufficient space on drive C, # bytes extra required
The analysis module has detected that there is not enough space left on the hard disk for the
analysis to run to completion. Extra space equal to the number of bytes shown is required. You
should terminate the analysis, remove any unwanted data files or programs and then try the
analysis again.
Cable member # is ill-conditioned in load case #
The program was unable to accurately calculate the cable geometry and stiffness matrix.
Member # has buckled in load case #, axial load = 123.23. Continue?
During a non-linear analysis, the program was unable to calculate the stiffness matrix for the
member because its Euler buckling load was exceeded. If you continue, the member is simply
disabled for the rest of the analysis iterations. Note that this message is the result of a simple local
member buckling check only. Overall frame buckling or buckling of multiple members is not
considered! The local member buckling messages can be suppressed by clearing the appropriate
check box at the start of the analysis.
Instability found at member # in load case #
An instability has been detected at a specified member. The instability could be located at either
end of the member.
Not all load steps were completed
The load was applied in more than one step, however it was stopped before all steps were
completed. Because the full load was not reached, the results cannot be used for the load cases
being analysed.
WARNING: Possible ill-conditioning detected, check reactions
Ill-conditioning may have been detected. If the reactions equal the applied loads then no illconditioning has occurred. This message is only a warning which can be suppressed from the
output reports if necessary.
WARNING: Analysis did not reach desired convergence in all load cases
The level of convergence in a non-linear analysis has not reached the required convergence
accuracy for some load cases. This is not necessarily fatal if the convergence achieved is close to
that requested. Note also that some of the load cases may have fully converged and this can be
checked by looking at the output reports.
374
Steel member design

Throughout this chapter it can be assumed that all information applies equally to all of
the supported steel design codes unless specifically stated otherwise.
This chapter describes in detail the data required to be input before a design or check can proceed.
It discusses the internal methods, philosophies and assumptions that the program uses as it
designs or checks members, and it explains how to initiate the actual design or checking process
once the steel member design data has been input.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Before you use the steel member design module, you should read all of the assumptions described
later in this chapter (see also Steel member design/check assumptions) to verify that its
performance and capabilities are adequate for your situation. It is up to you to determine whether
or not the steel member design module is suitable for your requirements.
The steel member design module is a general purpose design and code checking program which
reads the frame analysis output data, calculates the critical location and load case for each
member and then selects the most suitable steel member size from a library of standard sections.
Alternatively, you may specify a steel member size to be checked and the program determines
whether or not the member is adequate. For a given frame, you can specify any selected number
of members to be designed or checked.
The design module is also capable of passing the designed steel sizes back into the frame analysis
data and re-analysing the structure. This process can be iterated until the results converge. It
usually only takes two or three iterations.
During the design/check phase SPACE GASS automatically calculates the load factor
(LRFD/EC3/AS4100/BS5950/NZS3404) or combined stress ratio
(ASD/AS1250/SABS0162/AS3990) at numerous stations along each member. It considers
yielding of the cross section, lateral buckling, slenderness ratios, and all possible combinations of
shear, tension, compression and bending for both in-plane and out-of-plane failure.
The steel member design module doesnt consider torsional effects.

After all specified members have been designed or checked, a detailed report can be produced for
each member showing the critical location or segment on the member, the critical load case,
section properties, effective lengths, and the complete computations involved in the design.
Sections of the report can be suppressed if required.
375

The SPACE GASS steel member design module can handle most types of steel members
including beams, columns, ties, struts, braces, and members subjected to combinations of axial
loads, shear forces and bending moments (uniaxial or biaxial).
The AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, AS4100 and NZS3404 modules assume that second order
effects have been taken into account by a second order elastic analysis. Moment magnification is
not considered. The NZS3404 module uses the "Other than capacity" design method with nonseismic ductility categories only.
When some steel member design data has been input, or to see the results of a member design or
check, you can produce an output report on the screen or printer.
See also Steel design report.
376
Steel member design data

Select "Steel Member Design Input Data" from the Design menu or select some members and
then "Steel Member Design Input Data" from the floating menu.
For details of how to input or edit steel member design data graphically, refer to Steel members.
This section describes the steel member design data that is required to be input before you can
design and/or check steel members that are part of a frame analysis model.
Steel member design data can be input graphically, via a datasheet, or by importing a text
file.
377

The dialogue box that appears when you input steel member design data graphically is shown
above. The steel member datasheet contains the same information in a different format.
Group
Because a steel member in the real structure could be divided into a number of sub-members in
the analysis model, the steel design/check module must be able to consider these sub-members as
a whole during the design or checking process.
Hence, the concept of steel design groups is introduced. A steel design group usually represents a
single piece of steel in the real structure. It could be modelled as a single member or a number of
members in the analysis model.
In order to make it easier to relate member numbers to group

numbers, it is often a good idea to give the design group the same number as the first member in
the group. Otherwise, there is sometimes a tendency to confuse member numbers and group
numbers when scanning the design output data. By default, SPACE GASS will give a design
group a number corresponding to the first of the members selected (when performing a graphical
steel frame data input). You can, of course, change this if you wish.
Description
An optional brief description of the steel design group.
Member list
A list of frame analysis members to be combined into the steel design group. This is often only
one member in each group.
Because the top flange for a steel design group is taken to be the
same as the top flange for the first member in the design group, it is important to control which
end member comes first in the design group. Flange restraint positions are also referenced from
the free end of the first member in the design group.
See also Member groups.
Strength grade
The strength grade for members can be set to normal or high. The actual yield strengths are taken
from the standard section libraries supplied with SPACE GASS. All of these libraries can be
viewed or edited (see also Section libraries).
Choices are: Normal,
High.
378

Units
The compression effective lengths and flange restraint positions can be specified as actual
distances or as ratios of the design group length.
Choices are:
Actual,
Ratio.
Load height position

The load height position is used to allow for the case when a member is loaded (in-plane) on a
flange causing an increased tendency for the flange to buckle laterally (out-of-plane). The load
height position can be set to "Top flange" if this occurs, or "Shear centre" if the predominant load
is positioned at the shear centre or on a flange such that it resists lateral buckling of the flange.
Choices are:
Shear centre,
Top flange.
The load height position affects the value of the load height factor kl which is used to calculate
the bending effective length of the member.
Destabilizing and stabilizing loads

See also Load height factor.
Scan code
In order to control the types of steel sections that the program selects during the course of a
design, a library scan code is required. This allows you to select the types of sections that should
only be considered for each member. For example, you could use it to tell the program that only
I-sections were to be considered for the design of a portal frame column. Without the library scan
code the program would simply choose the lightest adequate steel section from the library,
regardless of its type or shape.
379
The library scan code is simply a list of up to four characters that contains the group codes of
sections that are to be considered during the design of a member. You can find out what the group
codes are for each type of section by going into the steel member design datasheet and clicking
button. You can also select the required section types and then click the Ok button to
on the
generate the library scan code without having to type it in. For example, if you wish to design
with square or rectangular tubes that have group codes of "I" and "H" respectively, the library
scan code would be "IH".
You can also find out about group codes from the library editor. Just open the desired section
library and then click on a group name in the library tree. The group code will then be displayed
at the top of the right-hand side of the editor.
SPACE GASS is supplied with standard section libraries for various countries. You can edit any
of these libraries or create your own (see also Section libraries).
Compression effective lengths (Lc major and minor)
These are the effective lengths for buckling about the major and minor axes due to axial
compression. Depending on the "Units" selected, the Lc values may be expressed as an absolute
length or as a ratio of the total group length.
Compression effective lengths can be calculated from a buckling analysis, however you can elect
to input them directly if you prefer. To have both of them calculated, select the "Calculate Lc
from Buckling Analysis" check box. To have just one of them calculated, leave the check box
unselected and enter a negative value for the Lc to be calculated. Of course to have Lc calculated,
you must have the buckling analysis module (it is not a standard program feature) and you must
run a buckling analysis before you can run a steel member design.
Having the Lc values calculated automatically is more efficient than specifying them directly
because case specific Lc values can be calculated for each design load case. If you specify Lc
values directly then they are used for every load case.
During the design, if the minor compression effective length exceeds the length of the segment
under consideration, it is reduced to the segment length if:
(a) both ends of the segment have full or partial flange restraints; or
(b) both ends of the segment have full, partial or lateral flange restraints and the member is a
tube or an equal flanged I-shape or box girder.
This happens regardless of whether the compression effective lengths are calculated from a
buckling analysis or specified directly.
380
For single angle sections, the compression effective lengths must be input relative to the
non-principal axes. For AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD and AISC-ASD, they
are converted to the principal axes during the design/check phase.
In order to cater for all design code naming conventions, the compression effective lengths
are referred to as "Lc major" and "Lc minor" in this document and in the data entry parts of the
program. However, in the design output reports, they are changed to match the notation of the
design code that was used.
Bending effective lengths (Lb +ve and ve)
Bending effective lengths for positive moments (Lb +ve) and for negative moments (Lb ve) are
normally calculated based on the flange restraints that you specify, however you can elect to input
them directly if you prefer. To have both of them calculated, select the "Calculate Lb from Flange
Restraints" check box. To have just one of them calculated, leave the check box unselected and
enter a negative value for the Lb to be calculated.
During the design, if you have elected to have the bending effective length calculated, it is taken
as the length of the segment under consideration multiplied by three additional factors kt twist
factor), kl (load height factor) and kr (lateral rotation factor) such that Lb = Lseg x kt x kl x kr.
Alternatively, if you have specified the bending effective length directly then the specified value
is used without modification.
kt, kl and kr are fully explained in AS4100/NZS3404 clause 5.6.3. In AS1250, SABS0162,
BS5950 and AS3990 there are no kt kl and kr factors and so SPACE GASS uses the rules of
AS1250 clause 5.9, SABS0162 clause 7.2.3, BS5950 clause 4.3.5 or AS3990 clause 5.9 to
calculate equivalent kt, kl and kr factors which, when multiplied together, produce an overall
effective length factor kb. Note that the kb factor is the only one included in AS1250, SABS0162,
BS5950 and AS3990 output reports. AS4100 and NZS3404 output reports include kt, kl and kr.
For single angle sections, the bending effective lengths must be input relative to the nonprincipal axes. For AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD and AISC-ASD, they are
converted to the principal axes during the design/check phase.
In order to cater for all design code naming conventions, the bending effective length is
referred to as "Lb" in this document and in the data entry parts of the program. However, in the
design output reports, it is changed to match the notation of the design code that was used.
See also Twist factor.
381

See also Load height factor.
See also Lateral rotation factor.
Top and bottom flange restraints
Flange restraint positions are referenced from the end of the first member in a design group.
SPACE GASS assumes that there is a restraint at each end of a group and you should therefore
specify the intermediate restraint positions only.
Restraint positions should be specified independently for the top and bottom flanges. Up to 100
intermediate positions can be specified for each flange. If there are no intermediate restraints for a
particular flange then the restraint positions field should be left blank.
When specifying restraint positions, you can use @s to specify relative positions or groups of
equally spaced positions. For example, restraint positions of 1.2,2.4,3.6,4.8,6.0,6.6,7.2,7.8,8.4
could be specified as 5@1.2,4@0.6, or positions of 1.2,1.8,2.7,3.3 could be specified as
1.2,1@0.6,2.7,1@0.6.
Depending on the "Units" selected, the restraint positions may be expressed as an absolute
distance or as a ratio of the total group length.
Flange restraint types must be specified for each intermediate restraint position and for the two
ends of the design group.
Choices are:
Full (F)
Partial (P)
Lateral (L)
Full and rotational (R)
Partial and rotational (S)
Unrestrained at end (U)
Continuous lateral restraint (C)
Ignore segment. (I)
The top flange of a member is defined such that positive major axis bending causes it to
go into compression. An alternative definition is that the top flange is the flange on the positive
local y-axis (or z-axis if the section has been flipped) side of the member. The top flange of a
group as a whole is defined such that it is the same as the top flange of the first member in the
group.
382
For single angle sections, flange restraints must be input relative to the non-principal
axes. For AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD and AISC-ASD, they are converted
to the principal axes during the design/check phase.
See also Flange restraints.
See also Effective flange restraints.
Major and minor axis sidesway
These are required for AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 only.
Major axis sidesway refers to sidesway that causes bending about the cross section major axis,
while minor axis sidesway refers to sidesway that causes bending about the cross section minor
axis.
Angle type
In order to define the geometry of single or double angle sections, SPACE GASS requires the
angle section type to be input.
Choices are:
Single angle,
Double angle with short legs connected,
Double angle with long legs connected,
Double angle starred (equal angles only).
Double angle sections are assumed to have no space between the individual angle
sections.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules assume that double angles are connected together
at intermediate points sufficient to ensure that half of the design axial compressive force for the
combined section does not exceed the compressive capacity of each angle section considered
individually using an effective length (for buckling of the sections away from each other) equal to
the distance between connection points.
The AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, AS4100 and NZS3404 modules convert double angle sections
into the equivalent Tee section and then treat them as a solid Tee shape. They do not support
double starred angles. The BS5950 module does not support double angle sections at all.
383
384

Angle section orientation
All of the possible arrangements involving single and double angles are shown in the diagrams
above. It is important to note that the major axis of a single or double angle section is assumed to
be parallel to the short leg(s) of the section as shown in the diagrams.
For equal angles, specifying a double angle section with either short or long legs
connected has the same effect and always results in a section as shown at the top-right diagram.
The design procedure for angle sections is considerably more complicated than for most other
sections. This is due to the significant moments generated by eccentric end connections which
cannot usually be avoided when working with angles. SPACE GASS is capable of taking these
effects into account for both single and double angle sections.
When designing/checking single or double angle sections for AS1250, SABS0162 or

AS3990, SPACE GASS considers only axial forces and shears. Normal bending moments are not
considered. The only moments considered are those due to the eccentric end connections. This is
not the case with the other design modules. They consider all axial forces, shears and moments
together with any extra eccentric moments (if appropriate).
Furthermore, for single angle sections, the effective lengths and flange restraints must be input
relative to the non-principal axes. For AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD and
AISC-ASD, they are converted to the principal axes during the design/check phase.
End connection
For non-symmetric members subjected to axial loads, such as angle sections, channels and Tees,
the program needs to know which leg, flange or web is connected so that the extra moments due
to possible eccentric end connections can be calculated (if appropriate).
Choices are:
Concentric,
Flange(s) (for I, H, T or channel sections),
Web (for channel or T sections),
Angle short leg,
Angle long leg (vertical leg for equal angles before being flipped or a direction
angle, direction node or direction axis applied).
Consider eccentric effects

For members that have eccentric end connections, you can elect to consider or ignore the
resulting eccentric moments. Eccentric moments are only added if they increase the normal
design moments.
385
Note that even if you select this check box, you can disable eccentric effects globally by
deselecting the eccentric effects check box in the steel member design/check dialogue box.
Design criteria
Most designs aim to minimize the structure weight, however if you are constrained to a certain
member depth then you can elect to minimize the member depth instead.
Choices are: Weight,
Depth.
Maximum bolts in X-sect
In order to calculate the effective web and flange areas, and subsequent member capacities, the
presence of bolt holes at the member ends must be taken into account. SPACE GASS requires
you to estimate the number and diameter of bolts per cross section at the ends of each member to
be designed or checked. A bolt count of zero indicates that the member end is welded.
During the design, SPACE GASS checks to see that the bolts per cross section specified can be
fitted into the cross section. If not, the number is reduced to the maximum that can be
accommodated. If the member is too small to take even a single bolt then the connection is
assumed to be welded.
Bolt diameter
End connection bolt diameter.
See also Steel member design text.
See also Steel members.
See also Running a steel member design.
386
Steel member design sign conventions

The steel member design module deals only with the member cross section axes. The longitudinal
axis of the member is of no relevance.
For most section types, steel member design input and output data always relates to the major and
minor principal cross section axes. The only exception is for single angle sections where the
effective lengths and flange restraints must be input relative to the non-principal axes (the axes
parallel to the angle legs) for all design codes.
During the design phase, the data for single angle sections is converted to the principal axes for
AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD and AISC-ASD. Output reports for those
codes also show the data in principal axes for single angle sections.
See also Column and beam Tees.
387
Member groups
In a typical structure, the actual beams, columns, struts, ties, etc. are modelled in SPACE GASS
as members connected together at nodes. Sometimes, however it is convenient and often
necessary for members to have nodes placed at intermediate positions along them so that they are
sub-divided into smaller members. This can occur when another member intersects a member at
an intermediate point or when a node is simply placed at an intermediate point so that deflections,
forces and moments are calculated at that point during the analysis.
Quite often the placement of intermediate nodes along a member is done purely for frame
analysis modelling purposes rather than due to an actual discontinuity or connection in the real
structure. For this reason, SPACE GASS allows you to group frame analysis members together
and design them as though they are a single entity (as they are in the real structure). In the
remainder of this manual a "design group" represents an actual member in the real structure
which consists of one or more frame analysis members grouped together end-to-end.
Note that in the following discussion, members in a group can be listed in either
direction. For example, "1,3,8,5" and "5,8,3,1" are both suitable. The direction can, however
affect the definition of the top flange (see also Flange restraints).
For information on how members from different parts of a structure (which cannot be grouped
together) can be constrained to the same final design size see also Constraining members to the
same final design size.
Consider, for example, a simply supported beam with a node at each end which is subjected to an
axial compressive force and a uniformly distributed dead load. When analysed, the deflected
shape and bending moment distribution along its length is calculated by SPACE GASS. If the
structural adequacy of this member is then checked against one of the design codes, various
factors are calculated based on the deflected shape and the bending moment distribution. These
factors are then used in the calculations to determine if the member is adequate or not.
If the same beam is modelled with a third node at midspan, you would still get the same deflected
shape and bending moment distribution, however unless you were able to group the two halves of
the beam together and design them as though they were a single member you would get a
completely different design result. This is because the factors and the combined actions moments
and axial forces would be based on the deflection and moment distributions for only half of the
beam rather than its full length.
If a member has been sub-divided into smaller members in the analysis model, it is
important that these sub-members are grouped together in the design model.
The rules for deciding whether or not a run of frame analysis members should be grouped into a
design group are as follows.
388

1. Each member in a design group must be rigidly connected to each other end-to-end, they
must lie generally in a straight line, and they must have the same section properties.
2. The length of a design group should not be less than the greater of the major axis span and
the minor axis span.
3. A design group must be long enough to include all of the flange restraints that affect its
bending effective lengths. Furthermore, under no circumstances should the design group
length be less than the unrestrained lengths of the top and bottom flanges. This rule is not
applicable if the bending effective lengths are specified directly rather than being
calculated.
4. Each end of a design group should coincide with the physical end of a member or a
significant change in direction of a member, or a support point for a member. It shouldnt
normally extend past a support or past an intersecting member that effectively acts as a
support. "Support" refers to a support for the major axis span.
If it is not possible for all of the above rules to be satisfied then you should not use
SPACE GASS to design the steel members involved.
Consider the following examples, indicating how members in typical frames can be grouped
together.
Member grouping for gable portal
Group 1:
1,2
Group 2:
3,4,5
389

Group 3:
Group 4:
7,8
Member grouping for flat portal
Group 1:
1,2
Group 2:
3,4,5,6
Group 3:
7,8
Member grouping for truss
Group 1:
2,6,10,14,18,22
Group 2:
4,8,12,16,20,24
Group 3:
Group 4:
3
(Some of the non-critical members have not been grouped)
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
The above grouping assumes that local bending of the chords between panel points is
insignificant compared with overall bending between the end supports (ie. the panel points are not
390

really acting as support points for the chords). If the chords were effectively spanning L/6 instead
of L then the chord members could not be grouped.
Member grouping for multi-storey frame
Group 1:
Group 2:
Group 3:
Group 4:
Group 5:
4
5
Group n:
etc...
No grouping of multiple members can occur in this case because each member acts as a single
span. The horizontal beams act as supports for the columns at each floor and the columns act as
supports for the beams.
391
Note that, if there was no significant axial forces in the beams such that they were not acting as
supports for the columns then the columns could be grouped into one design group from bottom
to top. This would not, however be a common situation.
Member grouping for continuous beam
Group 1:
1,2,3,4
Group 2:
5,6
392
Flange restraints
Flange restraints must be specified for both top and bottom flanges at each end of a design group
and at each intermediate restraint position.
Because the positions of the start and finish flange restraints is known, only the intermediate
restraint positions should be specified. However, the end and intermediate restraint types
should be specified.
The top flange of a member is defined such that positive major axis bending causes it to go into
compression. An alternative definition is that the top flange is the flange on the positive local yaxis (or z-axis if the section has been flipped) side of the member. The top flange of a group as a
whole is defined such that it is the same as the top flange of the first member in the group.
There are two classes of restraint types; those that occur at a discrete point and those that occur
over a continuous length of flange between two point restraints. The number of point restraint
types should exactly match the number of restraint positions.
When @ multipliers are used in the restraint positions lists, the corresponding restraint types must
have only one character for each @ multiplier. For example, restraint positions of
1.2,2.4,3.6,4.8,6.0,6.6,7.2,7.8,8.4 with corresponding restraint types of LLLLLPPPP could be
specified as 5@1.2,4@0.6 and LP. If the restraint types were LLPLLPPPP, however then they
would have to be specified as 2@1.2,3.6,2@1.2,4@0.6 and LPLP.
SPACE GASS accepts six point restraint types and two continuous restraint types. They are
defined as follows.
Full restraint (F)
Prevents lateral deflection of the critical

flange and fully or partially prevents
twist rotation of the section.
Or
Prevents lateral deflection of some point
on the cross section (other than on the
critical flange) and fully prevents twist
rotation of the section.
Partial restraint (P)
Prevents lateral deflection of some point

on the cross section (other than on the
critical flange) and partially prevents
twist rotation of the section.
393

Lateral restraint (L)

flange but is ineffective in preventing
twist rotation of the section. A lateral
restraint can only be considered to be
effective when it is positioned between
full or partial restraints.
Full & rotational restraint (R)
The same as full restraint above but also

with significant restraint against lateral
rotation of the critical flange about the
cross section minor axis.
Partial & rotational restraint (S)
The same as partial restraint above but

also with significant restraint against
lateral rotation of the critical flange
about the cross section minor axis.
Unrestrained (U)
There is no resistance to lateral

deflection of the critical flange or twist
rotation of the section. This can only be
used at the end of a design group and
must be applied to both flanges to be
effective.
An "unrestrained" end does not necessarily imply a cantilever. Flange restraints are
independent of the member support system. Cantilevers or beams with supported ends could be
restrained or unrestrained.
The following restraint types do not occur at a point but are continuous between two adjacent
point restraints.
Continuous lateral restraint (C)

flange but is ineffective in preventing
twist rotation of the section. A
continuous lateral restraint can only be
considered to be effective when it is
positioned between full or partial
restraints.
Ignore segment (I)
This is not really a flange restraint,

rather it instructs SPACE GASS to skip
past the ignored segment length when
designing or checking. It can be used
very conveniently to ignore the very
394

rigid area where intersecting members
connect so that members are designed
from the face of intersecting members
rather than from their centrelines. It is
also very handy for when a member is
stiffened over part of its length and is
not required to be designed over that
portion.
The above definitions allow for full, partial, lateral or no restraint against twist of the cross
section (about its longitudinal axis) (F,P,L,C or U). They also allow for full or no restraint against
lateral rotation of the critical flange (about the minor cross section axis) in the presence of full or
partial twist restraint (R or S). An extra restraint condition which is catered for in AS1250,
SABS0162, BS5950 and AS3990 only, which provides partial restraint against lateral rotation of
the critical flange is not supported by SPACE GASS.
The following diagrams are a collection of some fairly typical support and fly brace connection
details. The type of restraint that applies to each flange is shown as either "full", "partial",
"lateral" or "unrestrained". Note that the diagrams apply regardless of whether or not rotational
restraints also exists. The terms "full" or "partial" could also read "full and rotational" or "partial
and rotational" in each of the diagrams.
395
396
Flange restraint types

You can see from the diagrams above and from the restraint definitions, that having a full or
partial restraint on one flange implies that there is at least a partial restraint and possibly a full
restraint on the other flange. If you specify a full or partial restraint on one flange and no restraint
at the same point on the other flange, SPACE GASS automatically places a restraint on the other
flange (see also Effective flange restraints).
A full or partial restraint on one flange implies at least a partial restraint on the other
flange.
397
Portal frame flange restraints
Consider, for example, the portal frame above. The roof bracing system laterally braces each
rafter at the eaves and apex. Purlins are positioned at ninth points along each rafter and fly braces
are attached to each third purlin at rafter third points. Girts are positioned at the mid-height of
each column.
We will assume that the roof sheeting has enough rigidity to allow the purlins to prevent lateral
deflection of the rafter top flange. Note that if the roof sheeting has insufficient rigidity to prevent
398

lateral deflection then the fly braces will not be capable of providing any restraint to the bottom
flange and will thus be totally ineffective.
The frame could be set up with four design groups, each containing the following members.
Group 1:
1,2
Group 3:
Group 6:
3,4,5
6
Group 7:
7,8
When determining flange restraint positions and types, we will assume that the footing, eave and
apex connections provide F (full) restraint to both flanges of each member framing into them.
There is no fly bracing attached to the wall girts and they provide lateral restraint only to the
outside flange of the columns. Thus, groups 1 and 7 have top flange restraints of F (full) at each
end and L (lateral) at mid height, and bottom flange restraints of F (full) at each end only. If there
had been fly bracing to the girts then there would also be a bottom flange mid height restraint of F
(full) or P (partial). Note that the top flange for groups 1 and 7 is the outside flange because the
local y-axis for members 1, 2, 7 and 8 points towards the outside of the frame.
Similarly, groups 3 and 6 have top flange restraints of F (full) at each end and at each fly brace
location and L (lateral) at each purlin, and bottom flange restraints of F (full) at each end and P
(partial) at each fly brace location. Thus, the restraint arrangements for the frame are:
Groups 1 and 7:
Groups 3 and 6:
FLF
(Outside flange)
FF
(Inside flange)
FLLFLLFLLF (Top flange)

FPPF (Bottom flange)
399
Column and beam Tees

Column Tees have the major axis parallel to the web and are therefore assumed to be lying on
their side with their flange vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and no flipping). They are
orientated at right angles to normal beam Tees which have the major axis parallel to the flange.
Tee section orientation
Note that although beam Tees are supported by all of the steel member design modules, only the
AS4100 and NZS3404 modules support column Tees.
See also Steel member design sign conventions.
400
Running a steel member design

Select one of the "Steel Member Design/Check" items from the Design menu.
AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, AS4100 and NZS3404 require second order effects to be taken
into account by either performing a first order (linear) elastic analysis with moment magnification
or a second order (non-linear) elastic analysis with no moment magnification. Because a nonlinear analysis is generally more efficient and accurate than moment magnification, and because
SPACE GASS has no facilities for moment magnification, it is recommended that a non-linear
analysis be used at all times for AS4100 and NZS3404.
Design / Check mode
You can select between design mode or check mode as follows.
1. Design mode Works its way up from the smallest library section that conforms with the
specified library scan code until it finds a section that passes the code requirements for the
design group being designed.
2. Check mode Just checks the section from the analysis data for the design group being
checked.
401

Member groups list
If you want to consider all design groups (for which steel member design data has been input)
then this field can be left blank, otherwise you should type in a subset of design groups (separated
by commas or dashes).
Section properties list
If you want to consider all design groups (or a subset as specified above), regardless of section
type, leave this field blank. Otherwise, type in a list of section property numbers (separated by
commas or dashes) to limit the number of design groups.
For example, if the columns in a frame all have section property number 3, you could instruct the
program to design only the columns by entering "3" in the section properties list. Alternatively,
you could type in all of the groups containing columns in the member groups list above, however
this would be much more cumbersome.
Frame load cases list
If you want to consider all load cases then this field can be left blank, otherwise you should type
in a list of incorporating the load cases (separated by commas or dashes) that you want
considered.
Default section library
During the frame analysis section property input phase, sections which are read from a library
have the library name stored with their section property data. Sections which have not been read
from a library do not have a library name stored with their data.
For members with analysis section properties that were read from a library, the steel member
design module uses that library to get information about the strength grade, properties, cross
section shape, etc. of the member.
For members with analysis section properties that were not read from a library, the design module
uses the default section library to get its information.
Intermediate stations per member
During the design process, each analysis member in a design group is sub-divided into small
increments using intermediate member stations. You must define the number of equally spaced
intermediate stations that are to be positioned along each analysis member.
SPACE GASS automatically adds an extra station at each end of an analysis member, at each
point of application of a concentrated member load, at each flange restraint position, and at the
quarter points between flange restraints. If a design group consists of more than one analysis
member then the member stations are simply added together to give a total number of stations for
the design group as a whole.
402

The member stations are the points at which deflections, forces and moments are calculated. They
are also the points at which code checks are carried out. It is therefore important that there are
enough stations located along the design group to give a good representation of the deflected
shape, bending moment diagram and shear force diagram so that the design results are accurate.
9 intermediate stations for each analysis member is normally quite accurate, however this can be
increased to 75 if required. Note that the speed of the design process is approximately
proportional to the number of stations per design group.
Slenderness ratio limit
Recommendations for maximum slenderness ratios of members are given in most of the design
codes. They range from 180 to 300 for struts, 300 to 350 for ties and 250 to 300 for beams. The
maximum values depend on various factors including whether or not the predominant load is due
to wind.
Some of the codes do not recommend any slenderness limits, however because a slenderness ratio
check is a reliable safety net which guards against members being too flexible, the slenderness
ratio check is available for all steel member design modules. If you wish to disable the
slenderness ratio check you can do so by setting the limit to a high value such as 9999.
For tension members and members that have zero axial load, there is no slenderness check for
compression effective lengths, however there is a slenderness check for bending effective lengths.
Because of this, you may notice that in some cases the output report shows a value of l/r
(compression) which exceeds the permissible l/r ratio without the member failing.
Load factor limit or Combined stress ratio limit
Firstly, the terms "load factor" and "combined stress ratio" are defined as follows.
The load factor applies only to LRFD, EC3, AS4100, BS5950 and NZS3404. It is the amount by
which the design loads can be increased before the point of failure is reached.
For members designed in accordance with LRFD, EC3, AS4100, BS5950 or NZS3404, the load
factor must be greater than 1.0. This means that the loads can be factored up by an amount greater
than 1.0 before the member becomes inadequate.
The load factor is not equal to the inverse of the (design load)/(design capacity) failure
equation.
The combined stress ratio applies only to ASD, AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990. It is the ratio
of the actual stresses to the permissible stresses for the governing combined stress equation.
403

For members designed in accordance with ASD, AS1250, SABS0162 or AS3990, the combined
stress ratio must be less than 1.0. This means that the combined stresses in the member are less
than the combined permissible stresses.
During the design process, if the load factor is slightly less than 1.0 or if the combined stress ratio
is slightly greater than 1.0, the member is deemed to have failed. In a real design situation
however, you may decide to accept members which are very slightly overloaded. In order to cater
for this reality, SPACE GASS allows you to decrease the load factor limit or increase the
combined stress ratio limit so that the design program can accept a small amount of overload.
Alternatively, you can increase the load factor limit or decrease the combined stress ratio limit if
you wish to design conservatively.
Interrupted frame check (check mode only)
If the checking procedure is uninterrupted, then after each member check, the results are saved
and the program moves on to the next member regardless of the outcome of the check. Using this
procedure, it is possible to check a large numbers of members without any operator intervention.
Alternatively, you can elect to have interrupted checking which causes the program to stop after
each member check, notifying you of the results of the check and allowing you to manually select
other member sizes for checking. If you decide not to try other member sizes, the program saves
the results of the check and moves on to the next member.
Consider eccentric effects
Members such as angles, channels and Tees are sometimes connected at their ends by one flange
or plate only. Depending on the shape of the section and the distance from the point of connection
to the centroid of the section this can induce eccentric moments into the member.
This check box only affects the design groups that have eccentric effects enabled in their design
input data. For design groups that have their individual eccentric effects disabled, this check box
setting has no effect.
See also Eccentric effects for compression members.
See also Eccentric effects for tension members.
Use Kt factor for tension members
When considering eccentric end connection effects, the extra eccentric moments are usually
calculated and then added to the other bending moments in the member.
For tension members with AS4100/NZS3404, however the code allows you to use the above
approach or simply ignore the extra eccentric moments and apply a correction factor (Kt) which
is based on the cross section shape and the location of the point of connection (see
AS4100/NZS3404 clause 7.3.2). By default the steel member design module defaults to using the
404

Kt factor because it tends to give a more economical design in most cases, however you can elect
to use the eccentric moments approach instead if you wish.
See also Eccentric effects for tension members.
When all of the information has been entered, the SPACE GASS steel member design/check
proceeds.
If you want to terminate the process before it is finished, just press ESC or the right mouse
button. If you terminate the process in this way, the results for any groups that have already been
designed or checked are saved.
For a full explanation of the internal procedures and assumptions used during the design of a
member see The steel member design/check process in detail and Steel member design/check
assumptions.
405
Updating member sizes

Select "Update Frame Member Sizes" from the Design menu.
Note that this topic only applies if you have run the steel member design module in design mode.
The accuracy of any steel member design is dependent on the accuracy of the analysis on which it
was based. A truly accurate design can only be obtained when the design member sizes agree
with those used in the preceding analysis.
SPACE GASS has the ability to iterate the analysis-design process until the results converge. The
design sizes can then be printed out and used in the final computations. This option is not
available for manual members.
After an initial design, you can use this feature to rationalise the design member sizes, update the
analysis section properties, re-analyse the structure and re-design the members. It is also possible
to override any of the design member sizes and update some of the analysis section properties
with user defined sections instead.
406
Constraining members to the same final design size

Note that this topic only applies if you have run the steel member design module in design mode.
It is a requirement in most practical structures that certain groups of members are always made
from the same size steel section. A portal frame for example usually has the left and right rafters
made from the same section size even if one is more highly stressed than the other.
If a number of analysis members that are required to have the same final design member size can
be combined into a single design group (see also Member groups) then they are automatically
given the same size during the design process. If, however they are located at various points
throughout the structure or for other reasons cannot be combined into a design group then the
following procedure should be adopted.
When the frame is modelled in SPACE GASS, the members that are made from the same section
size are usually given the same section property number. The steel member design module can
then be made to give each member with the same section property number the same final design
member size.
After the normal analysis and design iterative process you will notice that the design member
sizes at this stage are usually different for each member regardless of their section property
number. You can then assign a common design size to each section property group by performing
a final steel member check (see next section). When you then produce a design report you will
see that each member which has the same section property number also has the same final design
member size.
407
Serviceability check
The SPACE GASS steel member design module does not consider serviceability requirements
other than slenderness effects during the course of a design or check.
This is because there are numerous ways to limit excessive deflections, many of which require
extensive engineering judgement. The only deflections that can easily be checked for adequacy
by an automatic design program such as SPACE GASS are the local member deflections that
apply to each member individually. It is quite appropriate to check local member deflections for
simple beams and columns, however for sway frames and for members that have been subdivided into smaller segments, the local member deflections become meaningless.
Take for example a portal frame building that is found to have excessive lateral sway deflections.
The deflections could be reduced in many ways such as by increasing the size of the columns,
increasing the size of the rafters, introducing a haunch, increasing the size of the haunch, adding
extra roof and end wall bracing or by adding an external restraint such as brickwork.
The optimum method in controlling deflections is determined often by architectural constraints,
cost constraints, engineering preferences and other constraints that are not immediately obvious
to a design program. Some of these parameters could possibly be built into SPACE GASS,
however the extra data required to be input would make the program very cumbersome and
unwieldy compared to the method recommended in the following paragraph.
In order to satisfy serviceability requirements, it is recommend that the frame first of all be
designed to satisfy strength requirements. This includes the initial design and subsequent
analysis-design iterations (see also Updating frame member sizes). It is then a simple matter to
obtain a graphical display or printout of the deformed geometry shape and simply observe
whether the frame has excessive deflections or not. If the deflections are excessive, you can
increase member sizes manually or add bracing as required, followed by another analysis and
obtain a revised deformed geometry display. If the deflections are satisfactory it is then a matter
of performing a final code check to ensure that the changes have not caused any members to
become inadequate.
408
The steel member design/check process

This section describes in detail the internal procedures and assumptions used as the program
calculates the capacity of a design group and determines whether it is adequate or not. Because
the procedure is very similar for all codes, you can assume that all of the discussion in this section
applies equally to all codes unless specifically stated otherwise.
The steps involved in a design are the same as those for a check except that a design tries various
member sizes until it finds one that is adequate, while a check simply tries a single member size
only and saves the results regardless of whether it is adequate or not. This process is repeated
separately for each design group.
In the remainder of this section, the process of trying a member size for compliance with
one of the steel codes will be referred to as "checking" regardless of whether it is done as part of a
steel member design or a steel member check.
409
Design groups and intermediate stations

The analysis members that make up the design group are assembled together into one complete
design member. The intermediate member stations for each analysis member are positioned along
the design group and then for each flange additional stations are positioned at the points of flange
restraints and at quarter points between adjacent flange restraints.
For each load case being considered, the deflections, forces and moments are calculated at each
station along the entire design group. For single angle sections, they are calculated relative to the
cross section principal axes for AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD and AISCASD, and relative to the non-principal axes for AS1250, SABS0162, AS3990 and EUROCODE
3.
410
Design segments
The program begins working its way along the design group until it gets to the end of a segment.
A segment end occurs at the start of the design group, at the end of the design group, and
wherever a full, partial or lateral flange restraint has been applied to the critical flange. Thus the
current design segment is the portion of the design group that extends from the current critical
flange restraint location back to the end of the previous design segment (or start of the design
group).
For each station in the segment, the program does a cross section capacity check using the forces
and moments which occur simultaneously at that point. It also does various member checks for
the segment as a whole using all possible combinations of maximum forces and moments that
occur anywhere in the segment.
411
Section check
A section check simply considers the capacity of a cross section and is not related to effective
lengths or any other conditions that occur away from the cross section. The forces and moments
used are those which occur simultaneously at the cross section.
412
Member check
A member check considers the capacity of a member segment. The member check is affected by
the compression and bending effective lengths of the segment and the shape of the deflection and
bending moment diagrams along the segment. The forces and moments used in a member check
are the maximum values taken from anywhere along the segment.
The BS5950 module performs a hybrid section/member check, instead of separate section
and member checks, at each station using the forces and moments that occur at that point. Some
of the calculations are independent of the effective lengths while others take the effective lengths
into account (as required by BS5950).
413
Critical flange
The critical flange at any point within a segment is assumed to be the compression flange unless
either end of the segment is laterally unrestrained in which case it is assumed to be the tension
flange.
SPACE GASS is not able to determine whether a loading condition is predominantly due
to gravity or wind and you should therefore check that the above rule is valid for your situation.
For more information refer to AS1250 clause 3.3.4.7, AS4100 clause 5.5, SABS0162 clause
7.2.3, BS5950 clause 4.2, NZS3404 clause 5.5 or AS3990 clause 3.3.4.7.
414
Effective flange restraints

In the following discussion, the "segment length" is the distance between two adjacent cross
sections that are fully or partially restrained or between a cross section that is fully or partially
restrained and the end of the design group. A cross section is assumed to be fully or partially
restrained when a full, partial or lateral restraint is applied to its critical flange.
Member design segments
The design group in the diagram above consists of three analysis members of different lengths.
The group has full or partial restraints at the ends and three equally spaced lateral restraints on the
top flange. For the bending moment diagram shown, the first top flange lateral restraint is
ineffective because the bottom flange is the critical flange at that point. Thus, the first segment
continues past the first top flange restraint to midspan where the top flange has become the
critical one.
The types of restraints applied to a flange can affect the types of restraints applied to the other
flange also. For example, restraints of L (lateral) for both flanges is the same as full restraint for
both flanges. A restraint of P (partial) for one flange only, gives the other flange at least partial
and possibly full restraint. For a restraint of U (unrestrained) to be effective, it must be applied to
both flanges.
When determining the effective restraint at a cross section, SPACE GASS looks at the restraint
applied to the critical flange, however it also looks at the other flange to see if a restraint has been
applied to it and, if so, whether or not it affects the critical flange restraint. Thus, the effective
restraint for the cross section can be dependent on the restraint applied to both flanges.
415

In the following table, the "critical flange" is the flange under consideration, the "other flange" is
the non-critical flange and the "effective restraint" is the effective cross section restraint that
SPACE GASS uses in the code check.
For restraint type definitions see also Flange restraints. A C (continuous) flange restraint is
assumed to be equivalent to a series of L (lateral) flange restraints spaced at increments of 1mm
for the entire length of the continuous restraint.
Restraint on Critical
Flange
U,L,P,F,S or R
Restraint on Other
Flange
None or U
Effective
Restraint
U,L,P,F,S or R
None
None
None
U
P,F,S or R
P,F,S or R
P
P
L,P,F,S or R
L,P,F,S or R
F
S
L,P,F,S or R
L,P,F,S or R
F
S
L,P,F,S or R
416
Twist factor
The twist factor kt depends upon the flange restraint conditions and the cross section shape. If the
critical flange switches from top to bottom within the segment, the critical flange thickness is
assumed to be the thickness of the flange at the end of the segment. For AS4100 and NZS3404, kt
is calculated from table 5.6.3(1), while for AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950 and AS3990 it is taken
as 1.0.
417
Load height factor

The load height factor kl relates to the point of application of gravity loads as specified by the
load height position (see also "Load height position" in Steel member design data). It is always
1.0 if the loads are applied at or below the member's shear centre. It can, however exceed 1.0 if
the top flange is loaded with a downwards load causing a destabilizing effect.
If the top flange is loaded within the segment then kl = 1.2 for all codes, except AS4100 and
NZS3404 where kl = 1.4 if both ends of the segment are fully, partially or laterally restrained or
kl = 2.0 if either end is unrestrained.
If the top flange is not loaded within the segment and shear force is detected at a segment end that
is unrestrained then kl = 1.2 for all codes, except AS4100 and NZS3404 where kl = 2.0.
For all codes, kl = 1.0 if the load height position is specified as "C". If the load height position is
specified as "T" then all transverse loads (including self weight) are considered to be acting at the
top flange.
kl is calculated for "downwards" loads, acting from the top to the bottom flange (see also
Flange restraints), regardless of the member orientation and flange positions. If you want kl = 1.0
for columns, sloping beams or beams on their side then you should set the load height position to
"C" regardless of the loaded flange or the load direction.
418
Lateral rotation factor

The lateral rotation factor kr is based solely on the flange restraint conditions. Its value for each
code is given in the following table. The restraint codes given represent the flange restraints at
each end of the segment under consideration. For example, PP represents partial restraint at both
ends, while PF represents partial restraint at one end and full restraint at the other end.
End
AS3990/
Restraints
RR
AS1250
0.70
AS4100
0.70
SABS0162
0.70
BS5950
0.70
NZS3404
0.70
SR
0.77
0.70
0.77
0.85
0.70
FR
0.85
0.85
0.85
0.85
0.85
PR
LR
.935
1.00
0.85
1.00
.935
1.00
0.85
0.85
0.85
1.00
UR
.935
1.00
.935
0.95
1.00
SS
0.84
0.70
0.84
1.00
0.70
FS
PS
.935
1.02
0.85
0.85
.935
1.02
1.00
1.00
0.85
0.85
LS
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
US
FF
1.02
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.02
1.00
1.10
1.00
1.00
1.00
PF
1.10
1.00
1.10
1.00
1.00
LF
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
UF
PP
1.10
1.20
1.00
1.00
1.10
1.20
1.10
1.00
1.00
1.00
LP
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
UP
1.20
1.00
1.20
1.10
1.00
LL
UU
1.00
1.20
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.20
1.00
1.20
1.00
1.00
For BS5950, a length equal to the overall depth of the section is added to the bending effective
length for each end of the segment that has a flange restraint of U, P or S. In such cases, the value
of kr is adjusted to take this into account.
The values of kr in the table are taken from AS1250 clause 5.9, AS4100 table 5.6.3(3),
SABS0162 clause 7.2.3, BS5950 clause 4.3.5, NZS3404 table 5.6.3(3) and AS3990 clause 5.9.
There are some specific assumptions affecting kr which you should be aware of, as follows:
419
AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950 and AS3990 do not give specific rules for calculating kr for all
combinations of flange restraints at the ends of the segment. In such cases interpolation has
been used to calculate some of the values of kr given in the table.
The extra restraint condition in AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950 and AS3990 which provides
partial restraint against lateral rotation (about the cross section minor axis) of the critical
flange is not supported in SPACE GASS.
Because it is difficult for SPACE GASS to determine whether a member is a true cantilever
or not, AS1250 clause 5.9.4, SABS0162 clause 7.2.3(b), BS5950 clause 4.3.6 and AS3990
clause 5.9.4 have not been considered. This may cause the bending effective length for
cantilevers to be underestimated and you should therefore check the bending effective
length for cantilevers calculated by the AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950 and AS3990 modules.
Before accepting the bending effective length calculated by SPACE GASS, it is

recommended that you verify for yourself that the values of kr given in the previous table are a
suitable interpretation of the code that you are using.
420
End moment ratios and other factors

During a member check, various factors are calculated. In most cases, these factors are largely
dependent on the moments at the ends of the segment under consideration. Some of them,
however depend on the values of moments and/or displacements at mid or quarter points along
the segment. It is not always possible to have stations positioned exactly at the mid or quarter
points required because even though stations are positioned at mid and quarter points between
adjacent flange restraints, segments do not always extend between adjacent flange restraints
(particularly when the critical flange changes due to moment reversal). In such cases, SPACE
GASS simply takes the moment and/or displacement values from the station nearest to the
required point.
For the AS4100 and NZS3404 modules, m is calculated using the formula in clause
5.6.1.1(a)(iii) when the segment is restrained at both ends. If the segment is unrestrained at one
end, AS4100 and NZS3404 require the bending moment diagram to be matched to one of the
three diagrams shown in table 5.6.2. This is very difficult when the bending moment diagram
could be any conceivable shape. Therefore, SPACE GASS adopts a slightly conservative
approach and uses m = 1.0 when there is no moment at the unrestrained end or m = 0.25 when
there is a moment at the unrestrained end.
421
Eccentric effects for compression members

Eccentric end connection effects for angles, channels and Tee sections subjected to axial
compression are normally taken into account by calculating the extra eccentric moments and then
adding them to the normal design moments along the entire length of the design group (unless
they cause a net reduction in the final design moment).
For all codes except BS5950, the eccentric moments are calculated by multiplying the axial force
by the distance from the centroid of the connected plate to the centroid of the cross section. The
BS5950 module uses the provisions of clauses 4.7.10.2 to 4.7.10.5 instead of calculating eccentric
moments for compression members.
Eccentric effects for compression members can be suppressed if required.
422
Eccentric effects for tension members

Eccentric end connection effects for angles, channels and Tee sections subjected to axial tension
are taken into account in various ways depending on the design code being used.
For AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990, SPACE GASS simply calculates the extra eccentric
moments and then adds them to the normal design moments along the entire length of the design
group provided that they dont cause a net reduction in the final design moment. This method is
used instead of reducing the effective area of the cross section in accordance with AS1250 clause
7.3.2, SABS0162 clause 9.2 or AS3990 clause 7.3.2.
The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules also use the above method of calculating and adding
eccentric moments if the Kt method is not used. Alternatively, if the Kt method is used then Kt is
calculated in accordance with AS4100/NZS3404 clause 7.3.2 and used to reduce the member
tensile capacity rather than eccentric moments being added. The Kt method also applies to I, H or
channel sections which are connected by their flanges only. For these sections, SPACE GASS
assumes that the provisions of AS4100/NZS3404 clauses 7.3.2(b)(i) and (ii) have been met and
uses Kt = 0.85.
The BS5950 module always reduces the effective area of the cross section in accordance with
BS5950 clause 4.6.3.1 and does not add eccentric moments.
Eccentric effects for tension members can be suppressed if required.
423
The code check

When all of the member properties, effective lengths, design loads and other factors have been
calculated, they are fed into the appropriate code specific subroutines to determine the success or
failure of the code check.
During this process the subroutines also calculate the load factor or the combined stress ratio
which is then passed back to SPACE GASS along with many other design result parameters. If
the latest check is more critical than any previous checks for the design group then the results of
the latest check are retained as the governing case until another check further along the design
group yields a smaller load factor or a larger combined stress ratio.
After considering every segment in the design group for each design load case, SPACE GASS
saves the data for the governing section and member check cases and moves on to the next design
group.
You may notice that some variables in the steel member design output reports are shown
as zero when it appears that they should have a non-zero value. This occurs because some of the
steel member design modules calculate only the values that are applicable to the design actions
and section type. Variables which are not applicable are not calculated and hence appear as zero
in the output report.
424
Steel member design/check assumptions

This section lists the main assumptions that are made in the steel member design module. Some
of these assumptions are also described in the previous sections of this chapter and others are
listed only in this section. It is up to you to check that these assumptions are suitable for your
situation.
1. The top flange of a member is defined such that positive major axis bending causes it to go
into compression. An alternative definition is that the top flange is the flange on the positive
local y-axis (or z-axis if the section has been flipped) side of the member. The top flange of a
member can be easily determined by displaying the member local axes graphically and
observing the direction of the local y-axis (or z-axis if flipped).
2. The top flange of a group as a whole is defined such that it is the same as the top flange of the
first member in the group.
3. The critical flange at any point within a segment is assumed to be the compression flange
unless either end of the segment is laterally unrestrained in which case it is assumed to be the
tension flange. SPACE GASS is not able to determine whether a loading condition is
predominantly due to gravity or wind and you should therefore check that the above rule is
valid for your situation.
4. All section and member capacities are calculated assuming that stiffeners do not exist.
5. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules assume that second order effects have been taken into
account by a second order elastic analysis in accordance with AS4100/NZS3404 appendix E.
Moment magnification is not considered.
6. The NZS3404 module uses the "Other than capacity" design method with non-seismic
ductility categories only.
7. The AS4100, BS5950 and NZS3404 modules assume that the design load cases are factored
(ultimate).
8. The BS5950 module performs a type of hybrid section/member check instead of separate
section and member checks. The hybrid check is done at each station with the forces and
moments which occur simultaneously at that point. Some of its calculations are independent
of effective lengths (as in a normal section check) and other calculations take the effective
lengths into account as required by BS5950.
9. For single angle sections, the effective lengths and flange restraints must be input relative to
the non-principal axes. For all other sections, they must be input relative to the principal axes.
10. The compression effective lengths Lmx and Lmy, used by AS4100 and NZS3404 in clause
8.4.2.2 for the calculation of Nc when ke=1.0, are assumed to be equal to the lesser of the
total design group length and the normal compression effective lengths for the segment under
425

consideration. Lmx = MIN(Ltot,Lcmajor) and Lmy = MIN(Ltot,Lcminor), where Ltot is the
total design group length and Lcmajor and Lcminor are the normal compression effective
lengths.
11. The torsion effective length used by AS4100 and NZS3404 is assumed to be equal to the
distance between adjacent full or partial restraints.
12. A C (continuous) flange restraint is assumed to be equivalent to a series of L (lateral) flange
restraints spaced at increments of 1mm for the length of the continuous restraint.
13. If C (continuous) or I (ignore) flange restraints are repeated without R, S, F, P or L restraints
inbetween (eg. CCC, III or CI) then the last C or I restraint is used and the previous repeated
ones are discarded.
14. If an intermediate flange restraint is positioned at the beginning or end of a design group then
it is ignored in favour of the appropriate end flange restraint.
15. Member offsets are automatically ignored (skipped over) during a steel member design/check
provided that they occur at the ends of a design group. They are treated the same as I (ignore)
flange restraints.
16. The extra restraint condition in AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950 and AS3990 which provides
partial restraint against lateral rotation (about the cross section minor axis) of the critical
flange is not supported.
17. Because it is difficult for SPACE GASS to determine whether a member is a true cantilever
or not, AS1250 clause 5.9.4, SABS0162 clause 7.2.3(b), BS5950 clause 4.3.6 and AS3990
clause 5.9.4 have not been considered. This may cause the bending effective length for
cantilevers to be underestimated and you should therefore check the bending effective length
for cantilevers calculated by the AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950 and AS3990 modules.
18. When calculating kt for AS4100 or NZS3404, if the critical flange switches from top to
bottom within the segment, the critical flange thickness is assumed to be the thickness of the
flange at the end of the segment.
19. When calculating kl, SPACE GASS assumes conservatively that top flange loads always
occur within the segment rather than at the segment end(s).
20. kl is calculated for "downwards" loads regardless of the member orientation and flange
positions. A "downwards" load is assumed to act in the direction from the top flange to the
bottom flange. If you want kl=1.0 for columns, sloping beams or beams on their side then
you should set the load height position to "Shear centre" regardless of the loaded flange or the
load direction.
21. The direction of the transverse load acting on a segment is determined by the sign of the
difference in shear force between the two segment ends.
426

22. AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950 and AS3990 do not give specific rules for calculating kr for all
combinations of flange restraints at the ends of the segment. In such cases interpolation has
been used to calculate some of the values of kr.
23. Eccentric end connection effects (if not suppressed) are taken into account in different ways
depending on the design code being used. In most cases, the eccentric end moments are
simply added to the normal design moments for the entire design group. Exceptions are
BS5950 which uses the provisions of clauses 4.6.3.1 (tension) or 4.7.10.2 to 4.7.10.5
(compression) and AS4100 and NZS3404 which use a Kt factor for tension members (if
activated).
24. Where applicable (see previous item), moments due to eccentric end connection effects for
angles, channels and Tee sections subjected to axial loads are added to the normal design
moments only if they dont cause a net reduction in the final design moment.
25. Eccentric end moments are calculated by multiplying the axial force by the distance from the
centroid of the connected plate to the centroid of the cross section.
26. The major axis of a single or double angle section is assumed to be parallel to the short leg(s)
of the section.
27. Double angle sections are assumed to have no space between the individual angle sections.
28. The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules assume that double angles are connected
together at intermediate points sufficient to ensure that half of the design axial compressive
force for the combined section does not exceed the compressive capacity of each angle
section considered individually using an effective length (for buckling of the sections away
from each other) equal to the distance between connection points.
29. The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules consider only axial forces and shears for
single or double angle sections. Bending moments are not considered. Eccentric end moments
are considered where applicable. The AS4100, BS5950 and NZS3404 modules consider axial
forces, shears (along minor axis) and bending moments (about both axes) for single or double
angle sections.
30. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules convert double angle sections into the equivalent Tee
section and then treat them as a solid Tee shape. They do not support double starred angles.
31. The BS5950 module does not support double angle sections.
32. Beam Tees have the major axis parallel to the flange and are therefore assumed to have their
web vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and no flipping).
33. Column Tees have the major axis parallel to the web and are assumed to be lying on their
side with their flange vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and no flipping).
427

34. The AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950 and AS3990 modules do not support column Tee sections.
35. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules do not support welded Tee sections unless they are beam
Tees with d/t<15 (lightly welded longitudinally) or d/t<14 (heavily welded longitudinally).
36. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules assume that heavily welded (longitudinally) I and H
sections with equal flanges are flame cut. Lightly welded (longitudinally) or unequal flanged
I and H sections and all plate web girders are assumed to be welded "as rolled".
37. The AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950 and AS3990 modules do not support welded box sections.
38. The AS4100, BS5950 and NZS3404 modules do not support welded circular hollow sections,
channels or angles.
39. The BS5950 module assumes that for I and H sections the largest flange has an area not
exceeding 50% of the total cross sectional area.
40. The AS4100, BS5950 and NZS3404 modules assume that channel sections have equal
flanges.
41. The BS5950 module assumes that square and rectangular hollow sections have uniform wall
thicknesses throughout the section and that the top and bottom flange widths are equal.
42. The AS4100, BS5950 and NZS3404 modules assume that angle sections have uniform plate
thicknesses throughout the section.
43. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules do not support solid sections.
44. The BS5950 module assumes that solid sections are class 1.
45. When calculating the area removed from the section due to a bolted end connection, SPACE
GASS assumes that the bolts are through the web(s) unless the end connection type is
specified as "F", in which case the bolts are assumed to be through the flange(s).
46. The area removed from the section due to a bolted end connection is assumed to apply for a
distance of 250mm from each end of the design group.
47. The BS5950 module assumes conservatively that single angle sections are connected with a
single fastener for clause 4.7.10.2.
48. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules perform a web capacity check in accordance with
appendix I. If the check fails, SPACE GASS treats it as a warning rather than a failure
condition.
428

49. Serviceability requirements are not considered automatically. They must be checked
manually by direct inspection of displacement diagrams.
50. Torsional effects are not considered.
51. Member end bearing capacity is not considered.
52. For the AS4100 and NZS3404 modules, m is calculated using the formula in clause
5.6.1.1(a)(iii) when the segment is restrained at both ends. If the segment is unrestrained at
one end, AS4100 and NZS3404 require the bending moment diagram to be matched to one of
the three diagrams shown in table 5.6.2. This is of course very difficult when the bending
moment diagram could be any conceivable shape. SPACE GASS therefore adopts a slightly
conservative approach and uses m=1.0 when there is no moment at the unrestrained end or
m=0.25 when there is a moment at the unrestrained end.
53. Because it is difficult for SPACE GASS to determine if the applied loading is substantially
concentrated within the middle fifth of the unrestrained length or not, the BS5950 module
calculates n from both tables 15 and 16 and conservatively uses the largest one.
54. When calculating n from BS5950 tables 15 and 16, if the values of and do not exactly
match the key values given in the tables then n is conservatively made equal to the largest of
the four values which surround the correct value of n in the table.
55. The BS5950 module assumes that for single angle sections, Lamdax=Lamday=Lamda as
calculated in clause 4.7.10.2.
56. The AS4100, BS5950 and NZS3404 modules do not consider shear force in the major axis
direction.
57. The BS5950 module assumes that the shear force in the major axis direction is always less
than 60% of the shear capacity in that direction. Hence, clause 4.2.6 is not required for the
calculation of Mcy.
58. The BS5950 module assumes that for circular sections the shear force in each direction is
always less than 60% of the shear capacity in the each direction. This is because of the fact
that clause 4.2.6 cannot be applied to circular sections.
59. The BS5950 module assumes that for slender sections, the design strength Pydes is calculated
from clause 3.6.3 or clause 3.6.4.
60. The value of Mb calculated from BS5950 clause 4.3.7.3 module is never allowed to exceed
Mcx.
61. For the BS5950 module, the reduced moment capacities Mrx and Mry (when required) are
calculated from Clarke and Coverman (8).
429

62. The BS5950 module assumes that Mb=Mcx if LamdaLT=0.0 for sections where LamdaLT is
applicable.
63. The BS5950 module uses clause 4.4.4.2(a) when calculating the capacity of plate web
girders.
64. The BS5950 module uses table 27(d) when calculating pc for I or H sections with unequal
flanges.
65. If any term in the steel member design failure equation becomes negative, it is assumed that
the section has failed and a value of 9.99 is used in place of the negative value.
430
Steel member design/check errors
are done in the steel member design data input modules and any errors detected there must be
corrected immediately. However, some errors such as faulty member groupings cannot be
detected until the design/check phase.
All of the errors in the following list cause SPACE GASS to abort the design or check of the
current design group and move on to the next group. If an error occurs during a design or an
uninterrupted check, the program continues without alerting you and puts the error message in the
output report. Alternatively, if an error occurs during an interrupted check, the program pauses to
display the message and, if it is a section related error, gives you the opportunity to manually
select other sections to be checked.
Warnings also appear in the output report but they do not cause SPACE GASS to abort the design
or check of the current design group.
This group contains a non-existent or repeated member
One of the analysis members nominated in the design group does not exist or has been repeated.
Members in this group are not of the same section type
All analysis members in the design group must have the same section property number.
This group does not have a contiguous run of members
All of the analysis members nominated in the design group must be connected together end-toend in the frame analysis model. They must also be listed in the design group in the order that
they are connected (from either end).
A tens/comp-only member in this group is disabled
One of the analysis members in the design group is a tension-only or compression-only member
which has been disabled during the analysis, thus leaving a gap in the group.
A member in this group has buckled
One of the analysis members in the design group has buckled during the analysis, thus leaving a
gap in the group.
Stations per member limit has been exceeded
The stations per analysis member limit has been exceeded or the stations per design group limit
has been exceeded.
431

There is a limit of 500 stations per analysis member which must be enough for the number of
intermediate member stations that you specify, plus the extra stations at the ends, at concentrated
member loads and at flange restraint points. The solution is to either add a node at midspan of the
analysis member which has too many stations or decrease the number of stations that you specify
at the start of the member design/check phase.
A flange restraint is off the end of the member group
One or more flange restraints have been specified beyond the end of the design group.
Inappropriate group code or shape not supported
The section data from the library has an invalid group code or shape code (see also Section
libraries).
Starred angles cannot be made up from unequal angles
Starred angles can only be made from equal angle sections.
Starred angles are not supported for this design code
This is a restriction in the AS4100, BS5950 and NZS3404 modules.
This section shape not supported for this design code
The selected steel member design module does not support the shape of the section currently
being designed or checked.
Inappropriate end connection code for this section
An end connection code which is inappropriate for the section being considered has been input.
For example, an I or H section can have end codes of "Flange(s)", "Web" or "Centroid", or a
single angle section can have end codes of "Short" or "Long". Note that single angle sections
cannot have end connection codes of "Centroid". If eccentric effects for angles are to be ignored,
they must be disabled at the start of the member design/check phase.
Invalid fabrication code for this section
The section data from the library has an invalid fabrication code (see also Section libraries) or a
rolled section has a fabrication code which shows it to be welded.
Inappropriate section dimensions for this design code
A code specific constraint on section dimensions has not been met. For example, the BS5950
module requires channels to have equal flanges. For dimension constraints, see also Steel member
design/check assumptions.
No suitable section found
The steel member design module has found that all sections from the library which comply with
the library scan code are inadequate.
432
WARNING: You have suppressed eccentric end connection effects

If eccentric end effects for members which are not connected concentrically have been disabled at
the start of the design/check phase then this warning appears in the output report.
WARNING: Not all load cases considered have been analysed non-linearly
For AS4100 and NZS3404, a warning appears in the output report if any member design/check
load cases have only been analysed linearly.
WARNING: Web is inadequate for combined actions (App I) (Lf=#.##)
For AS4100 and NZS3404, a warning appears in the output report if the web is inadequate. It
suggests that web stiffeners may be required. The web failure load factor is also given.
WARNING: Angle calculations do not consider bending moments. Do a manual check
For AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990, the calculations for angle sections do not consider bending
moments (apart from eccentric end moments). They should be checked manually.
WARNING: Web thickness is inadequate for serviceability (4.4.2.2(a))
For BS5950, a warning appears in the output report if the web is inadequate. It suggests that web
stiffeners may be required.
WARNING: Web thickness is inadequate for flange buckling (4.4.2.3(a))
For BS5950, a warning appears in the output report if the web is inadequate. It suggests that web
stiffeners may be required.
433

This chapter describes in detail the data required to be input before a connection design can
proceed. It discusses the internal methods, philosophies and assumptions that the program uses as
it designs connections, and it explains how to initiate the actual design process once the steel
connection design data has been input.
It is highly recommended that before you use the steel connection design module, you
carefully read all of the procedures and assumptions described later in this chapter (see also The
steel connection design process in detail) to verify that its performance and capabilities are
adequate for your situation. It is up to you to determine whether or not the steel connection design
module is suitable for your requirements.
The steel connection design module is a general purpose design program which reads the frame
analysis output data, evaluates the geometry for each connection, extracts the design actions from
the analysis results and then proceeds to design all components of the connection including bolts,
welds, plates, cleats and stiffeners.
Although it is not strictly necessary to have done a steel member design before a connection
design can be done, it is a good idea to finalize the member design first so that any changes to
member sizes and design actions can be made before the connections are designed.
Throughout the connection design phase, it is assumed that the design capacities of members
meeting at the connection are adequate. The only exceptions to this are the supporting member
web and flanges, which may be strengthened with stiffeners or doubler plates if required.
After all specified connections have been designed, a detailed report can be produced for each
connection showing the full description of each component in the connection, the critical load
case, design actions, geometric and other factors, design capacities, and a complete list of
possible failure modes together with the result for each mode. Sections of the report can be
suppressed if required.
SPACE GASS can handle many different types of steel connections including angle cleat, angle
seat, moment apex, moment baseplate, pinned baseplate, bearing pad, bolted end plate, flexible
end plate, stiff seat, web side plate, welded moment, etc. Some of the connections are only
capable of resisting shear loads, while others can resist any combinations of moment, shear and
axial loads.
Naturally, the design models used are slightly different for each type of connection, as are the
priorities concerning the relative importance of bolt numbers, bolt size, weld size, plate thickness,
etc.
434

It is assumed that second order effects have been taken into account by a second order elastic
analysis in accordance with AS4100 appendix E. Moment magnification is not considered.
When some steel connection design data has been input, or to see the results of a connection
design, you can produce an output report on the screen or printer.
See also Steel design report.
435
Steel connection design data

Select "Steel Connection Design Input Data" from the Design menu or select some members and
then "Steel Connection Design Input Data" from the floating menu.
For details of how to input or edit steel connection design data graphically, refer to Steel
connections.
This section describes the steel connection design data that is required to be input before you can
design steel connections.
Steel connection design data can be input graphically, via a datasheet, or by importing a
text file.
The dialogue box that appears when you input steel connection design data graphically is shown
above. The steel connection datasheet contains the same information in a different format.
Connection
Connection to be designed.
Connection description
A short description of the connection. It is used in output reports and becomes the title for the
connection drawing detail.
436

Supporting and supported members
For each connection, you can select up to three members to be joined. They consist of a
supporting member and one or two supported members.
Most connections require a supporting member, but some such as apex or baseplate
connections do not. All connections require at least one supported member.
A supporting member can be a beam or column. The supported members can be connected to its
web (beam/column) or flanges (column). The three general connections are shown as follows.
General connection arrangements
There are many variations on the three general connection arrangements. For example,
baseplates have only one member, stiff seats may have only one member or may sit on top of a
supporting member, apex connections have members meeting end-to-end, etc.
The two supported members are referred to as being on side A and side B. The A and B
designations mean nothing other than to differentiate between the two sides. Connection drawings
always show the side A member at the left hand side of the drawing and it is therefore good
practice to select the member on the LHS as A and the member on the RHS as B, otherwise they
will be shown on opposite sides in the drawing details. Single member connections such as
baseplates can be specified as A or B, the final result is the same.
See also Connection geometry.
Choices are:
Angle cleat (Double)

Angle cleat (Single)
Angle seat (Bolted)
Angle seat (Welded)
Apex (Bolted)
Apex (Welded)
437

Baseplate (Moment)
Baseplate (Pinned)
Bearing pad (Bottom)
Bearing pad (Top)
Bolted end plate
Flexible end plate
Stiff seat (End)
Stiff seat (Internal)
Web side plate
Welded moment
It is possible to specify different connection types on each side of the same connection. For
example, you could have a bolted end plate connection on side A and a web side plate on side B.
Naturally there are some rules restricting certain types of impractical connection combinations
such as an apex combined with a web side plate, or a baseplate combined with some other
connection type, etc.
Bolting procedure
The bolting procedure determines how the bolts are to be tightened. They can be snug, bearing or
friction for simple (non-moment resisting) connections, or bearing or friction for moment
resisting connections. Snug and bearing bolting procedures resist the shear load by direct bearing
of the bolt on the connected components, while friction bolting procedures resist the shear load
through friction between the connected surfaces. Bearing and friction bolting procedures require
high strength bolts to be fully tensioned.
Choices are:
Friction,
Bearing,
Snug.
Haunch dimensions
While the SPACE GASS connection design module does not design the haunches themselves
(they are considered to be part of the member design), the haunch dimensions must be known in
order for the connection to be designed. The haunch dimensions are also required so that they can
be included in the connection drawing details.
438
Haunch dimensions
If a haunch exists, its length and depth relative to the face of the supporting member must be
input. If the haunch depth is set to zero, SPACE GASS automatically calculates the depth during
the design phase. The calculated depth is based on the supported member depth less its flange
thickness and root radius.
If there is no haunch then the haunch length should be set to zero.
The connection design module always assumes that, if a haunch exists, it is cut from the
same section as the supported member.
See also Haunches.
Strength grades
The strength grades for bolts, welds, plates, cleats, seats and members can be set to normal or
high. The actual yield strengths are taken from the standard section, bolt, weld and plate libraries
supplied with SPACE GASS. All of these libraries can be viewed or edited as required (see also
Section libraries).
Choices are:
Normal,
High.
439

Bolt gauge and pitch
The bolt gauge is the centreline distance between adjacent gauge lines (columns of bolts), while
the bolt pitch is the centreline distance between adjacent bolts along a gauge line.
Bolt gauge and pitch dimensions
In most connections, the gauge lines run perpendicular to the axis of the supported
member. For the bolts in the seat component of an angle seat connection, however the gauge line
and pitch directions are interchanged
Stiff seat bearing length
The stiff seat bearing length is the flange bearing length parallel to the supported member
longitudinal axis used for stiff seat connections. If the connection has a steel supporting member
(as opposed to a brick or concrete support of unknown dimensions), the stiff seat bearing length
can be left at zero and it will be calculated automatically during the design phase based on the
dimensions of the supporting member.
Wrench type
This variable simply controls the amount of clearance required around a bolt to allow the
tightening wrench to fit. It applies to bolted end plate, apex and moment baseplate connections
only.
Choices are:
Air,
Hand.
Bolt hole type

The bolt hole type applies to bolted end plate, apex and moment baseplate connections which use
friction bolting procedures only. Standard holes are allowed to have a diameter not exceeding
440

df+2mm when df24mm, or df+3mm when df>24mm, or df+6mm for baseplates, where df is the
bolt diameter. Oversize or short slotted holes are allowed to have a width not exceeding the
greater of 1.25df and df+8mm and a length not exceeding the greater of 1.33df and df+10mm.
Long slotted holes are allowed to have a width not exceeding the greater of 1.25df and df+8mm
and a length not exceeding 2.5df.
Choices are:
Standard,
Oversize (or short slotted),
Long slotted.
Weld categories
The weld categories for the main connection components and stiffener plates can be GP (general
purpose) or SP (structural purpose). SP welds are stronger than GP welds. It is common to use SP
welds for the main connection components and GP welds for stiffener plates.
Choices are:
GP,
SP
Preferred number of bolt rows

It is possible to control the final number of bolt rows in web side plate, flexible end plate, angle
cleat or pinned baseplate connections by specifying a preferred number of bolt rows. The
specified number of bolt rows will be used provided that they physically fit and provided that the
resulting number of bolts are adequate for design purposes. If you set this variable to zero then
the number of bolt rows will be determined automatically during the design phase.
Flange weld type
You can specify fillet welds or butt welds for the ends of the supported member flanges in bolted
end plate, welded moment, apex or moment baseplate connections. It is common to use butt
welds in this situation, particularly when the supported member flanges are thick.
Member alignment
The member alignment variable allows you to control the relative alignment of members coming
into a connection.
Choices are: Top,
Centre,
Bottom.
For two supported beams coming into either side of a supporting column, the height of the side B
beam is adjusted in accordance with the specified member alignment to match the side A beam.
The member alignment variable has no effect when there is only one beam supported by a
column.
441
For one or two supported beams connecting to the sides of a supporting beam web, the height of
the supported beams is adjusted in accordance with the specified member alignment to match the
supporting beam flanges.
Member alignment variations
Threads in shear plane

The decision to include or exclude threads from the shear plane affects the bolt shear strength.
Bolts are commonly designed assuming that the threads are included in the shear plane, however
this results in a reduction in bolt strength.
442

Bolts above top flange
The bolts above top flange setting is not used at present. Eventually, it will allow you to specify a
top flange plate instead of having bolts above the top flange in bolted end plate connections. At
present, SPACE GASS always places two bolts on each side of the tension flange(s).
See also Steel connection configuration.
See also Steel connection design text.
See also Steel connections.
See also Running a steel connection design.
443
Running a steel connection design

Select "Steel Connection Design" from the Design menu.
!IMPORTANT NOTE !
AS4100 requires second order effects to be taken into account by either performing a first order
(linear) elastic analysis with moment magnification or a second order (non-linear) elastic analysis
with no moment magnification. Because a non-linear analysis is generally more efficient and
accurate than moment magnification, and because SPACE GASS has no facilities for moment
magnification, it is recommended that a non-linear analysis be used at all times.
Connections list
If you want to design all connections (for which steel connection design data has been input) then
this field can be left blank, otherwise you should type in a list of connections (separated by
commas or dashes) that you want designed.
Load cases list
If you want to consider all load cases then this field can be left blank, otherwise you should type
in a list of load cases (separated by commas or dashes) that you want considered.
You should include only the factored (ultimate) load cases in this field.
444

Default section library
During the frame analysis section property input phase, sections which are read from a library
have the library name stored with their section property data. Sections which have not been read
from a library do not have a library name stored with their data.
For members with section properties that were read from a library, the steel connection design
module uses that library to get information about the strength grade, properties, cross section
shape, etc. of the member.
For members with section properties that were not read from a library, the design module uses the
nominated default library to get its information.
The default library is normally one of the standard libraries supplied with SPACE GASS.
Comply with minimum design actions
AS4100 clause 9.1.4 requires that the connection design actions do not fall below a minimum
threshold, even if the actual design actions are quite small. This is to guarantee that the
connections achieve an acceptable level of robustness and are able to tolerate construction loads
and other unforseen conditions which may not be taken into account in the frame analysis data.
You do, however have the option of overriding these minimum design actions and using the
calculated design actions no matter how small they are. It is up to you to determine whether or
not you want the design to comply with the code requirements for minimum design actions.
See also Design actions.
See also Minimum design actions.
Generate drawings for SPACE GASS
During the connection design phase, SPACE GASS can generate a drawing view file which can
be accessed later SPACE GASS to enable viewing, printing or exporting to DXF files of fully
detailed and annotated drawings of the designed connections. If you elect not to generate a view
file then you will not be able to view the drawings later.
See also View steel connection drawings.
See also Steel connection details.
Generate drawings for a CAD system
This provides an alternative means of exporting connection drawings in DXF format to a CAD
system. If you enable this option then separate DXF files for each connection are generated
automatically during the design phase. Note that you must have purchased the CAD interface
module with SPACE GASS in order to have access to this facility.
445
The best way to create connection drawing files in DXF format

is to generate a view file during the connection design phase. Then, while viewing them
graphically after the design phase, make DXF drawing files of just the connections you want
rather than all connections.
See also Steel connection details.
When all of the information has been entered, the SPACE GASS steel connection design module
runs through the following basic design steps.
1. The geometry and loads for all members meeting at a connection are extracted from the
frame analysis output files.
2. The program runs through a design phase where it considers all code requirements and does
an independent design of bolts, welds, plates, cleats and stiffeners for each load case.
3. An envelope of bolts, welds, plates, cleats, stiffeners, etc. is built up from the design results
of each load case.
4. The program runs through a check phase where it again considers all code requirements but
uses the envelope of designed bolts, welds, plates, cleats and stiffeners for each load case.
5. Design data (and possibly drawing data) for the connection is saved and the program returns
to step 1 above for the next connection.
If you want to terminate the steel connection design before it is finished, just press ESC or the
right mouse button. If you terminate the design in this way, the results for any connections which
have already been designed are saved.
For a full explanation of the internal procedures and assumptions used during the design of a
connection, see also The steel connection design process in detail.
446
The steel connection design process

This section describes in detail the internal procedures and assumptions used as the program
designs each connection.
447
Connection geometry
For connections with a supporting member, the geometry for each supported member is
calculated relative to the supporting member location and orientation. For each side, the program
determines whether the supported member connects to the supporting member end, flange or
web.
Checks are done for invalid geometry to pick up such things as the angle between members being
too acute, or trying to connect a moment end plate to the supporting member web, etc. If any
errors are detected the program saves the error and skips to the next connection.
Some of the main geometric constraints are:
1. The supported member must be perpendicular to the supporting member in elevation for
bearing pad, angle seat, angle cleat and stiff seat connections.
2. For connections where the supported member does not have to be perpendicular to the
supporting member in elevation (all those not mentioned in point 1 above), the maximum
angle (in the plane of the supported member web) is 60 (+ve or -ve).
3. For all connections, the supported member must be perpendicular to the supporting member
in plan (in the plane of the supported member flanges).
4. For points 1, 2 and 3 above, an angle tolerance of 2.5 is allowed.
5. The supported member cannot connect to a supporting column web for bolted end plate,
welded moment and bearing pad connections.
6. The supported member cannot connect to a supporting beam web for bolted end plate,
welded moment, angle seat and bearing pad connections.
7. Only I or H shaped sections are supported at this stage.
448
Haunches
Haunches (if appropriate) are modelled by simply adding the haunch depth to the supported
member depth and then treating the combined section as a deep I or H section with the centre
flange ignored. The program assumes that the haunch flange dimensions and web thickness are
the same as the supported member.
449
Design actions
Design actions for all members involved in a connection are extracted from the frame analysis
output files. Some connection types are not able to resist all design actions and, in such cases,
some of the design actions are ignored during the design phase.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
If a design action has to be ignored and it is greater than 10% of the minimum design action then
it is considered to be "significant" and is flagged as such in the output reports. The 10% ratio is
thought to be a reasonable measure of whether an ignored design action is significant or not, but
this is not a code recommendation and it is really up to you the engineer to determine whether an
action can be safely ignored or not.
The design actions considered by SPACE GASS are:
Design action
N*
Vy*
Connection types
Moment connections and baseplates only
Moment connections and baseplates only
Vx*
All connections
My*
Mx*
Moment connections only

Moment connections only
Most of the non-moment connections such as angle cleat, angle seat and web side plate
take into account the extra eccentric moment generated by the point of application of the shear
force being a distance away from the face of the supporting member. Exceptions are the flexible
end plate and bearing pad connections in which it is assumed that the load eccentricity is
negligible.
450
Minimum design actions

Provided you havent suppressed the minimum design actions at the start of the connection design
phase, the design actions are modified if necessary to comply with the requirements of AS4100
clause 9.1.4.
The minimum design actions used by SPACE GASS are:
Design Action
N*
Vx*
Connection types
Baseplates
0.3fyA
All but baseplates
Mx*
Moment connections
0.5fy.min(S,1.5Z)
Value
40kN
The sign of the minimum design actions is always the same as the sign of the calculated design
actions. For example, if the minimum design action is 40kN and the calculated shear force is 30kN, then the final design action becomes -40kN, not 40kN.
451
Design phase
The program runs through a design phase where it builds up an envelope of bolts, welds, plates,
cleats, stiffeners, etc. based on the design results of each load case. An independent design is
done for each load case. For example, load case 1 might require 4 bolts at the top flange and 2
bolts at the bottom flange for a moment end plate connection, while load case 2 might require 2
bolts at the top flange and 4 bolts at the bottom. This would result in an envelope of 4 bolts at
each flange.
Unlike a member design, where there is usually a critical load case which governs the design of
the member, no one connection design load case (during the design phase anyway) can be the all
encompassing critical one because of the large number of components that have to be designed
and located.
452
Check phase
After all of the load cases have been considered during the design phase, the program goes into a
check phase. During the check phase, the final design envelope which resulted at the end of the
design phase is used for every load case. This means that the same bolt, weld, plate and stiffener
data is checked in each load case during the check phase.
The load case which causes the highest stress ratio for all of the failure modes considered is
marked as the critical load case. The design results included in the output reports apply only to
this critical load case. It is possible therefore for other load cases to have higher stress ratios than
the critical load case for some failure modes but not for the critical failure mode.
453
Bolts
During the design phase, the procedure used for sizing and locating bolts is as follows.
1. The program starts with the smallest bolt size and the minimum practical number of bolts.
The smallest bolt size is determined from the bolt size range specified in the connection
configuration and from the sizes in the bolt library.
2. If the bolts are inadequate, then the number of bolts is incremented.
3. If the number of bolts reaches the maximum possible and the bolt design is still inadequate,
then the number of bolts is reduced back to the minimum (as in step 1 above) and the bolt
size is incremented one size.
4. Steps 2 and 3 above are repeated until a satisfactory bolt design is reached or until the
maximum bolt size and number of bolts is reached and the connection fails due to bolt
failure.
If, during the plate or cleat design, the initial plate or cleat size is changed from that used in the
bolt design, and if the new size affects the bolt design, then the bolt design is repeated in
accordance with steps 1-4 above.
For some connections, where there isnt much variation possible for bolt numbers and locations,
the above procedure is simplified somewhat. Bolted end plate connections for example, always
have four bolts around the tension flange and hence the number of variations concerning bolt
numbers and locations are minimal.
454
Welds
This section discusses the main connection welds. For information about stiffener welds, see also
Tension and compression stiffeners, and see also Shear stiffeners.
The welded connections are designed to be welded as follows.
Connection type
Weld location
Bolted end plate,welded

moment,apex and moment
baseplate with butt welded flanges
Full strength (full penetration) butt

welds to flanges, and fillet welds on
both sides of web
Bolted end plate, welded moment,

apex and moment baseplate with
fillet welded flanges
Fillet welds all round
Welded angle seat
Fillet welds on two sides of seat only
Bearing pad
Fillet welds on both sides of web and

one side of connected flange for end
plate, and bottom and two sides of
bearing pad
Flexible end plate
Fillet welds on both sides of web only
Web side plate
Fillet welds on both sides of plate
Pinned baseplate
Fillet welds on both sides of web and

outside of flanges
455
Plates and cleats

The plate and cleat design depends largely on the type of connection involved. In bolted end plate
or bolted apex connections, for example, the dimensions of the end plates are based on the
number and size of bolts at each flange and there is not much variation possible. The main plate
variable is its thickness. In web side plate connections, however the plate dimensions can vary
drastically depending on the number of rows and columns of bolts required.
The general procedure used for sizing plates is as follows.
1. The program starts with a plate of minimum thickness and with dimensions just big enough
to fit the required number of bolts.
2. During the bolt design, if the number or size of bolts increases, then the plate dimensions
(not thickness) are increased also.
3. If the plate is inadequate, then the thickness is incremented, the bolt count is reduced to a
minimum, the plate dimensions are reduced accordingly, and the bolt design is repeated.
4. Steps 2 and 3 above are repeated until a satisfactory plate design is reached or until the
maximum plate size is reached and the connection fails due to plate failure.
Sizing of cleat components follows a similar procedure to that described for plates, except that
there are usually only one or two cleat sizes to choose from. The angle cleat connection, for
example, uses one of two cleat sizes, a 100x100x6 EA or a 150x100x10 UA.
456
Tension and compression stiffeners

Tension and/or compression stiffeners are designed for bolted end plate or welded moment
connections if required. In addition, if the supporting member does not extend at least a distance
equal to its flange width past the top flange of the supported member then a nominal top stiffener
is specified.
Stiffeners are always designed to be on both sides of the web, running the full distance
between flanges.
The general procedure used for sizing stiffeners is as follows.
1. The program starts with a stiffener of minimum thickness and width.
2. If the stiffener is inadequate, then the width is incremented.
3. If the width reaches the maximum possible and the stiffener design is still inadequate, then
the width is reduced back to the minimum (as in step 1 above) and the stiffener thickness is
incremented one size.
4. Steps 2 and 3 above are repeated until a satisfactory stiffener design is reached or until the
maximum stiffener thickness and width is reached and the connection fails due to stiffener
failure.
If there are two supported members (eg. on opposite sides of a column), and stiffeners are
designed for both of them, it is possible to reach a situation where the size and location of the
stiffeners is different for each side.
If this occurs then they are usually combined into one stiffener which slopes from the required
location on side A to the required location on side B. The combined stiffener plate and weld sizes
are set to the larger of the requirements for each side.
If the slope of the combined stiffener exceeds 15 (relative to the supporting member)
then the two stiffeners are not combined.
If two top stiffeners are required and they are not combined, and one or both of them is a nominal
stiffener then the lower most nominal stiffener is removed.
Tension and compression stiffeners are designed to be welded as follows.
Stiffener type
Weld location
457

Tension stiffeners
Flanges only
Compression stiffeners
Web only (tight fitting at ends)
Nominal stiffeners
Combined (tension and compression)
Flanges only
Flanges and web
Once the tension and/or compression stiffeners have been designed, the program does not
re-check the capacity of the supporting member stiffened flange (for tension stiffeners) and/or
stiffened web (for compression stiffeners).
It is assumed that the width of the stiffeners is not reduced by the member root radii, even though
these radii will actually decrease the stiffener area near the flanges by a small amount.
Stiffeners are designed using a simple design model which involves a yield check and a geometry
check rather than any buckling checks.
458
Shear stiffeners
At the end of the check phase, if either side of the connection is a bolted end plate or welded
moment connection, the program calculates the web shear in the supporting member and
evaluates whether or not diagonal shear stiffeners are required. If required, they are designed and
included in the output reports and drawings.
Shear stiffeners are always designed to be on both sides of the web, running the full
distance between flanges.
Shear stiffeners are designed to be welded to the flanges and web.
459
Clashing and copes

During a connection design, the program tries to avoid clashing of members and connection
components as much as possible. For example, the outside bolts in a bolted end plate connection
are automatically moved further away from the supported member flange if the angle between the
supported and supporting members becomes too acute.
Checks are also made to ensure that the required bolts can actually fit on the components with
adequate edge distances and clearances.
For connections which involve a beam connecting to the web of another beam, clashing of
flanges often occurs and, in these cases, single or double web copes are automatically specified
and taken into account during the design.
For connections which involve a beam connecting to the web of a column, it is assumed
that the beam flanges (and end plate if appropriate) can fit between the column flanges. Checks
are not made to detect this situation and flange side copes are not specified. It is up to you to
check for this situation.
It is also assumed that there will be no clashing of bolts if two supported members are
connected to each side of a supporting member web. This may be a problem in some cases,
however it will be easy to observe by simply viewing the connection drawing details. If it occurs,
it is up to you to manually adjust the bolt positions or use common bolts in order to rectify the
situation.
460
Baseplate connections
For pinned baseplate connections, no bolt check is done if the column is in compression. In this
case it is assumed that any shear between the baseplate and the footing is resisted by friction or a
shear key rather than by the bolts.
For moment baseplate connections, the same design model as is used for bolted end plate
connections is adopted. The model is adapted slightly to avoid any of the supporting member
flange and web capacity checks.
461
Critical load case

It is important to note that the stresses, capacities and other values included in connection design
output reports apply only to the critical load case, and that the critical load case is the one which
causes the highest stress-to-capacity ratio for all of the components and failure modes considered
during the design of a connection. Thus, the critical load case applies to the critical component in
the connection. Other components may have their own other critical load case which produces a
higher stress-to-capacity ratio for them, but which is still less than the highest stress-to-capacity
ratio of the critical component.
For example, suppose that in a web side plate connection, load case 3 is the critical load case
which causes stress-to-capacity ratios of 0.9 for the bolts, 0.8 for the welds and 0.75 for the plate.
This means that the bolts are the critical component. Load case 2, however may cause stress-tocapacity ratios of 0.6 for the bolts, 0.7 for the welds and 0.88 for the plate. Thus, while the output
report will show the critical load case as 3, and the plate stressed to 75%, you can see that it
would be a mistake to assume that the plate has 25% in reserve when in fact load case 2 leaves
only 12% in reserve!
An exception to this occurs in the design of column shear stiffeners. The stresses and capacities
reported for shear stiffeners apply to the critical shear stiffener load case which is not necessarily
the same as the overall critical load case.
462
Steel connection design errors

are done in the steel connection design data input modules and any errors detected there must be
corrected immediately. However, some errors (eg. trying to connect members which dont
actually meet) cannot be detected until the design phase.
All of the errors in the following list cause SPACE GASS to abort the design of the current
connection and move on to the next one. If an error occurs, the program continues without
alerting you and puts the error message in the output report.
Warnings and notes also appear in the output report but they do not cause SPACE GASS to abort
the design of the current connection. Notes are different to warnings in that they are not flagged
in summary output reports. They are, however treated identically to warnings in detailed output
reports.
Many of the errors, warnings and notes listed in this section may be caused by restrictive
ranges of bolt, weld or plate sizes in the SPACE GASS connection configuration data (see also
Steel connection configuration). The range of bolt, weld and plate sizes may also be restricted by
the sizes contained within the standard bolt, weld and plate data libraries (see also Standard
libraries). Be aware that these configuration ranges and data libraries can be modified by you
when you are looking at ways of eliminating errors, warnings and notes.
Non-existent member
One of the members in the connection does not exist.
No section name
One of the members in the connection has a section property without a name. This prevents
SPACE GASS from locating the section in one of the sections libraries.
Sections library not found
A member in the connection has a section property taken from a sections library that cannot be
found.
Wrong format library
A member in the connection has a section property taken from an out-of-date sections library.
Section not found in library
A member in the connection has a section property which cannot be located in its nominated
sections library.
463

Shape not supported
Only I or H shaped sections are supported at this stage.
There is no single common node
The members in the connection do not all meet at a common node.
Supported members are not of the same section
Both supported members must have the same cross-section (apex and internal stiff seat
connections).
Supported members have different planes/orientations
Both supported members must lie in the same plane. Eg: if you have two beams connecting to a
column, one beam cant connect to the flange and the other the web. In order to do this you must
separate them and design them as two connections.
Supported members must be on opposite sides
Supported members must connect to opposite sides of the supporting member. Eg: two beams
cant connect to the same side of a column.
Invalid member orientation for connection type
Occurs if the angle between connected members is too acute or the connection geometry is
invalid for the type of connection being designed. Eg: you cannot connect a bolted end plate
connection to the web of a column. For more information about geometric constraints, see also
Connection geometry.
Cannot have continuous column with internal stiff seat
An internal stiff seat connection consists of a beam continuos over a column or pedestal support.
It isnt possible for the supporting column to be continuous.
Extra members are in the plane of an apex connection
An apex connection must have only two members in the plane of the connection. This error
occurs if the program detects that other members also exist in the plane of the connection.
Cannot calculate stiff seat bearing length
If you havent specified a supporting member, and you specified a zero stiff seat bearing length
(see also Steel connection design data), then the bearing length cant be calculated and you should
simply specify a stiff seat bearing length in the connection design data. The bearing length is
calculated if there is a supporting member (even if a zero stiff seat bearing length is specified).
Member buckling load exceeded
One of the members in the connection has buckled during the frame analysis, preventing it from
being included in a connection design.
464
Tens/comp-only member disabled in all load cases

One of the members in the connection is a tension-only or compression-only member which has
been disabled during the frame analysis, preventing it from being included in a connection design.
Bolt strength failure
The bolts have insufficient strength for the design actions.
Bolt strength, plate bearing or beam web failure
The bolts have insufficient strength, or the plate component or beam web failed due to bearing of
the bolts against them.
Beam web or plate/cleat failure in vertical bearing
The maximum number of bolts possible are insufficient to prevent the beam web or the plate
component from failing due to the bolts bearing vertically against them.
Beam web or plate/cleat failure in horizontal bearing
The maximum number of bolts possible are insufficient to prevent the beam web or the plate
component from failing due to the bolts bearing horizontally against them.
Supporting member bolt failure
The bolts connecting the angle cleat component to the supporting member have insufficient
strength.
Bolt serviceability failure
The bolts are insufficient for serviceability.
Bolt and supporting member bearing/tearout failure
The bolts have insufficient strength and the number of bolts is insufficient for the checks
involving the bolts bearing against the supporting member.
Supporting member bearing/tearout failure
The strength of the supporting member is insufficient to avoid a local bearing failure from the
bolts or a bolt tearout failure. An increase in bolt pitch may help to avoid this situation.
Maximum plate depth is too small to fit bolts
Maximum plate depth is too small to fit the required number of bolts.
Bearing capacity failure at interface
The capacity of the end plate and bearing pad is insufficient to avoid bearing failure at their
interface.
465
Compression capacity failure of end plate

The end plate has failed in compression due to yielding.
Compression capacity failure of bearing pad
The bearing pad has failed in compression due to yielding.
Yielding of beam web due to small plate depth
The maximum possible plate depth is insufficient to avoid yielding of the supported member web.
End plate cannot fit between column flanges
The width of the flexible end plate when connected to a column web is too large to fit between
the column flanges. Try reducing the bolt gauge length and/or the bolt size range.
Plate strength failure
The largest plate size available is insufficient for strength.
Maximum angle cleat size failure
The largest angle cleat component available has insufficient strength.
Angle cleat dimensions incorrect (check input)
The beam end clearance specified is too large to allow the bolts to fit properly on the angle cleat.
Try reducing the beam end clearance.
Plate or column failure
The plate has insufficient strength, or the column failed due to the bolts causing yield bearing or
tearout.
Insufficient horizontal edge distance in angle cleat
The bolts cannot fit properly onto the angle cleat. Try reducing the edge distance factor, bolt
diameter, bolt gauge length or beam end clearance.
Insufficient distance from top of seat to bolt in vert. leg
The bolts cannot fit properly onto the angle seat. Try reducing the edge distance factor.
Fillet weld strength failure
The largest fillet weld size available has insufficient strength.
GP category flange butt weld failure (try SP)
The general purpose flange butt weld has failed. Try a structural purpose butt weld.
466
GP category web butt weld failure (try SP)

The general purpose web butt weld has failed. Try a structural purpose butt weld.
SP category web butt weld failure
The structural purpose web butt weld has failed. This probably also indicates that the web itself is
inadequate.
No suitable fillet weld from the user specified range
The range of available weld sizes in the weld data library all fall outside of the range of weld
sizes specified by you in the SPACE GASS connection configuration data (see also Steel
connection configuration). Try increasing the configuration range of weld sizes.
Connection capacity exceeded
Some of the angle seat connection strength capacity checks have failed.
Supported member web buckling failure
The web buckling capacity of the supported member has been exceeded.
Web crippling capacity failure of supported member
The web crippling capacity of the supported member has been exceeded.
Shear capacity failure of beam web at end plate
The web shear capacity of the supported member has been exceeded.
Bearing capacity failure at interface
The bearing capacity at the interface of the end plate and the bearing pad is insufficient.
Compression capacity failure of end plate
The end plate has failed in compression due to yielding.
Compression/shear capacity failure of bearing pad
The bearing pad has failed in compression or shear due to yielding.
Failure of weld at end plate
The end plate weld has insufficient strength.
Failure of weld to bearing pad
The bearing pad weld has insufficient strength.
467
Possible web buckling failure of supported member

The web of the supported member may have failed due to buckling.
Coped section failure in shear and bending
The supported member requires coping but its capacity is then reduced to the extent that it has
failed in both shear and bending.
Coped section failure in shear only
failed in shear.
Coped section failure in bending only
failed in bending.
Supported member web failure in block shear
The supported member web has failed due to block shear.
No suitable stiffener found
The largest stiffener plate size available has insufficient strength.
Stiffener fillet weld strength failure
The largest stiffener fillet weld size available has insufficient strength.
No suitable top stiffener found
The largest top stiffener plate size available has insufficient strength.
No suitable bottom stiffener found
The largest bottom stiffener plate size available has insufficient strength.
No suitable shear stiffener found
The largest shear stiffener plate size available has insufficient strength.
Top stiffener is required but was not designed
The column web tensile and compressive stress regions overlap or the supported member top
flange may be close to the top of the column and hence stiffeners should be provided.
Bottom stiffener is required but was not designed
468

The column web tensile and compressive stress regions overlap and hence stiffeners should be
provided.
No suitable shear stfnr weld from the user specified range
The range of available weld sizes in the weld data library all fall outside of the range of weld
sizes specified by you in the SPACE GASS connection configuration data. Choose "Steel
connection configuration" from the Config menu and try increasing the configuration range of
weld sizes.
Top stiffener fillet weld strength failure
The largest top stiffener fillet weld size available has insufficient strength.
Bottom stiffener fillet weld strength failure
The largest bottom stiffener fillet weld size available has insufficient strength.
Shear stiffener fillet weld strength failure
The largest shear stiffener fillet weld size available has insufficient strength.
Bending capacity of outstanding seat leg exceeded
The outstanding leg of the angle seat is not of sufficient strength to support the bending induced
by the supported member.
WARNING: A section has a zero root radius (check sections library)
In many of the connection design models, absence or presence of member root radii can affect the
results significantly. If this warning occurs, the section has a zero root radius (as specified in the
sections library). Update the sections library with the correct root radii.
WARNING: Extra members connect into joint and may affect the design
This warning indicates that members other than those specified in the connection meet at the
connection node. They may be in the plane of the connection or out-of-plane. It is up to you to
determine whether or not they will affect the connection design.
WARNING: Pitch specified is < 2.5 times bolt diameter
The bolts passed the strength check but the bolt pitch specified by you is less than 2.5x the bolt
diameter, violating clause 9.6.1 in AS4100.
WARNING: Bolts may be too close to column flange due to pitch
The bolts satisfy the strength checks but the bolt pitch specified by you may result in the bolts
being too close to the column flanges.
WARNING: Bolts between beam flanges may be clashing
469

In order to satisfy edge clearance requirements, the bolts may be too close together. It could
indicate that the supported member is too small for the connection type.
WARNING: Dist. from top of seat to bolt in vert. leg may be too small
The vertical distance from the heel of the angle seat to the supporting member bolts may result in
an edge distance factor smaller than that specified by you.
WARNING: Horizontal edge distance in angle cleat may be too small
The horizontal distance from the toe of the angle cleat to the supported member bolts may result
in an edge distance factor smaller than that specified by you.
WARNING: Capacity of weld group < capacity of side plate
The additional design requirement for the web side plate weld in which the nominal moment
capacity of the weld group must be greater than the nominal moment capacity of the web side
plate was not satisfied.
WARNING: Top stfnrs may be required if column upstand < flange width
Top stiffeners are not required for strength, however nominal top stiffeners may still be required
if the distance from the top of the beam flange to the top of the column is less than the column
flange width.
WARNING: Top stfnrs may not be required if column upstand > fl width
Nominal top stiffeners have been specified. They are not required if the distance from the top of
the beam flange to the top of the column is greater than the column flange width.
WARNING: Column flange top doubler plates required but not designed
The program has detected that column flange top doubler plates are required, however there is no
facility for designing them at this stage.
WARNING: Column flange bottom doubler plates reqd but not designed
The program has detected that column flange bottom doubler plates are required, however there is
no facility for designing them at this stage.
WARNING: Column flange top & bot doubler plates reqd but not designed
The program has detected that column flange top and bottom doubler plates are required,
however there is no facility for designing them at this stage.
NOTE: Custom plate used (library plates unsuitable)
No suitable plate width was available from the plate data library and therefore a custom plate
width was specified.
NOTE: Custom stiffeners used (library plates unsuitable)
470

No suitable stiffener width was available from the plate data library and therefore a custom
stiffener width was specified.
NOTE: Custom top stiffeners used (library plates unsuitable)
No suitable top stiffener width was available from the plate data library and therefore a custom
top stiffener width was specified.
NOTE: Custom bottom stiffeners used (library plates unsuitable)
No suitable bottom stiffener width was available from the plate data library and therefore a
custom bottom stiffener width was specified.
NOTE: Custom shear stiffeners used (library plates unsuitable) No suitable shear stiffener
width was available from the plate data library and therefore a custom shear stiffener width was
specified.
471
Concrete column design

This section describes in detail the general use of the concrete column design module. It also
includes explanations of all of the fields you need to complete to perform a concrete column
design or check. Capabilities of the concrete column design module include:
Design and checking modes.
Rectangular, circular, trapezoidal, tee, cruciform and non-standard shapes.
Multiple rectangular and circular voids.
Multiple reinforcing bars of any size and location.

Reinforcing bar library.
Numerous methods of quickly generating bar layouts.
Calculation and display of interaction curves for the actual reinforcement, and for other
reinforcement percentages that you specify.
Calculation of load factors for X-axis, Y-axis and biaxial bending.
Calculation of multiple load cases simultaneously.

Calculation of moment magnifiers.
Calculation and checking of code minimum design moments.
Allowance for tension and compression.
Allowance for positive and negative moments.

Automatic transfer of column geometry, including cross section shape from your frame
analysis model.
Automatic transfer of loads from your frame analysis model.
Allowance for input of extra user-defined load cases.
Various unit sets.
See also Concrete column assumptions and notes.
472
Running a concrete column design

Select "Concrete Column Design" from the Design menu or select some members and then
"Concrete Column Design" from the floating menu or click the right mouse button on a member
and then select "Concrete Column Design" from the floating menu.
Shape selection
These buttons allow you to select a column cross section shape.
Non-standard shapes
You can use multiple rectangular or circular voids with any of the standard shapes to create
almost any type of non-standard shape such as columns with holes, lift cores, shear walls, etc.
Clear
Resets all of the data in the dialogue box to default values.
Configure
Allows you to enter the configuration dialogue box where you are able to adjust a number of
parameters and settings. The specific fields are described later in this document (see also
Concrete column configuration).
473
Print
Allows you to print graphics, design data and the interaction curve points (see also Concrete
design report).
Check
Performs a check of the column for the shape, reinforcement and loads you have defined. This
includes calculation of the interaction diagrams, load factors, slenderness and moment magnifiers,
etc.
Auto-check mode
If activated, a check will automatically be performed whenever you change some data. It operates
exactly the same as if you clicked on the Check button after every change you made.
You may wish to turn this off when the module is taking a long time to perform calculations.
Design
Performs a design of the column which modifies the reinforcing bar sizes to satisfy the
reinforcement percentage range, loads and load factor limit you have defined. It does not move,
add or remove bars, it merely changes their size.
Note that all bar sizes will be changed to the same size.
Units
The units system you wish to use.
Code
The design code you wish to use.
Concrete
The concrete fields allow you to define the concrete strength and the column cross section shape
dimensions.
474

Fc
The characteristic concrete strength.
Dimensions
The dimensions for the selected shape. Note that all of the dimensions are pictorially represented
via the small diagram above the Concrete fields.
Bars
These fields allow you to define the reinforcement sizes and layout. You can specify multiple
reinforcement bars of different sizes within the column.
Add
Allows you to add another bar.
Delete
Allows you to delete the currently selected bar.
Generate reinforcement
Allows you simply specify the number and size of bars in each cross section face, after which all
bars are automatically generated.
When you specify the number of bars in each face, keep in mind that the corner bars belong to
just one face which is usually the horizontal face. For example, in order to specify four bars in
each face of a rectangular column, you should specify four bars in the top and bottom faces and
two bars in the side faces, resulting in a total of twelve bars.
Note that this method of bar generation completely replaces all bars that were previously defined.
Generate bars in a line

Allows you to generate a line of bars in any direction.
Note that this method of bar generation adds to the bars that were previously defined.
Unify bar sizes

Causes all of the bars to be changed to the size you specify.
475

Bar
The number and name of the currently selected bar. Note that the currently selected bar is circled
in blue in the cross section diagram.
D
The bar diameter.
X and Y
The position of the bar relative to the upper left hand corner of the shape.
Percentage
The reinforcement range that you wish to design within. The module looks at this range when
performing a design (ie. when you click on the Design button) and will only choose a bar if its
size falls within this range.
Voids
These fields allow you to specify multiple circular and rectangular voids.
Void
The number of the currently selected void. Note that if multiple voids exist, the currently selected
void is shown in blue in the cross section diagram.
Add
Allows you to add another void.
Delete
Allows you to delete the currently selected void.
Type
You can choose either rectangular or circular voids.
D
The void depth (if rectangular) or diameter (if circular).
B
The void width (if rectangular).
476

X and Y
The position of the voids centroid relative to the upper left hand corner of the shape.
Length
The actual length of the column.
kx and ky
The effective length factors. These values are used to calculate the effective lengths of the
column, where Lex = kx*L and Ley = ky*L.
Braced (shrt / slnd)
Specifies whether the column is braced or unbraced. If the column is fixed in position at its ends
then you should tick the box.
The value beside the braced item (ie. shrt / slnd) refers to the slenderness of the column. "Shrt"
means that a column is short and "Slnd" means that the column is slender according to AS3600
clause 10.3.
Loads
Each load case consists of a description, axial force, bending moments and end moment ratios.
During a design or check, the program considers all load cases simultaneously.
If the structural model has been analysed, you can select specific load cases to be transferred to
the concrete column design module. In addition, 10 blank "user-defined" load cases are created in
the concrete column design module, ready for you to manually input forces and moments to
supplement the transferred load cases.
If the frame has not been analysed then only the 10 blank load cases are available.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Note that loads transferred from a SPACE GASS analysis are taken from the column ends only,
regardless of whether any larger intermediate column loads exist or not
Load case description
This allows you to select a load case to view. All of the moment, axial force, end moment,
moment magnifier and ratio fields apply to the load case you select. The load factor for the
selected load case is shown as follows the interaction diagram window (along with the load factor
for the governing load case).
477

Note that the load point for the current load case is circled in blue in the interaction diagram
window.
If the load point is displayed in red in the interaction diagram window then it indicates that the
load factor is less than the load factor limit specified in the configuration dialogue (usually set to
1.0).
P
Axial compression (+ve) or tension (-ve). See also Sign conventions.
Mx
Bending moment (either positive or negative) about the columns local z-axis (shown as the
horizontal axis in the concrete column module). A positive Mx causes compression at the top of
the cross section. See also Sign conventions.
My
Bending moment (either positive or negative) about the columns local y-axis (shown as the
vertical axis in the concrete column module). A positive My causes compression at the left hand
side of the cross section. See also Sign conventions.
Mx1 / Mx2 and My1 / My2
The end moments used to calculate the reference L/r ratio when determining whether the column
is short or slender. The ratio is positive when bent in double curvature (ie. M1 is the opposite sign
to M2) or negative when bent in single curvature (ie. M1 and M2 are both the same sign).
Ratio
The ratio of the end moments. The module will calculate this value for you (given the end
moments) or you can enter it directly.
Apply moment magnification
If activated, the moment magnifiers will be applied to the moments you specify. The calculated
moment magnifiers and the magnified moments are displayed beside the moment fields.
If the buckling load of the column has been exceeded for the currently selected load case then no
moment magnifier will be shown, instead the word "buckled" will appear in red (and the moment
will be multiplied by 10,000).
Minimum load compliance
If activated, the codes minimum moments will be used if they are greater than the actual
moments applied. If the moment (Mx or My) beside the multiplier is drawn in blue then the code
defined minimum moment is being used.
478

Check biaxial
If activated, the module will consider biaxial effects in addition to the uniaxial effects.
The load factor for the current load case and the governing load case appear below the
interaction diagram window with a code beside them indicating whether biaxial (B), x-axis (X) or
y-axis (Y) moments govern.
Interaction diagram window
This is the large graph displayed on the left hand side of the dialogue box.
The module constructs an interaction diagram (ie. Moment vs Axial force) for the section you
define and then draws a point for every load case you have defined. The proximity of each load
point to the interaction curve indicates whether the section can resist that load or not.
The concrete column module also optionally performs a biaxial check so that a point
lying inside the curve does not necessarily indicate that the section has sufficient capacity.
Note that the diagram will automatically change to show negative and positive moments
dependant upon the sign of the currently selected load case moment. You can have both negative
and positive moments displayed at the same time by changing the appropriate configuration
setting (see also Concrete column configuration).
The load factors for the currently selected load case and the governing load case are displayed
below the bottom left hand corner of this window. A load factor displayed in red indicates that the
load factor is less than the load factor limit specified in the configuration dialogue. The maximum
load factor value that will be displayed is 999.0.
Load points drawn in red have a load factor less than the load factor limit specified in the
configuration dialogue.
Finally, three special points are shown on the diagram. These points are:
Ecc:
Point of Minimum Eccentricity (Code Defined)
Dec:
Point of Decompression (dn = D)
Bal:
Balance Point (Ku = 0.6)
Cross section window

This window, located to the right of the interaction diagram window, displays the cross section
and includes all reinforcing bars and voids.
479

There is also a load position indicator in the centre of the diagram which indicates the direction of
the moments and the eccentricity of the load. In many practical situations the load application
point falls outside of the cross section in which cases the load position indicator simply points
towards the load application point without showing its actual position.
Mux / Muy
These radio buttons, located immediately below the interaction diagram window, allow you to
select between the x-axis and y-axis interaction diagrams.
480
Concrete column configuration
Min / Max bar dia

The bar size range that the module will use (in addition to the reinforcement percentage range)
when determining a suitable reinforcement size during a design.
Tolerance (%)
The accuracy of the load factor and neutral axis depth calculations. A smaller tolerance means the
results will be more accurate, although the solution will take longer.
Cover
The cover that will be used when defining a standard reinforcement layout. Note that the cover is
measured to the bar centre-lines.
Beta d (G/(G+Q))
The ratio of dead load to dead+live load used when calculating the moment magnifier for an
unbraced column.
Buckling LF
The elastic buckling load factor for the entire frame.
481

Load factor limit
The acceptable load factor used to determine if the column is adequate for the given loads. A
column is assumed to be adequate if the load factor (X, Y or Biaxial) for each load case is greater
than or equal to the load factor limit. The default is 1.0.
Calculate extra curves
This allows you to calculate up to 4 extra reinforcement curves for the percentages you specify in
the fields to the right. The distribution of reinforcement in the cross section for the extra curves is
the same as for the specified reinforcement.
Show positive and negative curves together
Allows you to show both positive and negative interaction diagrams together.
Comply with code reinforcement limits
If activated, the module will apply the codes minimum reinforcement requirements during a
design if necessary.
Show grid lines
Turns on and off the grid lines in the interaction diagram window.
Show special point values
Turns on and off the numeric values for the special points shown in the interaction diagram
window.
482
Concrete column assumptions and notes

The following assumptions and notes should be noted when using the concrete column
design module.
1. Calculations involving shapes that have voids which overlap may not be accurate.
2. Calculations involving bars that fall within a void or outside the cross section may not be
accurate.
3. Calculations involving bars that overlap may not be accurate.
4. The program does some approximate checks for bars or voids that fall outside of the cross
section, however these checks are not exhaustive and it is up to you to verify visually that
none of these conditions occur.
5. In certain circumstances, usually where the balance point is near to zero, there will be a step
increase in the moment capacity (it will appear as a bump in the interaction diagram). This
is because there is not a gradual increase in the strength reduction factor from 0.6 to 0.8.
6. Sometimes, particularly in sections with very small dimensions, the curve may not appear to
be a continuous line. This is due to insufficient convergence of the calculations. Try
decreasing the tolerance in the configuration dialogue.
7. Calculation speed can usually be increased by turning off the calculation of extra
reinforcement curves in the configuration dialogue.
8. The module does not consider true biaxial moment, rather it considers the moments
uniaxially and then performs a simple biaxial check in accordance with AS3600 clause
10.6.5.
9. If the buckling load (Nc) has been exceeded, the moment magnifier will be inappropriate
and the term "Buckled" will appear beside the final moment field. This is because a moment
magnifier cannot be calculated if a columns buckling load has been exceeded.
10. A load factor of 999.0 indicates that the actual load factor is greater than or equal to 999.0.
11. A load factor drawn in red indicates failure.
12. The calculation of the strength reduction factor considers parts (a), (b)(i) and (b)(ii) of
AS3600 table 2.3 only.
13. The cracked moments of inertia and cracked modulus of elasticity are not used.
483

14. The module calculates both of the moment magnifiers (Delta s and Delta b) and uses the
largest (where appropriate). See AS3600 clause 10.4.
15. A column is bent in single curvature when the ratio of the end moments M1/M2 is positive
and double curvature when the ratio is negative.
16. Torsion or shear are not considered.
17. Cover is measured to the centre-line of the bars.
484
Output
Output text reports can be produced for both the frame analysis data and the design data. In
addition, scaled hardcopies of the graphics display area can be produced.
For text reports, the output can be limited to just input data or just output data and even to specific
nodes, members, section properties and load cases if required. You can also limit the output to the
data specified in any of the graphical filters.
You can direct text reports to the screen, printer or a file. Screen output allows you to scroll
through the report in either direction, and preview the data a page at a time. All reports are
automatically paginated and headed with the project and job titles. Multiple copies can be
obtained without continuous operator supervision.
You can direct graphics hardcopies to the printer, plotter or a file. You can control the graphics
scale, size, orientation and position on the page.
Text reports and graphics hardcopies can be obtained at any stage of the program operation either
before or after an analysis or design. It is not necessary to input all of the data for a job before
output can be generated. For example, member data can be printed even if no other job data has
been entered yet.
485
Frame analysis report

Click on the "Output" toolbar button and then select "Frame Analysis Report" from the dialogue
box that appears, or select "Frame Analysis Report" from the Output menu
Prior to generating a report, you must choose the items that you want to include in the report by
selecting the appropriate check boxes in the above dialogue box. You can turn a whole column of
check boxes on or off by clicking on the "All on" or "All off" buttons at the bottom of the
dialogue.
After completing your selections, you can proceed to the following report dialogue box.
486
Filters
You can select from any of the graphical filters to limit the output report to the data defined in a
filter. Alternatively, you can select "Use Filter Selected in Main Toolbar" so that the data
included in the output report always matches what is shown in the graphics display area.
You can also further limit the output data by specifying lists of nodes, members, section
properties, load cases or dynamic mode shapes. If you want to include all items for a particular
list then the list field should be left blank, otherwise type in a list of items (separated by commas
or dashes) that you want to include in the report.
Results envelope
The analysis results data for each load case can be printed separately or can be combined into a
load case envelope. If a load case envelope is specified, the program selects and prints the
maximum and minimum values from the list of specified output load cases. The report also
includes the load case numbers and the matching coincident values that occur at the same location
and load case as each maximum and minimum.
At the end of an envelope report is a summary envelope showing the maximums and minimums
for a group of nodes and/or members. The summary report also shows the load case numbers and
the matching coincident values.
487

Produce envelope summary only
By default, envelope reports include an envelope summary at the end, however you can limit your
report to just the summary by activating this option in the report generation dialogue.
Enabling the results envelope feature is a fast and convenient

way of determining the critical load cases, nodes and members.
Warning messages
This check box allows you to suppress warning messages relating to the analysis results which
sometimes appear in output reports. For example, if a non-linear analysis does not reach the
requested convergence in some load cases, then warning messages are posted in the output report
for those load cases.
Intermediate member stations
SPACE GASS can print the displacements, forces and moments at any intermediate points along
a member (not just at the end nodes). Before intermediate member displacements, forces and
moments can be printed, you must specify how many equally spaced intermediate member
stations are to be considered. The program automatically adds an extra station at each end of the
member and at each point of application of a concentrated member load.
Sorting options
Analysis results output can be sorted in one or both of two ways.
1. If sorted in order of load case, the report lists the data for every node (or member) under a
main load case heading. This is repeated for each load case.
2. If sorted in order of node/member, the report lists the data for every load case under a main
node (or member) heading. This is repeated for each node (or member).
Format
Output can be printed in fixed point format (eg. 12.45) or exponential format (eg. 1.245E+01).
Fixed point is generally preferred as it is easier to read and allows numbers with different orders
of magnitude to be readily identified. It cannot, however be used with very large or very small
values. In such cases, exponential format must be used.
As well as specifying the format, you can select the number of decimal places to be included.
This cannot be greater than 3 for exponential formatting and cannot be greater than 8 for fixed
point formatting. These limits are imposed because of a maximum 10 digit field width. Care must
be taken when specifying the number of decimal places with fixed point format. You must ensure
that for the range of values likely to be encountered, you don't exceed the 10 digit field width. For
example five decimal place fixed point format could only handle values from -999.99999 to
9999.99999. Values outside of this range would simply be printed as "**********".
488

Section and material properties are always presented in exponential format regardless of the
format you specify (due to the extreme range of values usually encountered).
Printer output
If you have requested output to a printer, the printer specific part of the dialogue is enabled, and
the name of the printer and the port to which it is connected is shown.
For printed reports, you can also specify the starting page number and the number of copies
required. Top, bottom and left margin fields allow you to position the report exactly where you
want on the page.
The "Set font" button gives you access to all of the Windows installed fonts, however you should
avoid proportional fonts otherwise the columns of numbers in the report will not line up properly.
The "Default font" button sets the font back to the default font.
The "Print manager" button loads the standard Windows Print Manager and allows you to change
your printer and printer port settings, or even change to a different printer.
If you use the "Print manager" button to change the printer or its port, the currently
displayed dialogue box will not show the change even though the change will be effective if you
proceed with the report. If you close the report dialogue box and then re-open it, however the
Print Manager changes will become visually evident.
Output to file
If you select the "Output to file" check box, SPACE GASS displays a file selection box from
which you can select a new file or an existing file to overwrite or append.
489
The status report

A status report showing the actual problem size and the problem size limits can be included at the
start of each output report. It shows the number of nodes, members, restraints, sections, materials,
constraints, loads, load cases and members with design data. It also shows the static and dynamic
analysis status, ill-conditioning status, non-linear convergence, frontwidth, total degrees of
freedom, whether there has been a steel or concrete design or check and the design code used.
The status report can be suppressed if it is not required.
490
The bill of materials report

A bill of materials report showing quantities, lengths and masses of each type of component in
the structure can be included in frame analysis reports. It bundles members of the same type and
length together and shows their individual and total lengths and masses. It also shows the total
structure mass and centre of gravity location.
491
Centre of gravity
The SPACE GASS bill of materials report includes the coordinates of the structure centre of
gravity.
492
Dynamic frequency output

A dynamic frequency analysis report includes the natural frequencies and natural periods for each
mode shape analysed within each mass load case. Although the mode shapes are best shown
graphically, you can also produce a report showing the relative deflections for each mode shape.
493
Dynamic response output

The results of a response spectrum analysis include normal deflections, forces, moments and
reactions that can be displayed graphically, printed or used in a steel design in the same way that
the results of a static analysis are used. In addition, spectral load cases and static load cases can be
mixed together in combination load cases.
The output results also include a summary of the analysis input parameters and details of the
governing mode shapes, total static forces, total masses and mass participation factors. Details are
given for the three global axis directions and for the direction vector.
The results are highly sensitive to the number of mode shapes included in the analysis. An
insufficient number of modes will result in an inaccurate solution. The total mass participation
factor for each direction is a reliable indicator of the number of modes required. Usually, an
earthquake is applied along one of the two horizontal axes, as defined by the direction vector. For
example, an earthquake acting in the X direction would have a direction vector of Dx = 1.0, Dy =
0.0 and Dz = 0.0. In this case, the total mass participation factor in the X direction should be
greater than 90%. The values of the total mass participation factors in the other two directions are
not important.
The table in the output report showing the mass participation factors for each mode shape
individually gives a good indication of the contribution of each mode shape in the overall
dynamic response of the structure. From it you can quickly see which mode is dominant.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE SPECTRUM (kN,T,Sec,Hz)
-------------------------
Spectral case 5: Sample AS1170.4 Case
Mass load case:
Direction vector:
Dx = 1.000, Dy = 1.000, Dz = 1.000
Auto scaling of base shear:
AS1170.4
Vertical direction:
Y-Axis
Base shear:
Not less than 80% of total static force
Results scaled by factor:
2.825
Site factor:
0.670
Sign of the results:
Mode shape 1 (Calculated)
Acceleration coefficient:
0.080
Importance factor:
1.000
Structural response factor:
4.500
Spectral curve multiplier:
0.017778
Mode combination method:
SRSS (Square Root of the Sum of Squares)
MPF for
Total
Dominant
Static
Total
Total
Dominant
Mass Part
Base
Direction
Mode
Force
Mass
Mode
Factor
Shear
X-Axis
0.5371
2.1209
99.999%
100.000%
1.056%
Y-Axis
0.2686
1.1209
29.745%
29.745%
0.023%
494

Z-Axis
0.0000
Mode
Direction Shape
0.0000
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
Damping
Natural
Natural
Mass Part
Spectral Curve
Factor
Period
Frequency
Factor
Vector
NEWCASTLE 2%
2.0%
0.4378
2.284
65.419%
Vector
NEWCASTLE 0%
0.1%
0.0133
75.470
10.365%
Total
75.783%
Spectral case 6: Sample General Case
Mass load case:
Direction vector:
Dx = 1.000, Dy = 1.000, Dz = 0.000
AS1170.4
Vertical direction:
Y-Axis
Base shear:
1.532
Site factor:
0.670
0.080
Importance factor:
1.000
4.500
0.017778
MPF for
Total
Dominant
Static
Total
Total
Dominant
Mass Part
Base
Direction
Mode
Force
Mass
Mode
Factor
Shear
X-Axis
0.8363
4.1209
99.999%
100.000%
2.244%
Y-Axis
0.4182
4.1209
50.829%
91.077%
0.239%
Z-Axis
0.0000
0.0000
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
Mode
Direction Shape
Damping
Natural
Natural
Mass Part
Spectral Curve
Factor
Period
Frequency
Factor
50.096%
Vector
AS1170.4 S=.67
5.0%
0.6102
1.639
Vector
AS1170.4 S=.67
5.0%
0.0253
39.566
2.584%
Vector
AS1170.4 S=.67
5.0%
0.0206
48.544
25.278%
Vector
AS1170.4 S=.67
5.0%
0.0153
65.291
17.556%
Total
95.514%
495
Buckling analysis output

After completing a buckling analysis you can create an output report, or you can view or print the
buckling mode shapes graphically by choosing the "Buckling Mode Shapes" option from the
"View" menu. If you want to display any higher order mode shapes, just press the "Filters"
toolbar button and then list the mode shapes required in the "Buckling modes" field.
If a frame appears to buckle in the wrong direction, it is because the buckling mode shape
diagrams are only intended to show the mode of buckling and not its direction or magnitude.
When displaying the buckling mode shapes graphically, SPACE

GASS makes no attempt to show the member curvature between end nodes (ie. the node positions
are simply joined by straight lines). You can, however improve the look of the mode shapes by
adding intermediate nodes to the members.
496
Steel design report

Click on the "Output" toolbar button and then select "Steel Design Report" from the dialogue box
that appears, or select "Steel Design Report" from the Output menu
Prior to generating a report, you must choose the items that you want to include in the report by
selecting the appropriate check boxes in the above dialogue box. You can turn a whole column of
check boxes on or off by clicking on the "All on" or "All off" buttons at the bottom of the
dialogue.
After completing your selections, you can proceed to the following report dialogue box.
497
Filters
You can select from any of the graphical filters to limit the output report to the data defined in the
filter. Alternatively, you can select "Use Filter Selected in Main Toolbar" so that the data
included in the output report always matches what is shown in the graphics display area.
You can also further limit the output data by specifying lists of member groups, section properties
or connections. If you want to include all items for a particular list then the list field should be left
blank, otherwise type in a list of items (separated by commas or dashes) that you want to include
in the report.
Member symbols notation
Steel member design reports allow you to optionally include a summary sheet of the symbols
used in the report together with a brief description of each.
Member section properties
This allows you to specify whether or not full section properties for the designed or checked
members are included in the output. This option is usually suppressed because it enlarges the size
of the report.
498

Non-critical load cases
The majority of the report for a steel member design gives information about the governing
failure mode and the critical load case. A summary showing the performance of all of the other
load cases can also be included if required. The non-critical load cases summary includes the load
factor and the failure mode for each load case.
A description of the failure mode for each load case does not necessarily indicate that
failure has occurred. It simply indicates the failure mode if the loads were increased enough to
cause failure.
Connection symbols notation
Steel connection design reports allow you to optionally include a summary sheet of the symbols
used in the report together with a brief description of each.
Connection specifications
This allows you to include or suppress the list of detailed specifications for the bolts, plates,
welds, stiffeners and cleats from the detailed output reports.
Connection calculations
This setting allows you to include or suppress the loads, stresses, capacities, factors and other
calculated values from the detailed output reports.
Warnings and notes
This check box allows you to suppress warning messages and notes relating to the design results
which sometimes appear in output reports.
Pass/fail criteria
For output of steel member and connection design results you can set the "Pass/fail criteria" value
to include only the members/connections which have passed, only the ones which have failed, or
all members/connections.
Printer output
If you have requested output to a printer, the printer specific part of the dialogue is enabled, and
the name of the printer and the port to which it is connected is shown.
For printed reports, you can also specify the starting page number and the number of copies
required. Top, bottom and left margin fields allow you to position the report exactly where you
want on the page.
499

The "Set font" button gives you access to all of the Windows installed fonts, however you should
avoid proportional fonts otherwise the columns of numbers in the report will not line up properly.
The "Default font" button sets the font back to the default font.
your printer and printer port settings, or even change to a different printer.
proceed with the report. If you close the report dialogue box and then re-open it, however the
Output to file
500
Steel member design section, member and shear check results

For each design group in a steel member design output report, three lines of information relating
to section, member and shear checks are presented. These represent summaries of the results of
the three main checks that are performed when a group is designed or checked.
The section and shear checks are performed at numerous points along each design group. They
consider the capacity of a cross section and are not related to effective lengths or any other
conditions which occur away from the cross section under consideration. The forces and moments
used in a section or shear check are the ones which occur simultaneously at the cross section. The
governing location for the section and shear checks is shown under the "Start Posn" heading.
The member check is performed for each segment between adjacent points of critical flange
restraint. The member check is affected by the axial and bending effective lengths of the segment
and the shape of the deflection and bending moment diagrams along the segment. The forces and
moments used in a member check are the maximum values taken from anywhere along the
segment. The governing segment for the member check has its start and finish locations shown
under the "Start Posn" and "Finish Posn" headings.
501
Steel member design zero variables

You may notice that some variables in the steel member design output report are shown as zero
when it appears that they should have a non-zero value. This occurs because the steel member
design modules only calculate the values that are applicable to the design actions and section
type. Variables which are not applicable for the governing failure mode are not calculated and
hence appear as zero in the output report.
502
Steel connection design critical load case
The stresses, capacities and other values included in connection design output reports
apply only to the critical load case, and that the critical load case is the one which causes the
highest stress-to-capacity ratio for all of the components and failure modes considered during the
design of a connection.
Some components may have another load case which is more critical for them than the overall
critical load case, however their critical stress-to-capacity ratio will never exceed the overall
stress-to-capacity ratio.
An exception to this occurs in the design of column shear stiffeners. The stresses and capacities
reported for shear stiffeners apply to the critical shear stiffener load case which is not necessarily
the same as the overall critical load case.
503
Graphics hardcopy
Click on the "Output" tool bar button and select the "Graphics Hardcopy" radio button, or select
"Graphics Hardcopy" from the Output menu
Scale
Specify the desired hardcopy scale or leave it at zero for automatic scale to fit. For example, type
in a value of 100 for a 1:100 scale.
Title
This is simply a description which you can use to describe the particular view that is being
printed. It is placed near the bottom-left corner of the hardcopy and can be left blank if it is not
required.
Orientation
You can choose between portrait (not rotated) and landscape (rotated through 90).
If you specify landscape, only the structure and labelling inside the graphics border is
rotated. The border around the graphics output is not affected. Thus, a landscape hardcopy uses
exactly the same page space as a portrait hardcopy.
504
Size
Type in any width and height that you require, but dont exceed the maximum printer or plotter
size limits, otherwise part of the image will be missing.
Origin offset
You can place the image at any desired location on the page by specifying X and Y origin offsets.
Offsets of zero usually result in the image being positioned in the corner of the page.
Fonts
The "Set font" button gives you access to all of the Windows installed fonts. The "Default font"
button sets the font back to the default font.
Print manager
your printer and printer port settings, or even change to a different printer or plotter.
proceed with the hardcopy. If you close the report dialogue box and then re-open it, however the
In order to direct the graphics hardcopy to a plotter, you must load Print Manager, select
a plotter, and then make it the "Default" output device.
Output to file
505
Concrete design report

Click on the "Print" tool bar button from within the concrete column design module.
Graphics
This includes the interaction diagram, the column cross section, and some of the key input and
output design parameters.
The content of the printed interaction diagram will depend upon how it is displayed on the screen;
so if you wish to display multiple reinforcement curves in the report then you should make sure
they are displayed on the screen. This also applies to the special point values, grid lines, etc.
Design data
The design data report includes full details of the reinforcing bars, loads, and design results for
each load case. Values of bending moment, axial force, kx, ky, and are also included for each of
the special points. The special points are explained as follows:
Ecc - Point of Minimum Eccentricity (Code Defined)
Dec - Point of Decompression (dn = D)
Bal - Balance Point (Ku = 0.6)
M=0 - The point where the curve crosses the vertical axis
N=0 - The point where the curve crosses the horizontal axis
Interaction points
This produces a table of bending moment versus axial force values for each of the points that
make up the interaction curve. The values of kx, ky, and are also included for each point. The
special points are also labelled for easy reference.
506
CAD interface module

An optional SPACE GASS - CAD interface module allows you to transfer data from SPACE
GASS to a CAD program and vice-versa. Because the interface transfers data via a standard DXF
file format it can be used with many CAD programs including AutoCAD and Microstation.
As well as providing an alternative graphical means of inputting structures, the interface can be
very useful in the preparation of working drawings. Once a structure has been designed using
SPACE GASS, the data can be sent to a CAD program to be used as the basis for a structural
drawing.
3D model exported to a CAD program

507
SPACE GASS drawing files can include the full member geometry or just centrelines. They can
be 2D views, elevations, plans, cross sections or a full 3D model shown as follows. A member
schedule can also be included, and scales can be set as required.
If you have the SPACE GASS steel connection design module then the CAD interface
module can also be used to generate steel connection drawing details.
Partial 3D CAD model
508
Exporting data from SPACE GASS to CAD

There are two types of data that can be exported from SPACE GASS to a CAD program.
1. 2D views, 3D models, elevations, plans, cross sections and member schedules.
2. Steel connection drawings.
509
Elevations, plans, cross sections, 2D views, 3D models and schedules

Select "Export - to CAD DXF" from the File menu.
Full member geometry

You can elect to simply export a wireframe drawing that consists of lines along the centrelines of
each member, or you can also include the full member geometry which shows the actual member
shapes including flanges and webs, etc.
Drawings that include the full member geometry have the geometry lines shortened by 0.75D at
each end so that intersecting members do not run into one another.
Member schedule
Selecting this check box causes a member schedule to be included in the drawing.
Z axis vertical
AutoCAD and some other 3D CAD programs assume that the Y-axis is vertical for 2D drawings,
while the Z-axis is vertical for 3D drawings.
If this check box is selected then the SPACE GASS global Z-axis is made vertical in the drawing,
otherwise the Y-axis is vertical.
510
Label members
Members can be unlabelled, or labelled with the member names, member marks or both.
Draw with
By choosing 3DLINEs or FACES you can generate a full 3D drawing, or by choosing 2DLINEs
you can limit the drawing to just 2D views, elevations, plans or cross sections of the structure.
Note that FACEs support hidden line removal and shading while 3DLINEs do not.
A 3D drawing complete with full member geometry is very useful for visualizing how the
structure fits together and for checking whether members clash with each other or not.
Similar 3D drawings with hidden line removal can also be viewed directly in SPACE GASS
without having to go to a CAD program (see also View full 3D member geometry).
Because almost all structural drawings are made up

predominantly of 2D plans, elevations and details, the ability of SPACE GASS to produce 2D
drawings of the frame is probably the most useful aspect of the CAD interface module. SPACE
GASS allows you to create a series of 2D vertical or horizontal "slices" at any position through a
3D frame and have them exported to CAD as cross sections, elevations or plans.
These 2D drawings can contain the full member geometry complete with dashed and dotted
hidden lines. It is then a simple matter for a draftsperson to use a CAD package, such as
AutoCAD, to add connections, notation, etc. and complete the structural drawing.
2D drawing plane
If you have specified a 2D drawing by choosing 2DLINEs in the "Draw with" combo box, you
must choose a 2D drawing plane here.
2D drawing limits
If you have specified a 2D drawing, then you must nominate upper and lower drawing plane
limits. The limits will be along the global axis at right angles to the 2D drawing plane. Any
members that lie between the two limits will be included in the drawing.
Scale
You can scale the drawing up or down with this field. For example, a scale of 10 causes the
drawing dimensions to be reduced by a factor of 10. Units for the DXF drawing file are the same
as those used in SPACE GASS.
Title
Typing a title into this field causes it to appear at the bottom of the drawing.
511

DXF layer names
Layer names can be any names of up to 8 characters. AutoSKETCH requires layer names to be
integers from 1 to 10 in all cases. It is recommended that you configure your CAD software so
that the hidden line layer uses dashed or dotted lines. This ensures that they can be easily
distinguished from visible geometry lines.
512
Steel connection details

During or after a steel connection design, you can create fully detailed and annotated drawings of
the connections and export them to DXF drawing files in either of two ways.
1. Enable the "Generate drawings for a CAD system" option at the beginning of the connection
design phase (see also Running a steel connection design). This causes a DXF drawing file
to be created for every connection designed.
2. Click on the "Connection drawings" tool bar button after the connection design phase to
view the connection drawings graphically and then selectively produce DXF files from there
(see also View steel connection drawings).
Using either method, the final result is the same. You can control the drawing layer names by
setting them in the SPACE GASS configuration data. An example of a steel connection drawing
produced automatically by SPACE GASS is shown as follows.
SPACE GASS connection detail
513
Importing data from CAD to SPACE GASS

Select "Import - from CAD DXF" from the File menu
The CAD interface is a very useful feature if you already have the geometry of your structure in a
CAD format. It enables you to read the drawing into SPACE GASS as a structural model ready
for analysis.
SPACE GASS interprets each discrete line in a CAD drawing as a member. This has two
ramifications that you will need to consider.
1. CAD programs do not know that intersecting lines need to be segmented into sub-members
with nodes at the intersection points. For example, if you drew the top and bottom chords of
a truss with just two lines adding the struts and braces as separate lines, SPACE GASS
would consider that the chords are not connected to the web members except at the chord
ends.
You must ensure every member that you want in the SPACE GASS model is drawn as a
separate line in the CAD program. If you draw a line in the CAD program which continues
past a node then the member will not be connected to that node in the SPACE GASS model.
2. You shouldnt read a DXF file, created with full member geometry, back into SPACE
GASS (it interprets each member flange and web line as an individual member).
It is usually much quicker and more efficient to draw the

structure directly in SPACE GASS rather than drawing it in your CAD program and importing it
into SPACE GASS. This is because SPACE GASS knows it is dealing with a structure and not
just lines in a drawing.
514
Standard libraries
SPACE GASS is supplied with libraries of standard sections, materials, bolts, plates, welds,
spectral curves and reinforcing bars.
The libraries can be accessed by SPACE GASS for rapid and convenient input of standard
properties. They are also scanned frequently during analysis and design operations.
All of the libraries are contained within a single MS-Access database file called SGLibs.MDB.
You can get access to the libraries and retrieve data via the built-in library editor by clicking on
button at various locations throughout SPACE GASS. You can also access the library
the
editor by choosing "Edit Libraries" from the File menu. The library editor is shown below.
515

You cannot modify any of the standard libraries supplied with SPACE GASS, however you can
create your own custom libraries and edit them without restriction. You can also copy data from
the standard libraries into your custom libraries.
516
The library editor
When you open the library editor from an area of SPACE GASS that is working with a specific
type of data (eg. section property data), the library editor gives you access only to the types of
libraries that are applicable (eg. all section property libraries). However, when opened from the
File menu, the library editor gives you access to all types of libraries as shown below.
Common library editor operations

Retrieving data from a library
Expand the library tree to get to the item you

want and then double click on it or click on the
Ok button.
Creating a custom library
Click the right mouse button on a library type

heading in the library tree and then select "New"
to create a custom library.
517

Enter a library name, description and units into
the dialogue box that appears.
Note that any of the properties of a custom library
can be changed at any time later by clicking the
right mouse button on the library name in the
library tree and then selecting "Properties". If you
change the units of a custom library after data has
been entered into it, the data is automatically
converted.
Adding a new group to a
custom section library (for
section libraries only)
Click the right mouse button on a custom section

library name in the library tree and then select
"New" to create a new group within the custom
library.
Note that library groups are used to differentiate
between the different types of section shapes
within a section library. The other library types
do not have library groups.
Enter a group name and a group code into the
dialogue box that appears.
Note that the group codes are used in the steel
member design data "library scan code" to
nominate what types of sections to design to.
Adding a new data item to a

custom library
Click the right mouse button on a custom library

name or a custom section group name in the
library tree and then select "New" to add a new
data item to the library.
Enter an item name into the dialogue box that
appears.
Enter the items property data into the data fields
on the right-hand side of the editor and then click
on the "Save" button at the bottom to save the
item.
Copying data between

libraries
Find the item you want to copy in the library tree

and then drag it onto the desired custom library or
custom section library group to make a copy.
518
Note that you can copy individual items or an

entire section library group.
You can copy from but not into any of the
standard libraries.
Deleting a custom library
Click the right mouse button on a custom library

name in the library tree and then select "Delete"
to delete it.
Note that you cannot delete any of the standard
libraries.
519
Section libraries
Each section in a standard section library contains the following information.
1. Shape
Choose from Circular Bar, Square Bar, Rectangular Bar, Circular Tube, Square Tube,
Rectangular Tube, Channel, I or H Section, Unequal Angle, Equal Aangle, Beam Tee
(major axis parallel to flange), Plate Web Girder, Box Girder, Column Tee (major axis
parallel to web) or Cruciform.
2. Fabrication
Choose from Rolled / Stress Relieved, Lightly Welded or Heavily Welded.
3. Fy (normal strength)
Steel yield stress for normal grade steel.
4. Fyw (normal strength)
Steel yield stress of web for normal grade steel. Use zero if Fyw = Fy.
5. Fu (normal strength)
Steel ultimate strength for normal grade steel.
6. Fy (high strength)
Steel yield stress for high grade steel.
7. Fyw (high strength)
Steel yield stress of web for high grade steel. Use zero if Fyw = Fy.
8. Fu (high strength)
Steel ultimate strength for high grade steel.
9. A
Cross sectional area.
10. J
Torsion constant. Equals polar moment of inertia for sections that cannot warp.
11. Ix
Moment of inertia about principal major axis for all sections except some Tees. For Tees use
moment of inertia about axis parallel to flange (even if it is the minor axis).
12. Sx or Zx (notation is country dependent)
Plastic section modulus about principal major axis for all sections except some Tees. For
Tees use section modulus about axis parallel to flange (even if it is the minor axis).
520

13. Iy
Moment of inertia about principal minor axis for all sections except some Tees. For Tees
use moment of inertia about axis parallel to web (even if it is the major axis). Use zero if Iy
= Ix.
14. Sy or Zy (notation is country dependent)
Plastic section modulus about principal minor axis for all sections except some Tees. For
Tees use section modulus about axis parallel to web (even if it is the major axis). Use zero if
Sy / Zy = Sx / Zx.
15. Iw or Cw (notation is country dependent)
Warping constant.
16. Alpha
Principal angle (degrees). For angle sections only.
17. D
Overall depth of section (in direction of web) or angle section long leg.
18. Bt
Top flange overall width or angle section short leg. Use zero if Bt = D.
19. Bb
Bottom flange overall width. Use zero if Bb = Bt.
20. Btw
Top flange outside distance between webs. For box girder sections only. Use Btw = Bt if
there are no top flange outstands.
21. Bbw
Bottom flange outside distance between webs. For box girder sections only. Use Bbw = Bb
if there are no bottom flange outstands. Use zero if Bbw = Btw.
22. Tt
Top flange thickness or angle section thickness.
23. Tb
Bottom flange thickness. Use zero if Tb = Tt.
24. Tw
Web thickness. Use zero if Tw = Tt.
25. Cx
Distance from right side of section to centroid along the x-axis. This is the small distance for
channels and angle sections. Use zero if Cx = max(Bt,Bb)/2.
521

26. Cy
Distance from bottom of section to centroid along the y-axis. This is the large distance for
Tees and the small distance for angle sections. Use zero if Cy = D/2.
27. Radius
Root radius.
For Tee sections, Ix and Sx/Zx are about an axis parallel to the flange, while Iy and Sy/Zy are
about an axis parallel to the web. In addition, D and Tw relate to the web dimensions, while Bt
and Tt relate to the flange dimensions. The above rules apply even for Column Tee sections
which are assumed to be on their side with the flange vertical. This sign convention was chosen
solely for consistency between both types of Tee sections. It applies only to section library data
and is different to the sign convention used by the analysis and design sections of SPACE GASS.
See also Column and beam Tee sections.
See also Steel member design sign conventions.
522
Material libraries
Each material in a standard material library contains the following information.
1. Youngs Modulus.
2. Poissons Ratio.
3. Mass Density.
4. Thermal Coefficient.
5. Concrete Strength.
523
Bolt libraries
Each bolt in a standard bolt library contains the following information.
1. Diameter.
2. Tensile Strength (normal strength).
3. Tensile Strength (high strength).
4. Tensile Stress Area - Cross-sectional area for calculating tensile stress.
5. Shank Area - Plain shank cross-sectional area.
6. Core Area - Core cross-sectional area.
7. Minimum Tension - Minimum bolt tension at installation.
524
Plate libraries
Each plate in a standard plate library contains the following information.
1. Width.
2. Thickness.
3. Yield Stress (normal strength).
5. Yield Stress (high strength).
525
Weld libraries
Each weld in a standard weld library contains the following information.
1. Size.
526
Reinforcing bar libraries

Each bar in a standard reinforcing bar library contains the following information.
1. Diameter.
2. Yield Strength.
3. Area.
527
Spectral curve libraries

Each curve in a standard spectral curve library contains the following information.
1. Damping Factor (%).
2. Period, Acceleration point pairs.
528
Portal frame analysis

This worked example considers the analysis of a typical 25m span haunched portal frame. Linear
(1st order), non-linear (2nd order), dynamic (frequency and response) and buckling analyses have
been performed and the results are presented in the computer printout at the end of this appendix.
This appendix considers only the analysis of the portal frame. The portal frame member and
connection design is covered in Portal frame member design and Portal frame connection design.
This example is loosely based on the design example used in the AISC publication by Woolcock,
Kitipornchai and Bradford (9). There are, however a number of significant differences between
this example and the AISC example which can be summarized as follows.
Because SPACE GASS has facilities for projected length member loads, the live load has
been input over the plan rafter length rather than its inclined length. This was a situation that
the software used in the AISC example could not model.
Because SPACE GASS has facilities for automatically calculating haunch section properties
based on the rafter size and the size of the member from which the haunch was cut, the
haunch section properties are different. The AISC example simply approximates the haunch
to a 530UB82 for half of its length and a 410UB60 for the other half.
SPACE GASS uses a value for gravitational acceleration of 9.8066, the AISC example uses
9.82.
SPACE GASS uses grade 300 steel, whereas the AISC example uses grade 250 steel.
The purlins used in the AISC design example are assumed to be spaced at a maximum of
1500mm, while the structural drawings elsewhere in the publication show them to be spaced
at 1200mm maximum. This SPACE GASS example uses purlin spacings of 1200mm as
they are shown in the drawings.
Because the members in the AISC example have been designed by hand, they have not been
able to take full advantage of some of the more calculation intensive and slightly more
efficient higher tiers offered by the SPACE GASS steel member design module.
The differences between this example and the AISC example prohibit the direct
comparison of results. However, if you wish to do so, you should first modify the SPACE GASS
example in accordance with the differences listed above. If you do the modifications, you will
find that the results of the two examples agree almost exactly.
529
Geometry and loads

The portal frame considered in this example has the following basic properties.
Building length:
Portal span:
Portal spacing:
Eave height:
Apex height:
Columns:
Rafters:
Haunches:
Roof and walls:
Static load data
Dead load (DL):
Sheeting and purlins 0.90kN/m (slope)

Self weight (calculated by SPACE GASS)
Live load (LL):
2.25kN/m (plan)
4.5kN concentrated at apex
Cross wind (CW):
6.30kN/m on windward columns
(external)
4.50kN/m on leeward columns

6.48kN/m uplift on windward 8m of rafter
3.60kN/m uplift on central 8m of rafter
2.16kN/m uplift on leeward remainder of rafter
Longit. wind (LW1):
4.14kN/m outward on columns
(1st internal frame)
5.04kN/m uplift on rafters
Longit. wind (LW2):
(external suction)
Cross wind (IPCW):
(Internal pressure)
Longit. wind (IPLW):
(Internal pressure)
530
Load combination 1:
1.25DL + 1.50LL
Load combination 2:
0.80DL + CW + IPCW
Load combination 3:
1.25DL + CW - 0.96IPCW (ISCW)
Load combination 4:
Load combination 5:
0.80DL + LW1 + IPLW

1.25DL + LW2 - 6.50IPLW (ISLW)
The distributed live load is based on a roof area of 9m x 25m = 225sqm which requires a
distributed live load of 0.25kPa.
The wind loads are based on terrain category 3 (industrial area) for region B with Vu = 60m/s and
Vs = 38m/s. Taking into account the height of the rafters and purlins (200mm), the eaves height is
assumed to be 8m and the apex height is assumed to be 8.7m.
Dynamic frequency mass data
Dead load (DL):
Self mass (calculated by SPACE GASS)
Sheeting and purlins 91.77kg/m (slope)
Live load (LL):
229.43kg/m (plan)
458.86kg concentrated at apex
Total distributed mass:
91.77 + 229.43 = 321.20kg/m
Mass at nodes 3 and 11:
1.63/2.0*321.20 = 0.26 tonne

1.63*321.20 = 0.52 tonne

(1.63/2.0+2.99/2.0)*321.20 = 0.74 tonne
(2.99/2.0+6.26/2.0)*321.20 = 1.49 tonne
Mass at node 7:
6.26*321.20+458.86 = 2.47 tonne
Dynamic response data

Spectral curve:
1989 Newcastle earthquake, magnitude 6.5
Damping:
5%
Dynamic modes:
1,2 and 3
Direction vector:
Dx=1.0, Dy=0.0, Dz=0.0
Loading code:
General
Vertical direction:
Y-axis
Signed to match first dynamic mode
Base shear:
Site factor:
2.0
531

Acceleration factor:
Importance factor:
0.08
1.0
4.5
0.017778
SRSS
Load combinations
The static load combinations are in accordance with typical strength limit state stipulations
(excluding earthquake loading) as follows.
1. 1.25G + 1.5Q
2. 1.25G + Wu
3. 0.80G + 1.5Q
4. 0.80G + Wu
In this worked example it has been assumed that the distributed live load in load case 2
need not be considered to act simultaneously with any wind load. The structure will be designed
to support either the distributed live load or the wind load, whichever produces the most critical
effect.
Notes on the structure
Extra nodes have been positioned at mid-height of the columns and at midspan of the rafters. This
is not absolutely necessary but it means that graphical displays will automatically show the values
of forces and moments at these points. Of course you can obtain the deflections, forces and
moments at these points without having to have nodes there by simply scaling them off the
diagrams or by obtaining an intermediate displacements, forces and moments report, however
these methods may sometimes be less convenient than having the values displayed graphically.
Nodes have also been positioned at the mid-points and end-points of the haunches. These are
necessary so that the section properties can be varied along the haunch. In the above example, the
haunch has been modelled as a tapered 360 UB 50.
Only two prismatic members were used to approximate the tapered haunch because tests have
shown that this gives results very close to the exact solution. If you wish to experiment with this,
try inputting some frames with varying numbers of haunch segments, and compare the results of
the deflections and bending moments.
In fact, haunches do not have much effect at all on the bending moments in other parts of the
frame, however they do eliminate the need to design the rafters for the high bending moments
which usually occur at the knee. Haunches can also offer significant reductions in deflection of
the frame.
532
The frame, as modelled in SPACE GASS, is shown in the following diagrams.
Basic arrangement of nodes and members
533
Frame elevation
534
Method of input
The portal frame in this example was initially input as a single bay portal frame using the
structure wizard. This allowed quick and easy generation of the basic structural geometry,
restraints, section properties (including the haunch section properties) and material properties. If
the extra column and rafter nodes were not required, it would then have been a simple matter to
add the loads (graphically or using datasheet input) and then perform the analysis.
Node and member numbering
In this example we wanted to match the node and member numbering with the numbering used in
the AISC example. Therefore, it was necessary to modify the geometry slightly so that the extra
nodes were added and the nodes and members were re-numbered. This was done graphically by
simply subdividing the members and then renumbering the structure with the extra nodes
included. The rafter and haunch section properties were assigned to members 3 - 10 by
graphically changing the section property numbers of members 5, 6, 7 and 8 to section 2,
members 3 and 10 to section 3, and members 4 and 9 to section 4.
Node restraints
When the structural geometry was established, node restraints of FFDDDR were applied to nodes
1 and 13, and a general restraint of RRDDDR was applied to node 2 using the graphical restraint
input facility. The restraints on nodes 1 and 13 specified that the structure was pin based, while
the general restraint on node 2 simply suppressed all of the out-of-plane degrees of freedom that
are not appropriate for a 2D frame. Although the general restraint appears to be applied to node 2
only in the output report, it is in fact applied to all unrestrained nodes (ie. nodes 2 to 12
inclusive).
Under normal circumstances it would not have been necessary to match the node and
member numbering with the AISC example. This would have removed the necessity to subdivide
the members, or change the member properties and node restraints as described above.
Loads
The node and member loads were applied graphically. Although there are many member loads,
the graphical input facility made it very easy to input them en-masse. For most load cases, it was
simply a matter of placing a window around the members and then specifying the load applied to
them.
Self weight, combination load cases and load case titles were input using datasheets.
Input check
As a final check before the analysis was initiated, loading diagrams for each load case were
viewed followed by an output report of the complete structural data. Any errors in the data were
corrected and the model was then ready for analysis.
535
536
Analysis procedure
Linear analysis
The first analysis to be performed was a linear analysis for the primary load cases 1 - 7. The
results of this analysis were used to check frame deflections.
Non-linear analysis
Load cases 10 - 14 were analysed in a second run because the steel member design example is
based on factored combination load cases analysed non-linearly. Both P- and P- effects were
activated, while axial shortening wasnt. The linear analysis results for the primary load cases
were retained and the stiffness matrix was written to the disk.
A general optimization method was used, however this had little impact on the analysis
time due to the small size of the model.
The self mass of the portal frame was considered in association with mass load case 8 (which
incorporated the lumped masses due to both dead and live loading conditions). Three mode
shapes were requested.
The dynamic response analysis was performed for spectral load case 9. The sign of the results
was determined automatically and all results were retained for those load cases analysed linearly
or non-linearly.
Buckling analysis
The default options were selected for the buckling analysis (ie. only one mode shape was
calculated).
537
Analysis results
The following summary was developed based upon the results:
Maximum sway deflection:
99mm (load case 3)
Maximum vertical deflection:
118mm (load case 4)
Maximum moment (column - knee):
527kNm (load case 11)
Maximum moment (rafter - haunch):

Maximum moment (apex):
Minimum frame buckling load factor:
Natural frequency:
11.004 (load case 14)
0.861Hz
The dynamic response spectrum analysis resulted in small displacements, forces and moments
that were insignificant in comparison with the static load cases.
The results of the non-linear analysis were then used to perform a steel member check and a steel
connection design.
As an interesting exercise, the results of the non-linear analysis were then compared with the
results of a linear analysis of the combination load cases. Load case 11 was still found to be
critical with the new moments being 542kNm at the knee, 223kNm at the end of the haunch and
132kNm at the apex. You can see that the linear moments are actually greater than the non-linear
moments. This is also shown in the AISC example.
538
Graphical output
The following diagrams are examples of the graphical output that can be obtained from SPACE
GASS on the screen or printer.
Basic arrangement of nodes and members
Loading diagram (load case 3)
Deflection diagram (load cases 2, 3 and 4)
539
Bending moment diagram (load case 10)
540
Bending moment diagram envelope (load cases 10-14)
541
Dynamic mode shape (load case 8)
Buckling mode shape (load case 12)
542
Analysis input report

This report extract shows all of the frame analysis input data, including lumped masses and
spectral load cases.
ANALYSIS STATUS REPORT
----------------------
This is a simple portal frame analysed and designed for the SPACE GASS 9.0
worked example appendices.
Length units ......................... m

Section property units ............... mm
Material strength units .............. MPa
Mass density units ................... kg/m^3
Temperature units .................... Celsius
Force units .......................... kN
Moment units ......................... kNm
Mass units ........................... kg
Acceleration units ................... g's
Translation units .................... mm
Stress units ......................... MPa
Nodes ................................
13
Members ..............................
12
(10000)
Restrained nodes .....................
210)
Nodes with spring restraints .........
210)
Section properties ...................
100)
Material properties ..................
25)
Constrained nodes ....................
210)
Member offsets .......................
(10000)
Node loads ...........................
(11000)
Prescribed node displacements ........
(11000)
Member concentrated loads ............
(11000)
Member distributed forces ............
78
(11000)
Member distributed torsions ..........
(11000)
Thermal/Prestress loads ..............
(11000)
Self weight load cases ...............
200)
Combination load cases ...............
200)
Load cases with titles ...............
14
200)
Lumped masses ........................
18
(11000)
Spectral load cases ..................
Static analysis ......................
Dynamic analysis .....................
Response analysis ....................
Buckling analysis ....................
Ill-conditioned ......................
Non-linear convergence ...............
Frontwidth ...........................
Bandwidth ............................
Total degrees of freedom .............
35
210)
200)
543

Primary load cases ...................
200)
Mass load cases ......................
200)
Members with design data .............
(10000)
Member design or check ...............
AS4100
Connections with design data .........
(10000)
Connection design ....................
AS4100
STEEL DESIGN STATUS REPORT

--------------------------
NODE COORDINATES (m)

----------------
Node
Coord
Coord
Coord
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
3.750
0.000
0.000
7.500
0.000
1.630
7.585
0.000
3.260
7.671
0.000
6.250
7.828
0.000
12.500
8.155
0.000
18.750
7.828
0.000
21.740
7.671
0.000
10
23.370
7.585
0.000
11
25.000
7.500
0.000
12
25.000
3.750
0.000
13
25.000
0.000
0.000
MEMBER DATA (deg,kNm/rad,m)

----------- (F=Fixed, R=Released) (*=Cable length)
Dir
Dir
Dir Memb
Node A Node B
Memb
Angle
Node Axis Type Node A Node B Sec Mat Fixity Fixity
Length
0.00
Norm
1 FFFFFF FFFFFF
3.750
0.00
Norm
1 FFFFFF FFFFFF
3.750
0.00
Norm
1 FFFFFF FFFFFF
1.632
0.00
Norm
1 FFFFFF FFFFFF
1.632
0.00
Norm
1 FFFFFF FFFFFF
2.994
0.00
Norm
1 FFFFFF FFFFFF
6.259
0.00
Norm
1 FFFFFF FFFFFF
6.259
0.00
Norm
1 FFFFFF FFFFFF
2.994
0.00
Norm
10
1 FFFFFF FFFFFF
1.632
10
0.00
Norm
10
11
1 FFFFFF FFFFFF
1.632
11
0.00
Norm
11
12
1 FFFFFF FFFFFF
3.750
12
0.00
Norm
12
13
1 FFFFFF FFFFFF
3.750
NODE RESTRAINTS (kN/m,kNm/rad)

--------------- (F=Fixed, R=Released, D=Deleted, S=Spring, *=General)
544
Node
Rest
X Axial
Y Axial
Code
Stiffness
Stiffness
Z Axial X Rotation Y Rotation Z Rotation

Stiffness
Stiffness
Stiffness
Stiffness
1 FFDDDR
2 RRDDDR*
13 FFDDDR
SECTION PROPERTIES (mm,mm^2,mm^4,deg)

------------------
Sect
Section Name
Mark
Angle Type
Flipped
Source
530 UB 92.4
C1
Not applicable No
Aust300
360 UB 50.7
R1
Not applicable No
Aust300
360 UB 50.7-A
S5
Not applicable No
Shape builder
360 UB 50.7-B
S6
Not applicable No
Shape builder
Area of
Torsion
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Princ
Section
Constant
Mom of In
Mom of In
Shr Area
Shr Area
Angle
1 1.1800E+04 7.7500E+05 2.3800E+07 5.5400E+08
INFINITE
INFINITE
0.00
2 6.4700E+03 2.4100E+05 9.6000E+06 1.4200E+08
INFINITE
INFINITE
0.00
3 1.0845E+04 3.3364E+05 1.4404E+07 6.4355E+08
INFINITE
INFINITE
0.00
4 9.7132E+03 3.1352E+05 1.4399E+07 3.6751E+08
INFINITE
INFINITE
0.00
Sect
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (MPa,kg/m^3,strain/degC)

-------------------
Matl
Material Name
STEEL
Young's
Poisson's
Mass
Coeff of
Concrete
Modulus
Ratio
Density
Expansion
Strength
2.0000E+05
0.25 7.8500E+03 1.1700E-05
MEMBER OFFSETS (m)

--------------
Memb Axes
Dxa
Dya
Dza
Dxb
Dyb
Dzb
0.000
-0.168
0.000
0.000
-0.168
0.000
0.000
-0.106
0.000
0.000
-0.106
0.000
0.000
-0.106
0.000
0.000
-0.106
0.000
10
0.000
-0.168
0.000
0.000
-0.168
0.000
NODE LOADS (kN,kNm)

----------
Load
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Case
Node
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
0.000
-4.500
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
MEMBER DISTRIBUTED FORCES (m,kN/m)

-------------------------
Load
Sub Axes
Start
Finish
X Start/
Y Start/
Z Start/
545

Case
Memb
Load
Sys
Position
Position
Finish
Finish
Finish
GI
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-0.900
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
0.000
-2.250
0.000
6.300
0.000
0.000
6.300
0.000
0.000
6.300
0.000
0.000
10
10
GI
GI
GI
GI
GI
GI
GI
GP
GP
GP
GP
GP
GP
GP
GP
GP
GP
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
546
10
11
12
GP
GP
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000
1.741
0.000
3.482
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
1.741
6.259
3.482
6.259
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
6.300
0.000
0.000
0.000
6.480
0.000
0.000
6.480
0.000
0.000
6.480
0.000
0.000
6.480
0.000
0.000
6.480
0.000
0.000
6.480
0.000
0.000
6.480
0.000
0.000
6.480
0.000
0.000
3.600
0.000
0.000
3.600
0.000
0.000
3.600
0.000
0.000
3.600
0.000
0.000
2.160
0.000
0.000
2.160
0.000
0.000
2.160
0.000
0.000
2.160
0.000
0.000
2.160
0.000
0.000
2.160
0.000
0.000
2.160
0.000
0.000
2.160
0.000
4.500
0.000
0.000
4.500
0.000
0.000
4.500
0.000
0.000
4.500
0.000
0.000
0.000
4.140
0.000
0.000
4.140
0.000
0.000
4.140
0.000
0.000
4.140
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
547
10
11
12
10
11
12
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
5.040
0.000
0.000
4.140
0.000
0.000
4.140
0.000
0.000
4.140
0.000
0.000
4.140
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
1.440
0.000
548
10
11
12
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
0.000
1.440
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
549
10
11
12
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000
SELF WEIGHT (g's)

-----------
Load
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Case
Accel'n
Accel'n
Accel'n
0.000
-1.000
0.000
COMBINATION LOAD CASES

----------------------
Load case
10: 1.25DL+1.5LL
1.250 * Load case
1: Dead load (DL)
1.500 * Load case
2: Live load including 4.5kN at ridge (LL)
Load case
11: 0.8DL+CW+IPCW
0.800 * Load case
1: Dead load (DL)
1.000 * Load case
3: Cross wind (CW)
1.000 * Load case
6: Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
Load case
12: 1.25DL+CW+ISCW
1.250 * Load case
1: Dead load (DL)
1.000 * Load case
3: Cross wind (CW)
-0.960 * Load case
Load case
6: Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
13: 0.8DL+LW1+IPLW
0.800 * Load case
1: Dead load (DL)
1.000 * Load case
4: Longitudinal wind at first internal frame (LW1)
1.000 * Load case
7: Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
550

Load case
14: 1.25DL+LW2+ISLW
1.250 * Load case
1: Dead load (DL)
1.000 * Load case
5: Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
-6.500 * Load case
7: Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
LOAD CASE TITLES

----------------
Load
Case
Title
Dead load (DL)
Live load including 4.5kN at ridge (LL)
Cross wind (CW)
Longitudinal wind at first internal frame (LW1)
Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
Lumped masses (DL+LL)
Spectral load case
10
1.25DL+1.5LL
11
0.8DL+CW+IPCW
12
1.25DL+CW+ISCW
13
0.8DL+LW1+IPLW
14
1.25DL+LW2+ISLW
LUMPED MASSES (kg,kgm^2)

-------------
Load
X Trans
Y Trans
Z Trans
X Rot'n
Y Rot'n
Z Rot'n
Case
Node
Mass
Mass
Mass
Mass
Mass
Mass
260.000
260.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
520.000
520.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
740.000
740.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
1490.000
1490.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
2470.000
2470.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
1490.000
1490.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
740.000
740.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10
520.000
520.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
260.000
260.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
SPECTRAL LOAD DATA

------------------
Load
Mode
Case Shape
Damping Mass
Spectral Curve
Factor Case
Direction Vector
Dx
Dy
Dz
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
1.000
0.000
0.000
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
1.000
0.000
0.000
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
1.000
0.000
0.000
Damping
551

Spectral Curve
Factor
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
Description
Newcastle 1989, Dir=N-S, Mag=6.5
552
Static analysis report (itemised)

This report extract shows the node displacements for primary load cases (1-9), the member forces
and moments for combination load cases (10-14), and the node reactions for all load cases. Note
that SPACE GASS lets you choose any desired load cases for each part of the report.
Although load case 9 is a spectral load case rather than a static load case, it is also included in this
part of the report because its results are in the same form as those of a static analysis.
NODE DISPLACEMENTS (mm,rad)
------------------
Load case 1 (Linear): Dead load (DL)
Node
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Transl'n
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
0.001
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-3.443
-0.037
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-1.988
-0.069
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
-1.704
-3.152
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.002
-1.392
-7.573
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.003
-0.795
-19.423
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.004
0.000
-35.597
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.795
-19.423
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.004
1.392
-7.573
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.003
10
1.704
-3.152
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.002
11
1.988
-0.069
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
12
3.443
-0.037
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
Load case 2 (Linear): Live load including 4.5kN at ridge (LL)
Node
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Transl'n
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
0.002
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-6.194
-0.048
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
-3.698
-0.097
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.003
-3.193
-5.540
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.004
-2.629
-13.435
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.006
-1.532
-35.183
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.008
0.000
-66.190
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
1.532
-35.183
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.008
2.629
-13.435
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.006
10
3.193
-5.540
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.004
11
3.698
-0.097
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.003
12
6.194
-0.048
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
13
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.002
Load case 3 (Linear): Cross wind (CW)
553
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Transl'n
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.018
63.213
0.117
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.014
99.245
0.234
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.004
98.834
-3.476
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
98.244
-0.524
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.004
96.821
27.786
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.013
93.372
96.251
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.005
92.581
78.638
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.010
Node
90.748
42.539
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013
10
89.618
21.016
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013
11
88.459
0.084
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013
12
43.844
0.042
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.012
13
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.012
Load case 4 (Linear): Longitudinal wind at first internal frame (LW1)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Transl'n
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.003
10.251
0.100
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.002
6.504
0.200
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.005
5.583
9.951
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.007
4.560
24.370
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.010
2.597
64.155
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.015
0.000
118.858
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-2.597
64.155
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.015
Node
-4.560
24.370
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.010
10
-5.583
9.951
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.007
11
-6.504
0.200
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.005
12
-10.251
0.100
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.002
13
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.003
Load case 5 (Linear): Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Transl'n
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
2.808
0.029
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
1.823
0.057
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
1.565
2.772
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.002
1.278
6.813
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.003
0.728
18.027
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.004
0.000
33.464
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.728
18.027
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.004
-1.278
6.813
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.003
10
-1.565
2.772
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.002
11
-1.823
0.057
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
12
-2.808
0.029
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
554

13
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
Load case 6 (Linear): Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Transl'n
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.003
9.127
0.093
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
5.925
0.186
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.004
5.086
9.010
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.007
4.154
22.143
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.009
2.365
58.586
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.013
0.000
108.759
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-2.365
58.586
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013
-4.154
22.143
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.009
10
-5.086
9.010
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.007
11
-5.925
0.186
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.004
12
-9.127
0.093
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
13
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.003
Load case 7 (Linear): Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Transl'n
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
1.755
0.018
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
1.139
0.036
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
0.978
1.733
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
0.799
4.258
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.002
0.455
11.267
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.003
0.000
20.915
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.455
11.267
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.003
-0.799
4.258
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.002
10
-0.978
1.733
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
11
-1.139
0.036
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
12
-1.755
0.018
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
Load case 9 (Dynamic): Spectral load case
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Transl'n
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.002
5.882
0.002
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
10.948
0.003
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
11.017
-1.784
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
11.071
-3.256
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
11.121
-4.169
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.906
0.003
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
11.121
4.171
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
11.071
3.257
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
555

10
11.017
1.784
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
11
10.948
-0.003
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
12
5.882
-0.002
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
13
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.002
MEMBER FORCES AND MOMENTS (kN,kNm)

-------------------------
Load case 10 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+1.5LL

Non-linear effects: P-D, P-d, 3 Iterations, 99.986% Convergence
Axial
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Memb
Node
Force
Shear
Shear
Torsion
Moment
Moment
77.150
-40.644
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
72.892
-40.644
0.000
0.000
0.000
-153.453
72.892
-40.644
0.000
0.000
0.000
-153.453
68.634
-40.644
0.000
0.000
0.000
-305.471
44.164
66.424
0.000
0.000
0.000
-298.072
43.693
57.396
0.000
0.000
0.000
-196.485
43.728
57.369
0.000
0.000
0.000
-199.188
43.261
48.518
0.000
0.000
0.000
-112.003
43.249
48.529
0.000
0.000
0.000
-116.570
42.445
33.226
0.000
0.000
0.000
7.892
42.439
33.234
0.000
0.000
0.000
7.892
40.765
1.247
0.000
0.000
0.000
118.626
40.765
-1.247
0.000
0.000
0.000
118.626
42.439
-33.234
0.000
0.000
0.000
7.892
42.445
-33.226
0.000
0.000
0.000
7.892
43.249
-48.529
0.000
0.000
0.000
-116.570
10
11
12
43.261
-48.518
0.000
0.000
0.000
-112.003
10
43.728
-57.369
0.000
0.000
0.000
-199.188
10
43.693
-57.396
0.000
0.000
0.000
-196.485
11
44.164
-66.424
0.000
0.000
0.000
-298.072
11
68.634
40.644
0.000
0.000
0.000
-305.471
12
72.892
40.644
0.000
0.000
0.000
-153.453
12
72.892
40.644
0.000
0.000
0.000
-153.453
13
77.150
40.644
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 11 (Non-linear): 0.8DL+CW+IPCW

Axial
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
556

Memb
Node
Force
Shear
Shear
Torsion
Moment
-111.201
77.746
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-113.926
71.671
0.000
0.000
0.000
272.857
-113.926
71.671
0.000
0.000
0.000
272.857
-116.651
65.596
0.000
0.000
0.000
526.725
-71.582
-113.077
0.000
0.000
0.000
514.733
-71.700
-97.124
0.000
0.000
0.000
343.454
-71.759
-97.080
0.000
0.000
0.000
347.890
-71.872
-81.012
0.000
0.000
0.000
203.494
-71.852
-81.031
0.000
0.000
0.000
211.081
-72.027
-50.960
0.000
0.000
0.000
17.402
-72.018
-50.974
0.000
0.000
0.000
17.402
-72.384
-1.129
0.000
0.000
0.000
-127.099
-71.871
-8.677
0.000
0.000
0.000
-127.099
-71.505
32.155
0.000
0.000
0.000
-50.643
-71.511
32.142
0.000
0.000
0.000
-50.643
-71.335
49.278
0.000
0.000
0.000
66.903
10
11
12
Moment
-71.348
49.260
0.000
0.000
0.000
59.371
10
-71.234
58.276
0.000
0.000
0.000
145.026
10
-71.199
58.319
0.000
0.000
0.000
140.619
11
-71.081
67.221
0.000
0.000
0.000
241.246
11
-70.832
-67.484
0.000
0.000
0.000
253.153
12
-68.106
-33.059
0.000
0.000
0.000
61.665
12
-68.106
-33.059
0.000
0.000
0.000
61.665
13
-65.381
1.366
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 12 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+CW+ISCW

Axial
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Memb
Node
Force
Shear
Shear
Torsion
Moment
Moment
13.925
43.143
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
9.666
2.670
0.000
0.000
0.000
86.514
9.666
2.670
0.000
0.000
0.000
86.514
5.408
-37.803
0.000
0.000
0.000
20.962
38.033
3.432
0.000
0.000
0.000
27.334
37.849
3.141
0.000
0.000
0.000
33.333
37.851
3.118
0.000
0.000
0.000
30.988
557
10
11
12
37.674
3.004
0.000
0.000
0.000
36.582
37.673
3.014
0.000
0.000
0.000
32.605
37.398
3.738
0.000
0.000
0.000
43.546
37.398
3.745
0.000
0.000
0.000
43.546
36.826
-7.751
0.000
0.000
0.000
42.296
37.434
-3.865
0.000
0.000
0.000
42.296
38.006
-24.374
0.000
0.000
0.000
-41.104
38.010
-24.366
0.000
0.000
0.000
-41.104
38.284
-36.576
0.000
0.000
0.000
-132.859
38.294
-36.567
0.000
0.000
0.000
-128.817
10
38.471
-43.732
0.000
0.000
0.000
-194.204
10
38.444
-43.755
0.000
0.000
0.000
-191.825
11
38.628
-51.098
0.000
0.000
0.000
-268.882
11
53.040
35.915
0.000
0.000
0.000
-275.353
12
57.298
35.942
0.000
0.000
0.000
-138.337
12
57.298
35.942
0.000
0.000
0.000
-138.337
13
61.556
35.969
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 13 (Non-linear): 0.8DL+LW1+IPLW

Axial
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Memb
Node
Force
Shear
Shear
Torsion
Moment
Moment
-54.034
14.715
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-56.759
33.615
0.000
0.000
0.000
90.115
-56.759
33.615
0.000
0.000
0.000
90.115
-59.484
52.515
0.000
0.000
0.000
251.790
-55.541
-56.669
0.000
0.000
0.000
242.485
-55.659
-49.236
0.000
0.000
0.000
156.549
-55.689
-49.202
0.000
0.000
0.000
159.994
-55.802
-41.655
0.000
0.000
0.000
86.580
-55.792
-41.669
0.000
0.000
0.000
92.471
-55.968
-27.228
0.000
0.000
0.000
-8.627
-55.962
-27.238
0.000
0.000
0.000
-8.627
-56.328
2.947
0.000
0.000
0.000
-81.824
-56.328
-2.947
0.000
0.000
0.000
-81.824
-55.962
27.238
0.000
0.000
0.000
-8.627
-55.968
27.228
0.000
0.000
0.000
-8.627
558
10
11
12
-55.792
41.669
0.000
0.000
0.000
92.471
-55.802
41.655
0.000
0.000
0.000
86.580
10
-55.689
49.202
0.000
0.000
0.000
159.994
10
-55.659
49.236
0.000
0.000
0.000
156.549
11
-55.541
56.669
0.000
0.000
0.000
242.485
11
-59.484
-52.515
0.000
0.000
0.000
251.790
12
-56.759
-33.615
0.000
0.000
0.000
90.115
12
-56.759
-33.615
0.000
0.000
0.000
90.115
13
-54.034
-14.715
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 14 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+LW2+ISLW

Axial
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Memb
Node
Force
Shear
Shear
Torsion
Moment
Moment
86.713
-28.274
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
82.455
-44.811
0.000
0.000
0.000
-138.153
82.455
-44.811
0.000
0.000
0.000
-138.153
78.197
-61.349
0.000
0.000
0.000
-336.805
65.338
74.896
0.000
0.000
0.000
-325.860
65.153
64.163
0.000
0.000
0.000
-211.561
65.192
64.123
0.000
0.000
0.000
-215.594
65.015
53.567
0.000
0.000
0.000
-118.350
65.002
53.584
0.000
0.000
0.000
-125.214
64.727
35.154
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.904
64.721
35.166
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.904
64.149
-3.356
0.000
0.000
0.000
114.934
64.149
3.356
0.000
0.000
0.000
114.934
64.721
-35.166
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.904
64.727
-35.154
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.904
65.002
-53.584
0.000
0.000
0.000
-125.214
10
11
12
65.015
-53.567
0.000
0.000
0.000
-118.350
10
65.192
-64.123
0.000
0.000
0.000
-215.594
10
65.153
-64.163
0.000
0.000
0.000
-211.561
11
65.338
-74.896
0.000
0.000
0.000
-325.860
11
78.197
61.349
0.000
0.000
0.000
-336.805
12
82.455
44.811
0.000
0.000
0.000
-138.153
12
82.455
44.811
0.000
0.000
0.000
-138.153
559

13
86.713
28.274
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
NODE REACTIONS (kN,kNm)

--------------
Load case 1 (Linear): Dead load (DL)
Node
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
10.293
25.270
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
-10.293
25.270
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
0.000
-50.540
0.000
Reac
0.000
50.540
0.000
Load case 2 (Linear): Live load including 4.5kN at ridge (LL)
Node
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
18.261
30.375
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
-18.261
30.375
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
0.000
-60.750
0.000
Reac
0.000
60.750
0.000
Load case 3 (Linear): Cross wind (CW)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
-70.889
-73.554
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
-8.223
-26.461
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
79.112
100.014
0.000
Reac
-79.112
-100.014
0.000
Load case 4 (Linear): Longitudinal wind at first internal frame (LW1)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
-20.355
-63.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
20.355
-63.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
0.000
126.000
0.000
Reac
0.000
-126.000
0.000
Load case 5 (Linear): Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
Node
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
560

1
-4.821
-18.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
4.821
-18.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
0.000
36.000
0.000
Reac
0.000
-36.000
0.000
Load case 6 (Linear): Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
-15.667
-58.500
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
15.667
-58.500
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
0.000
117.000
0.000
Reac
0.000
-117.000
0.000
Load case 7 (Linear): Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
-3.013
-11.250
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
3.013
-11.250
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
0.000
22.500
0.000
Reac
0.000
-22.500
0.000
Load case 9 (Dynamic): Spectral load case
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
-1.736
-0.971
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
-1.736
0.970
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Reac
-3.472
-0.001
0.000
Load case 10 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+1.5LL

Node
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
40.644
77.150
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
-40.644
77.150
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
0.000
-154.300
0.000
Reac
0.000
154.300
0.000
Load case 11 (Non-linear): 0.8DL+CW+IPCW

X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
561

Node
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
-77.746
-111.201
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
-1.366
-65.381
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
79.112
176.582
0.000
Reac
-79.112
-176.582
0.000
Load case 12 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+CW+ISCW

X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
-43.143
13.925
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
-35.969
61.556
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
79.112
-75.481
0.000
Reac
-79.112
75.481
0.000
Load case 13 (Non-linear): 0.8DL+LW1+IPLW

X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
-14.715
-54.034
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
14.715
-54.034
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
0.000
108.068
0.000
Reac
0.000
-108.068
0.000
Load case 14 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+LW2+ISLW

Node
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
28.274
86.713
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
-28.274
86.713
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
0.000
-173.425
0.000
Reac
0.000
173.425
0.000
562
Static analysis report (enveloped)

This report extract covers the same information as the previous section except that the results are
enveloped. It allows you to quickly locate the maximum and minimum values together with their
coincident values.
Note the summary envelopes at the end of each section which show the overall maximums and
minimums for all selected nodes and members.
NODE DISPLACEMENTS (mm,rad)
------------------ (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
Envelope = Load Cases 1-9

and All Nodes
Load
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Case
Transl'n
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.002*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.018#
63.213*
0.117
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.014
-6.194#
-0.048
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
63.213
0.117*
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.014
-6.194
-0.048#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
-6.194
-0.048
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001*
63.213
0.117
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.014#
99.245*
0.234
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.004
-3.698#
-0.097
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.003
99.245
0.234*
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.004
-3.698
-0.097#
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.003
6.504
0.200
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.005*
99.245
0.234
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.004#
98.834*
-3.476
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
-3.193#
-5.540
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.004
5.583
9.951*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.007
-3.193
-5.540#
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.004
5.583
9.951
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.007*
-3.193
-5.540
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.004#
98.244*
-0.524
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.004
-2.629#
-13.435
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.006
4.560
24.370*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.010
-2.629
-13.435#
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.006
4.560
24.370
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.010*
-2.629
-13.435
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.006#
96.821*
27.786
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.013
-1.532#
-35.183
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.008
563
10
11
12
13
2.597
64.155*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.015
-1.532
-35.183#
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.008
2.597
64.155
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.015*
-1.532
-35.183
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.008#
93.372*
96.251
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.005
0.000#
118.858
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
118.858*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-66.190#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
93.372
96.251
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.005*
0.000
-66.190
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000#
92.581*
78.638
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.010
-2.597#
64.155
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.015
92.581
78.638*
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.010
1.532
-35.183#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.008
1.532
-35.183
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.008*
-2.597
64.155
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.015#
90.748*
42.539
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013
-4.560#
24.370
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.010
90.748
42.539*
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013
2.629
-13.435#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.006
2.629
-13.435
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.006*
90.748
42.539
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013#
89.618*
21.016
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013
-5.583#
9.951
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.007
89.618
21.016*
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013
3.193
-5.540#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.004
3.193
-5.540
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.004*
89.618
21.016
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013#
88.459*
0.084
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013
-6.504#
0.200
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.005
-6.504
0.200*
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.005
3.698
-0.097#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.003
3.698
-0.097
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.003*
88.459
0.084
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.013#
43.844*
0.042
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.012
-10.251#
0.100
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.002
-10.251
0.100*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.002
6.194
-0.048#
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
-10.251
0.100
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.002*
43.844
0.042
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.012#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.003*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.012#
99.245*
0.234
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.004
12
-10.251#
0.100
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.002
0.000
118.858*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-66.190#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
564

6
2.597
64.155
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.015*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.018#
MEMBER FORCES AND MOMENTS (kN,kNm)

------------------------- (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
Envelope = Load Cases 10-14

and All Members
and All Sections
Load
Axial
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Memb
Case
Force
Shear
Shear
Torsion
Moment
Moment
14
86.713*
-28.274
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
-113.926#
71.671
0.000
0.000
0.000
272.857
11
-111.201
77.746*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
14
82.455
-44.811#
0.000
0.000
0.000
-138.153
11
-113.926
71.671
0.000
0.000
0.000
272.857*
10
72.892
-40.644
0.000
0.000
0.000
-153.453#
14
82.455*
-44.811
0.000
0.000
0.000
-138.153
11
-116.651#
65.596
0.000
0.000
0.000
526.725
11
-113.926
71.671*
0.000
0.000
0.000
272.857
14
78.197
-61.349#
0.000
0.000
0.000
-336.805
11
-116.651
65.596
0.000
0.000
0.000
526.725*
14
78.197
-61.349
0.000
0.000
0.000
-336.805#
-325.860
14
65.338*
74.896
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
-71.700#
-97.124
0.000
0.000
0.000
343.454
14
65.338
74.896*
0.000
0.000
0.000
-325.860
11
-71.582
-113.077#
0.000
0.000
0.000
514.733
11
-71.582
-113.077
0.000
0.000
0.000
514.733*
14
65.338
74.896
0.000
0.000
0.000
-325.860#
-215.594
14
65.192*
64.123
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
-71.872#
-81.012
0.000
0.000
0.000
203.494
14
65.192
64.123*
0.000
0.000
0.000
-215.594
11
-71.759
-97.080#
0.000
0.000
0.000
347.890
11
-71.759
-97.080
0.000
0.000
0.000
347.890*
14
65.192
64.123
0.000
0.000
0.000
-215.594#
-125.214
14
65.002*
53.584
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
-72.027#
-50.960
0.000
0.000
0.000
17.402
14
65.002
53.584*
0.000
0.000
0.000
-125.214
11
-71.852
-81.031#
0.000
0.000
0.000
211.081
11
-71.852
-81.031
0.000
0.000
0.000
211.081*
14
65.002
53.584
0.000
0.000
0.000
-125.214#
14
64.721*
35.166
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.904
11
-72.384#
-1.129
0.000
0.000
0.000
-127.099
10.904
14
64.721
35.166*
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
-72.018
-50.974#
0.000
0.000
0.000
17.402
10
40.765
1.247
0.000
0.000
0.000
118.626*
11
-72.384
-1.129
0.000
0.000
0.000
-127.099#
565
10
11
12
14
64.721*
-35.166
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.904
11
-71.871#
-8.677
0.000
0.000
0.000
-127.099
11
-71.505
32.155*
0.000
0.000
0.000
-50.643
14
64.721
-35.166#
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.904
10
40.765
-1.247
0.000
0.000
0.000
118.626*
11
-71.871
-8.677
0.000
0.000
0.000
-127.099#
14
65.002*
-53.584
0.000
0.000
0.000
-125.214
11
-71.511#
32.142
0.000
0.000
0.000
-50.643
11
-71.335
49.278*
0.000
0.000
0.000
66.903
14
65.002
-53.584#
0.000
0.000
0.000
-125.214
13
-55.792
41.669
0.000
0.000
0.000
92.471*
12
38.284
-36.576
0.000
0.000
0.000
-132.859#
14
65.192*
-64.123
0.000
0.000
0.000
-215.594
11
-71.348#
49.260
0.000
0.000
0.000
59.371
11
-71.234
58.276*
0.000
0.000
0.000
145.026
14
65.192
-64.123#
0.000
0.000
0.000
-215.594
13
-55.689
49.202
0.000
0.000
0.000
159.994*
14
65.192
-64.123
0.000
0.000
0.000
-215.594#
14
65.338*
-74.896
0.000
0.000
0.000
-325.860
11
-71.199#
58.319
0.000
0.000
0.000
140.619
11
-71.081
67.221*
0.000
0.000
0.000
241.246
14
65.338
-74.896#
0.000
0.000
0.000
-325.860
13
-55.541
56.669
0.000
0.000
0.000
242.485*
14
65.338
-74.896
0.000
0.000
0.000
-325.860#
-138.153
14
82.455*
44.811
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
-70.832#
-67.484
0.000
0.000
0.000
253.153
14
78.197
61.349*
0.000
0.000
0.000
-336.805
11
-70.832
-67.484#
0.000
0.000
0.000
253.153
11
-70.832
-67.484
0.000
0.000
0.000
253.153*
14
78.197
61.349
0.000
0.000
0.000
-336.805#
14
86.713*
28.274
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
-68.106#
-33.059
0.000
0.000
0.000
61.665
14
82.455
44.811*
0.000
0.000
0.000
-138.153
13
-56.759
-33.615#
0.000
0.000
0.000
90.115
13
-56.759
-33.615
0.000
0.000
0.000
90.115*
10
72.892
40.644
0.000
0.000
0.000
-153.453#
14
86.713*
-28.274
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
-116.651#
65.596
0.000
0.000
0.000
526.725
11
-111.201
77.746*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
-71.582
-113.077#
0.000
0.000
0.000
514.733
11
-116.651
65.596
0.000
0.000
0.000
526.725*
14
78.197
-61.349
0.000
0.000
0.000
-336.805#
NODE REACTIONS (kN,kNm)

-------------- (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
Envelope = All Load Cases
566

and All Nodes
Load
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Case
Force
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
Moment
10
40.644*
77.150
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
-77.746#
-111.201
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
14
28.274
86.713*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
-77.746
-111.201#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
13
20.355*
-63.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10
-40.644#
77.150
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
14
-28.274
86.713*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
-1.366
-65.381#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10
40.644*
77.150
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
-77.746#
-111.201
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
14
28.274
86.713*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
11
-77.746
-111.201#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
567
Bill of materials report

This report extract shows the bill of materials listing that can be produced by SPACE GASS.
BILL OF MATERIALS (m,kg)
----------------Unit
Total
Unit
Total
Length
Length
Mass
Mass
530 UB 92.4
3.750
15.000
347.362
1389.450
360 UB 50.7-A
1.632
3.264
138.961
277.922
360 UB 50.7-B
1.632
3.265
124.458
248.916
360 UB 50.7
2.994
5.988
152.070
304.140
360 UB 50.7
6.259
12.517
317.869
635.737
Item
Sect
Qty
4
5
Total mass
Section Name
= 2856.165
Centre of gravity = 12.500,5.802,0.000
568
Dynamic frequency analysis report

This report extract shows the natural frequencies and periods for each of the dynamic modes
within each mass load case. In this case there was only one mass load case which we analysed for
three dynamic modes.
DYNAMIC NATURAL FREQUENCIES (Sec,Hz,kg)
--------------------------- (*=Desired convergence not achieved)
Mass
Mode
Natural
Natural
Case Shape
Period
Frequency
1.1609
0.861
6.49 (6)
2856.17
0.5484
1.824
7.32 (6)
2856.17
0.2049
4.880
6.30 (6)
12
2856.17
Tolerance Iterations
Self Mass
569
Dynamic response analysis report

This report extract shows the general results of a dynamic response spectrum analysis for spectral
load case 9. A dynamic response analysis also calculates displacements, forces, moments and
reactions just like a static analysis and, for comparison purposes, they are included with the static
analysis results in this report.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE SPECTRUM
(kN,kg,Sec,Hz)
-------------------------
Spectral case 9: Spectral load case
Mass load case:
Direction vector:
Dx = 1.000, Dy = 0.000, Dz = 0.000
Loading code:
General
AS1170.4
Vertical direction:
Y-Axis
Base shear:
3.233
Site factor:
2.000
0.080
Importance factor:
1.000
4.500
0.017778
MPF for
Total
Dominant
Static
Total
Total
Dominant
Mass Part
Base
Direction
Mode
Force
Mass
Mode
Factor
Shear
X-Axis
4.3400 10998.8021
92.656%
98.897%
3.219%
Y-Axis
2.1700 10998.8021
59.181%
59.181%
0.001%
Z-Axis
0.0000
0.0000
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
Mode
Direction Shape
Damping
Natural
Natural
Mass Part
Spectral Curve
Factor
Period
Frequency
Factor
Vector
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
1.1609
0.861
92.656%
Vector
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
0.5484
1.824
0.000%
Vector
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
0.2049
4.880
6.241%
Total
98.897%
570
Buckling analysis report

This report extract shows the buckling load factors and the member effective lengths for each
combination load case. The primary load cases were not included in the buckling analysis
because in real life they could not occur in isolation.
Note that member effective lengths are not calculated for load cases 11 and 13 because their
buckling load factors are greater than 1000 (beyond the upper limit specified at the start of the
analysis).
BUCKLING LOAD FACTORS
---------------------
Load
Load
Case
Mode
Factor
10
13.410
11
>1000
12
23.738
13
>1000
14
11.004
Tolerance Iterations
0.008
15
0.008
17
0.008
15
BUCKLING EFFECTIVE LENGTHS (kN,m)

--------------------------
Load case 10 (Linear): 1.25DL+1.5LL
Mode
Memb
Pcr
Length
Ly
Lz
ky
kz
1006.045
3.750
6.834
32.969
1.822
8.792
948.944
3.750
7.036
33.947
1.876
9.052
583.910
1.632
6.978
46.643
4.275
28.576
578.093
1.632
7.012
35.424
4.296
21.702
569.410
2.994
5.769
22.187
1.927
7.410
552.718
6.259
5.855
22.519
0.936
3.598
552.718
6.259
5.855
22.519
0.936
3.598
569.410
2.994
5.769
22.187
1.927
7.410
578.093
1.632
7.012
35.424
4.296
21.702
10
583.910
1.632
6.978
46.643
4.275
28.576
11
948.944
3.750
7.036
33.947
1.876
9.052
12
1006.045
3.750
6.834
32.969
1.822
8.792
Load case 12 (Linear): 1.25DL+CW+ISCW
Mode
Memb
Pcr
Length
Ly
Lz
ky
kz
286.399
3.750
12.808
61.792
3.415
16.478
185.319
3.750
15.922
76.817
4.246
20.485
904.804
1.632
5.606
37.470
3.434
22.956
900.563
1.632
5.618
28.382
3.442
17.388
895.185
2.994
4.601
17.695
1.537
5.910
571

6
885.128
6.259
4.627
17.795
0.739
2.843
898.886
6.259
4.591
17.659
0.734
2.822
909.033
2.994
4.566
17.560
1.525
5.865
914.609
1.632
5.575
28.163
3.415
17.254
10
918.268
1.632
5.564
37.194
3.409
22.787
11
1303.229
3.750
6.004
28.967
1.601
7.725
12
1404.308
3.750
5.784
27.905
1.542
7.441
Load case 14 (Linear): 1.25DL+LW2+ISLW
Mode
Memb
Pcr
Length
Ly
Lz
ky
kz
930.750
3.750
7.105
34.277
1.895
9.141
883.895
3.750
7.290
35.174
1.944
9.380
710.874
1.632
6.324
42.273
3.875
25.899
709.318
1.632
6.330
31.980
3.878
19.592
706.685
2.994
5.178
19.916
1.729
6.652
701.958
6.259
5.196
19.983
0.830
3.193
701.958
6.259
5.196
19.983
0.830
3.193
706.685
2.994
5.178
19.916
1.729
6.652
709.317
1.632
6.330
31.980
3.878
19.592
10
710.874
1.632
6.324
42.273
3.875
25.899
11
883.895
3.750
7.290
35.174
1.944
9.380
12
930.750
3.750
7.105
34.277
1.895
9.141
572
Portal frame member design

This worked example considers the AS4100 member design of the 25m span haunched portal
frame which was analysed in the previous appendix. The design is based on the non-linear
analysis results of the combination load cases 10 - 14.
This appendix considers only the design of the portal frame members. The portal frame analysis
and connection design is covered in Portal frame analysis and Portal frame connection design.
This example bases the member design directly on the forces and moments obtained from the
non-linear analysis. The non-linear analysis results for combination load cases 10 - 14 are
included in the static analysis report (itemised) of the portal frame analysis worked example.
The portal frame has wall girts spaced at 1200mm and 1700mm, and roof purlins spaced at
1000mm, 1200mm and 800mm as shown in the following drawing. The frame is fully
symmetrical about its centre.
573
In order to check deflections, the following maximum limits will be used.

Eaves sway limit for serviceability:
Apex sag limit for dead load:
L/360
Apex sag limit for live load:
L/240
Apex deflection limit for:
L/150
h/150
serviceability:
Eaves sway due to cross wind: 99*(38/60)**2= 40mm = h/188 (Ok).
(Vu = 60m/s, Vs = 38m/s)
574

Apex sag due to dead load:
Apex sag due to live load:
36mm = L/694 (Ok).

66mm = L/379 (Ok).
Apex uplift due to cross wind
(96+109)*(38/60)**2 = 82mm = L/305 (Ok).
and internal pressure:

In order to define the steel member design data for the frame, the following design groups were
specified.
Group 1:
Left column
Group 2:
Left rafter Members 5 and 6
Group 3:
Right rafter Members 7 and 8
Group 4:
Right column
(Haunches have to be checked by hand)
Members 1 and 2
Members 11 and 12
Groups 3 and 4 were specified as members 8,7 and 12,11 (rather than 7,8 and 11,12) so that the
positions and types of flange restraints could be referenced from the column base and the narrow
end of the haunch in similar fashion to groups 1 and 2. This was not absolutely necessary,
however it made the input of the restraint data for groups 3 and 4 identical to the data for groups 1
and 2.
Major axis (in-plane) compression effective lengths (Lmajor) were calculated by the buckling
analysis and automatically transferred into the member design. The advantage of doing it this way
is that different effective lengths can be used for each design load case. The alternative is to
manually input the effective lengths, however they are then used for every design load case and
the design is usually not as efficient.
In the out-of-plane direction, all members were considered to be braced due to the presence of
girts on the columns and purlins on the rafters. Because the purlins and girts were not modelled in
the buckling analysis, the Lminor effective lengths calculated by it were longer than the purlin
and girt spacing. Therefore, the minor axis compression effective lengths were taken to be:
Groups 1 and 4 (columns):
Groups 2 and 3 (rafters):
purlins)
Lminor = 1.7m (distance between girts)

Lminor = 1.2m (distance between
If you want SPACE GASS to calculate both the major and minor axis compression effective
lengths then you can just specify "Yes" for the "Calculate Lc from buckling analysis" field in the
steel member design input data. If, however, Lmajor is to be calculated and Lminor is to be
specified (as in this example), then you should specify "No" for "Calculate Lc from buckling
analysis" and use 1.0 for the lengths you want to be calculated from the buckling analysis.
Therefore, for the group 1 and 4 columns, we have used Lmajor = -1.0 (calculate) and Lminor =
1.7m.
575

Flange restraints for the columns were placed on the outside (top) flange at each end and at each
girt location. Inside (bottom) flange restraints were placed at the column ends. There are no
column fly braces and therefore no intermediate inside flange restraints were applied.
For each column, the column base plate was assumed to provide full restraint to both column
flanges and was also assumed to provide minor axis rotational restraint. Thus, restraint codes of R
(full and rotational) were specified for both column flanges at the base.
Because wall bracing and an eaves strut effectively prevented lateral deflection of both flanges at
the top of the column and because the rafter provided partial (or full) twist restraint, the restraints
applied to the top of the column were assumed to be F (full).
In addition, the stiffness of the haunch meant that the restraining effect of the rafter could be
considered to be applied at the bottom of the haunch, hence additional flange restraints identical
to those at the top of the column were applied to both column flanges at the base of the haunch.
An I (ignore) continuous restraint was also applied to the segment from the bottom of the haunch
to the top of the column so that it would be ignored during the design.
Top flange restraints of L (lateral) were positioned at each purlin location in the rafter design
groups, except that the purlins close to the end of the haunch and near the apex were
conservatively assumed to be at the ends of the group. A bottom flange restraint was also
positioned at midspan of the rafter design groups to coincide with a fly brace at that location.
Fly braces were also located at the face of the columns, end of haunches and apex. Thus, the top
and bottom flange restraints at the ends of the rafter design groups were assumed to be at least F
(full). Because of the continuity of the rafter into the haunched section, rotational restraint about
the minor axis was also assumed to be provided at the lower end of each rafter design group,
giving a restraint code of R (full and rotational). Some rotational restraint also exists at the apex
but the adjacent segment (on the other side of the apex) is quite long and it is safe to ignore this
restraint at the apex end.
Note that the effect of the fly brace at midspan could also have been taken into account by
specifying a full restraint at the fly brace location on the top flange and not specifying anything
on the bottom flange. A full or partial restraint on one flange causes SPACE GASS to
automatically place a partial restraint (at least) on the other flange (see also Effective flange
restraints). This method would, however increase the kt factor marginally.
All of the member design data was input graphically, however it could have been input just as
successfully via a datasheet or by importing it from a text data file. For information about the
graphical input procedure for steel member design data, see also Steel members. For detailed
information about the actual member design data values and settings, see also Steel member
design data.
576
Member design results

The AS4100 member design module running in checking mode was then initiated and the results
are shown in the following computer printout.
The 530 UB 92.4 columns are generally safe with load factors of 1.23 on both sides. The rafters
are also satisfactory with load factors of 1.15 and 1.06.
Note that in group 1 (the left column), although the load factor is adequate, SPACE GASS reports
that "Failure has occurred due to an l/r limit being exceeded in another load case or at another
location along the design group in the governing load case". This sometimes occurs when a load
case with an excessive l/r ratio is not the governing load case. In this worked example, load case
12 is not governing because it has a group 1 load factor of 6.25, however its Lx/rx ratio is 315.8
which is slightly higher than the specified safe l/r ratio of 300.
In this example, because the approximate sizes of the columns and rafters were known in
advance, it was appropriate to simply run a steel member check rather than a design. If the steel
module had been run in design mode instead, the column members would have been selected as
slightly smaller than 530 UB 92.4 because of their load factors being somewhat greater than 1.0.
Thus, if you know that your initial analysis member sizes are close to the final design sizes, the
recommended procedure is to run a steel member check first rather than a design. If the check
results show that the analysis member sizes are almost correct then it is a simple matter to
manually change some of the analysis member sizes and then do a final check to verify that they
are correct.
Alternatively, if your analysis member sizes have not been chosen carefully, you should run a
steel member design and then choose "Update frame member sizes" from the Steel menu (see
also Updating frame member sizes) to update the analysis data and bring it in line with the design
data. You should then iterate the analysis-design procedure until the design member sizes agree
with the analysis member sizes. You should then run a final member check to verify that the final
member sizes are correct and to ensure that all analysis members with the same section property
number have the same final design member size (see also Constraining members to the same final
design size).
577
Steel member design report

This report extract shows all of the steel member design input and output data.
AS4100 1990 STEEL MEMBER SYMBOLS NOTATION
-----------------------------------------
Group
= An actual member in the real structure which consists of
Segment
= A part of the total member length under consideration
Load factor
= The ratio of the minimum loads which cause failure to
Grade
= Grade of steel.
Fy
= Yield stress of overall section.
Fyw
= Yield stress of web.
Fu
= Ultimate tensile strength.
Ltot
= Total group length.
one or more analysis members joined together end-to-end.
(usually equals the portion between lateral restraints).
the actual design loads.
Lseg
= Length of the critical segment in the group.
kt
(5.6.3)
= Twist restraint effective length factor.
kl
(5.6.3)
= Load height effective length factor.
kr
(5.6.3)
= Lateral rotation effective length factor.
Le
(5.6.3)
= Bending effective length for major axis bending.
Lx
(6.3.2)
= Compression effective length for major axis buckling.
Ly
(6.3.2)
= Compression effective length for minor axis buckling.
Lz
= Torsion effective length.
L/r
= Slenderness ratio for compression or bending.
Arf
= Area of bolt holes removed from flanges.
Arw
= Area of bolt holes removed from web.
An
= Net area of section. (Gross area less Arf and Arw).
Ae
(6.2.2)
= Effective area of section.
Kf
(6.2.2)
= Form factor for compression members.
Kt
(7.3)
= Correction factor for eccentric effects in tension members.
(5.6.1.1)
= Moment modification factor for bending.
(5.6.1.1)
= Bending member slenderness reduction factor.
cx
(6.3.3)
= Compression member slenderness reduction factor (major).
cy
(6.3.3)
= Compression member slenderness reduction factor (minor).
(6.3.3)
= Compression member section constant.
me
(8.4.4.1)
= Ratio of major axis moments at ends of segment.
mx
(8.4.2.2)
= Ratio of major axis moments at ends of member.
my
(8.4.2.2)
= Ratio of minor axis moments at ends of segment.
Gamma(8.3.4)
= Index.
= Capacity factor.
(3.4)
N*
= Design axial force (+ve=compression).
Vx*
= Design major axis shear force (not considered).
Vy*
= Design minor axis shear force.
Mx*
= Design major axis bending moment.
My*
= Design minor axis bending moment.
Nt
(7.2)
= Section capacity in tension.
Ns
(6.2)
= Section capacity in compression.
Ncx (6.3.3)
= Major axis member capacity in compression.
Ncy (6.3.3)
= Minor axis member capacity in compression.
578

Vv
(5.11)
= Shear capacity of web.
Mf
(5.12.2)
= Moment capacity of flanges.
Msx (5.2)
= Section major axis moment capacity.
Msy (5.2)
= Section minor axis moment capacity.
Mbx (5.6)
= Member major axis moment capacity.
Mox (8.4.4)
= Member out-of-plane major axis moment capacity.
Mrx (8.3.2)
= Section major axis moment capacity reduced by axial force.
Mry (8.3.3)
= Section minor axis moment capacity reduced by axial force.
Mix (8.4.2.2)
= Member in-plane major axis moment capacity.
Miy (8.4.2.2)
= Member in-plane minor axis moment capacity.
Mtx (8.4.5.2)
= Lesser of Mrx and Mox.
Mcx (8.4.5.1)
= Lesser of Mix and Mox.
STEEL MEMBER DESIGN DATA (m)

-----------------------Restraint codes are:
F => Fixed restraint

P => Partial restraint
R => Fixed and rotational restraint
S => Partial and rotational restraint
L => Lateral restraint
U => Unrestrained
C => Continuous lateral restraint
I => Ignore segment
Group: 1
Left column
Member list: 1,2

Compr'n eff lengths: Major axis
=> Calculate,
Bending eff lengths: +ve bending => Calculate,
Minor axis
=> 1.700
-ve bending => Calculate
Top flange restr pos'ns: 3@1.2,5.3,7

Bot flange restr pos'ns:
Top flange restr types: RLLFIF
Bot flange restr types: RF
Group: 2
Left rafter
Member list: 5,6

=> Calculate,
Minor axis
=> 1.200
Top flange restr pos'ns: 1.3,5@1.2,8.1

Bot flange restr pos'ns: 4.9
Top flange restr types: RLLLF
Bot flange restr types: RLF
Group: 3
Right rafter
Member list: 8,7

=> Calculate,
Minor axis
=> 1.200
Top flange restr pos'ns: 1.3,5@1.2,8.1

Bot flange restr pos'ns: 4.9
Top flange restr types: RLLLF
Bot flange restr types: RLF
Group: 4
Right column
Member list: 12,11

=> Calculate,
Minor axis
=> 1.700
579

Top flange restr pos'ns: 3@1.2,5.3,7

Bot flange restr pos'ns:
Top flange restr types: RLLFIF
Bot flange restr types: RF
Load Major Minor

Str
Bolts
Height
Axis
Axis Scan
Angle
Pos'n
Sway
Sway Code
Type
Group Grade Units
End Ecc Design in

Conn Eff
Crit X-sect
Norm
Act
Top
No
No
Single
Con Yes Weight None
Norm
Act
Top
No
No
Single
Con Yes Weight None
Norm
Act
Top
No
No
Single
Con Yes Weight None
Norm
Act
Top
No
No
Single
Con Yes Weight None
AS4100 1998 STEEL MEMBER DESIGN NOTES

-------------------------------------
1. The sign convention used in this design report for cross section axes is
shown below. Note that it is not the same as the sign convention used in
the analysis.
n - major geometric axis (or angle section short leg)

p - minor geometric axis (or angle section long leg)
x - major principal axis
y - minor principal axis
2. Double angle sections are treated as solid Tee shapes.
3. Torsion moments are not considered.
4. Shear forces in the direction of the minor axis only are considered.
5. Items that affect the end connection of members such as block shear,
bearing, tearing, bolts, welds, stiffeners and the like are considered to
be part of the connection design rather than the member design and, as
such, are not considered here.
6. Cantilevers cannot be automatically detected. ALWAYS check that the bending

effective lengths calculated by the program for cantilevered members are
correct.
AS4100 1998 STEEL MEMBER DESIGN SUMMARY (MPa,m) (*=Failure)

--------------------------------------Yield
Group
Section Name
Total
(#=Warning)
Seg Failure Crit
Str Length Length
Load
Mode Case Factor
1* 530 UB 92.4
300
7.500
7.000
Member
14
1.23*
360 UB 50.7
300
9.253
1.300 Section
11
1.15
360 UB 50.7
300
9.253
4.353
Member
11
1.06
530 UB 92.4
300
7.500
7.000
Member
14
1.23
AS4100 1998 CALCULATIONS FOR GROUP 1 (*=Failure)
580

------------------------------------
Critical load case is
14, out of 10-14
Section: *530 UB 92.4 (I or H section, Rolled)
Failure Crit
Mode Case
Start Finish
Axial
x-axis
y-axis
x-axis
y-axis
Pos'n
Force
Shear
Shear
Moment
Moment Factor
-116.29
0.00
66.41
Section
11
7.000
Member
14
0.000
Shear
11
7.000
Pos'n
7.000
86.71
-116.29
0.00
Load
493.83
0.00
1.30
-306.89
0.00
1.23
493.83
0.00
66.41
1.68
(1.00)
Load
Load
Failure
Case Factor
Mode
10
1.69
Member - Member out-of-plane bending (8.4.4.1)
11
1.30
12
6.25
13
2.83
Member - Section bending about X-axis (8.3.2)
14
1.23
Grade=
Fyw
Ltot =
Fy
300.0 MPa
320.0 MPa
300
Fu
440.0 MPa
7.500 m
Lseg =
7.000 m (RP Bot-Bot)
kt
1.03 (5.6.3)
kl
kr
0.85 (5.6.3)
Le
8.597 m (Bending) (5.6.3)
Lx
Ly
1.700 m (Compression)
Lz
Lx/rx=
1.40 (5.6.3)
7.000 m (Torsion)
156.2 (Compression)
191.4 (Bending)
(300 max)
Arf
Arw
An
= 11800.0 mm^2
Ae
= 10955.5 mm^2 (6.2.2)
Kf
0.93 (6.2.2)
Kt
1.00 (7.3)
2.05 (5.6.1.1)
0.30 (5.6.1.1)
cx
0.25 (6.3.3)
cy
0.00 (6.3.3)
me
-1.00 (8.4.4.1)
mx
1.00 (8.4.2.2)
my
0.00 (8.4.2.2)
0.00 (8.3.4)
0.90 (3.4)
Gamma=
0.0 mm^2
Le/ry=
0.0 mm^2
0.91 (6.3.3)
N*
Vx*
86.71 kN (Slender)
Vy*
Mx*
= -306.89 kNm (Compact)
My*
Nt
(7.2)
Ns
= 2957.99 kN
(6.3.3)
Ncy = 2677.00 kN
(8.4.4.1)
Mo
231.92 kNm (5.6.1)
(5.12)
Mf
455.47 kNm (5.12.2)
0.00 kN (not considered)
-28.27 kN
0.00 kNm (Compact)
0.00 kN
Ncx =
736.75 kN
(6.2)
Noz =
0.00 kN
Vvm =
903.97 kN
Msx =
639.90 kNm (5.2)
Msy =
Mbx =
391.70 kNm (5.6)
Mox =
379.01 kNm (8.4.4)
Mrx =
639.90 kNm (8.3.2)
Mry =
92.24 kNm (8.3.3)
Mix =
619.48 kNm (8.4.2.2)
Miy =
89.25 kNm (8.4.2.2)
Mtx =
0.00 kNm (8.4.5.2)
Mcx =
379.01 kNm (8.4.5.1)
(6.3.3)
92.24 kNm (5.2)
581
Mx*
---- = 0.81 < 1.00
(Pass) Member out-of-plane bending (8.4.4.1)
Mox
* Failure has occured due to an l/r limit being exceeded in another load case
or at another location along the design group in the governing load case

------------------------------------
Section:
11, out of 10-14
360 UB 50.7 (I or H section, Rolled)
Failure Crit
Mode Case
Start Finish
Axial
x-axis
y-axis
x-axis
y-axis
Pos'n
Force
Shear
Shear
Moment
Moment Factor
-71.85
0.00
-81.03
211.08
0.00
1.15
211.08
0.00
1.15
211.08
0.00
Section
11
0.000
Member
11
0.000
Shear
11
0.000
Pos'n
1.300
-71.93
-71.85
0.00
-81.03
Load
1.40
(1.00)
Load
Load
Failure
Case Factor
Mode
10
1.80
11
1.15
12
3.73
13
1.79
14
1.76
Member - Member in-plane bending (8.4.2.2)
Grade=
Fyw
Ltot =

Section - Section bending about X-axis (8.3.2)
Fy
300.0 MPa
320.0 MPa
300
Fu
440.0 MPa
9.253 m
Lseg =
1.300 m (RL Top-Top)
kt
1.00 (5.6.3)
kl
kr
1.00 (5.6.3)
Le
1.300 m (Bending) (5.6.3)
Lx
Ly
Lz
4.353 m (Torsion)
Ly/ry=
31.2 (Compression)
Arf
0.0 mm^2
An
6470.0 mm^2
Kf
m
cx
Le/ry=
1.00 (5.6.3)
33.7 (Bending)
Arw
Ae
0.00 (6.2.2)
Kt
1.00 (7.3)
1.27 (5.6.1.1)
0.00 (5.6.1.1)
0.00 (6.3.3)
cy
0.00 (6.3.3)
me
-1.00 (8.4.4.1)
mx
0.51 (8.4.2.2)
my
0.00 (8.4.2.2)
1.44 (8.3.4)
0.90 (3.4)
Vy*
My*
Gamma=
N*
Vx*
Mx*
(300 max)
0.0 mm^2
0.0 mm^2 (6.2.2)
0.00 (6.3.3)
-71.85 kN
211.08 kNm (Compact)
-81.03 kN
0.00 kNm (Compact)
582

Nt
(7.2)
Ns
0.00 kN
(6.2)
Ncx =
= 1746.90 kN
0.00 kN
(6.3.3)
Ncy =
0.00 kN
(6.3.3)
Noz =
0.00 kN
(8.4.4.1)
Mo
0.00 kNm (5.6.1)
Vvm =
361.74 kN
(5.12)
Mf
Msx =
242.19 kNm (5.2)
Msy =
Mbx =
0.00 kNm (5.6)
Mox =
0.00 kNm (8.4.4)
Mrx =
242.19 kNm (8.3.2)
Mry =
45.47 kNm (8.3.3)
182.91 kNm (5.12.2)

45.47 kNm (5.2)
Mix =
0.00 kNm (8.4.2.2)
Miy =
0.00 kNm (8.4.2.2)
Mtx =
0.00 kNm (8.4.5.2)
Mcx =
0.00 kNm (8.4.5.1)
Mx*
---- = 0.87 < 1.00
(Pass) Section bending about X-axis (8.3.2)
Mrx

------------------------------------
Section:
11, out of 10-14
Failure Crit
Mode Case
Start Finish
Axial
x-axis
y-axis
x-axis
y-axis
Pos'n
Pos'n
Force
Shear
Shear
Moment
Moment Factor
38.28
0.00
-36.58
-132.86
0.00
1.82
9.253
-71.87
-132.19
0.00
1.06
-125.21
0.00
Section
12
0.000
Member
11
4.900
Shear
14
0.000
65.00
0.00
-53.58
Load
8.38
(1.00)
Load
Load
Failure
Case Factor
Mode
10
1.80
11
1.06
12
1.46
13
1.79
14
1.76
Member - Member in-plane bending (8.4.2.2)
Grade=
Fyw
Ltot =
Fy
300.0 MPa
320.0 MPa
300
Fu
440.0 MPa
9.253 m
Lseg =
4.353 m (FF Bot-Bot)
kt
1.00 (5.6.3)
kl
kr
1.00 (5.6.3)
Le
4.353 m (Bending) (5.6.3)
Lx
Ly
Lz
4.353 m (Torsion)
Ly/ry=
31.2 (Compression)
Arf
0.0 mm^2
An
6470.0 mm^2
Kf
m
cx
Le/ry=
1.00 (5.6.3)
113.0 (Bending)
Arw
Ae
0.00 (6.2.2)
Kt
1.00 (7.3)
1.03 (5.6.1.1)
0.54 (5.6.1.1)
0.00 (6.3.3)
cy
0.00 (6.3.3)
me
-1.00 (8.4.4.1)
mx
my
0.00 (8.4.2.2)
-0.34 (8.4.2.2)
(300 max)
0.0 mm^2
0.0 mm^2 (6.2.2)
0.00 (6.3.3)
583

Gamma=
0.00 (8.3.4)
0.90 (3.4)
N*
Vx*
-71.87 kN
Vy*
Mx*
My*
0.00 kNm (Compact)
Nt
= 1746.90 kN
21.25 kN
(7.2)
Ns
0.00 kN
(6.2)
Ncx =
0.00 kN
(6.3.3)
Ncy =
0.00 kN
(6.3.3)
Noz =
0.00 kN
(8.4.4.1)
Mo
198.98 kNm (5.6.1)
(5.11)
Mf
182.91 kNm (5.12.2)
Vv
449.07 kN
Msx =
242.19 kNm (5.2)
Msy =
Mbx =
134.08 kNm (5.6)
Mox =
139.59 kNm (8.4.4)
45.47 kNm (5.2)
Mrx =
242.19 kNm (8.3.2)
Mry =
45.47 kNm (8.3.3)
Mix =
0.00 kNm (8.4.2.2)
Miy =
0.00 kNm (8.4.2.2)
Mtx =
139.59 kNm (8.4.5.2)
Mcx =
0.00 kNm (8.4.5.1)
Mx*
---- = 0.95 < 1.00
Mox

------------------------------------
Section:
14, out of 10-14
Failure Crit
Mode Case
Start Finish
Axial
x-axis
y-axis
x-axis
y-axis
Pos'n
Force
Shear
Shear
Moment
Moment Factor
78.76
0.00
59.14
-306.89
0.00
-306.89
0.00
1.23
220.08
0.00
14.89
Section
14
7.000
Member
14
0.000
Shear
11
7.000
Pos'n
7.000
86.71
-70.47
0.00
-62.89
Load
2.08
(1.00)
Load
Load
Failure
Case Factor
Mode
10
1.69
11
2.91
12
1.88
13
2.83
14
1.23
Grade=
Fyw
Ltot =
Fy
300.0 MPa
320.0 MPa
300
Fu
440.0 MPa
7.500 m
Lseg =
7.000 m (RP Top-Bot)
kt
1.03 (5.6.3)
kl
kr
0.85 (5.6.3)
Le
8.597 m (Bending) (5.6.3)
Lx
Ly
Lz
Lx/rx=
Arf
1.40 (5.6.3)
7.000 m (Torsion)
156.2 (Compression)
0.0 mm^2
Le/ry=
Arw
191.4 (Bending)
(300 max)
0.0 mm^2
584

An
= 11800.0 mm^2
Ae
= 10955.5 mm^2 (6.2.2)
Kf
0.93 (6.2.2)
Kt
1.00 (7.3)
2.05 (5.6.1.1)
0.30 (5.6.1.1)
cx
0.25 (6.3.3)
cy
0.00 (6.3.3)
me
-1.00 (8.4.4.1)
mx
1.00 (8.4.2.2)
my
0.00 (8.4.2.2)
0.00 (8.3.4)
0.90 (3.4)
Gamma=
0.91 (6.3.3)
N*
Vx*
86.71 kN (Slender)
Vy*
Mx*
My*
Nt
(7.2)
Ns
= 2957.99 kN
(6.3.3)
Ncy = 2677.00 kN
(8.4.4.1)
Mo
231.92 kNm (5.6.1)
(5.11)
Mf
455.47 kNm (5.12.2)
0.00 kN
Ncx =
736.75 kN
Noz =
0.00 kN
Vv
936.53 kN
28.27 kN
0.00 kNm (Compact)
(6.2)
(6.3.3)
Msx =
639.90 kNm (5.2)
Msy =
Mbx =
391.70 kNm (5.6)
Mox =
379.01 kNm (8.4.4)
92.24 kNm (5.2)
Mrx =
639.90 kNm (8.3.2)
Mry =
92.24 kNm (8.3.3)
Mix =
619.48 kNm (8.4.2.2)
Miy =
89.25 kNm (8.4.2.2)
Mtx =
0.00 kNm (8.4.5.2)
Mcx =
379.01 kNm (8.4.5.1)
Mx*
---- = 0.81 < 1.00
Mox
585
Portal frame connection design

This worked example considers the AS4100 connection design of the 25m span haunched portal
frame which was analysed in a previous appendix. The design is based on the non-linear analysis
results of the combination load cases 10 - 14.
This appendix considers only the design of the portal frame connections. The portal frame
analysis and member design is covered in Portal frame analysis and Portal frame member
design.
This example bases the connection design directly on the forces and moments obtained from the
non-linear analysis. The non-linear analysis results for combination load cases 10 - 14 are
included in the static analysis report (itemised) of the portal frame analysis worked example.
The portal frame has been analysed as pin based and therefore the two column base connections
were specified as pinned baseplates with snug tightened high strength bolts. For clarity and
consistency with the frame geometry, the left hand column was input as the side A supported
member, and the right hand column as side B. In reality, for baseplate connections, it doesn't
matter whether you specify side A or B, the design results and drawings are identical. Note that
there is no supporting member for a baseplate connection.
The left hand eave is a rigid connection and was specified as a bolted end plate using tensioned
high strength bolts in bearing. The rafter member was input as the side B supported member
because it is on the right hand side of the connection. If it had been specified as side A then the
design results would be identical but the connection drawing would show the rafter on the left
hand side of the connection.
For a bit of variety (although probably not highly practical), the right hand eave connection was
specified as a fully welded moment connection with the rafter as the side A supported member.
For both eave connections, a 3000mm long haunch was nominated with a zero haunch depth. The
zero depth instructs the program to calculate it automatically based on the assumptions that the
haunch will be cut from the same section as the rafter and that its depth will be equal to the
section depth less the top flange thickness and root radius. Note that the haunch dimensions are
measured perpendicular and parallel to the face of the supporting member.
The portal apex connection was input as a bolted end plate with tensioned high strength bolts in
bearing. The two rafter members were specified as the side A and B supported members. There is
no supporting member in a apex connection.
In all of the connections main welds are SP fillet welds except for the rafter flanges which use
full strength butt welds, stiffener welds are GP fillet welds, bolt gauges and pitches are 70mm,
bolt hole sizes are standard, and bolt threads are included in the shear plane.
586

All of the connection design data was input graphically, however it could have been input just as
successfully via a datasheet or by importing it from a text data file. For information about the
graphical input procedure for steel connection design data, see also Steel connections. For
detailed information about the actual connection design data values and settings, see also Steel
connection design data.
In order for these connections to be designed properly, the default connection

configuration size ranges for tensioned bolts and plates had to be changed. The maximum
tensioned bolt size was increased to 30mm and the maximum plate thickness was increased to
40mm. For more information about changing the default connection configuration data, see also
Steel connection configuration.
587
588
Connection design results

The AS4100 connection design module was then initiated and the results are shown in the
following computer printout.
For the two baseplate connections, the minimum design axial force of 1062kN governs. This
force is considerably more than the maximum actual tensile force of 111kN from load case 11,
however AS4100 clause 9.1.4 requires that the connection design actions do not fall below a
minimum threshold, even if the actual design actions are quite small. This is to guarantee that the
connections achieve an acceptable level of robustness and are able to tolerate construction loads
and other unforseen conditions that may not be taken into account in the frame analysis data. For
more information regarding minimum design actions, see also Design actions, and see also
Minimum design actions.
The output report for the baseplate connections also shows that custom plate sizes of 640x330x20
have been used. This is because none of the sizes available in the standard plate library were
suitable.
The report also notes that the concrete footing capacities are assumed to be adequate. Because the
properties of the footings are unknown for the purposes of the baseplate connection design, you
should check manually that the ability of the footing to resist compression, bolt pull-out and bolt
shear is sufficient.
Tension and compression stiffeners have been designed for both eave connections, but shear
stiffeners and doubler plates are not required.
Because the cross wind load case has been applied in one direction only and, for practical reasons
of standardization and symmetry, the portal baseplate and eave connections would probably be
made the same on both sides.
589
Steel connection drawings

The following connection drawings were produced automatically by SPACE GASS during the
connection design process.
Left baseplate
Left eave
Bolted apex
Right eave
Right baseplate
590
Steel connection design report

This report extract shows all of the steel connection design input and output data.
AS4100 1990 STEEL CONNECTION SYMBOLS NOTATION
---------------------------------------------
Fy
= Yield stress of overall section.
Fu
= Ultimate tensile strength.
Diam
= Bolt diameter.
Edge
= Edge distance.
Slip
= Bolt slip factor.
Pry
= Bolt prying factor.
N*
= Design axial force (+ve=compression).
Vx*
= Design major axis shear force.
Vy*
= Design minor axis shear force.
Mx*
= Design major axis bending moment.
My*
= Design minor axis bending moment.
Ntf*
= Design tension force on critical bolt.
Vf*
= Design shear force on critical bolt.
Nft*
= Total tension design force in a flange.
Nfc*
= Total compression design force in a flange.
Nts*
= Design force on a stiffener at the tension flange.
Ncs*
= Design force on a stiffener at the compression flange.
Nvs*
= Design force on a shear stiffener.
Vvc*
= Design shear force at end plate - support interface.
Vct*
= Design shear force in a column at the top beam flange.
Vcb*
= Design shear force in a column at the bottom beam flange.
Vw*
= Design force per unit length on a fillet weld.
Nf*
= Design force on a butt weld.

(3.4)
= Capacity factor.
Ntf (9.3.2.2)
= Design tension capacity of a bolt.
Vf
= Design shear capacity of a bolt.
(9.3.2.1)
Vbc
= Local bearing or tearout capacity of a supporting column.
Vbi
= Local bearing or tearout capacity of an end plate.
Npb
= Design bending capacity of an end plate.
Vph
= Out-of-plane design shear capacity of an end plate.
Vpv
= In-plane design shear capacity of an end plate.
Vfb
= Design bearing/tearout capacity of an end plate or column.
Rt
= Design capacity of a column at the beam tension flange.
Rc
= Design capacity of a column at the beam compression flange.
Rts
= Design capacity of a column flange at beam tension flange.
Nts
= Design capacity of a stiffener in tension.
Ncs
= Design capacity of a stiffener in compression.
Nvs
= Design capacity of a shear stiffener.
Vc
= Design shear capacity of a column web.
Vw (9.7.3.10)
= Design shear capacity of a weld.
Nw
= Design axial capacity of a weld.
Ns
= Design axial capacity of a baseplate.
Va - Vg
= Design shear capacities of simple connections

corresponding to various modes of failure.
591

STEEL CONNECTION DESIGN DATA (mm)
----------------------------
Conn
Description
Left baseplate
Left eave
Bolted apex
11
Right eave
12
Right baseplate
Conn
Supporting
Supported
Member
Member(s)
Side A Connection
Side B Connection
Pinned baseplate
Snug bolt proc
Bolted end plate

Bearing bolt proc
3000x0 haunch
6,7
11
11
10
Bolted apex
Bolted apex
Bearing bolt proc
Bearing bolt proc
Welded moment
3000x0 haunch
12
12
Pinned baseplate
Snug bolt proc
Bolt
Weld
Plate
Cleat
Member
Strength Strength Strength Strength Strength
S'Seat
Bolt
Bolt Bearing
Conn
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
Gauge
Pitch
Length
High
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
70
70
High
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
70
70
High
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
70
70
11
High
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
70
70
12
High
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
70
70
Bolt Pref
Wrench
Weld cat
Flange
Hole Bolt in Shear above Top for Conn &
Weld
Type Rows
Conn
Type
Hand
Standard
Hand
Standard
Hand
11
12
Threads
Bolts
Member
Plane
Flange
Stiffener
Type Alignment
Yes
Yes
SP and GP
Butt
Top
Yes
Yes
SP and GP
Butt
Top
Standard
Yes
Yes
SP and GP
Butt
Top
Hand
Standard
Yes
Yes
SP and GP
Butt
Top
Hand
Standard
Yes
Yes
SP and GP
Butt
Top
592

AS4100 STEEL CONNECTION DESIGN SUMMARY (mm) (*=Failure, #=Warning)
--------------------------------------
($=Min design action non-compliance)
Plate or
Conn
Crit Stress
Description
Bolts
Seat/Cleat
Weld
Pinned baseplate
4M30
640x330x20 Plate 6 CFW Web
8.8N/S
Bolted end plate
Case
Ratio
10
0.93
11
0.98
11
0.86
14
0.84
10
0.93
6 CFW Flngs
8M30
8.8N/TB 10 Top Cmp Stfnr FSBW Flanges

6 Bot Cmp Stfnr
Bolted apex
8M20
8.8N/TB
11 # Welded moment
FSBW Flanges
10 Top Nom Stfnr 6 CFW Web

6 Bot Cmp Stfnr
12
Pinned baseplate
4M30
FSBW Flanges
8.8N/S
6 CFW Flngs
AS4100 CALCULATIONS FOR CONNECTION 1 (%=Load not considered)

------------------------------------ (#=Minimum design action governs)
($=Less than minimum design action)
Pinned baseplate
530 UB 92.4 Column
4M30 Bolts 8.8N/S (Fu=830MPa), Threads included
Gauge=70mm, Pitch=70mm
640x330x20mm Plate (Fy=250MPa, Fu=410MPa)
6 CFW web (2 sides), 6 CFW flanges (1 side), SP category (Fu=410MPa)
Critical load case is 10, out of 10-14
N*
1062.00 kN
Vx*
0.00 kN
Vy*
Mx*
0.00 kNm %
My*
Ntf* =
0.00 kNm %
Ntf =
372.50 kN (=0.80) (Critical bolt)
3.68 kN
Vf
213.66 kN
Vbc =
0.00 kN
Vbi =
Diam =
30.00 mm
Edge =
Vf*
265.50 kN
-40.64 kN
Vf*
Bolt shear and tension:
0.00 kN (=0.90)
52.50 mm
Ntf*
--- + ---- = 0.73 < 1.00 => Pass

Vf
Ntf
Baseplate (=0.90):
N*
( 1062.00 kN)
< Ns
( 1434.36) => Pass
Weld capacity (=0.80):
N*
( 1062.00 kN)
< Nw
( 1140.21) => Pass
NOTE: Concrete capacities Nc, Ncc and Vus are assumed to be adequate
593

Connection is satisfactory (Pass)

Bolted end plate with 3000x333.6 haunch
360 UB 50.7 Beam to 530 UB 92.4 Column flange (Angle=3.0)
8M30 Bolts 8.8N/TB (Fu=830MPa), Threads included
From top edge=2@40mm,2@171mm, From bottom edge=2@52mm,2@184mm, Gauge=70mm
902x200x40mm Plate (Fy=250MPa, Fu=410MPa), Top edge to flange=100mm
8 CFW web (2 sides), FSBW flanges, SP category (Fu=410MPa)
2No. 90x10mm Top compression stiffeners, 6 CFW (2 sides), GP category
2No. 65x6mm Bottom compression stiffeners, 6 CFW (2 sides), GP category
N*
Vx*
Mx*
Ntf* =
Vf*
-71.58 kN
Vy*
514.73 kNm
0.00 kN
My*
197.85 kN
Ntf =
0.00 kN
Vbc =
247.10 kN
Vbi =
Diam =
30.00 mm
Edge =
Slip =
Vf
0.35
Pry
-113.08 kN
0.00 kNm
213.66 kN
1416.96 kN (=0.90)
52.50 mm
0.30
Vf* 2
Ntf*
[(---)
Vf
(------------)] = 0.69 < 1.00 => Pass

Ntf/(1+Pry)
Plate bending (=0.90):
Nft* (
791.41 kN)
< Npb ( 1600.00) => Pass
Plate shear (=0.90):
Nft* (
791.41 kN)
< Vph ( 1800.00) => Pass
Vvc* (
116.65 kN)
< Vpv ( 8122.83) => Pass
Bearing/tearout (=0.80):
Vvc* (
116.65 kN)
< Vfb (
Web fillet weld (=0.80):
Vw*
Column tension (=0.90):
Nft* (
791.41 kN)
< Rt
843.49) => Pass
Column compressn (=0.90):
Nfc* (
725.81 kN)
> Rc
389.45) => Stfnr
Column shear top (=0.90):
Vct* (
725.81 kN)
< Vc
884.45) => Pass
Column shear bot (=0.90):
Vcb* (
725.81 kN)
< Vc
884.45) => Pass
Flnge tension bot (=0.90): Nft* (
791.41 kN)
< Rts (
965.97) => Pass
Nts* (
0.00 kN)
< Nts (
182.52) => Pass
Stfnr compression (=0.90): Ncs* (
336.37 kN)
< Ncs (
421.20) => Pass
Stiffener weld (=0.60):
177.48 kN/m) < Vw
Stfnr tension (=0.90):
Vw*
( 1094.25 kN/m) < Vw
854.65) => Pass
( 1113.27) => Pass
626.21) => Pass

Bolted apex
360 UB 50.7 Beam to 360 UB 50.7 Beam (Angle=-3.0)
8M20 Bolts 8.8N/TB (Fu=830MPa), Threads included
From top edge=2@35mm,2@166mm, From bottom edge=2@35mm,2@166mm, Gauge=70mm
546x180x25mm Plate (Fy=250MPa, Fu=410MPa), Top edge to flange=95mm
594

N*
Vx*
0.00 kN
Vy*
Mx*
-134.55 kNm #
My*
Ntf* =
Vf*
-71.87 kN
106.74 kN
0.00 kN
Vf
Vbc =
291.46 kN
Vbi =
Diam =
20.00 mm
Edge =
0.35
Pry
92.63 kN
322.88 kN (=0.90)
35.00 mm
0.30
Vf* 2
0.00 kNm
Ntf =
Slip =
-40.00 kN
Ntf*
[(---)
(------------)] = 0.85 < 1.00 => Pass
Vf
Ntf/(1+Pry)
Plate bending (=0.90):
Nft* (
426.96 kN)
< Npb (
Nft* (
426.96 kN)
< Vph ( 1012.50) => Pass
Vvc* (
36.19 kN)
< Vpv ( 3073.99) => Pass
Bearing/tearout (=0.80):
Vvc* (
36.19 kN)
< Vfb (
Vw*
721.59 kN/m) < Vw
506.25) => Pass
370.51) => Pass

834.95) => Pass

------------------------------------- (#=Minimum design action governs)
Welded moment with 3000x333.6 haunch
360 UB 50.7 Beam to 530 UB 92.4 Column flange (Angle=3.0)
2No. 65x10mm Top nominal stiffeners, 6 CFW (2 sides), GP category
2No. 65x6mm Bottom compression stiffeners, 6 CFW (2 sides), GP category
WARNING: Top stfnrs may not be required if column upstand > fl width
N*
Vx*
Mx*
65.34 kN
0.00 kN
-325.86 kNm
Vy*
My*
74.90 kN
0.00 kNm
Vw*
701.57 kN/m) < Vw
834.95) => Pass
Column tension (=0.90):
Nft* (
449.58 kN)
< Rt
462.85) => Pass
Column compressn (=0.90):
Nfc* (
510.92 kN)
> Rc
389.45) => Stfnr
Column shear top (=0.90):
Vct* (
449.58 kN)
< Vc
884.45) => Pass
Column shear bot (=0.90):
Vcb* (
449.58 kN)
< Vc
884.45) => Pass
Stfnr tension (=0.90):
Nts* (
0.00 kN)
< Nts (
182.52) => Pass
Stfnr compression (=0.90): Ncs* (
121.48 kN)
< Ncs (
182.52) => Pass
Stiffener weld (=0.60):
Vw*
64.10 kN/m) < Vw
626.21) => Pass
595

------------------------------------- (#=Minimum design action governs)
Pinned baseplate
530 UB 92.4 Column
4M30 Bolts 8.8N/S (Fu=830MPa), Threads included
Gauge=70mm, Pitch=70mm
640x330x20mm Plate (Fy=250MPa, Fu=410MPa)
6 CFW web (2 sides), 6 CFW flanges (1 side), SP category (Fu=410MPa)
N*
1062.00 kN
Vx*
0.00 kN
Vy*
Mx*
0.00 kNm %
My*
Ntf* =
0.00 kNm %
Ntf =
3.68 kN
Vf
213.66 kN
Vbc =
0.00 kN
Vbi =
Diam =
30.00 mm
Edge =
Vf*
265.50 kN
40.64 kN
Vf*
0.00 kN (=0.90)
52.50 mm
Ntf*
--- + ---- = 0.73 < 1.00 => Pass

Vf
Ntf
Baseplate (=0.90):
N*
( 1062.00 kN)
< Ns
( 1434.36) => Pass
Weld capacity (=0.80):
N*
( 1062.00 kN)
< Nw
( 1140.21) => Pass
NOTE: Concrete capacities Nc, Ncc and Vus are assumed to be adequate
596
Cable analysis
This worked example demonstrates the input and analysis of a 30m tall, guyed mast. The catenary
cable equations are used to calculate the axial force in a nominal guy member, which is then
compared to the result obtained from SPACE GASS.
A non-linear analysis is the only type of analysis that can be performed on a structure
containing cable members due to their highly non-linear behaviour.
The guyed mast considered in this example has the following basic properties.
Height:
30m
Number of guys:
3 sets of 3
Radial guy spacing:
120
Guy connections at:
15m, 22.5m and 30m
Distance from base:

Guys:
12m
10mm steel cable
Mast:
406x9.5CHS
Dead load (DL):
Self weight (calculated by SPACE GASS)
The uniformly distributed dead load is not the only load that the structure would be subject to in
real life, however it is the only one considered here. The load cases are limited in order to
simplify the example.
In this example, the only type of load applied is an UDL. You

can apply point loads to cable members, however they must be applied as node loads rather than
member concentrated loads.
597
7500
15000
30000
7500
Elevation of guyed mast
598
Method of input
It was not possible to input the guyed mast using the structure wizard due to its unusual geometric
configuration. All of the data input was performed using either graphical tools or datasheets.
Node restraints and member fixities
After the structural geometry was generated, node restraints of FFFFFF were applied to nodes 1,
5, 6 and 7 using the graphical restraint input facility. Even though the guyed members are to be
pin connected to the mast and to their base, a member end fixity of FFFFFF was specified. This is
because a member end fixity code of FFFRRR would yield the same result as a code of FFFFFF
for cable members (ie. cables have no moment capacity).
Loads
Loading due to the self weight of the structure was input using a datasheet.
Cables have no moment capacity. Hence, intermediate nodes on cables must have all
their rotational degrees of freedom restrained (ie. use RRDDDF for 2D frames or RRRFFF for 3D
frames).
Input check
As a final check before the analysis was initiated, an output report containing the complete
structural data was viewed. Any errors in the data were corrected and the model was then ready
for analysis.
599
Analysis procedure
A non-linear (2nd order) analysis was performed in which both P- and P- effects were
activated, while axial shortening was not.
600
Analysis results
In the absence of any lateral loads, the guys simply deflect vertically under self weight as shown
in the following deformed shape diagram.
SPACE GASS model
601
Deformed shape
This report extract shows all of the input data for the model, together with the intermediate
displacements, forces and moments for guy member 12. Following the report, we compare the
SPACE GASS results for member 12 with a theoretical formular.
NODE COORDINATES (m)
----------------
Node
Coord
Coord
Coord
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
15.000
0.000
0.000
22.500
0.000
0.000
30.000
0.000
-12.000
0.000
0.000
6.000
0.000
10.392
6.000
0.000
-10.392
MEMBER DATA (deg,kNm/rad,m)

----------- (F=Fixed, R=Released) (*=Cable length)
602

Dir
Memb
Angle
12
0.00
Dir
Dir Memb
Node A Node B
Node Axis Type Node A Node B Sec Mat Fixity Fixity
Cabl
Length
1 FFFFFF FFFFFF
32.311
NODE RESTRAINTS (kN/m,kNm/rad)

--------------- (F=Fixed, R=Released, D=Deleted, S=Spring, *=General)
Node
Rest
X Axial
Y Axial
Code
Stiffness
Stiffness
Z Axial X Rotation Y Rotation Z Rotation

Stiffness
Stiffness
Stiffness
Stiffness
1 FFFFFF
5 FFFFFF
6 FFFFFF
7 FFFFFF
SECTION PROPERTIES (mm,mm^2,mm^4,deg)

------------------
Sect
Section Name
Mark
Angle Type
Flipped
Source
406.4X9.5 CHS
S1
Not applicable No
Aust300
Guy
S2
Not applicable No
Standard shape
Area of
Torsion
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Princ
Section
Constant
Mom of In
Mom of In
Shr Area
Shr Area
Angle
1 1.1800E+04 4.6700E+08 2.3300E+08 2.3300E+08
INFINITE
INFINITE
0.00
2 7.8500E+01 9.8175E+02 4.9087E+02 4.9087E+02
INFINITE
INFINITE
0.00
Sect
Sect
Section Shape
Circle
B/Bt
Bb/Hf
Tw
Tf
10.000
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (MPa,kg/m^3,strain/degC)

-------------------
Matl
Material Name
STEEL
Young's
Poisson's
Mass
Coeff of
Concrete
Modulus
Ratio
Density
Expansion
Strength
2.0000E+05
0.25 7.8500E+03 1.1700E-05
SELF WEIGHT (g's)

-----------
Load
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Case
Accel'n
Accel'n
Accel'n
0.000
-1.000
0.000
INTERMEDIATE DISPLACEMENTS (m,mm)

-------------------------- (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
Memb 12, Case 1 (Non-linear):

603

Station
Global X
Global Y
Global Z
Local X
Local Y
Local Z
Location
Transl'n
Transl'n
Transl'n
Transl'n
Transl'n
Transl'n
0.000
0.000
-0.291
0.000
5.385
-50.196
-39.841
86.942
10.770
-81.314
-64.831
140.840
16.155
-92.633#
-74.359#
160.445*
0.234
-199.631#
0.000*
21.541
-83.393
-67.448
144.442
0.681
-179.907
0.000
26.926
-52.796
-43.046
91.445
0.751*
-114.026
0.000
32.311
0.000*
0.000*
0.000#
0.270
-0.108
0.000#
-0.293#
-108.008
0.000
-0.204
-175.074
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
INTERMEDIATE FORCES AND MOMENTS (m,kN,kNm)

------------------------------- (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
Memb 12, Case 1 (Non-linear):

Station
Axial
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Location
Force
Shear
Shear
Torsion
Moment
Moment
0.000
-1.559#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
5.385
-1.529
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.770
-1.499
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
16.155
-1.468
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
21.541
-1.438
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
26.926
-1.408
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
32.311
-1.378*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
The following catenary cable equation from Hibbeler (15) for a single catenary element can be
used to verify the results for member 12 shown above.
As you can see, it was necessary to resolve the UDL to the local axis of the member (multiplying
it by the cosine of the angle between the vertical). From this point the solution is straightforward,
the result varying by only 0.2% (ie. 1.468kN vs. 1.465kN).
wL2
,
P=
8h
where: h = 0.200m
L = 32.311m
w = 6.046 cos (68.9 )
= 2.245 N / m
2.245 10 3 (32.311) 2
8 0.200
= 1465
. kN
P=
604
See also Members.

605
Converting old jobs

SPACE GASS automatically converts all version 4.0 and newer jobs into the correct format at the
time they are opened. They are then saved with the usual <Job>.SG naming convention.
However, pre-version 4.0 jobs use multiple data files for each job, each of which has a filename
extension of "DAT". In order to open the pre-version 4.0 files with the current version of SPACE
GASS they must first be renamed to the new convention. This can be done automatically with a
batch program called SGName.BAT that is supplied with SPACE GASS.
In order to rename the old data files, you should first open a command (or DOS) prompt window,
go to the folder containing the old data files and then run SGName from your SPACE GASS
program folder. Assuming that the old files are in a folder called C:\OldData and the SPACE
GASS program files are in a folder called C:\Program Files\SPACE GASS\EXE, the commands
necessary to rename them are:
C:
CD\OldData
C:\Program Files"\SPACE GASS"\EXE\SGName
Once the files have been renamed, you can access them from the current version of SPACE
GASS as normal. Naturally, they still have to be converted to the latest format, however this is
done automatically as each job is opened by SPACE GASS.
606
Bibliography
1. Harrison H.B. "Computer Methods in Structural Analysis",
pp 248-251, Prentice Hall, 1973.
2. Ghali A. and Neville A.M.
"Structural Analysis A Unified Classical and Matrix Approach",
2nd edition, pp 364-374, Chapman and Hall, London, 1978.
3. AS1250 - 1981 "SAA Steel Structures Code",
Standards Australia, 1 The Crescent, Homebush, NSW, 2140, Australia.
4. AS4100 - 1990 "Steel Structures",
5. SABS0162 - 1984 "Code of Practice for The Structural Use of Steel",
The Council of the South African Bureau of Standards, Private Bag X191, Pretoria,
Republic of South Africa.
6. BS5950 : Part 1 : 1990 "Structural Use of Steelwork in Building",
British Standards Institution, 2 Park Street, London W1A 2BS.
7. NZS3404 - 1992 "Steel Structures Standard",
Standards New Zealand, Wellington Trade Centre,
Victoria Street, Wellington 1, New Zealand.
8. Clarke A.B. and Coverman S.H. "Structural Steelwork: Limit state design",
p 49, Chapman and Hall, London, 1987.
9. Woolcock S.T., Kitipornchai S. and Bradford M.A.
"Limit State Design of Portal Frame Buildings", 1st edition, AISC, 1991.
10. Clough R.W. and Penzien J. "Dynamics of Structures",
McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1975.
11. AS3990 - 1993 "Mechanical equipment - Steelwork",
12. Wittrick W.H. and Williams F.W. "Natural Frequencies of Elastic Structures",
Quarterly Journal of Mechanics and Applied Mathematics, Vol. XXIV, Pt. 3, 1971.
13. AS/NZS4600 - 1996 "Cold-Formed Steel Structures",
607

14. AS3600 - 1988 "Concrete Structures",
15. Hibbeler R.C. "Engineering Mechanics", 6th edition, Macmillan Publishing Company,
1992.
16. AISC-ASD "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, Allowable Stress Design",
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), June 1, 1989.
17. AISC-LRFD "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings", American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), Dec 1, 1993.
18. Eurocode 3 "Design of Steel Structures", European Committee for Standardization (CEN),
DD ENV 1993-1-1 : 1992.
608
Index
2
2nd order analysis
See non-linear analysis ............................................................................................................ 329
3
3D member geometry .................................................................................................................. 507
A
A quick frontwidth calculation method ....................................................................................... 340
Absolute coordinates............................................................................................................ 204, 310
Acceleration ................................................................................................................................. 136
Access ...................................................................................................................................... 62, 63
Alignment .......................................................................................... 38, 39, 41, 115, 437, 438, 440
Amplitude .................................................................................................................................... 275
Analysis ....................................................................................................................................... 316
Buckling analysis..................................................................................... 361, 363, 364, 365, 366
Dynamic frequency analysis............................................................................ 346, 349, 350, 351
Dynamic response analysis.............................................................................. 352, 353, 356, 360
Static analysis .......................................................................................................... 317, 344, 345
Warnings and errors................................................................................................................. 367
Analysis menu................................................................................................................................ 67
Angle sections.............................................................................. 102, 111, 113, 377, 378, 379, 381
Animation .................................................................................................................................... 275
Annotation ................................................................................................................................... 274
Aperture circle ....................................................................................... 28, 195, 196, 307, 308, 311
ARC ............................................................................................................................................... 62
Arc generation.............................................................................................................................. 229
Area loading
Described ................................................................................................................................. 148
Graphics................................................................................................................................... 258
Area of section ............................................................................................................................. 102
ASCII ............................................................................................................................................. 62
Attach................................................................................................................... 194, 199, 307, 308
Auto scaling of base shear ........................................................................................................... 356
609

AutoCAD ..................................................................................................................... 501, 507, 508
Axes
Global axes .................................................................................................................. 81, 84, 268
Local axes .............................................................................................................. 81, 83, 84, 269
Local axes for moments and shears ................................................................................... 27, 293
Axial force distribution ................................................................................................................ 365
Axial forces
Described ................................................................................................................................. 319
Diagrams.................................................................................................................................. 275
Sign convention ......................................................................................................................... 84
Axial shortening................................................................................................... 324, 329, 330, 344
Axis limits.................................................................................................................................... 293
B
Base shear factor .......................................................................................................................... 356
Baseplate connections.................................................................................................................. 458
Beam end clearance ...................................................................................................................... 37
Bending moments
Described ................................................................................................................................. 319
Diagrams.............................................................................................................. 27, 28, 275, 314
Sign convention ......................................................................................................................... 84
Biaxial bending ............................................................................................................................ 468
Bibliography ................................................................................................................................ 606
Bill of materials ................................................................................................................... 485, 566
Bolts ............................................................................................................................................. 451
Above top flange................................................................................................................ 41, 440
Bolting procedure .............................................................................................................. 35, 433
Edge distance factor................................................................................................................... 35
Gauge ................................................................................................................................. 35, 431
Hole type............................................................................................................................ 38, 437
Library ............................................................................................................................. 513, 522
Pitch ................................................................................................................................... 35, 431
Preferred bolt rows.................................................................................................................... 38
Prying factor ............................................................................................................................. 36
Size range................................................................................................................................... 35
Slip factor .................................................................................................................................. 36
Boundary conditions
See node restraints ..................................................................................................................... 98
Buckling analysis
610

Analysis ................................................................................................... 316, 331, 361, 365, 366
Axial force distribution ........................................................................................................... 366
Cables ...................................................................................................................................... 363
Effective lengths ...................................................................................................................... 362
Load cases................................................................................................................................ 365
Load factor....................................................................................... 361, 363, 364, 365, 366, 475
Messages.................................................................................................................................. 344
Mode shapes ............................................................................................................ 279, 361, 366
Node restraints ......................................................................................................................... 363
Output .............................................................................................................................. 490, 569
Special considerations.............................................................................................................. 363
C
Cables
Analysis ................................................................................................... 316, 326, 327, 329, 330
Buckling analysis..................................................................................................................... 363
Chord length .............................................................................................................................. 93
Convergence ............................................................................................................................ 326
Converted to tension-only.......................................................................................................... 93
Damping........................................................................................................................... 326, 342
Fixity.................................................................................................................................. 93, 326
Length........................................................................................................................................ 94
Load stepping................................................................................................................... 326, 342
Loading ............................................................................................................ 130, 134, 136, 326
Members .................................................................................................. 93, 94, 96, 97, 326, 327
Worked example ...................................................................................................................... 596
CAD interface module ......................................................................................... 285, 442, 501, 503
Calculator ................................................................................................................................ 24, 62
Cartesian coordinates ........................................................................................................... 204, 310
Catenary cables
See cables................................................................................................................................. 326
Centre of gravity .................................................................................................................. 486, 566
Changing the appearance of SPACE GASS .................................................................................. 33
Characteristic concrete strength................................................................................................... 114
Check boxes................................................................................................................................... 50
Check phase ................................................................................................................................. 450
Chord length .................................................................................................................................. 94
Clashing
Copes ....................................................................................................................................... 457
611

Shear stiffeners ........................................................................................................................ 456
Clean-up job................................................................................................................................... 57
Click............................................................................................................................................... 47
Clipboard ....................................................................................................................................... 63
Code check................................................................................................................... 398, 441, 468
Codes
Flange restraint ....................................................................................... 374, 378, 392, 394, 396
Master-slave constraint .................................................................................................... 121, 122
Member fixity ............................................................................................................................ 93
Node restraint............................................................................................................................. 98
Coefficient of thermal expansion................................................................................................. 114
Colors....................................................................................................................................... 32, 33
Column and beam Tee sections ................................................................................................... 110
Column and beam Tees................................................................................................................ 397
Described ................................................................................................................................. 137
Graphics................................................................................................................................... 253
Managing load cases................................................................................................................ 260
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 167
Combined stress ratio
Limit ................................................................................................................................ 399, 400
Steel connection design ........................................................................................................... 450
Steel member design........................................................................ 371, 398, 399, 400, 401, 420
Combo boxes ................................................................................................................................. 50
Command based editing............................................................................................................... 202
Command buttons ......................................................................................................................... 49
Compression effective lengths............................................................................................. 362, 373
Compression-only members .......................................................................... 93, 325, 342, 345, 349
Concrete column design............................................................................................... 467, 468, 477
Assumptions and notes ............................................................................................................ 477
Auto-check mode..................................................................................................................... 469
Biaxial bending........................................................................................................................ 468
Check....................................................................................................................... 469, 471, 473
Configuration........................................................................................................................... 475
Cover........................................................................................................................................ 475
Cross section ............................................................................ 468, 469, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474
Design ...................................................................................................................... 469, 470, 471
Effective lengths ...................................................................................................................... 471
Interaction diagram.................................................................................................. 472, 473, 474
612

Load factor....................................................................................... 467, 469, 472, 473, 475, 477
Loads........................................................................................................................ 469, 471, 472
Minimum load compliance ..................................................................................................... 473
Moment magnification............................................................................................................ 472
Output ...................................................................................................................................... 500
Reinforcement.......................................................................................................................... 468
Shapes...................................................................................................................................... 468
Voids........................................................................................................................................ 468
Config menu................................................................................................................................... 74
Configuring SPACE GASS ..................................................................................................... 22, 74
Connection design........................................................................................................................ 429
Connection design results ............................................................................................................ 587
Connection geometry ................................................................................................................... 445
Constraining members to the same final design size ................................................................... 403
Constraint code ................................................................................... 115, 116, 118, 119, 121, 122
Context sensitive cursors ............................................................................................................. 194
Context sensitive menus .............................................................................................................. 197
Continuous lateral restraint .......................................................................................................... 392
Control Panel ................................................................................................................................. 33
Convergence ........................................ 325, 327, 329, 343, 344, 350, 371, 398, 402, 477, 482, 484
Converting old jobs...................................................................................................................... 605
Coordinate systems ........................................................................................................................ 81
Coordinates .................................................................................................................. 200, 201, 310
Absolute........................................................................................................................... 204, 310
Cartesian .......................................................................................................................... 204, 310
Polar................................................................................................................................. 204, 310
Relative ............................................................................................................................ 204, 310
Copes ............................................................................................................................. 35, 456, 457
Copying
Load cases................................................................................................................................ 260
Parts of the structure ........................................................................................................ 194, 223
Correction factors........................................................................................................................... 30
Cover............................................................................................................................................ 475
CQC ............................................................................................................................................. 359
Creating a new job ................................................................................................................... 52, 62
Critical flange............................................................................................................................... 410
Critical load case.......................................................................................................................... 459
Cross section window .................................................................................................................. 473
Crosshair cursor ..................................................................................................... 27, 305, 306, 312
613

Crosshair size .............................................................................................................................. 312
Crossing window ......................................................................................................................... 194
Curved line resolution............................................................................................................ 27, 313
D
Damping
Spectral curves......................................................................................................................... 143
Static analysis .................................................................................................................. 326, 342
Dashed lines .................................................................................................................................. 28
Data entry....................................................................................................................................... 49
Datasheet input ............................................................................................................................ 187
Deleting
Jobs ................................................................................................................................ 56, 62, 63
Load cases................................................................................................................................ 260
Parts of the structure ........................................................................................................ 194, 226
Design actions ............................................................................................................. 442, 447, 448
Design groups and intermediate stations ..................................................................................... 406
Design menu .................................................................................................................................. 68
Design phase ................................................................................................................................ 449
Design segment.................................................................... 371, 407, 408, 413, 414, 415, 420, 421
Diagram shading .................................................................................................................... 27, 315
Diagrams ...................................................................................................................................... 275
Dialogue boxes .............................................................................................................................. 48
Closing....................................................................................................................................... 48
Moving....................................................................................................................................... 48
Using the keyboard ................................................................................................................... 48
Direction angle........................................................................................................................ 94, 96
Direction axis .......................................................................................................................... 95, 96
Direction node......................................................................................................................... 94, 95
Direction vector ................................................................................................................... 143, 144
Displacements
Described ................................................................................................................................. 319
Diagrams.................................................................................................................................. 275
Sign convention ......................................................................................................................... 84
Double-click .................................................................................................................................. 47
Drag ............................................................................................................................................... 47
Draw............................................................................................................................. 194, 196, 219
DXF
Files............................................................................................................ 62, 285, 442, 507, 509
614

Layer names ...................................................................................................................... 28, 508
Dynamic frequency analysis .................................................................. 62, 140, 141, 316, 346, 349
Frequency shift ............................................................................................................... 350, 351
Iterations ................................................................................................................................. 350
Load cases................................................................................................................................ 349
Mode shapes .................................... 143, 144, 277, 346, 347, 348, 350, 351, 353, 355, 358, 359
Natural frequencies .................................................................................................................. 349
Output .............................................................................................................................. 487, 567
Self mass.................................................................................................................................. 349
Stiffness matrix ....................................................................................................................... 344
Worked example ...................................................................................................................... 527
Dynamic response analysis .......................................................................................... 316, 352, 353
Auto scaling of base shear...................................................................................................... 357
Base shear factor ............................................................................................................ 357, 358
Load cases................................................................................................................................ 356
Mode combination method ..................................................................................................... 359
Output .............................................................................................................................. 488, 568
Sign of the results ................................................................................................................... 358
Site factor ................................................................................................................................ 357
Site subsoil category................................................................................................................ 358
Spectral curve multiplier................................................................................................. 358, 359
Vertical direction..................................................................................................................... 357
Worked example ...................................................................................................................... 527
E
Eccentric effects .................................................................................................................. 381, 401
Compression members............................................................................................................. 418
Tension members ..................................................................................................................... 419
Edge distance factor....................................................................................................................... 35
Edit mode............................................................................................................................. 208, 211
Editing.......................................................................................................................................... 202
Effective lengths
Concrete column effective length ............................................................................................ 468
Steel member effective lengths................................................................................................ 373
Eigenvalue ........................................................................................................................... 346, 361
Eigenvector .......................................................................................................................... 346, 361
Elastic critical buckling analysis
See buckling analysis............................................................................................................... 361
615

Elastic critical load analysis
Elastic restraints
Elastic suppprts
End fixity
See member fixity.............................................................................................................. 93, 326
End moment ratios and other factors ........................................................................................... 417
Enveloping
Graphics................................................................................................................................... 276
Reports............................................................................................................................. 481, 482
Errors
Analysis ................................................................................................................... 367, 369, 370
Steel connection design ................................................................................................... 460, 461
Steel member design........................................................................................................ 426, 427
Text file.................................................................................................................................... 176
Euler buckling capacity........................................................................................ 331, 342, 361, 362
Examples
Cable analysis .......................................................................................................................... 596
Portal frame analysis................................................................................................................ 527
Portal frame connection design................................................................................................ 585
Portal frame member design .................................................................................................... 571
Excel .............................................................................................................................................. 62
Exporting
Backup file................................................................................................................................. 62
CAD DXF file............................................................................................ 62, 285, 441, 506, 509
MS-Access file........................................................................................................................... 62
MS-Excel file............................................................................................................................. 62
MS-Word file............................................................................................................................. 62
SDNF file................................................................................................................................... 62
Text file.............................................................................................................................. 62, 149
ZIP file ....................................................................................................................................... 62
Exporting data from SPACE GASS to CAD ............................................................................... 506
Extrusions .................................................................................................................................... 270
F
File menu ....................................................................................................................................... 62
Filters ................................................................................................................................... 293, 294
616

Find...................................................................................................................................... 201, 292
Fixity.............................................................................................................................................. 97
See members.............................................................................................................................. 93
Flange restraints ................................................................................... 376, 377, 378, 381, 391, 412
Flange to bolt clearance ............................................................................................................... 37
Flange weld type .................................................................................................................... 35, 437
Flexural-torsional buckling.......................................................................................................... 361
Flipping a section................................................................................................................. 102, 108
Floating menus............................................................................................................................. 198
Floor loading
See area loading....................................................................................................................... 258
Floor slab ..................................................................................................................................... 115
Folders ........................................................................................................................................... 24
Fonts....................................................................................................................... 25, 480, 491, 498
Forces
Described ................................................................................................................................. 319
Diagrams.................................................................................................................................. 275
Sign convention ......................................................................................................................... 84
Formatting.................................................................................................................................... 480
Frame analysis report................................................................................................................... 480
Frame data...................................................................................................................................... 88
Frequency..................................................................................................................................... 275
Frequency shift ............................................................................................................................ 349
Frontwidth.................................................................................................... 332, 336, 338, 339, 340
Full 3D member geometry ........................................................................................... 271, 272, 507
Full extrusions.............................................................................................................................. 272
Full restraint ................................................................................................................. 391, 392, 394
G
Gauge............................................................................................................................. 36, 435, 436
General colours .............................................................................................................................. 33
General configuration .................................................................................................................... 27
General restraint............................................................................................................................. 98
Generate arc ................................................................................................................................. 229
Geometry and loads ..................................................................................................................... 528
Global axes ...................................................................................................................... 81, 84, 268
Graphical editing.......................................................................................................................... 202
Graphical input ............................................................................................................................ 199
Graphical output .......................................................................................................................... 535
617

Graphics ....................................................................................................................................... 193
Colors......................................................................................................................................... 32
Commands ............................................................................................................................... 199
Cursor ...................................................................................................................... 194, 195, 196
Dimensions ................................................................................................................................ 30
Display area ....................................................................................................................... 46, 193
Editing...................................................................................................................................... 203
Input......................................................................................................................... 199, 200, 201
Output .............................................................................................................. 285, 479, 498, 499
Overview.................................................................................................................................. 194
Text format ................................................................................................................................ 25
Gravity ......................................................................................................................................... 136
Grid ...................................................................................................................................... 199, 304
Group code........................................................................................................................... 373, 518
H
Hardcopy.............................................................................................................. 285, 479, 498, 499
Haunches.............................................................................................................................. 433, 446
Headings
Described ................................................................................................................................... 91
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 152
Help menu...................................................................................................................................... 76
Hidden line removal..................................................................................................... 270, 272, 508
Horizontal angle........................................................................................................................... 298
I
Ill-conditioning and instabilities .................................................................................................... 87
Importing
Backup file................................................................................................................................. 62
CAD DXF file.................................................................................................................... 62, 512
Microstran file ........................................................................................................................... 62
SDNF file................................................................................................................................... 62
Spectral curve text file ............................................................................................................. 147
Text file.............................................................................................................................. 62, 149
ZIP file ....................................................................................................................................... 62
Importing a spectral curve ........................................................................................................... 147
Importing data from CAD to SPACE GASS ............................................................................... 512
Initiator......................................................................................................................................... 151
Instabilities..................................................................................................................................... 87
618

Installing SPACE GASS................................................................................................................ 21
Interaction diagram ...................................................................................................................... 468
Intermediate member stations ...................................................................................... 399, 406, 482
Intersect........................................................................................................................................ 232
Iterating the analysis-design process............................................................................................ 402
J
Jobs
Clean-up..................................................................................................................................... 57
Delete......................................................................................................................................... 56
New............................................................................................................................................ 53
Open........................................................................................................................................... 54
Save............................................................................................................................................ 55
Status............................................................................................................................ 58, 59, 484
K
Keyboard input ............................................................................................................ 199, 204, 310
Keyboard shortcuts ........................................................................................................................ 61
Kt factor....................................................................................................................................... 401
L
Labelling and annotation.............................................................................................................. 274
Lateral restraint
See flange restraints ................................................................................................................. 391
Lateral rotation factor .................................................................................................................. 415
Legal notice.................................................................................................................................... 14
Libraries ................................................................................................. 63, 513, 514, 515, 516, 517
Library scan code................................................................................................................. 376, 518
Licence Agreement ........................................................................................................................ 14
Lift off............................................................................................................................................ 93
Line width...................................................................................................................................... 31
Linear analysis ....................................................................................................... 80, 316, 317, 342
List boxes ....................................................................................................................................... 50
Lists................................................................................................................................................ 50
Load cases.............................................................. 80, 143, 187, 317, 329, 342, 344, 345, 346, 349
......................................................... 350, 356, 359, 365, 371, 399, 406, 420, 444, 471, 492, 497
Combining ............................................................................................................... 137, 167, 253
Copying.................................................................................................................................... 260
Deleting.................................................................................................................................... 260
619

Renumbering............................................................................................................................ 260
Titles ........................................................................................................................................ 139
Titles text ................................................................................................................................. 168
Load factor
Buckling analysis............................................................................................. 361, 363, 365, 475
Concrete column design................................................................................... 467, 468, 475, 477
Limit ........................................................................................ 365, 366, 398, 469, 472, 473, 475
Steel connection design ................................................................................... 441, 442, 443, 587
Steel member design........................................................................................ 371, 372, 398, 420
Load height factor ........................................................................................................................ 414
Load height position.................................................................................................... 374, 375, 383
Load stepping....................................................................................................................... 326, 342
Load types.................................................................................................................................... 293
Loading diagrams......................................................................................................................... 275
Local axes ........................................................................................................................ 81, 84, 269
Local axes for moments and shears ....................................................................................... 27, 293
Lumped masses
Described ................................................................................................................................. 140
Dynamic frequency analysis.................................................................................................... 349
Graphics........................................................................................................................... 255, 275
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 169
M
Margins .......................................................................................................................... 25, 480, 491
Mass density................................................................................................................................. 114
Masses
See lumped masses .................................................................................................................. 140
Master node ................................................................................................................. 115, 116, 119
Described ................................................................................................................................. 115
Graphics................................................................................................................................... 217
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 158
Material properties
Described ................................................................................................................................. 114
Graphics................................................................................................................................... 216
Library ............................................................................................................................. 513, 521
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 157
Member alignment ................................................................................................. 35, 115, 123, 431
Member check...................................................................................................................... 409, 495
620

Described ................................................................................................................................. 128
Graphics........................................................................................................................... 244, 275
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 162
Described ................................................................................................................................. 130
Graphics........................................................................................................................... 246, 275
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 163
Described ................................................................................................................................. 132
Graphics........................................................................................................................... 248, 275
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 164
Member groups ............................................................................................................................ 384
Member numbering...................................................................................................... 236, 339, 341
Member offsets
Described ................................................................................................................................. 123
Graphics................................................................................................................................... 218
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 159
Member schedule ................................................................................................................. 503, 507
Member segment.................................................................. 371, 407, 408, 413, 414, 415, 420, 421
Members
Described ............................................................................................................................. 80, 93
Graphics................................................................................................................................... 210
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 154
Menu system ............................................................................................................................ 44, 61
Analysis menu ........................................................................................................................... 67
Config menu .............................................................................................................................. 74
Design menu .............................................................................................................................. 68
File menu ............................................................................................................................. 62, 63
Help menu.................................................................................................................................. 76
Loads menu................................................................................................................................ 66
Output menu .............................................................................................................................. 69
Query menu................................................................................................................................ 71
Settings menu....................................................................................................................... 72, 73
Structure menu..................................................................................................................... 64, 65
View menu................................................................................................................................. 70
Window menu............................................................................................................................ 75
Microsoft
Access ........................................................................................................................................ 62
621

Excel .......................................................................................................................................... 62
Windows .................................................................................................................................... 52
Word .......................................................................................................................................... 62
Microstation ................................................................................................................................. 501
Microstran...................................................................................................................................... 62
Mirror................................................................................................................................... 194, 225
Mode combination method .......................................................................................................... 356
Mode shapes
Buckling analysis............................................................................................. 279, 361, 363, 365
Dynamic frequency analysis.................................................................... 277, 346, 347, 348, 349
Dynamic response analysis...................................................................... 143, 352, 353, 355, 356
Viewing mode shapes ...................................................................................................... 277, 279
Modelling considerations............................................................................................................. 347
Moment magnification......................................................................................... 371, 429, 441, 468
Moment of inertia ........................................................................................................................ 102
Moments
Described ................................................................................................................................. 319
Diagrams.................................................................................................................................. 275
Sign convention ......................................................................................................................... 84
Mouse............................................................................................................................................. 47
Move .................................................................................................................................... 194, 220
MS-Access ..................................................................................................................................... 62
MS-Excel ....................................................................................................................................... 62
MS-Word ....................................................................................................................................... 62
Multiple viewports ....................................................................................................................... 205
Multiplying factor ....................................................................................................................... 137
N
Natural frequencies .............................................................................. 140, 141, 346, 348, 350, 351
Node loads
Described ................................................................................................................................. 126
Graphics................................................................................................................................... 240
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 160
Node numbering........................................................................................................... 236, 339, 341
Node restraints ......................................................................................................... 80, 98, 100, 214
Described ................................................................................................................................... 98
Elastic restraint .......................................................................................................................... 98
Frame data ................................................................................................................................. 98
622

General restraint ..................................................................................................................... 100
Graphics................................................................................................................................... 214
Restraint code .......................................................................................................................... 100
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 155
Nodes
Described ............................................................................................................................. 80, 92
Graphics................................................................................................................................... 207
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 153
Non-linear analysis ........................................ 80, 316, 317, 320, 322, 324, 326, 329, 342, 344, 345
Normal members............................................................................................................................ 93
Normal window ........................................................................................................................... 194
Normalize mode shapes ....................................................................................................... 348, 351
O
Object orientated editing.............................................................................................................. 202
Offsets
See member offsets.................................................................................................................. 123
Opening a job........................................................................................................................... 52, 62
Operating plane.................................................................................................................... 199, 309
Optimization ................................................ 316, 332, 333, 334, 336, 337, 338, 339, 340, 341, 345
Ortho .................................................................................................................................... 199, 306
Output
Analysis report......................................................................................................................... 480
Described ................................................................................................................................. 479
Design report ........................................................................................................................... 491
Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 69
P
Pan ....................................................................................................................... 200, 201, 285, 290
Partial extrusions.......................................................................................................................... 270
Partial restraint..................................................................................................... 391, 392, 393, 394
P-Delta effects...................................................................................................................... 329, 342
P-D effect (big) ........................................................................................................................ 320
P-d effect (little)....................................................................................................................... 322
Pick ........................................................................................................................................ 47, 194
Pitch............................................................................................................................... 36, 435, 436
Plane............................................................................................................................. 199, 200, 309
Plates
Cleats ....................................................................................................................................... 453
623

Edge distance factor.................................................................................................................. 36
Library ............................................................................................................................. 513, 523
Plates and cleats....................................................................................................................... 453
Size range................................................................................................................................... 35
Point............................................................................................................................................... 47
Pointer ........................................................................................................................................... 47
Poisson's ratio .............................................................................................................................. 114
Polar coordinates.................................................................................................................. 204, 310
Popup menus................................................................................................................................ 197
Preferred bolt rows................................................................................................................. 35, 431
Described ................................................................................................................................. 127
Graphics........................................................................................................................... 242, 275
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 161
Prestress loads
Described ................................................................................................................................. 134
Graphics........................................................................................................................... 250, 275
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 165
Pre-tension ................................................................................................................................... 134
Principal angle ............................................................................................................................. 102
Print manager ............................................................................................................... 483, 493, 499
Printer/plotter
Orientation ......................................................................................................................... 30, 498
Origin offset ...................................................................................................................... 31, 499
Size............................................................................................................................... 30, 31, 498
Printing................................................................................................................................... 52, 479
Bill of materials ....................................................................................................................... 485
Centre of gravity ...................................................................................................................... 486
Dynamic response analysis...................................................................................................... 488
Enveloping............................................................................................................................... 480
Fonts ........................................................................................................................ 483, 493, 499
Formatting................................................................................................................................ 482
Frame analysis ......................................................................................................................... 480
Graphics .......................................................................................................................... 498, 499
Margins ............................................................................................................................ 480, 491
Printing to a file ....................................................................................................... 480, 491, 498
Scale ........................................................................................................................................ 498
624

Sorting ..................................................................................................................................... 482
Status report ............................................................................................................................. 484
Steel design .............................................................................................................................. 491
Symbols notation............................................................................................................. 492, 493
Warning messages .......................................................................................................... 482, 493
Worked examples ............................................................................................ 527, 571, 585, 596
Printing this manual ....................................................................................................................... 13
Problem size limits......................................................................................................................... 34
Program Manager........................................................................................................................... 21
Prying factor .................................................................................................................................. 35
Q
Query
Analysis results................................................................................................................ 199, 301
Frame ....................................................................................................................................... 199
Member properties........................................................................................... 210, 211, 212, 213
Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 71
Node properties........................................................................................................ 207, 208, 209
R
Radio buttons ................................................................................................................................ 50
Rational buckling analysis
Reactions
Described ................................................................................................................................. 319
Diagrams.................................................................................................................................. 275
Sign convention ......................................................................................................................... 84
Real-time...................................................................................................................................... 298
Redraw ......................................................................................................................................... 288
Reinforcement...................................................................................................... 469, 470, 513, 525
Relative coordinates............................................................................................................. 204, 310
Renumbering
Load cases................................................................................................................................ 260
Members .......................................................................................................................... 236, 237
Nodes ....................................................................................................... 194, 195, 196, 236, 237
Report text format .......................................................................................................................... 25
Reports ................................................................................................................... 52, 479, 480, 491
Restraints
625

Right hand orthogonal.................................................................................................................... 81
Right hand screw rule .................................................................................................................... 84
Rigid diaphram............................................................................................................................. 115
Rigid offset .................................................................................................................................. 123
Rotate ................................................................................................................................... 194, 222
Rotational inertia.......................................................................................................................... 141
Rotational restraint....................................................................................................................... 392
S
Saving a job ............................................................................................................................. 52, 62
Scale nodes .................................................................................................................................. 228
Scales ........................................................................................................................................... 291
Scissor lift .................................................................................................................................... 121
Scroll bars................................................................................................................................ 49, 50
SDNF ............................................................................................................................................. 62
Section check ....................................................................................................................... 408, 495
Section properties............................................................................................................. 80, 93, 215
Angle sections.................................................................................................................. 104, 111
Area of section ........................................................................................................................ 103
Described ................................................................................................................................. 102
Flipping a section............................................................................................................. 102, 108
Graphics................................................................................................................................... 215
Library ..................................................................................................................... 513, 518, 520
Moment of inertia .................................................................................................................... 103
Principal angle........................................................................................................................ 104
Section mark ........................................................................................................................... 104
Shape builder ................................................................................................................... 106, 107
Shear area................................................................................................................................. 104
Source...................................................................................................................................... 102
Tee sections ............................................................................................................................. 110
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 156
Torsion constant ..................................................................................................................... 103
Segment ............................................................... 371, 407, 408, 413, 414, 415, 420, 421, 422, 424
Selecting nodes and members ...................................................................................................... 194
Selection window......................................................................................................................... 194
Self mass .............................................................................................................. 141, 142, 349, 350
Self weight ................................................................................................................................... 136
Described ................................................................................................................................. 136
Graphics........................................................................................................................... 252, 275
626

Text .......................................................................................................................................... 166
Serviceability check ..................................................................................................................... 404
Settings menu................................................................................................................................. 72
SG.INI............................................................................................................................................ 22
Shading.................................................................................................................................. 27, 315
Shape builder ............................................................................................................... 102, 106, 211
Shear area..................................................................................................................................... 102
Shear check .................................................................................................................................. 495
Shear forces
Described ................................................................................................................................. 319
Diagrams.................................................................................................................................. 275
Sign convention ......................................................................................................................... 84
Shear stiffeners ............................................................................................................................ 456
Shear wall .................................................................................................................................... 122
Shortcuts ........................................................................................................................................ 61
Sidesway ...................................................................................................................................... 378
Sign conventions
Analysis ..................................................................................................................................... 84
Bending moment diagrams ................................................................................................ 27, 314
Concrete column design........................................................................................................... 471
Steel member design................................................................................................................ 383
Sign of the results ........................................................................................................................ 356
Site factor ..................................................................................................................................... 356
Site subsoil category .................................................................................................................... 356
Skew angle
See direction angle..................................................................................................................... 93
Slave node............................................................................................................................ 115, 116
Slenderness ratio................................................................................................................. 399, 400
Slip factor....................................................................................................................................... 35
Snap ..................................................................................................................................... 199, 305
Sorting.......................................................................................................................................... 480
Sound............................................................................................................................................. 27
Source .......................................................................................................................................... 102
Spectral loads
Curves and load cases .............................................................................................................. 355
Described ................................................................................................................................. 143
Editor ............................................................................................................................... 145, 146
Library ............................................................................................................................. 513, 526
Spectral curve multiplier.......................................................................................................... 356
627

Spectral data............................................................................................................................. 354
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 170
Spring stiffness ...................................................................................................................... 98, 100
SRSS ............................................................................................................................................ 359
Stability analysis
Standard shapes............................................................................................................................ 212
Starting SPACE GASS .................................................................................................................. 43
Static analysis .............................................................................................................. 316, 317, 342
Analysis type............................................................................................................................ 344
Buckling................................................................................................................................... 331
Buckling messages................................................................................................................... 342
Compression-only members .................................................................................................... 342
Damping........................................................................................................................... 327, 343
Errors ....................................................................................................................................... 367
Iterations per load step............................................................................................................ 343
Load cases................................................................................................................................ 342
Load stepping................................................................................................................... 326, 342
Non-linear effects .................................................................................................................... 342
Optimization ............................................................................................................................ 342
Output .............................................................................................. 480, 481, 482, 483, 550, 561
Tension-only members ............................................................................................................ 342
Worked example ...................................................................................................................... 527
Status line....................................................................................................................................... 59
Status report ........................................................................................................................... 58, 484
Combined stress ratio ...................................................................................................... 444, 450
Configuration............................................................................................................................. 35
Connection types ..................................................................................................................... 433
Critical load case..................................................................................................................... 497
Described......................................................................................................................... 429, 431
Design actions.................................................................................................................. 441, 447
Drawings.................................................................................................................. 285, 442, 509
Errors ....................................................................................................................................... 460
Geometry ................................................................................................................................. 445
Graphics................................................................................................................................... 263
Load cases................................................................................................................................ 444
Minimum design actions.................................................................................................. 448, 449
Reports..................................................................................................................... 492, 493, 589
628

Text .......................................................................................................................................... 173
Worked example ...................................................................................................................... 585
Steel member design
Assumptions ............................................................................................................................ 421
Check mode ..................................................................................................................... 405, 421
Combined stress ratio .............................................................................................. 371, 398, 420
Described ................................................................................................................. 261, 371, 373
Design mode ............................................................................................................ 398, 405, 421
Effective lengths ...................................................................................... 362, 374, 376, 377, 381
Errors ....................................................................................................................................... 426
Flange restraints....................................................................................................... 391, 392, 396
Graphics................................................................................................................................... 261
Grouping .................................................................................. 373, 386, 387, 388, 389, 390, 406
Load cases................................................................................................................................ 398
Load factor............................................................................................................... 371, 400, 420
Member check.......................................................................................................................... 495
Reports............................................................................................................................. 491, 576
Results...................................................................................................................................... 495
Section check ................................................................................................................... 408, 495
Segment ........................................................................... 371, 407, 408, 413, 414, 415, 420, 421
Shear check.............................................................................................................................. 495
Sign convention ....................................................................................................................... 383
Tee sections ............................................................................................................................. 397
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 171
Worked example ...................................................................................................................... 571
Zero variables .......................................................................................................................... 496
Stiff seat bearing length........................................................................................................ 38, 436
Stiffeners ...................................................................................................................... 454, 455, 456
Stiffness matrix ........................................................................................ 80, 87, 339, 341, 342, 349
Strength grade ................................................................................................................ 35, 374, 431
Stress ratio.................................................................................................... 371, 400, 420, 444, 450
Stresses......................................................................................................................................... 275
Stretch .................................................................................................................................. 194, 227
Sub load number .......................................................................................................... 128, 131, 132
Sub-divide .................................................................................................................... 194, 230, 231
Subsets
See filters ................................................................................................................................. 293
Supports
629

Symmetrical structures................................................................................................................... 86
T
Tapered Members ................................................................................................................ 234, 235
Tee sections.......................................................................................................... 110, 397, 519, 520
Temperature change..................................................................................................................... 134
Tension and compression stiffeners............................................................................................. 454
Tension-only and compression-only effects ................................................................................ 325
Tension-only members................................................................................... 93, 325, 326, 342, 349
Terminator ................................................................................................................................... 175
Text boxes...................................................................................................................................... 49
Text display area ........................................................................................................................... 46
Text editor.............................................................................................................................. 62, 149
Text file
Errors ....................................................................................................................................... 176
Exporting ........................................................................................................................... 62, 149
Format............................................................................................................................... 25, 150
Importing ........................................................................................................................... 62, 149
Worked example ...................................................................................................................... 180
Text reports .................................................................................................................. 479, 480, 491
Thermal loads
Described ................................................................................................................................. 134
Graphics........................................................................................................................... 250, 275
Text .......................................................................................................................................... 165
Threads in shear plane ......................................................................................................... 41, 440
Title bar ......................................................................................................................................... 45
Toggle buttons ............................................................................................................................... 77
Toolbars................................................................................................................................... 46, 77
Side toolbar................................................................................................................................ 78
Top toolbar................................................................................................................................. 79
Top flange ............................................................................................................................ 261, 270
Torsion constant........................................................................................................................... 102
Torsional effects........................................................................................................................... 371
Torsions
Described ................................................................................................................................. 319
Diagrams.................................................................................................................................. 275
Sign convention ......................................................................................................................... 84
Translational inertia ..................................................................................................................... 140
Trapezoidal loads ......................................................................................................................... 130
630

Triangular loads ........................................................................................................................... 130
Twist factor .................................................................................................................................. 413
U
Units........................................................................................................... 27, 89, 90, 151, 469, 518
Unstable equilibrium.................................................................................................................... 331
Updating frame member sizes ..................................................................................................... 402
Using the keyboard to position points ......................................................................................... 204
Using the mouse............................................................................................................................. 47
V
Vertical angle............................................................................................................................... 298
Vertical axis........................................................................................................................... 28, 299
Vertical direction ......................................................................................................................... 356
View
Diagrams.................................................................................................................................. 275
Full 3D member geometry....................................................................................................... 270
Member properties................................................................................................................... 267
Members .................................................................................................................................. 266
Node properties........................................................................................................................ 267
Nodes ....................................................................................................................................... 266
Steel connection drawings ....................................................................................................... 285
Viewpoint............................................................................................................. 200, 201, 298, 299
Viewports............................................................................................................................. 205, 206
Views.................................................................................................................................... 296, 297
Voids.................................................................................................................... 468, 470, 471, 473
VRML viewer .............................................................................................................................. 270
W
Wavefront optimizer .................................................................................................... 316, 332, 345
Analysis method ...................................................................................................................... 339
Analysis method in more detail ............................................................................................... 341
Calculating the frontwidth ....................................................................................................... 340
Welcome to SPACE GASS ............................................................................................................. 9
Welds ........................................................................................................................................... 452
Category............................................................................................................................. 35, 431
Flange weld type ....................................................................................................................... 38
Library ............................................................................................................................. 513, 524
Size range................................................................................................................................... 35
631

Windows ........................................................................................................................................ 52
Word .............................................................................................................................................. 62
Worked examples
Bill of materials ....................................................................................................................... 566
Cable analysis .................................................................................................................. 596, 600
Centre of gravity ...................................................................................................................... 566
Dynamic response analysis...................................................................................................... 568
Frame analysis graphics........................................................................................................... 535
Frame analysis input ................................................................................................................ 540
Frame analysis output ...................................................................................................... 550, 561
Portal frame analysis................................................................................................................ 527
Portal frame connection design................................................................................................ 585
Portal frame member design .................................................................................................... 571
Steel connection design ........................................................................................... 589, 590, 591
Steel connection drawings ....................................................................................................... 588
Steel member design........................................................................................ 576, 577, 578, 579
Wrench type................................................................................................................................... 38
Y
Young's modulus.......................................................................................................................... 114
Z
ZIP ................................................................................................................................................. 62
Zoom.................................................................................................................... 200, 201, 285, 289
632

SGWIN

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

SGWIN

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

SPACE GASS Reference Manual

Integrated Technical Software

SPACE GASS Reference Manual

Hardware locks and insurance

Installation and configuration

Folders and files

Problem size limits

Using the mouse

Managing job files

Starting a new job

The status line

The menu system

The file menu

SPACE GASS Reference Manual

The loads menu

The analysis menu

The design menu

The view menu

The query menu

The settings menu

The window menu

The help menu

The top toolbar

Modelling the structure

Node restraint data

Standard section libraries

Column and beam Tee sections

Material property data

Member offset data

Node load data

Prescribed node displacement data

Member concentrated load data

SPACE GASS Reference Manual

Member distributed torsion data

Thermal/prestress load data

Self weight data

Load case title data

Lumped mass data

Spectral load data

Importing a spectral curve

Text file input

Node restraints text

Material properties text

Master-slave constraints text

Member offset text

Prescribed node displacements text

Member concentrated loads text

Member distributed forces text

Thermal/Prestress loads text

Self weight text

Combination load cases text

Load case titles text

Lumped masses text

Spectral loads text

Steel member design text

Text file errors

SPACE GASS Reference Manual

Using the keyboard to position points

Prescribed node displacements

Member concentrated loads

Member distributed forces

Member distributed torsions

SPACE GASS Reference Manual

Combination load cases